Copyright: ©1999-2002 Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved.
Citation: ©1999-2002 Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved.


Trimble Geomatics Office - Overview
Trimble Geomatics Office − Overview

Trimble Geomatics Office lets you integrate data from a variety of surveying techniques, including GPS (RTK and Postprocessed), conventional/optical instruments (including servo and robotic), levels, and lasers. Extensive quality control tools let you complete tasks more quickly and efficiently for seamless data transfer from the field to the office and back to the field again.

Use Trimble Geomatics Office for:

  GPS baseline processing (if you have the WAVE Baseline Processing module installed)

  Survey network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed)

  Processing of GPS and conventional topographic survey data

  Quality assurance and quality control of data (QA/QC)

  Road design data import and export

  Survey data import and export

  Digital terrain modeling and contouring

  Datum transformation and projections

  GIS data capture and data export

  Feature coding

  Project reporting

  Survey project management

Key Features

The following are the key features of Trimble Geomatics Office (version 1.6) software:

  Survey and Plan view displays of the project data in the graphics window

  Project Bar organizes commonly used tasks as shortcuts in the main graphics window

  View Filters allow observation types to be displayed or hidden

  ‘Drag-and-drop’ functionality allows you to drag and drop any job file from the desktop to the project area

  Import of data collected from GPS receivers and/or conventional total stations

  Extensive import and export formats

  DAT Checkin dialog allows checking and editing of raw GPS data before import

  Properties window lets you view and edit all related information for points, as well as all observation types

  Multiple Edit dialog for quick editing of multiple entities

  GIS data collection support

  Layer support to manage CAD data

  Professionally presented HTML reports

  Standard and custom report formats

  RoadLink and DTMLink modules for viewing and editing third party road design files and creating digital terrain models.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office does not support 8.3 file name systems.

Modules

The following describes the optional modules that are available for Trimble Geomatics Office:

  WAVE baseline processing module computes baselines from GPS field observations made using static, FastStatic, or kinematic data collection procedures. The WAVE Baseline Processor provides default processing and flexible controls for advanced processing. Timeline displays GPS data found in raw observation files in a graphical, time-base format. Use it view and edit raw GPS measurements and survey information.

  Network adjustment module adjusts your GPS and terrestrial survey data to estimate and reduce the inherent errors.

What is Geomatics?

Geomatics is the design, collection, storage, analysis, display, and retrieval of spatial information. The collection of spatial information can be from a variety of sources, including GPS and terrestrial methods. Geomatics integrates traditional surveying with new technology-driven approaches, making geomatics useful for a vast number of applications.


Removing the Software

CAUTION: The process outlined in this topic removes all files except common files, templates, and data files. To delete data files use Microsoft Windows Explorer.

To remove Trimble Geomatics Office from your computer:

1.	Select Start / Settings / Control Panel.

2.	From the Control Panel, choose Add/Remove Programs. The Add/Remove Programs Properties dialog appears.

3.	Make sure that the Install/Uninstall tab is active.

4.	Select Trimble Geomatics Office.

5.	Click Add/Remove. The Confirm File Deletion message appears.

6.	Click Yes.

The files are deleted.

CAUTION: If you uninstall Trimble Geomatics Office you lose all customized formats. For example, if you have added symbol types to the system-created Symbol library (Symbols.sym) or added custom import/export formats these will be lost.

The following files store customized information:

  Plan form definition files (*.frm) — customized by editing this file with a text editor

  Report format files (Asciirpt.dat) — customized when you create custom files

  ASCII import definition files (Asciiimp.dat) — customized when you create custom import formats

  ASCII export definition files (Asciiexp.dat) — customized when you create custom export formats

  System-created Symbol library (Symbols.sym) — customized when you save new symbol types to this file

  System-created Line Type library (Linetype.ltp) — customized when you save new line types to this file


Folder Structure

During installation, all files required by Trimble Geomatics Office are copied into the folders listed below:

Folder	What it stores
\Program Files\Trimble\ Trimble Geomatics Office	Trimble Geomatics Office Program and Help files
...\System	System files; including the feature and attribute library software files, Symbol Editor™ and Line Type Editor™ utilities, and HTML report templates
...\Template	Project template files
...\Utility	Links to A1 Viewer, Convert to RINEX™, Coordinate System Manager™, Data Transfer, DC File Editor™, Feature and Attribute Editor™, Line Type Editor, Planning, and Symbol Editor utilities
...\RoadLink - DTMLink	Program files and associated files for RoadLink and DTMLink
\Program Files\Common Files\ Trimble	Files used by both Trimble Geomatics Office and other Trimble products.
...\GeoData	Coordinate system information and Geoid files
...\GeoDB	Coordinate System Manager program files
...\Data Transfer	Data Transfer program files
...\DatToRinex	Convert to RINEX program files
...\DCeditor	DC File Editor program files
...\Plan	Planning program files


About Trimble

Trimble is a leading innovator of Global Positioning System (GPS) technology. In addition to providing advanced GPS components, Trimble augments GPS with other positioning technologies as well as wireless communications and software to create complete customer solutions. Trimble’s emerging applications include surveying, automobile navigation, machine guidance, asset tracking, wireless platforms, and telecommunications infrastructure.

Trimble's Corporate offices are located at 645 N. Mary Avenue in Sunnyvale, CA. We also have offices located throughout the world to serve you.

For an interactive look at Trimble, visit our site on the World Wide Web:

www.trimble.com


Inverse command

Use this command to determine the inverse between two project points.

To access it, select Survey / Inverse.

The Inverse dialog appears.


Inverse dialog

Use this dialog to determine the inverse between two project points. You can use the dialog to view brief or detailed information on the inverse and to generate a report.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Survey / Inverse.

  Press F7.

NOTE: The Inverse tool only operates with existing points. To view azimuths and distances between any other coordinate positions, use the Measure tool. To access it, select Survey / Measure.

From

Enter a point name from the keyboard, or use field fill-in to click a point.

To

Enter a point name from the keyboard, or use field fill-in to click a point.

When you move the pointer close to another point, a dotted line appears. It shows the inverse to be computed. When you click on the second point, the dotted line changes to a solid line. This shows the line that the inverse details refer to.

If the Display distance setting in the Units and Format tab of the Project Properties dialog is set to Grid or Sea level distances, and the two points do not have elevations, the grid distance and azimuth is displayed. However, if the Display distance as field is set to Ground distances, and both inverse points have null elevations, then the distance displays as null (if the default elevation is set to null). Without any elevation information, it is impossible to compute the ground distance.

Grid Azimuth

This field shows the grid azimuth between the points.

Grid Distance

This field shows the grid distance between the points.

Delta Elevation

When both points have elevations, the delta elevation is displayed. If either elevation is unknown, the field shows null.

Method

Two methods of calculating the inverse are available:

Sequential	To compute a sequence of inverses one after another.

Radial	To compute a sequence of inverses radiating from a common start point.

Calculate

Click Calculate to compute the inverse if you used the keyboard to enter the points selected.

Send to Report

Click Send to Report to create a report of the inverse computation. A brief or detailed report of the inverse can be generated depending on the display option used for the inverse.

NOTE: If the report has been generated from one display option and then regenerated in the other display mode, the inverse details from the report are appended to the existing report.

Show Report

Click Show Report to view the Inverse report created.

The brief report shows the inverse details as displayed from the Inverse dialog in brief mode.

The detailed report shows the positions of the "from" and "to" points in grid, local (geodetic), and cartesian (WGS-84) coordinate systems, as well as the calculated inverse values and the parameters used to reduce the inverse in those coordinate systems.

Detailed / Brief

Click Detailed to display the Details group. When the Details group is displayed the button changes to Brief. Click Brief to hide the Details group.

Details

The Details group shows additional information on the inverse.

NS Fwd Azimuth

This field shows the normal section forward (geodetic) azimuth from the first point to the second point.

NS Back Azimuth

This field shows the normal section back (geodetic) azimuth from the second point to the first point.

Ellipsoid Distance

This field shows the ellipsoid distance between the points.

Ground Distance

This field shows the ground distance between the points.

Delta Height

This field shows the delta height between the points.


Measure command

Use this command to measure azimuths, distances, and areas from any graphics window.

To access it, select Survey / Measure.

The Measure dialog appears.


Measure dialog

Use this dialog to measure azimuths, distances, and areas from any graphics window.

To access it, select Survey / Measure.

You can measure between project points or positions on the screen. (Click on the appropriate position.)

Once you have selected two or more positions, the cumulative distance between the first and last positions shows in the Distance field. The Azimuth field shows the azimuth between the last two selected positions.

TIP: If you click and drag the mouse, the fields show the current azimuth, the cumulative distance from the first selected point, and the area enclosed.

Azimuth

When you select two positions, the grid azimuth between the points is shown. With three or more points selected, this field shows the azimuth between the last two points.

Distance

When you select two positions, the distance between the two points is shown. With three or more points selected, this field shows the cumulative total (sum) of the distances measured.

Total distances are reported according to your display settings.

NOTE: If the Display distance as field in the Project Properties dialog is set to Ground distances, and both measured positions have null elevations, the distance is displayed as null (if the default elevation is set to null). Without any elevation information, the software cannot compute the ground distance.

Area

With three or more points selected, the area of the figure formed by closing back to the first point is shown.

The computed area varies depending on the distance display settings:

  A ground distance setting gives an area computed at the average ground elevation.

  A sea level distance setting gives an area computed on the ellipsoid surface.

  A grid distance setting gives an area computed from the grid coordinates.

Reset

Click Reset to clear all fields. You can also reset by double-clicking on the start point.

TIP: You can quickly determine how much of the project is displayed in the graphics window by viewing the graphics window dimensions indicator [image] in the status bar. To view this indicator, hold the cursor outside the graphics window.

When using the pointer [image] press Ctrl. This stops it snapping to a point nearby.


Coordinate Transformation - Overview
Coordinate Transformation − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

A coordinate transformation shifts the points in the project. It can involve shifts, rotations, and scaling in two dimensions. Points with a quality of Control or Adjusted are not moved. A message appears if a point you have selected to move has an adjusted or control quality.

You use a coordinate transformation when, for example, you have points in the project from a third party design package that are in an assumed coordinate system, and you need to transform the points to obtain correct coordinates to use.

To define the coordinate transformation, you can do one of the following:

  Using field fill-in, click on points, then enter their known coordinate values. If more than three points are used, the software uses the least squares method to calculate the transformation parameters for the selected points.

  Specify transformation parameters.

When you perform a coordinate transformation, all other observations to the point are disabled. The displayed Grid, Local, and WGS-84 coordinates for the transformed points are changed, but the coordinate system is not.

Once you have performed a transformation, you can create a report that shows the original and transformed coordinate values.


Coordinate Transformation command

Use this command to determine and apply a horizontal transformation.

To access it, select Survey / Coordinate Transformation.

The Coordinate Transformation dialog appears.


Coordinate Transformation dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to determine and apply a horizontal transformation.

To access it, select Survey / Coordinate Transformation.

To enter values in this dialog, do one of the following:

  Click Point List to select points in the project for which you have known coordinates and enter the known values for each point. The software calculates the transformation parameters. If there are more than three point values, it uses the least squares method. Statistics are shown in the Point list to help you evaluate whether you have correctly added points to the list. The Coordinate Transformation dialog shows the transformation values.

  Enter the values from the keyboard.

When you perform a coordinate transformation, all other observations to the point are disabled. The displayed Grid, Local, and WGS-84 coordinates for the transformed points are changed. The coordinate system is not changed.

Translation east

Shows the amount of translation east (positive) or west (negative).

Translation north

Shows the amount of translation north (positive) or south (negative).

Rotation

Shows the amount of angular rotation to be applied in the transformation.

Scale

Shows the scale change of the transformation.

Origin of rotation

The following fields show the position of the center of rotation.

Point	Shows the name of the point that is to be used as the origin point for the rotation. If you enter a point name, the coordinates are displayed in the North and East fields. If Point List is used to compute the parameters, this field shows the average of the coordinates from the point list.
North	Shows the North coordinate of the origin point.
East	Shows the East coordinate of the origin point.
Transform

To transform the points, select one of the following options:

Selection	Applies the transformation to selected points.
Whole database	Applies the transformation to all project points.
When no points are selected, these options are unavailable and all points are transformed.

Generate the Coordinate Transformation report

Select this check box to create a report of the original and transformed coordinates. The report appears in the default HTML viewer.

Point List

Click Point List to select the control points. Enter the known values for the points.

The Point List dialog appears.


Coordinate Transformation - Point List dialog
Coordinate Transformation − Point List dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use the Coordinate Transformation − Point List dialog to select the points that are used to calculate the coordinate transformation parameters. You select the points, Trimble Geomatics Office displays the current coordinates and you enter the known coordinates. Trimble Geomatics Office calculates the transformation parameters, then applies the transformation to the points you have selected to transform.

To access it:

1.	Select Survey / Coordinate Transformation. The Coordinate Transformation dialog appears.

2.	Click Point List.

This dialog presents a scrolling list of points. Each point has fields showing the current coordinates and fields showing the known coordinates. You enter the point name and the Current Northing and Current Easting field appears. Then you enter the known coordinates in the Known Northing and Known Easting fields.

TIP: You can leave the point name blank and use field fill-in to enter the current coordinates.

There is no limit to the number of position definitions that can be defined to compute a coordinate transformation. Adding many position definitions does not always improve the computed transformation results, but it does provide extra checks on the validity of the computed parameters.

Statistics

The Statistics group shows the scale factor and maximum horizontal residual. Use these statistics to check if any incorrect values were entered.

Insert

Click Insert to insert an empty position definition record. Generally, Trimble Geomatics Office automatically adds new position definition fields, so you do not need to do this very often. However, because the first point in the Point List is used as the origin of rotation in the computed transformation parameters, you may want to insert a position definition at the start of the list.

Delete

Click Delete to remove a position definition from the list.


Elevation Adjustment - Overview
Elevation Adjustment − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also

An elevation adjustment adjusts point elevations.

Once the adjustment is performed, Trimble Geomatics Office applies the elevation adjustment using one of the following methods:

  Where you enter known elevations for existing points, Trimble Geomatics Office calculates the elevation adjustment parameters.

  Where you enter a constant (positive or negative), Trimble Geomatics Office applies it to all selected points.

NOTE: The elevation adjustment will not be applied if the point’s height or elevation qualities are control or adjusted.

Elevation Adjustment Results

When you perform an elevation adjustment, all other observations to a point or grid positions for a point are disabled. The displayed Grid, Local, and WGS-84 coordinates for the transformed points are changed. The coordinate system is not changed.

The following table shows the parameters calculated when a number of elevations are included in the points list.

NOTE: The computed elevation adjustment is not included in the coordinate system definition, unlike the vertical adjustment that can be carried out in the Survey / GPS Site Calibration command.

You can create a report showing the original elevation, adjusted elevation, and the difference between the two.


Elevation Adjustment command

Use this command to determine and apply an elevation adjustment.

To access it, select Survey / Elevation Adjustment.

The Elevation Adjustment dialog appears.


Elevation Adjustment dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to determine and apply an elevation adjustment.

To access it:

  Select Survey / Elevation Adjustment.

To adjust elevations of selected project points, use one of the following methods:

  Constant method

  Plane parameters method (enter the values or select the points)

Constant

Select this option to add a constant value to the elevations of points. Apply the constant to selected points or the whole project.

Add to Elevation

The Add to Elevation field becomes available when you select the Constant option. Enter a positive or negative elevation value to add to points.

Parameters

Select this option to specify or calculate the parameters for an inclined plane elevation adjustment. To select the control points to calculate the parameters, click Point List.

Origin point

Shows the name of the point to be used as the origin point for the inclined plane.

NOTE: If Point List is used to select points for computation of the parameters, this field shows the first control point selected.

Origin East

Shows the East coordinate of the origin point. If you select a point in the Origin point field, this field is filled in with the coordinate of the selected point.

Origin North

Shows the North coordinate of the origin point. If you select a point in the Origin point field, this field is filled in with the coordinate of the selected point.

Correction constant

Shows the elevation correction applied at the origin position.

Slope North

This value defines the slope of the plane in the north-south direction. An elevation adjustment is calculated from this parts per million (ppm) value and the distance (north-south direction) from the origin. It is applied in addition to the correction constant.

Slope East

This value defines the slope of the plane in the east-west direction. An elevation adjustment is calculated from this ppm value and the distance (east-west direction) from the origin. It is applied in addition to the correction constant.

Point List

Click Point List to select the control points to be used to compute the elevation adjustment parameters. The Point List dialog dialog appears.

Adjust

Select this option to apply the adjustment. Two options are available:

Selection	Select this option to apply the adjustment to selected points.
Whole database	Select this option to apply the adjustment to all project points.
When no points are selected, the selection buttons are unavailable and the adjustment is applied to all points in the project.

Generate the Elevation Adjustment report

Select this check box to create a report of the original and adjusted elevations. The report appears in the default HTML viewer.


Elevation Adjustment - Point List dialog
Elevation Adjustment − Point List dialog

 Overview and More Information

Trimble Geomatics Office uses the points selected in this dialog to calculate the elevation adjustment parameters. You select points in the project and enter the known elevations for them.

To access it:

1.	Select Survey / Elevation Adjustment. The Elevation Adjustment dialog appears.

2.	Click Point List.

Select each control point using field fill-in or keyboard entry and enter the known elevation.

TIP: The coordinate and elevation fields can be filled in using field fill-in to pick appropriate points from the screen.

Usually, you enter three or more control points. These points should be evenly distributed around the perimeter of the points being adjusted.

There is no specific limit to the number of points that can be defined to compute an elevation adjustment. Adding many point definitions does not always improve the computed adjustment results, but it provides extra checks on the computed parameters.

Statistics

The Statistics group shows the maximum adjustment inclination and maximum vertical residual. Use these statistics to check if any incorrect values were entered.

Insert

Click Insert to insert a point definition record. Generally, Trimble Geomatics Office automatically adds new point definition fields so you do not need to use this button very often. However, because the first point in the point list is used as the Elevation Adjustment origin point, you can use this function to place a point at the start of the point list that you want. However, the position used for the adjustment origin is not usually significant.

Delete

Click Delete to delete a point definition from the list.


Undo command

Use this command to reverse actions.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Undo.

  Press Ctrl+Z.

In the Edit menu, the text that appears next to the Undo command shows the action to be undone. Actions can be undone one at a time. The most recently performed action is undone first. If you undo an action by mistake, use the Redo command.

If you close the project, or Trimble Geomatics Office, you cannot undo any of the actions that were performed while it was open.

TIP: To reverse an import operation after you have closed the project, use the From source option in the Select Points dialog / General tab and delete the selection to undo the import operation.


Redo command

Use this command to redo actions that you undo using the Edit / Undo command.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Redo.

  Press Ctrl+Y.

In the Edit menu, the text that appears next to the Redo command shows the action to be redone.

Actions can be redone one at a time.

If you close the project, you cannot redo any of the actions that you performed while it was open.


Cut / Copy / Paste command

The Cut, or Copy, and Paste commands are a convenient way of moving or copying the current selection of data.

From the Edit menu, select Cut, Copy, or Paste:

  Cut removes the selection from the current project.

  Copy makes a duplicate of the selection.

  Paste inserts the selection in another project or software application.

When you cut or copy a selection, it is held on the clipboard. Each new cut or copy replaces any previous selection.

The copy of the selection stays on the clipboard after you paste the selection into a project or another software application. You can paste the selection again or as often as necessary.

Use these commands to:

  transfer data between your projects (for example, you can copy the control points between projects)

  copy and paste points with attributes from one project to another

  copy and paste the CAD-work to a report

  copy data into a project with a different coordinate system (for example, points from a project with a NAD-27 coordinate system can be copied and pasted into a project with a NAD-83 coordinate system)

The copied entities are pasted into a project by using the coordinate values associated with them. This results in the entities positioned correctly because if the project into which you are pasting entities has a different coordinate system definition to the source project for the entities, the coordinate values are automatically converted to the new coordinate system.

NOTE: To copy and paste observations from one project to another, you must use the Trimble Data Exchange Format. You cannot copy and paste observations between projects in Trimble Geomatics Office.


Delete command

Use this command to delete the currently selected entities.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Delete.

  Press Delete.

To undo a Delete command:

  Select Edit / Undo.


Rename Points command

Use this command to rename points.

To access it, select Edit / Rename Points.

The Rename dialog appears.


Rename dialog

 Overview and More Information

If you have many points in a project that are not the same physical point, but have the same name, you can resolve the duplicate points by renaming them using the Rename dialog.

Example

You import two Survey Controller files collected by different field crews:

  One field crew uses point names from 1000 to 2000.

  The other field crew uses point names from 1000 to 1050.

When the files are imported while the Merge duplicate points within tolerance option is set in the Duplicate Point Options dialog, 51 duplicate points (1000 to 1050) are created in the database.

When the files are imported while the Always merge duplicate points option is set in the Duplicate Point Options dialog, the software tells you which duplicate points it has merged. If you want to rename the duplicate points, undo the import option and then rename them.

To do this:

  Select Edit / Rename Points. The Rename dialog appears.

Rename

To rename the points, select one of the following options:

Selection − This option renames the selected points.

Whole database − This option renames all points.

When no points are selected, all points in the database are renamed by default.

TIP: To rename coordinates from a .dc file, use the Select Points dialog to select points from source.

Method

The Method group has the following options:

Rename from

Click Rename from and enter the first of the names that you want to replace.

Note: If you enter an alphabetic name, all points in the selection will be given the same name. Enter a numeric value for the last character of the name to increment point names, when a selection is made.

Add prefix

Click Add prefix and enter a prefix. For example, to indicate Topo points, enter the prefix TOPO to the selected existing point name.

TIP: Make the last character of the prefix a space. This distinguishes the renamed point from the original.

Add suffix

Click Add suffix and enter a suffix. For example, add a date suffix to points to indicate the survey date (such as, 08/10/99).

TIP: Make the first character of the suffix a space. This distinguishes the renamed point from the original.

Add Constant

Use this option to add a constant to the selected points. The constant value can be positive or negative. The following table provides some examples:

NOTE: P1023 - 1000 results in P23. If the desired result is P0023 then a second rename operation, P23 + 0000, can be performed.

Report

Select this check box to create a report of the original and new names. When you click OK, the report appears in the default HTML viewer.


Properties command

Use this command to open the Properties window.

To access it, select Edit / Properties.

The Properties window opens.


CAD Styles - Overview
    CAD Styles − Overview

More Information

See also	Dialog
Overview

In the Plan view, CAD styles set how entities (points, lines, and text) are displayed in the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window.

CAD styles include:

  Point styles

  Line styles

  Text styles

Point styles and line styles

Point styles and line styles set how points and lines are displayed.

A point style is made up of a point symbol and settings that configure the size, color, and dimensions of the symbol. To create and edit point symbols, use the Symbol Editor utility.

A line style is made up of a line type and settings that configure the size, color, and dimensions of the type. To create and edit line types, use the Line Type Editor utility.

To set the styles for a point or line, use one of the following:

  The Properties window.

  Feature code processing.

To create and edit point styles, use the CAD Styles dialog in Trimble Geomatics Office, or the Feature and Attribute Editor utility.

Trimble default templates have a point style and a line style for each symbol and line type in the Symbols (*.sym) file and Linetype (*.ltp) file. The styles have the same name as the symbol or line type.

If a point or line has its point style field or line style field set to <By Layer>, the point style or line style assigned to the points or lines is inherited from the layer. The default styles are set for the layer to which the points and lines are in.

To set the default styles for different layers, use the Layers dialog.

Text Styles

Text styles set how text entities are displayed in Trimble Geomatics Office. Use the Properties window to set the text style for text entities. A text style is made up of a font, size information, and font format. Trimble supplies one text style, named Standard, but you can create your own. To do this, use the CAD Styles dialog in Trimble Geomatics Office.


    Styles command

Use this command to create and manage point styles, line styles, and text styles.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Styles.

  Press Ctl+S.

The CAD Styles dialog appears.


    CAD Styles dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use the CAD Styles dialog to create and manage point, line, and text styles.

To access it:

  Select Edit / Styles.

New

Opens the Create Style dialog and create a new style based on the current tab.

Edit

Click Edit to edit an existing style. If you edit a CAD style that is being used by an entity in the project, the entity is updated with the new CAD style settings.

Delete

Click Delete to delete a style. You can delete any CAD styles that are not being used by an entity in the project.


    Create/Edit Point Style dialog

Use this dialog to create or edit a point style.

To access it:

1.	From the Plan view, select Edit / Styles. The CAD Styles dialog appears.

2.	In the Point Styles tab, do one of the following:

  Click New. The Create Point Style dialog appears.

  Click Edit. The Edit Point Style dialog appears.

Once you select a style, the Edit button becomes available.

Name

Enter the name of a new point style or rename an existing point style. All point style names must be unique. However, you can use the same name for a point style, a line style, and a text style.

Symbol

Select a symbol from the Symbol list. To view and edit a symbol use the Symbol Editor utility.

Color

Select a color for the symbol. If you select Window text, the style will be displayed using the Window text setting in Microsoft Windows. To edit the Window text setting, use the Control Panel. If Window text is used, the style defaults to black when plotting if you have the default Legend Style selected. To select the default Legend Style, choose View / Options / Survey Legend tab. If you have the black Legend Style selected, the style defaults to white when plotting.

Some symbol definitions have defined colors. These colors are set when the symbol is created in the Trimble Symbol Editor utility. For example, using the Trimble Symbol Editor utility, the color for the symbol ‘bush’ can be defined as green. When you select symbols that have color definitions the Color field becomes unavailable, and the Color field will display ‘from symbol’.

Diameter

Enter the diameter for the symbol. The units for the Diameter field change depending on whether the Dimensions option is set to Paper or Ground. For some symbols where the diameter is not applicable (such as a single pixel dot) this field becomes unavailable.

Paper	With the Paper option selected, the diameter value of the symbol controls the size of the symbol on paper.

For example, if the Dimensions option is set to Paper and you enter 5 in the Diameter field, Trimble Geomatics Office plots a five-millimeter symbol in a metric plot.
The units that Trimble Geomatics Office uses are the Coordinate units. To set the Coordinate units, select File / Project Properties / Units and Format tab.

The representation of the paper units on-screen is calculated using the plot scale. To set the plot scale, select the File / Sheet Setup dialog.

Ground	With the Ground option selected, the diameter value of the symbol is the size on the ground.

For example, if the Dimensions option is set to Ground and you enter 5 in the Diameter field, Trimble Geomatics Office gives a five-meter sized symbol (or five-foot sized symbol, depending on the Coordinate units setting). This result occurs both on a plot and on-screen.
To set the Coordinate units, select File / Project Properties / Units and Format tab.

Rotation

Use the Rotation field to control the orientation of the symbol. The interpretation of this field depends on the setting of the Dimensions option.

Paper	With the Paper option selected, the symbol is always plotted with its orientation relative to the top of the page on which it is plotted.

Ground	With the Ground option selected, the symbol is plotted relative to north.

Dimensions

Click Paper or Ground to control the operation of the Diameter and Rotation fields as described above.


    Create/Edit Line Style dialog

Use this dialog to create or edit a line style.

To access it:

1.	From the Plan view select Edit / Styles. The CAD Styles dialog appears.

2. 	In the Line Styles tab, do one of the following:

  Click New. The Create Line Style dialog appears.

  Click Edit. The Edit Line Style dialog appears. (The Edit button becomes available once you select a style.)

Name

Enter the name of a new line style or rename an existing line style. All line style names must be unique. However, you can use the same name for a line style, a point style, and a text style.

Settings

Use the Settings group to define the appearance of the style.

Line types

Select the line type for the line. To view and edit a line type, use the Trimble Line Type Editor utility.

Color

Select a color for the line style. If you select Window text, the style will be displayed using the Microsoft Windows’ Window text setting. To edit the Windows setting, use the Control Panel in Microsoft Windows. If Window text is used, the style defaults to black when plotting if you have the default Legend Style selected. To select the default Legend Style, choose View / Options / Survey Legend tab. If you have the black Legend Style selected, the style defaults to white when plotting.

Some line type definitions have defined colors. These colors are set when the line type is created in the Trimble Line Type Editor utility. For example, using the Trimble Line Type Editor utility, the color for the line type ‘hedge’ can be defined as green. When you select line types that have color definitions the Color field becomes unavailable, and the Color field will display ‘from line type’.

Length

Enter the length of the pattern repetition. This field becomes available if the line type is a pattern that is repeated when the line style is selected for a line. For example, you can select a ‘fence line’ as a type to be repeated. The following figure shows this:

Some line types have an inherent length (for example, gate) and this field is unavailable.

The interpretation of this field depends on the setting of the Dimensions option. The units for the Length field change depending on whether the Dimensions option is set to Paper or Ground.

Paper	With the Paper option selected, the length value is set in millimeters (mm) or inches (in). (The units will depend on the Coordinate units setting. To set these units, select File / Project Properties / Units and Format tab.)

For example, if the Dimensions option is set to Paper, entering 5 into the Length field will plot a line using a five-millimeter (or five-inch) pattern repetition.

The representation of the paper units on-screen is calculated using the plot scale. To set the plot scale, select File / Sheet Setup.

Ground	With the Ground option selected, the length value is the ground value set for the Coordinate units. To set these units, select File / Project Properties / Units and Format tab.

For example, if the Dimensions option is set to Ground, entering 5 into the Length field results (both on a plot and on-screen) in a line using a five-meter (or five-foot) pattern repetition.

Width

Enter the width of the line. For some line types (for example, solid) the width is not applicable and the field becomes unavailable. The following figure shows how the Width field is applied:

The interpretation of this field depends on the dimensions setting.

Paper	If the Dimensions option is set to Paper, the line type is set in millimeters or inches. (The units will depend on the Coordinate units setting. To set these units, select File / Project Properties / Units and Format tab.)

Ground	If the Dimensions option is set to Ground, the line type value will be the ground values set for the coordinate units in File / Project Properties / Units and Format.

Dimensions

Click Paper or Ground to control the operation of the Length and Width fields as described above.


    Create/Edit Text Style dialog

Use the Create/Edit Text Style dialog to create or edit a text style.

To access it:

1.	From the Plan view, select Edit / Styles. The CAD Styles dialog appears.

2.	Select the Text Styles tab.

3.	Do one of the following:

  Click New. The Create Text Style dialog appears.

  Click Edit. The Edit Text Style appears.

Once you select a style, the Edit button becomes available.

Name

Enter the name of a new text style or rename the current name of the text style. All text style names must be unique. However, you can use the same name for a text style, line style, and a point style.

Font

Select the font for the text style.

The font names that are displayed in the list are the fonts that are available in your Microsoft Windows system.

Color

Select the color for the text. If you do not select a color the default is the Window text setting in Microsoft Windows. To edit the Window text setting, use the Control Panel. If Window text is used, the style defaults to black when plotting if you have the default Legend Style selected. To select the default Legend Style, select View / Options / Survey Legend tab. If you have the black legend style selected, the style defaults to white on the screen.

Height

Enter the height of the text style.

The interpretation of this field depends on the dimensions setting.

Paper	With the Paper option selected, the height value is set in millimeters (mm) or inches (in). (The units depend on the coordinate units set in File / Project Properties / Units and Format tab.)

For example, if the option is set to Paper, entering 5 into the height field creates a 5 mm text height on a metric plot. The representation of the paper units on-screen is calculated using the specified plot scale from File / Sheet Setup.

Ground	With the Ground option selected, the height value is the ground values set for the coordinate units in the File / Project Properties / Units and Format tab.

For example, if the option is set to Ground, entering 5 into the Height field will show (both on a plot and on-screen) as a five meter height text on a metric plot.

Font style

Select the bold, italic, or underline check boxes to create the desired text effect.

Dimensions

Click Paper or Ground to control the operation of the Height field as described above.


    Layers command

Use this command to manage layers for the current project.

To access it:

  Select Edit / Layers.

The Layers dialog appears.


    Layers dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to manage layers for the current project.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Layers.

  Click the Layers tool [image].

  Press Ctrl+L.

The current layer is displayed at the top of the dialog.

Name

Enter a name for the layer. The name must be unique. If you change the name of a layer that contains entities, the entities are moved to the new layer.

Point style

Select a point style from the list. The entries in the list are the Trimble predefined styles and new point styles that you have created in Trimble Geomatics Office (using Edit / Styles), or during feature code processing. (For more information, see the Feature and Attribute Editor utility Help.)

This point style is the one used for all points in this layer that have <By Layer> selected for their point style.

Line Style

Select a line style from the list. The entries in the list are the Trimble predefined styles and new line styles that you created in Trimble Geomatics Office (using Edit / Styles) or during feature code processing. (For more information, see the Feature and Attribute Editor utility Help.)

This line style is the one used for all lines in this layer that have <By Layer> selected for their line style.

Text Style

Select a text style from the list. The entries in the list are the Trimble predefined styles and any new text styles that you have created in Trimble Geomatics Office (using Edit / Styles).

This text style is the one used for all text and annotations in this layer that have <By Layer> selected for their text style.

Locked

To allow entities in the layer to be selected in the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window, clear this check box. If you do not want entities in this layer to be selected, select this check box. The value of this field displays in the Layer Selection tool in the Layers toolbar.

If the layer is locked, the icon [image] appears in the Layers toolbar.

If the layer is not locked, the icon [image] appears in the Layers toolbar.

If one or more layers have their Locked field selected, the icon [image] appears in the status bar.

NOTE: If you select this check box, you cannot view the entities in the layer by any of the following methods:

  using the Properties window

  selecting them by clicking

  using any of the Select commands in the Select menu

Visible

To see entities in the layer in the graphics window, select this check box. The value for this field displays in the Layer Selection tool in the Layers toolbar.

If the layer is visible, the icon [image] appears in the Layers toolbar.

If the layer is not visible, the icon [image] appears in the Layers toolbar.

To hide entities in the layer, clear this check box.

NOTE: If you clear this check box, you cannot see any entities in the layer in the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window.

The Hidden Layers icon [image] appears in the status bar when one or more layers are hidden. That is, this icon appears in the status bar when one or more layers have the Visible property cleared.

CAUTION: If a layer is not visible you cannot view or select entities from that layer. This applies when the layer is locked or unlocked. That is, the Visible option overrides the Locked option.

New

Click New to add a new layer to the project. A new row is added in the Layer dialog. Enter values for each column in the new layer.

Delete

Click Delete to delete the currently highlighted layer. If you delete a layer containing entities, a warning dialog appears. The dialog warns that if you delete the layer, the entities in that layer will be deleted.

Current

Click Current to make the selected layer the current layer. The current layer is highlighted. The current layer is the layer to which new entities are added. Any entities (points, lines, arcs, curves, text, and annotations) added to the database without a layer name included is added to the current layer.

TIP: You can edit multiple entries in the Layers dialog:

1.	Use the Ctrl key to select multiple entries.

2.	Edit the last field highlighted. All of the entries highlighted will be updated.


Layers - Overview
    Layers − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

In the Plan view, each entity in the project belongs to a layer. A layer consists of a name, point style, line style, and text style. Organizing data into layers makes it easier to manage. This is useful when managing large data sets. For example, all points with the feature code of ‘tree’ can be grouped in a layer named ‘Trees’. Unless you have created new layers in the project, the Default layer is used for all entities.

All entities (points, lines, arcs, curves, text, and annotations) have a Layer field. Use the Properties window to view entities. To select the layer for an entity, use one of the following methods:

  When adding an entity to the project, select the layer from the Layer field in the appropriate dialog.

  Import a file with the layer specified.

  Use feature code processing.

  To select the layer for existing entities in the project, use the Properties window.

To manage the layers for the project, use the Layers dialog.

Use the Layer Selection toolbar to specify which layers you can see and select. To select entities in a chosen layer:

  Choose Select / By Layer.

If a point in the database has <By Layer> selected in the Point style field, the point style specified for the layer is assigned to the point. If a line, curve, or arc has <By Layer> selected in the Line style field, the line style specified for the layer is assigned to the line, curve, or arc. Similarly, if a text or annotation has <By Layer> selected in the Text style field, the text style specified for the layer is assigned to the text or annotation.


Duplicate Points - Overview
Duplicate Points − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog
Overview

Trimble Geomatics Office provides two options for importing points with the same name:

1. 	Always merge duplicate points

2.	Merge duplicate points within tolerance. You can specify within what horizontal or vertical tolerance the software merges points, or that the software does not resolve duplicate points on import at all.

By default, Trimble Geomatics Office merges points with the same name on import, so duplicate points are not created. (This is the fastest way to import data.)

If you do not choose to merge duplicate points, duplicate points are created when you import one or more files that have observations or coordinates for the same point that are out of tolerance. For example, when you import:

  a file that contains a point with the same name as an existing point in the database and they are not within tolerance

  points with the same name from different Survey Controller (*.dc) files

If necessary, you can also merge points from within the software, using the Merge Duplicate Points command.

How Trimble Geomatics Office merges points

A point can only have one user-entered WGS-84 coordinate and one user-entered grid/local coordinate. Trimble Geomatics Office chooses which existing WGS-84 or grid/local coordinates to overwrite by following these rules:

1.	The highest quality coordinates are taken.

2.	The last coordinate component entered in the database is used.

The Point Derivation report provides details on the survey data used to coordinate the points, while the Import report lists any coordinate components that have been overwritten or discarded.

NOTE: If the software overwrites a coordinate that you wanted to use, you must undo the import operation, edit the import file (or the point name in the Trimble Geomatics Office project), and re-import the data. Alternatively, undo the import operation and re-import the data, using the Merge duplicate points within tolerance option in the Duplicate Point Options dialog. You can then just rename the duplicate points from within Trimble Geomatics Office.


Duplicate Point Options dialog

More Information

How to ...	See also

Use the Duplicate Point Options dialog to specify how Trimble Geomatics Office manages points with the same name when they are imported into a project.

The settings in this dialog apply to all import options; whether you import files using the project bar, or drag and drop files into a Trimble Geomatics Office project, the software uses the last Duplicate Point Options setting that you specified. You can create a template to set the Duplicate Point Options.

To access the Duplicate Points Options dialog:

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	Click Options.

The following sections describe the available options.

Always merge duplicate points

This option is selected by default. The software merges points with the same name on import, so duplicate points are not created. After import, the Import report lists any overwritten or discarded coordinate components.

NOTE: If the software overwrites a coordinate that you wanted to use, you must undo the import operation, edit the import file (or the point name in the Trimble Geomatics Office project), and re-import the data. Alternatively, undo the import operation and re-import the data, using the Merge duplicate points within tolerance option in the Duplicate Point Options dialog. You can then just rename the duplicate points from within Trimble Geomatics Office.

Merge duplicate points within tolerance

If you select this option, all survey data for a point is placed under the same point if it is within the horizontal and/or vertical tolerance you specify. The default tolerance is determined from the unknown horizontal and vertical tolerance specified in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog. After import, the Import report lists any overwritten or discarded coordinates.

You can also use this option to specify that the software does not merge duplicate points on import. To do this, set the tolerance for importing data at 0.02 (that is, the horizontal survey quality tolerance) and 0.050 (that is, the vertical survey quality tolerance). You can then just rename the duplicate points from within Trimble Geomatics Office. If both a horizontal and vertical tolerance are specified, for duplicate points to be merged they must be within both the horizontal and vertical tolerance. If a tolerance is not specified (that is, in the Tolerances group, the Horizontal and Vertical check boxes are not selected) the duplicate points are merged.

NOTE: When importing digital level data, only the vertical tolerance is used.

NOTE: If the tolerance is set to 0.000, the duplicate point coordinates must be exactly the same for the points to be merged.


Explode Points command

Use this command to create many points from one point by separating the data:

  by data source

  by all observations

  by data type (GPS/Terrestrial)

To access it, select Edit / Explode Points.

The Explode Points dialog appears.

Use the explode points option to:

  resolve duplicate points

  compute positions for every observation

  perform a calibration in Trimble Geomatics Office when GPS data and grid/local data are under the same point

  separate terrestrial and GPS observations


Explode Points dialog

A point can have survey data from more than one data source. The data source can also contain more than one observation. However, only one observation is used to derive the point’s calculated position.

You can use the Explode Points option to create points by separating the data by data source, all observations, or data type (GPS/Terrestrial). Explode points to:

  resolve duplicate points

  compute positions for every observation

  perform a GPS site calibration in Trimble Geomatics Office when GPS data and grid/local data are under the same point

  separate terrestrial and GPS observations

When you explode points, the operation creates points with the same name.

For example, you import two Survey Controller (*.dc) files into the same project:

  The first .dc file contains a conventional observation to the point ‘101’.

  The second .dc file contains a keyed-in coordinate and a GPS observation to the same point ‘101’.

When the first file is imported, a single point ‘101’ is created in the project and the observation is used to derive the position of the point. When the second file is imported, the Trimble Geomatics Office compares the keyed-in coordinate from the .dc file with the position of the point in the project. As the survey data from the .dc file are for the same point ‘101’, the point from the project and .dc file are automatically merged into one. The survey data will come from two data sources: the first and second Survey Controller (*.dc) files. There will be three sets of coordinate sources for the point:

  Conventional observation

  Keyed-in coordinate

  GPS occupation

TIP: You can view the data source and observation and coordinate content of a point in the Properties window page menu.

You can only explode points when there is a point in the current selection set that contains multiple observations or coordinates.

To access the Explode Points dialog, select Edit / Explode Points.

Explode

To explode points to create separate ones, the software separates data using one of the following methods:

By data source	For example, a .dc file.
By all observations	Separate points are created from all observation and coordinates for the point.
By data type	All GPS observations and WGS-84 coordinates are put under one point. All grid coordinates and terrestrial observations are put under another point.
NOTE: If you need to perform a GPS site calibration in Trimble Geomatics Office, and GPS observations and grid coordinates are under the same point, use the Explode points by data type option. This operation creates two points; one grid point and one GPS point. You will then be able to perform a GPS site calibration using these points.

Rename GPS Points with suffix (_GPS)

If you select the By data type option, the Rename GPS points with suffix option becomes available.  You can make the point names unique by choosing the suffix to be added to the GPS points. If you do not select this option, points are exploded by data type and each point has the same name.

Show explode statistics

Select this check box to display the number of points that can be created from the selected points using the selected explode method.


Multiple Edit command

 See also

Use this command to edit the survey-related or CAD-related properties of entities in the selection. This command is only available if you have a current selection set.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Multiple Edit.

  Choose Multiple Edit from the shortcut menu.

The Multiple Edit (Survey tab or CAD tab) dialog appears.


Multiple Edit dialog - Survey tab
Multiple Edit dialog − Survey tab

Use this dialog to edit the survey-related properties on multiple entities. For example, you can correct the antenna heights for the occupations of a group of GPS points if you know they were incorrectly entered in the field.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Multiple Edit.

  Choose Multiple Edit from the shortcut menu.

NOTE: The selection is validated when it is selected. It may become unavailable if it is not a valid option for the current selection.

Perform these edits on selected points

This group contains the survey-related properties you can edit for selected points.

Set antenna height to

Select this check box to enable the following fields. Use these fields to change the antenna heights of the point’s occupations.

Change heights of size	Select the antenna height value of the points you want to change. The list contains the heights entered for the selected points. Only the antenna heights with the selected value will change.
New antenna height	Enter the correct antenna height value you want applied.

Set GPS antenna details to

Select this check box to enable the following fields. Use these fields to change the antenna type and/or measurement method of the selected points.

Antenna type	Select the antenna type for the points you want changed.
Measured to	Select the measurement method for the points you want changed. The list in this field depends on the antenna type you selected. If a new antenna type is selected, this field is cleared.

Set conventional target detail

Select this check box to enable the following fields. Use these fields to change the target heights and prism constants of the selected points.

Target Height	Enter the correct target height you want applied.
Prism Constant	Enter the correct prism constant you want applied.

Set laser target height

Select this check box to enable this field. Enter the correct target height you want applied.

Perform these edits to the selected observations

This group contains the survey-related properties you can edit for the selected observations (GPS, Conventional, Laser).

Use in Network Adjustment

Select this check box to enable the field. Use this field to use (or exclude) the selected observations in a Network Adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed).

This setting only applies to GPS observations that have covariance (QC2) information. When this is set to No, the observations will be disabled for a network adjustment. However, they are still used during a recomputation to determine the positions of points.

Set observation status to

Select this check box to enable the field. Use the field to enable or disable an observation during a recomputation or to enable the observations as a check.

When the observations are disabled, the observations will not be used during a recomputation and any misclosures will be reported for these observations. If you enable the observations as a check, the observations will be used to coordinate a point if no other enabled observation or coordinates are available.

Suppress flags of type

Select this check box to enable the field. Select the warning flag types that you want to suppress in the Survey view. Warning flags will reappear if a recomputation is performed.

NOTE: When you select a check box to edit a particular field, Trimble Geomatics Office performs a check on the selected entities. If it finds the fields are not used in the selected entities, the check box option(s) will be disabled.


Multiple Edit dialog - CAD tab
Multiple Edit dialog − CAD tab

Use this dialog to edit the CAD-related properties of the entities in the selection.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Multiple Edit.

  From the shortcut menu, choose Multiple Edit.

Perform these edits on selected points

This group contains the CAD-related properties you can edit for selected points.

Set feature code to

Select this check box to enable the field. Enter the feature code value that you want applied to the selected points.

Set layer to

Select this check box to enable the field. Select the layer you want assigned to the selected points. If you enter a layer that does not exist, the New Layer dialog appears.

Set point style to

Select this check box to enable the field. Select the point style that you want applied to the selected points. If you enter a point style that does not exist, the Create Point Style dialog appears.

Remove all annotations

Select this check box to remove any annotations assigned to the selected points.

Perform these edits to the selected linework

This group contains the CAD-related properties you can edit for the selected linework (lines, curves, arcs).

Set layer to

Select this check box to enable the field. Select the layer you want assigned to the selected linework. If you enter a layer that does not exist, the New Layer dialog appears.

Set line style to

Select this check box to enable the field. Select the line style that you want applied to the selected linework. If you enter a line style that does not exist, the Create Line Style dialog appears.

Remove all annotations

Select this check box remove any annotations assigned to the selected linework.

Perform these edits to the selected text

This group contains the fields you can edit for the selected text.

Set layer to

Select this check box to enable the field. Select the layer you want assigned to the selected text. If you enter a layer that does not exist, the New Layer dialog appears.

Set text style to

Select this check box to enable the field. Select the text style that you want applied to the selected text. If you enter a text style that does not exist, the Create Text Style dialog appears.


    Enable/Disable Observations command

Use this command to enable or disable an observation. Disabling an observation will remove it from being used for any surveying computation.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Enable/Disable Observation.

  In the Properties window, use the Status field of an observation.

  In the Multiple Edit dialog / Survey tab, use the Set observation status to field.

NOTE: A recomputation considers the status of the observations in determining the calculated position for a point. You can use the Enable/Disable Observations function to disable the status of an observation so it is removed from a recomputation.

You can only change the status of observations when:

  There is a current selection set, and

  All of the observations in the selection set have the same observation status.

NOTE: You can set the status of multiple observations if you have more than one in your current selection set.

When you disable an observation, the color of the observation lines changes to dark red.

NOTE: If there are multiple observations along the same line, the observation is only shown in red if all of the observations are disabled.


    Reverse Observation Flowout command

Vectors are applied in the direction in which they are observed. Use this command to reverse the direction of an observation, and force it to be applied in the opposite direction.

To access it, select Edit / Reverse Observation Flowout.

When you reverse the direction of the observation the calculated coordinates and qualities for a point may change. The recomputation process must be used to apply the observation and calculate new point positions.

CAUTION: If the point you want the observation to flow out from does not have a known position (such as an RTK observed point), the observation is not applied.


New Layer dialog

Use this dialog to create a new layer. This dialog appears if you enter a layer name that does not exist when inserting or editing entities (points, lines, curves, arcs, text).

Name

Enter a name for the layer to which the selected entity(s) will be moved.

Point style

Select a point style from the list. The entries in the list are the Trimble predefined styles and new point styles that you have created in Trimble Geomatics Office (using Edit / Styles), or during feature code processing.

For more information, see the Feature and Attribute Editor utility Help.

This point style is the one used for all points in this layer that have <By Layer> selected for their point style.

Line Style

Select a line style from the list. The entries in the list are the Trimble predefined styles and new line styles that you created in Trimble Geomatics Office (using Edit / Styles) or during feature code processing.

This line style is the one used for all lines in this layer that have <By Layer> selected for their line style.

Text Style

Select a text style from the list. The entries in the list are the Trimble predefined styles and any new text styles that you have created in Trimble Geomatics Office (using Edit / Styles).

This text style is the one used for all text and annotations in this layer that have <By Layer> selected for their text style.

Locked

To allow entities in the layer to be selected in the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window, clear this check box. If you do not want entities in this layer to be selected, select this check box. The value of this field displays in the Layer Selection tool in the Layers toolbar.

If the layer is locked, this icon [image] appears in the Layers toolbar.

If the layer is not locked, this icon [image] appears in the Layers toolbar.

If one or more layers have their Locked field selected, this icon [image] appears in the status bar.

NOTE: If you select this check box, you cannot view the entities in the layer by any of the following methods:

  Using the Properties window.

  Selecting the entities by clicking.

  Using any of the Select commands in the Select menu.

Visible

To see entities in the layer in the graphics window, select this check box. The value for this field displays in the Layer Selection tool in the Layers toolbar.

If the layer is visible, this icon [image] appears in the Layers toolbar.

If the layer is not visible, this icon [image] appears in the Layers toolbar.

To hide entities in the layer, clear this check box.

NOTE: If you clear this check box, you cannot see any entities in the layer in the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window.

The Visible icon [image] appears in the status bar when one or more entities in the layer are hidden. That is, this icon appears in the status bar when one or more layers have the Visible property cleared.

CAUTION: If a layer is not visible you cannot view or select entities from that layer. This applies when the layer is locked or unlocked. That is, the Visible option overrides the Locked option.


Move Points and Text command

Use this command to access the Move dialog. This command is only available if you have a current selection set. To access it, select Edit / Move Points and Text.

The Move dialog appears.


Move dialog

Use this dialog to move points or text.

To access it, select Edit / Move Points and Text.

Points with a quality of Control, Fixed Control, or Adjusted are not moved. If a point that you have selected to move has an Adjusted, Fixed Control, or Control quality, a message appears.

WARNING: Moving a point will disable any observations to the point or coordinates for the point. You can re-enable them using the Properties window. Re-enabling observations and coordinates can cause the moved point to be relocated to its original position.

Select the text or points and enter the new location into the dialog. The move occurs when you click OK in the dialog.

Move By

Select the Move By option to move the selected text or points to a new location defined by shifts north and east (deltas).

Two options are available:

Delta East	This option adds the displayed delta east value to the Eastings of all selected entities.

Delta North	This option adds the displayed delta north value to the Northings of all selected entities.

Move to Point

Select the Move to Point check box to move the selected points to the position of another point.

Name

Use this field to name or select the point at the new location.

Move to Coordinate

Select the Move to Coordinate check box to move the selected text or point to the new position. Two options are available:

Easting	Use this field to enter or select the new Easting value for the selected point.

Northing	Use this field to enter or select the new Northing value for the selected point.

Set elevations to null

Select the Set elevations to null check box to set the point elevations for the moved points to null. If you do not select this option, the existing elevation of the point is maintained.

NOTE: Any observations to a point that has been moved will be disabled.


Duplicate Points dialog

More Information

 See also

When you import a file that contains a point with the same name as another point in the project, the result is that points with the same name are created in the project. The Duplicate Points dialog appears with the following message:

The import operation has created points with the same name in the database, (duplicate points).

You can resolve these duplicate points by:

  merging the points with duplicate names if you know they are to the same physical point

  renaming the points with duplicate names if they are not to the same physical point


Feedback

Your feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to improve the documentation with each revision.

To forward your comments, do one of the following:

  Send an e-mail to ReaderFeedback@trimble.com

  Complete the Reader Comment Form at the back of the manual and mail it according to the instructions at the bottom of the form. If the reader comment form is not available, you can send comments and suggestions to:

Land Survey Marketing

Trimble Navigation

7403 Church Ranch Boulevard, Suite 100

Westminster, CO 80021

USA

Attention: Technical Publications Group

Fax: +1 720 887-6101

www.trimble.com/

All comments and suggestions become the property of Trimble Navigation Limited.

Thank you for your help.


New Project command

Use this command to create a new project or template.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select File / New Project.

  Click the New Project button [image] on the standard toolbar.

The New Project dialog appears.


New Project dialog

Use this dialog to create a new project or template.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select File / New Project.

  Click the New Project button [image] on the standard toolbar.

  Click the New Project shortcut on the Project bar.

Name

Enter the name of the project that you want to create. A new folder with the project name is created under the current project folder as selected using the Folder button.

Template

The Template list shows the project templates available in your system. Using project templates in Trimble Geomatics Office is similar to using template documents in Microsoft Word or prototype drawings in AutoCAD. You create every new project using a template to form the basis of your new project. The template you use remains unchanged.

TIP: New CAD styles added to a template are available in projects that are based on that template. Where ongoing work in a given area is likely to require a series of individual projects, you may want to create a template that includes the specific coordinate system for the area, special styles, and control points, for example, so that these are immediately available in all new projects.

Once project templates are defined, you can use the templates many times for many different projects.

From the template names presented in the list, select the most appropriate template. The template you select forms the basis for the new project you are creating.

Details

The Details list shows the coordinate system details and the Headings of the selected template. This helps you select the most appropriate template.

In addition, the folder where the project is created and maintained is shown. This folder reflects what is defined directly in the Name field or by using Folder.

Projection options are predefined in the template project; and the projection can be changed.

Folder

Click Folder to select the folder where you want to create a new project.

Selecting a folder using Folder changes the default location that Trimble Geomatics Office uses the next time you open or create a project.

Use the folder tree structure shown in the Browse for Folder dialog to do one of the following:

  Directly select a project folder.

  Select the folder containing a number of projects.

New

Click New to create a new project or a new template.

When set to template, you can create a new template in the appropriate folder based on the currently selected template. You can use this to generate new templates for specific purposes.


Open Project command

Use this command to open an existing project.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select File / Open Project.

  Click the Open Project button [image] on the standard toolbar.

The Open Project dialog appears.


Open Project dialog

Use this dialog to open an existing project.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select File / Open Project.

  Click the Open Project button [image] on the standard toolbar.

NOTE: If you already have a project open, you are warned that this action will close the current project.

NOTE: A preview of the project is shown in the Open Project dialog.

Name

Enter the name of the project you want to open.

A list of projects in the current project folder appears below the Name field. Select one of these project names to automatically enter its name in the Name field.

You can also enter a path in the Name field to a project that you want to open.

For example, you could have several projects in the folder MYPROJ on C:\ drive.

Enter C:\myproj\. Trimble Geomatics Office shows the projects in this folder that are available for selecting. Opening a project this way does not change the default project folder as it does when you click Folder. See the following description of the Folder button.

Folder

Click Folder to select the folder from which a project is to be opened.

Use the folder tree structure shown in the Browse for Folder dialog to do one of the following:

  Directly select a project folder.

  Select the folder containing a number of projects.

Details

The Details list shows the coordinate system and headings of the project and contains the folder where the project is stored. Use these details to help you open the appropriate project. Details can be altered with the File / Project Properties / Unit and Formats tab.

NOTE: If you do not have the WAVE Baseline Processing module or the Network Adjustment module installed, when you open an existing project created with these modules, the survey data remains unchanged. You can view data derived from the disabled modules (such as error ellipses and processed baselines). Further tasks requiring the use of the disabled modules are not available.


Close Project command

Use this command to close the current project.

To access it, select File / Close Project.

All changes made to a project (including Saved Selection Sets and Views) are saved as you work in the project. You can close a project without having to save it first.


Delete Project command

Use this command to delete a project.

To access it, select File / Delete Project.

The Delete Project dialog appears.


Delete Project dialog

Use this dialog to delete a project. The project must be closed.

To access it, select File / Delete Project.

TIP: You can restore a deleted project from the Recycle Bin.

Name

Enter the name of the project you want to delete.

In the Delete dialog, a list of projects in the current project folder appears below the Name field. Select one of these project names to automatically enter the name in the Name field.

You can also enter a directory path to a project that you want to delete.

For example, you could have several projects in your folder MYPROJ on C:\ drive.

Enter C:\myproj\. Trimble Geomatics Office shows the projects in this folder that are available for selection. Deleting a project this way does not change the default project folder unlike when you use Folder. See the following description of the Delete group.

Delete group

To view the projects you want to delete, select the Project option.

To view the templates you want to delete, select the Template option.

Folder

Click Folder to select the folder from which a project is to be deleted. Selecting a folder using Folder changes the default that Trimble Geomatics Office uses the next time you open or create a project.

Use the folder tree structure shown in the Browse for Folder dialog to do one of the following:

  Directly select a project folder.

  Select the folder containing a number of projects.

Delete

Click Delete to delete the selected project. All folders and files included in the project are deleted.

Details

The Details group shows the coordinate system and Headings of the project and presents the folder where the project is stored. Use these details to help you confirm that you are deleting the correct project.


Import command

Use this command to open the Import dialog.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select File / Import.

  Click the Import button [image] on the standard toolbar.

  Use the Import group on the Project bar.

The Import dialog appears.


Export command

Use this command to export data to another format or to a Trimble device.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select File / Export.

  Click the Export button [image] on the standard toolbar.

The Export dialog appears.


Sheet Setup command

Use this command to change the sheet layout settings before producing a plot.

You can:

  select the plan form you want to use for your plot

  assign the plot scale, origin, and orientation

To access it, select File / Sheet Setup.

The Sheet Setup dialog appears.


Sheet Setup dialog

Use this dialog to change the sheet layout settings before producing a plot. You can select the plan form that you want to use for your plot and assign the plot scale, origin, and orientation.

To access it, select File / Sheet Setup.

Plan form

A Plan form provides a template into which you plot your drawing. You can customize this template to provide drawing components (such as a North arrow or your company logo) as well as the clipping region, frame, line work, and text annotation. The plan form is applied to the sheet size set for the selected printer or plotter and will conform to the portrait or landscape setting for the printer or plotter.

You can change these settings using Print Setup.

In the File field, enter the filename of the desired plan form.

Browse

The Browse dialog shows a list of available plan form (*.frm) files.

Select the plan form filename you require.

Trimble Navigation Limited supplies several different plan forms for your use. You can create your own plan forms. For more information, see Plan Forms − Overview.

Scale, Plot rotation, Origin N (North), Origin E (East)

Use these fields to define the area of the project to be plotted.

Once you have set a scale, a "plot box" which represents the area of the project to be plotted, appears in the graphics window. It is based on the origin coordinates. Change the scale to increase or decrease the coverage of the plot.

TIP: Set the Plot rotation field to a value for the required plot orientation. The value in this field sets the orientation of the side of the plot sheet, rather than the rotation of the north point on the plot. The plot box may move. If it does, move it graphically around the data to fit the project data.

Click the Origin North or Origin East field, then click and drag the ‘plot box’ to cover the required area. You can set the Plot rotation field to a value that gives you the required plot orientation. In using this field you are specifying the orientation of the side of the plot sheet rather than the rotation of the north point on the plot.

OK

Click OK to confirm your plot sheet setup. These setup details are stored and then used in the Plot/Print option.

Best Fit

Click Best Fit to have the system calculate optimum values for the Scale and Origin fields to plot all currently displayed project data. The Plot rotation defaults to 0° when you use this option.

Print Setup

Click Print Setup to open the Print Setup dialog for your system. Use this dialog to select the appropriate printer or plotter, choose the paper size and source, and select the orientation of the plot output on the paper (portrait or landscape).


Plan Forms - Overview
Plan Forms − Overview

A plan form (*.frm) file is stored as a text file. It contains a series of statements which describe what is to be placed on the plan form and where it is to be placed. You can include in a plan form definition lines, text, symbols (for example, North point), and Microsoft Windows enhanced metafiles (*.wmf) to build up the desired layout.

Comments

In the supplied plan forms, there are comments to explain the meaning of the different commands available in the plan form definition. Use a text editor to edit a plan form definition. The supplied plan form definitions are usually located in the System folder under the main program folder (typically, C:\Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office).

TIP: During Trimble Geomatics Office installation, the Microsoft Notepad text editor is assigned to the Open operation for the file extension. Therefore, when selecting a plan form file, or when in the Microsoft Windows Explorer program, if you highlight a .frm file, you can use the Open option in the shortcut menu to present the plan form details in Microsoft Notepad.

For more information, see Plan Form Definition Details.


Plan Form Definition Details

 Overview

The plan form definitions are stored in a format similar to the standard Windows *.ini file format. This consists of a number of section headings enclosed in square brackets ( [ ] ). Within each section individual items are defined, with each item having a unique name and being assigned an appropriate value using an ‘=’ character. Comments can be placed within a file but the comments must be on a line of their own and the line must start with a semi-colon (;).

A special coordinate system within plan form definitions allows the same plan form to be used on different plot sheet sizes. All coordinate values are assumed to be in millimeters and are always specified in comma-separated pairs within parentheses, with the x (or horizontal) value first and the y (or vertical) value second.

For example (20,40) is a valid coordinate position. The upper-left plottable corner of the sheet is defined as having the coordinates +0.0, +0.0. All positive coordinate values are interpreted as being to the right and below this position. The lower-right plottable corner of the sheet is defined as having the coordinates −0.0, −0.0. All negative coordinate values are interpreted as being to the left and above this position.

NOTE: The plottable corners of a sheet are the limits of the actual plotting (or printing) that can be carried out on a given sheet by the plotter or printer. These limits will vary on different plotters and printers. The limits are affected by factors such as how the sheet is held in the rollers on a plotter, for example.

To illustrate, the table below shows the various coordinate positions and their interpretations.

Sections

The sections in a plan form definition file are as follows:


Plot / Print command

Use this command to:

  View a list of installed plotters and printers.

  Set the default plotter or printer.

  Access other plotting or printing options for the selected plotter or printer.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select File / Plot/Print.

  Press Ctrl+P.

Before you can print in Trimble Geomatics Office, you must:

  Connect the plotter or printer to your computer or a network.

  Install a plotter or printer driver by using Microsoft Windows Setup or the Microsoft Windows Control Panel, if one is not already present. For more information, see the Microsoft Windows Help.

  In the Plot/Print Setup dialog, select the plotter or printer that you want to use.

NOTE: If you have grid lines displayed in the graphics window, they are drawn on your plot.


Project Properties command

Use this command to open the Project Properties dialog. To access it, select File / Project Properties.


Last Project command

The File menu lists the last four projects you have recently opened.

To open a recently used project, select one from the File menu list.


Exit command

Use this command to close the current project and exit Trimble Geomatics Office.

Trimble Geomatics Office automatically saves your changes.


Copy Project command

Use this command to make a copy of an existing Trimble Geomatics Office project. This command is only available when there is not a project open.

The Project to Copy dialog appears.


Project to Copy dialog

Use this dialog to select the project you want to copy.

To access this dialog:

  Select File / Copy Project.

This option is only available when there is no project open.

Select a project from the list.

The details for the selected project appear below the project list.

Folder

To select a project from a different folder, click Folder.

When you have selected the project you want to copy, click OK.

The Copy Project To dialog appears.


Copy Project To dialog

Use this dialog to enter the new name for the project you are copying.

Project Title

Enter the name for the project.

Folder

Do one of the following:

  Click the ellipsis button to copy the project to a different folder.

  Enter the folder path using the keyboard.


File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Site

Use the Trimble FTP site to send files or to receive files such as software patches, utilities, and answers to Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs). You can access the FTP site from the Trimble World Wide Web site: www.trimble.com/support/support.htm.


GIS Formats - Overview
GIS Formats − Overview

More Information

How to ...	See also
Overview

You can export points and their associated attributes from Trimble Geomatics Office to a variety of Geographic Information System (GIS) formats. Lines, arcs, curves, text, and annotations are not exported.

See the following table:

During export, you can create new attributes to export (for example, the time or date the attribute was collected, or the elevation of the point).

You can also create custom ASCII export or report formats to export points and their attributes.

Two Custom GIS Formats are listed:

  Name,Latitude,Longtitude,Height,All Attributes (Local)

  Name,North,East,Elevation,All Attributes

Use the GIS tab to export data to a variety of GIS formats.

To access this tab:

1.	Do one of the following:

  Select File / Export.

  Use the Export group on the Project bar.

The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the GIS tab.

You can move custom formats to this tab. For more information, see Asciiexp.dat file.

For information about exporting to a GIS format, see GIS Export Formats.

This tab has the following formats:


ArcView files (*.dbf, *.shp, *.shx) option

When you export to the ArcView format, three files are created for each feature code with attributes.

The following table describes these files:

These files are binary files. You cannot view or edit these files with a text editor.

Trimble Geomatics Office automatically names these files.

For example, if you have points with attributes for the feature code ‘Tree’, the following files are created:

  Tree.shp

  Tree.shx

  Tree.dbf

For information about ArcView settings, see the topic Export Options dialog. ArcView does not have any extra settings other than the ones for all formats.

NOTE: Only ArcView version 3.1 or later support 3D points.


AutoCAD file with attributes (*.dxf) option

When you export to the AutoCAD file with attributes (*.dxf) option, a .dxf file is created.

Use Drawing eXchange Format (.dxf) files to exchange and display graphical and tabular data.

Configure

In addition to the standard settings described in the topic Export Options dialog, there are also AutoCAD-specific settings.

Click Options. The Export Options dialog appears.

Text size

There are two options for specifying the size of text in the output file:

Automatic	The text size is calculated automatically from the input file.
Fixed	The text size is fixed. Do one of the following:   In the Text Size field, enter the size that you want the text to be.   Use the arrow buttons.
Block Options

Select the Export Features in blocks check box to export the attribute information in blocks. This means that the attributes can be queried and edited when read into a GIS or CAD system that supports the .dxf format. The Block Insertion Point group becomes available. There are two options for placing an insertion point in a block:

  Origin	Place the insertion point at position 0,0 in the block.

  Centroid	Place the insertion point in the calculated centroid of the block.

If the Export features in blocks check box is not selected these options are not available. Instead, position information for a feature is stored as a POLYLINE or POINT entity and the attribute information is written as TEXT. TEXT is written to the appropriate layer for each feature. The Block Insertion Point group is not available.

NOTE: If you do not export in blocks, attribute names are not exported—only the values for the attributes. If you are exporting to any of the AutoCAD GIS packages, for example AutoCAD Map, always export in blocks so that the attribute names are included.

Layer Options

The .dxf files organize different information into layers. These layers can be manipulated independently of each other. There are two layer options:

  One feature per layer − a different layer is created for each feature. For example, pole features are put in a different layer to tree features. The layer name for each layer is the name of the feature.

  All features in one layer − all features are put in a single layer. The Layer name field is available. Enter the name of the layer in the Layer name field. The Layer name field cannot be left blank.

Change Spaces in Feature Names to underscores

Some programs that read .dxf files require that layer names in .dxf files do not have spaces in them. Select this option to convert any spaces in feature names to the underscore character (_).


MapInfo files (*.mif, *.mid) option

When you export to the MapInfo format, two files are created for each feature code with attributes. They are discussed in the following table:

These files are text files. You can view or edit them with a text editor. An example of each of these files is shown below:

MIF File

VERSION 2

  DELIMITER "	"

  COORDSYS EARTH PROJECTION 1, 104

COLUMNS 3

  Height_m  DECIMAL(5,0)

  Needs_attention  CHAR(30)

  Remarks  CHAR(30)

DATA

POINT 700345.32 306565.45

POINT 700356.47 306125.38

POINT 700937.71 306505.41

MID File

1	Yes	Branches in wires

2	Yes	Dead

3	No	Directly beside pole

Trimble Geomatics Office automatically names these files. For example, if you have points with attributes for the feature code ‘tree’, the following files are created:

  tree.mif

  tree.mid

MapInfo does not have any extra settings other than the ones for all formats. These are described in the Export Options dialog topic.

NOTE: MapInfo supports 2D points only.


Microstation file (*.dgn) option

When you export to the Microstation (*.dgn) format, one file is created. You need to enter the name for the file that you want to export.

Configure

In addition to the settings available for all formats in the Export Options dialog, the following options are available to configure how you want to export to the Microstation DGN format.

Make snapable

Select this check box to make sure that the .dgn file that is created has ‘snapable’ features. With this option in Microstation, if you click close to the feature the cursor snaps its exact position.

Unit of resolution

Enter the unit of resolution for GPS positions in the output file. If you want to overlay your GPS data with existing data in .dgn format it is important that the units of resolution in both files are the same.

The two options are:

  Automatic − The units of resolution are calculated automatically from the Coordinate Decimal Places field in the File / Project Properties / Units and Format tab of the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

  User-defined − The units of resolution can be manually specified in this field.

Global origin

Select how the global origin is calculated. If you want to overlay your GPS data with existing data in the .dgn format, it is important that the global origin in both files is the same.

The two options are:

  Automatic − The global origin is calculated from the input file (or files) automatically.

  User-defined − The X, Y and Z coordinates of the global origin can be manually specified in this field.


Export Options dialog (GIS export)

Use this dialog to edit the options for the Geographic Information System (GIS) format to which you are exporting.

To access this dialog:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the GIS tab, click Options.

NOTE: The options available in this dialog depend on the export format you have chosen. These settings are described in the appropriate format topics:

  ArcView files (*.dbf, *.shp, *.shx)

  AutoCAD file with attributes (*.dxf)

  MapInfo files (*.mif, *.mid)

  Microstation file (*.dgn)

Other than the format-dependent settings, the settings common to all formats are discussed below.

File Format

There are three different file formats:

  DOS format

Select this option if the target system runs under MS-DOS or contains text in the MS-DOS ASCII character set. Text files in this format have <CarriageReturn> <NewLine> record terminators.

  Windows format

Select this option if the target system runs under a Microsoft Windows operating system or contains text in the ANSII character set. Text files in this format have <CarriageReturn> <NewLine> record terminators.

  UNIX format

Select this option if the target system runs under a UNIX operating system. Text files in this format have <NewLine> record terminators.

NOTE: Only the file formats that are valid for the selected GIS format are available.

Dimensions

If the GIS format supports three-dimensional (3D) points, you can export two-dimensional (2D) points (Northing, Easting), or three-dimensional points (Northing, Easting, Elevation). This option is unavailable if the GIS format does not support 3D points.

TIP: If the GIS does not support 3D points, to export elevations click Attributes and select the Point elevation option.

Attributes

Click Attributes to select the generated attributes that you want exported with the points. The Attributes dialog opens. Use this dialog to configure how you want menu attribute values exported.

NOTE: The options available in the Attributes dialog are the same in all GIS formats.


Attributes dialog (GIS Export Options)

Use this dialog to select any other attribute values that you want Trimble Geomatics Office to include with the file export. The attributes are created using the appropriate values stored with points in the database. In this dialog, you cannot create your own attributes to add.

The options available in the Attributes dialog are the same in all Geographic Information System (GIS) formats.

Generated Attributes

Select any combination of these options to be added for each point exported. This is useful if you are exporting to a 2D GIS and want the elevations exported. In the GIS software to which you are exporting, any generated attributes appear as normal attributes.

NOTE: Generated date and time attributes are exported in the most recent format used in the feature and attribute library.

Export Menu Attributes As

When a Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file or Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file is defined, you can specify up to two code values for each menu attribute item.

For example, consider a feature code ‘Tree’ with a menu attribute ‘Type’. Each menu item can have code values. The type ‘Native’ can have code values of NV and NT. Points with a Tree feature code with attributes collected can have their type attributes exported as the actual attribute value (for example, Native), ‘User Code 1’ (for example, NV), or ‘User Code 2’ (for example, NT). This is useful if your GIS only supports two-character attribute values.

For more information about code values, see the Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor utility Help.


Help Topics command

Use the Help Topics command to open the online help.


Tip of the Day command

The Tip of the Day system provides tips to help you use Trimble Geomatics Office.

Choose this command to display the next tip of the day.

To display tips when you start Trimble Geomatics Office, select the Show Tips on StartUp check box.


Tip of the Day dialog

The Tip of the Day system provides tips to help you use Trimble Geomatics Office.

To display tips when you start Trimble Geomatics Office, select the Show Tips on StartUp check box.


About Trimble Geomatics Office command

 How to ...

Use this command to display program, copyright information, and the version number for Trimble Geomatics Office.


About Trimble Geomatics Office dialog

This dialog displays program, copyright information, and the version number for Trimble Geomatics Office.


Using the Help

There are several ways to obtain help while you are using Trimble Geomatics Office.

To get Help in a dialog	Make sure that the dialog is active and press F1.
To get Help on a menu command	1. Place your cursor over the menu command and hold down the left mouse button. 2. Press F1.
To find a topic in the Help system by using the Contents	Select the Contents tab to browse through topics by category, like a book.
To find a topic in the Help system by using the Index	Select the Index tab to see a list of index entries. Type the word you are looking for or scroll through the list.
To search for a term or phrase in the Help system	1. Select the Search tab. 2. The Find Setup wizard may appear. If it does, select the Minimize database size option and click Next >, then click Finish. 3. In the Type the word(s) you wish to find field, enter the word or phrase that you want to find. 4. If necessary, in the Select matching word(s) to narrow the search field, select a word to narrow the search. 5. In the Choose topic to display field, select a topic. It will be display in the right side of the Help window. TIP: To rebuild the index, select Search / Options.
To print a Help topic	To print the current Help topic, do one of the following:  Click Print.  From the File menu choose Print Topic.  Use your right mouse to click inside the Help window, and then choose Print Topic. NOTE: You can print individual Help topics but not Help books.  To print information in a pop-up window, use the right mouse button to click inside it, then click Print Topic.

TIP: Click Back on the Help toolbar to view topics that you have seen before.


To report note records

 Overview and More Information

To report notes from the Trimble Geomatics Office project database, create a custom database report. Custom reports work on the primary record types or Queries defined in the database.

There are two parts to creating a custom report:

  Defining the selection set

  Creating a report format


Defining the selection set

To select non-graphical record types (for example, Note records):

1.	Do one of the following:

  Use the .dc file selection set.

  Choose Select / By Query.

2.	Select the record types.

NOTE: If you select Whole database, the report includes all the notes in the database.


Creating a report format

To do this:

1.	Select Reports / Additional Reports. The Additional Reports dialog appears. The Reports list shows a list of the reports currently available.

2.	Click New to create a new report format. The Define Report Format dialog appears.

3.	In the Name field, enter a name for the report.

4.	In the Report on field, select Note records.

5.	In the Format body field, do one of the following:

  Enter [Note].

  Use the shortcut menu and select Note.

The default HTML viewer opens and displays the report. You can print or save the report.


Reporting note records (collected in the field) with point information

Note records are not directly related to points in Trimble Geomatics Office. Therefore, you cannot directly export note records and point information (for example N, E, notes) using the process outlined above. However, you can export notes through the feature code field.

To do this:

1.	Using the DC Editor utility, in the .dc file, find the GPS Vector Records (GPS VEC) that are followed by a note.

2.	In these GPS Vector Record fields, go to the CODE field and type a dash after the current code, followed by the Note information. For example, TREE - Pine.

When the record is imported the note record is added to the end of the feature code field. The note is then associated with a point and you can report:

  Point, Northing, Easting, Feature Code

NOTE: Sometimes the GPS Vector Record field is followed by a Timestamp and then the note record. In this case the Timestamp is associated with the feature code instead of the point. You will need to delete the timestamp record.


To create a custom point report

 Overview and More Information

To report point records from the Trimble Geomatics Office database, create a custom database report. Custom reports work on the primary record types or Queries defined in the database.


Creating a custom database report

1.	Select Reports / Additional Reports. The Additional Reports dialog appears. The Reports list shows a list of the reports currently available.

2.	Click New to create a new report format. The Define Report Format dialog appears.

3.	In the Name field, enter a name for the report. By default, the item Point records appears in the Report on field.

4.	Click Fill format automatically and Trimble Geomatics Office completes the Format header and Format body fields. You can edit these formats.

TIP: Right-click in the Format header and Format body fields, select Fields, and select field codes available from the list.

6.	Click OK.

The default HTML viewer opens and displays the report. You can print or save the report.


To change the zone in the project's projection

 Overview and More Information

NOTE: The zone must be in the coordinate system database.

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Coordinate System tab.

3.	In the Coordinate Systems Setting group, click Change. The Select Coordinate System dialog appears.

4.	Select the New System option and then click Next. The Select Coordinate System Type dialog appears.

5.	Select the Coordinate System and Zone option and then click Next.

6.	In the Coordinate System Zone group, highlight the coordinate system that contains the zone you require.

7.	In the Zone group, select the required zone and then click Next. The Select Geoid Model dialog appears.

8.	Do one of the following:

  Select the geoid model that you require for the project.

  Click No Geoid Model.

9.	Click Finish.

The coordinate system is applied to the database. Any existing points in the database are converted to the new coordinate system.

If you have point positions or enter coordinates with null elevations in your project and a project elevation is not defined, the coordinate system selection fails. This is because Trimble Geomatics Office cannot convert existing points from one system to the other without an approximate elevation.


To export a Background Map file to Trimble Survey Controller

 Overview and More Information

1.	Do one of the following:

  Select File / Export.

  Click the Export tool.

The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Feature and Attribute Library to Survey Controller (*.fcl) option. The Select Feature and Attribute Library dialog appears.

3.	Click Browse to locate the .fcl file that you want to export.

4.	Select the Export Attributes check box to export attribute definitions contained in the feature and attribute library. This option makes the attributes available in Trimble Survey Controller. If the check box is cleared, any attributes defined in the .fcl file are not exported.

NOTE: Control codes are also exported.

5.	Click OK. The Data Transfer Save As dialogappears.

6.	Check that your device (running Trimble Survey Controller) is connected to your computer.

7.	Select a Survey Controller device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears.

When the connection is made, the Save dialog appears.

8.	Do one of the following:

  Select the Main Memory (C:) option to store the library in the main memory of Trimble Survey Controller.

  Select the PC card (A:) option if you have a PC card inserted and would like to store the library on the PC card.

NOTE: If your device does not have a PC card, this dialog is not available.

9.	Click Open. The location you selected is read. All feature and attribute library files in the directory are displayed. The internal name of the feature and attribute library appears in the File Name field.

10.	Edit the File Name field to change the name of the file in Trimble Survey Controller if required. The name of the original file on your computer is not changed.

11.	Click Save. The Uploading dialog appears. The progress bar displays the progress of the transfer.

When the transfer is complete, the Uploading dialog disappears and the connection to the device is broken.

The library has been transferred.


To export to a GIS format

 Overview and More Information

1.	Do one of the following:

  Select File / Export.

  Click the Export tool on the Standard toolbar.

The Export dialogappears.

2.	In the GIS tab, select the format that you require.

3.	To change the set up options for the export formats, click Options. This lets you configure options appropriate for the GIS format to which you are exporting.

4.	Click OK. The File Name dialog appears.

5.	Specify a name for the new file and click Save to create the new file (or files).


To create a Combined Datum Grid (.cdg) file to transfer to Trimble Survey Controller

 Overview and More Information

NOTE: To create a new combined datum grid you can only use the datum grid file currently being used in the project. However, you can export any combined datum grid. You can only transfer a combined datum grid file to Trimble Survey Controller version 7.00 or later.

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Datum grid to Survey Controller (*.cdg) option and click OK. The Export a Datum Grid dialog appears.

3.	Select the Create a Combined Datum Grid file for export to the Trimble Survey Controller option. The Create Combined Datum Grid dialog appears.

The yellow box on the globe defines the area covered by the latitude and longitude grid files. These are specified on the right side of the Create Combined Datum Grid dialog.

4.	To decrease the size of the file, use the Select tool at the left side of the Create Combined Datum Grid dialog. Drag the black selection box over the area inside the yellow box for which you want the combined datum grid created.

The file size shows the size and the Latitude and Longitude limits show the extent of the combined datum grid file that will be created.

5.	The Survey Controller name field displays the name of the subgridded combined datum grid used in the Trimble Survey Controller job. Add a suffix or prefix to the name if the Trimble Survey Controller already uses a datum grid of the same name. The name must contain the name of the original datum grid.

NOTE: During import of the Survey Controller (*.dc) file, Trimble Geomatics Office uses the Survey Controller name to check if the name of the .cdg file used in the field matches the datum grid defined for the Trimble Geomatics Office project. If the name does not incorporate the original datum grid name, the datum grid will not be recognized.

6.	Click OK.

The File Name dialog appears. The default file name is the first six characters of the datum grid name. This is not the name used in the Trimble Survey Controller − it is the name of the .cdg file to be stored in the Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData directory.

7.	To specify an alternative name for the file, use the keyboard to edit the File Name field and click Save. The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

8.	Select a Survey Controller device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears. When the connection is made, the Save dialog appears.

9.	Do one of the following:

  Select the Main Memory (C:) option to store the file in the main memory of Trimble Survey Controller.

  Select the PC card (A:) option if you have a PC card inserted and would like to store the file on the PC card.

NOTE: If your Trimble device does not have a PC card, this dialog is not available.

10.	Click Open.

The directory you selected is read. All combined datum grid files in the directory are displayed. The File name field is unavailable. It displays the name of the combined datum grid that appears in Trimble Survey Controller.

11.	Click Save. The Uploading dialog appears and the progress bar displays the progress of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, the Uploading dialog disappears and the connection to the device is broken.

You can now use the file in Trimble Survey Controller.


To subgrid and transfer a Geoid Grid (.ggf) file to Trimble Survey Controller

 Overview and More Information

NOTE: You can only transfer a Geoid Grid file to Trimble Survey Controller version 6.00 or later.

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Geoid files to Survey Controller (*.ggf) option and click OK. The Export a Geoid Model dialog appears.

3.	To create a new Geoid Grid file, select the Create a subgrid of a Geoid model for export to the Survey Controller option and click OK. The Create Geoid Grid File dialog appears.

NOTE: Choose the Export existing Geoid Grid file to the Survey Controller option to export an existing file of this type.

The yellow box on the globe defines the area covered by the geoid model. The geoid model and the Geoid Grid file are specified on the right side of the Create Geoid Grid File dialog. If the geoid model covers the world a yellow box is not visible.

4,	To decrease the size of the file, use the Select tool at the left side of the Create Geoid Grid File dialog. Drag the black selection box over the area inside the yellow box for which you want the geoid grid file created.

The file size shows the size, and the Latitude and Longitude limits show the extents of the geoid grid file that will be created.

5.	The Name field shows the name of the subgridded geoid model used in the Trimble Survey Controller job. If Survey Controller already uses a geoid model of the same name, add a prefix or suffix to the name. It must contain the name if the original geoid model.

NOTE: During import of the Survey Controller (*.dc) file, Trimble Geomatics Office uses the name field to check if the name of the .ggf file used in the field matches the geoid model defined for the Trimble Geomatics Office project. Make sure that the filename contains the original geoid model name, or the geoid model will not be recognized.

6.	Click OK.

The Save As dialog appears. The default file name is the first six characters of the geoid model name. This is not the name used in Trimble Survey Controller. It is the name of the geoid grid file that will be stored in the Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData directory.

7.	To specify an alternative name for the file, use the keyboard to edit the File Name field and click Save. The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

8.	Select a Survey Controller device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears. When the connection is made, the Save dialog appears.

9.	Do one of the following:

  Select the Main Memory (C:) option to store the file in the main memory of Trimble Survey Controller.

  Select the PC card (A:) option if you have a PC card inserted and would like to store the file on the PC card.

NOTE: If your Trimble device does not have a PC card, this dialog is not available.

10.	Click Open.

The directory you selected is read. All geoid grid files in the directory are displayed. The File name field displays the name of the geoid grid that appears in the Survey Controller. This name is used to match up with the geoid grid name when you transfer a .dc file using this file to Trimble Geomatics Office.

11.	Click Save. The Sending dialog appears. The progress bar displays the progress of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, the Sending dialog disappears and the connection to the device is broken.

You can now use the file in Trimble Survey Controller.

NOTE: You can also use the Grid Factory utility to sub-grid geoid model files. Grid Factory is part of the Trimble Geomatics Office custom option at installation of the software.

NOTE: If you are transferring data to or from Trimble Survey Controller version 7.60, use the version 7.50 .dc file format.


To subgrid and transfer a Geoid Grid (.ggf) file to the TDS Survey Pro CE Software

 Overview and More Information

NOTE: You can only transfer a Geoid Grid file to the TDS Survey Pro CE software version 4 or later.

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Geoid files to TDS Survey Pro CE (*.ggf) option and click OK. The Export a Geoid Model dialog appears.

3.	To create a new Geoid Grid file, select the Create a subgrid of a Geoid model for export option and click OK. The Create Geoid Grid File dialog appears.

NOTE: Choose the Export existing Geoid Grid file option to export an existing file of this type.

The yellow box on the globe defines the area covered by the geoid model. The geoid model and the Geoid Grid file are specified on the right side of the Create Geoid Grid File dialog. If the geoid model covers the world a yellow box is not visible.

4,	To decrease the size of the file, use the Select tool at the left side of the Create Geoid Grid File dialog. Drag the black selection box over the area inside the yellow box for which you want the geoid grid file created.

The file size shows the size, and the Latitude and Longitude limits show the extents of, the geoid grid file that will be created.

The Name field shows the name of the subgridded geoid model used.

NOTE: During file import, Trimble Geomatics Office uses the Name field to check if the name of the .ggf file used in the field matches the geoid model defined for the Trimble Geomatics Office project. Make sure that the filename contains the original geoid model name, or the the geoid model will not be recognized.

6.	Click OK.

The Save As dialog appears. The default file name is the first six characters of the geoid model name. It is the name of the geoid grid file that will be stored in the Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData directory.

7.	To specify an alternative name for the file, use the keyboard to edit the File Name field and click Save. The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

8.	Select the TDS Survey Pro CE device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears. When the connection is made, the Save dialog appears.

9.	Transfer the file to the TDS Survey Pro CE device.

You can now use the file in the TDS Survey Pro CE software.

NOTE: You can also use the Grid Factory utility to sub-grid geoid model files. Grid Factory is part of the Trimble Geomatics Office custom option at installation of the software.


To use data from the TRIMMAP Software

You can import data from jobs created with the TRIMMAP software to Trimble Geomatics Office.

1.	From the TRIMMAP software, open the job that you want to process with Trimble Geomatics Office.

2.	Select Tools / Import/Export / Graphical Interfaces. The Graphical Interfaces menu appears.

3.	Select Graphical Interfaces / Create file.

4.	Enter a job name and an Output filename.

NOTE: In the Output filename field, make sure that you specify the name and location of the file that will be created and provide the .tgf extension. For example C:\Temp\Topo_pts.tgf

5.	In Trimble Geomatics Office, select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

6.	In the CAD / ASCII tab, select TRIMMAP graphics file option and click OK. The Select file(s) dialog appears.

7.	Navigate to the folder that contains the .tgf file and click Open.

The file is imported into Trimble Geomatics Office.


To create a new query

WARNING: Trimble Navigation Limited supports use or modification of this database only by use of Trimble’s proprietary Trimble Geomatics Office software. Trimble does not support  or authorize use or modification, or warrant the performance, of this database by means of other software applications. Trimble may at any time modify the format of this database making it incompatible with other software applications.

 Overview and More Information

NOTE: To define custom queries, you need the Microsoft Access 2000 (or later) software.

This example creates a query that selects all the database points with elevation values of zero.

1.	In Microsoft Access, open Trimble Geomatics Office template (or project) database into which the query is to be added. This is found in the template or project’s folder (.mdb).

2.	Select the Queries tab on the main graphics window then click New to create a new query.

TIP: Choose the Design View option rather than the Query wizards option.

3.	In the Show Table dialog, select the Point table since you want to select point entities and they are all stored in this table.

4.	Click Add before closing the dialog.

A query dialog appears.

5.	Set the first column in the query definition to the entire Points table. This can be done either by dragging and dropping the * identifier from the Point table in the top section of the query dialog, or by selecting Point.* from the Field box.

NOTE: The Show check box is selected by default. Unless multiple entities are to be selected by the query, it is generally preferable to return the entire table. In this way, the query can be used for other purposes (such as reporting).

6.	Set the Field setting in the second column to Elevation (the elevation field identifier).

Enter =0 in the Criteria field in this column. This sets up the check for zero elevation values.

7.	To test the functionality of this query, check the Datasheet view. Any points in the database with zero heights are listed in the table.

8.	To save the new query, close it and name it with a prefix of "Select_". For example, name it "Select_Points with zero elevations".

NOTE: To add the query to the Properties window selection tools, use the prefix "SortSS_" for the Sort tool, "SvyFilterSS_" for the Filter tool (for survey data), and "PlanFilterSS_" for the Filter tool (for CAD data). To use the query for a custom report, use the prefix "Report_".

9.	Before the new query becomes available in Select / By Query (and elsewhere within Trimble Geomatics Office) the database schema file must be updated. Use Microsoft Windows Explorer to delete the existing database schema file (.dbs) for the project (or the template project).

NOTE: When a project without a database schema file is opened, Trimble Geomatics Office automatically creates a new schema file based on the configuration of the database file. This new schema file contains the reference to the newly added query. The new query appears in Select / By Query. You can use it in custom ASCII export and report definitions.

10.	Open Trimble Geomatics Office, and open the template or project to which you have added the query.

You can now use the new query by choosing Select / By Query. Your new query appears in the list.


To import a Survey Controller (*.dc) file from Trimble Survey Controller

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Survey devices option and click OK. The Data Transfer Open dialog appears.

3.	Select a Survey Controller device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears.

When the connection is made, the Look in field of the Open dialog changes to the Survey Controller device.

4.	Do one of the following:

  Select the Main Memory (C:) option if the file you are importing is in the main memory of Trimble Survey Controller.

  Select the PC card (A:) option if you have a PC card inserted and would like to import the file that is on the PC card.

NOTE: If your Trimble device does not have a PC card, this dialog is not available.

5.	Click Open. The directory you selected is read. All Trimble Survey Controller jobs in the directory are displayed.

6.	In the File Format field, select the Data Collector file version you are using.

7.	Select the file(s) that you want to import and click Open. The Downloading dialog appears and the progress bar shows the progress of the file transfer. When the transfer is complete, the Downloading dialog disappears and the connection to the device is broken.

The job file has been converted to a .dc file and is imported to the project database. The .dc file is located in the project’s Data Files\Trimble Files folder.

NOTE: When you transfer a .dc file to Trimble Geomatics Office from a device running Trimble Survey Controller, it is automatically imported to the project.

NOTE: If you are transferring data to or from Trimble Survey Controller version 7.60, use the version 7.50 .dc file format.


To import a Trimble GPS Data (.dat) File on your computer

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the GPS data (*.dat) file option and click OK. The Open dialog appears.

3.	Locate the .dat file that you want to import and click Open. The DAT Checkin dialog appears.

4.	Make any necessary changes.

In particular, check that the antenna height value(s) are correct. Changing any values does not change the actual values in the .dat file. It only changes the values used to import the file in Trimble Geomatics Office. This maintains the .dat file in its original state.

5.	Click OK.

The imported file is located in the project’s Data Files\Trimble Files folder.

TIP: You can drag and drop the file.


To import a Trimble GPS Data (.dat) File from a Trimble GPS Receiver

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Survey devices option and click OK. The Data Transfer Open dialog appears.

3.	Select a GPS Receiver device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears.

When the connection is made, the Look in field of the Open dialog changes to the GPS receiver device.

4.	Select the file(s) that you want to import and click Open. The Downloading dialog appears and the progress bar shows the progress of the file transfer.

When the transfer is complete, the Downloading dialog disappears and the connection to the GPS receiver is broken.

The DAT Checkin dialog appears.

5.	Make any necessary changes.

In particular, check the antenna height value(s) are correct. Changing any values does not change the actual values in the .dat file, it only changes the values used to import the file in Trimble Geomatics Office. This maintains the .dat file in its original state.

6.	Click OK.

The imported file is located in the project’s Data Files\Trimble Files folder.


To import a RINEX GPS Data File

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the RINEX files option and click OK. The Open dialog appears.

Select the observation file(s) that you want to import. Change the Files of type option if required. Click Open.

If there is a corresponding .nav file with the same name, this is automatically linked with the observation file.

If the corresponding .nav file does not have the same name, the Navigation File Matching dialog appears. Observation files are listed under observation files. Select the appropriate .nav file and click OK.

NOTE: Each observation file must have a corresponding .nav file. If the correct .nav file is not selected, a message will appear on import and baselines cannot be processed.

4.	The file(s) are converted to Trimble GPS data file format. The DAT Checkin dialog appears.

5.	Make any necessary changes.

In particular, check the antenna height value(s) and receiver type are correct. Changing any values does not change the actual values in the GPS data file, it only changes the values used to import the file in Trimble Geomatics Office. This maintains the GPS data file in its original state.

TIP: Make sure that on dat check-in the receiver and antenna types are not unknown.

6.	Click OK.

The imported file is located in the project’s Data Files\Trimble Files folder.


To create a Custom Import / Export format

 Overview and More Information

This example defines a custom export format. The format is a comma-delimited text file containing the point name (in uppercase), northing (with units), easting (with units), and elevation (with units). Field codes are used to select the required fields. Custom import formats are defined in a similar way.

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Custom tab, click New. The Define ASCII Export Format dialog appears.

3.	In the Name field, enter a name.

4.	Right-click in the Format Body field and select Fields / Name from the shortcut menu.

[Name] appears in the Format Body box.

5.	Right-click and select Fields / Advanced / Modifiers / Uppercase from the shortcut menu.

[Name:Uppercase] appears in the format body box. This means that all point names will be exported in upper case.

6.	Enter a comma followed by a space.

7.	Right-click and select Fields / Northing from the shortcut menu.

[Northing] appears beside the comma.

8.	Right-click and select Fields / Advanced / Modifiers / Units from the shortcut menu.

[Northing] changes to [Northing:units]. This means the current coordinate unit is included in the file.

9.	Enter a comma followed by a space.

10.	Right-click and select Fields / Easting from the shortcut menu.

[Easting] appears beside the comma.

11.	Right-click and select Fields / Advanced / Modifiers / Units from the shortcut menu.

[Easting] changes to [Easting:units]. This means the current coordinate unit is included in the file.

12.	Enter a comma followed by a space.

13.	Right-click and select Fields / Elevation from the shortcut menu.

[Elevation] appears beside the comma.

14.	Right-click and select Fields / Advanced / Modifiers / Units from the shortcut menu.

[Elevation] changes to [Elevation:units]. This means the current coordinate unit is included in the file.

15.	Click OK to save the export format. The Export dialog appears. The format you created appears in the list in the Custom tab.

16.	To export data in this format, select the format and click OK. The Save As dialog appears.

17.	In the File name field, enter a name for the export file and click Save to create the file.


To export a Survey Controller (*.dc) file to Trimble Survey Controller

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Survey devices option.

3.	Click Options to specify the job settings for the file.

4.	In the dialog that appears, click OK to accept any changes and return to the Export dialog.

5.	Click OK. The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

6.	Select a Trimble Survey Controller device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears.

7.	When a connection is made, the Save dialog appears.

8.	Do one of the following:

  Select the Main Memory (C:) option to store the file in the main memory of Trimble Survey Controller.

  Select the PC card (A:) option if you have a PC card inserted and would like to store the file on the PC card.

NOTE: If your Trimble device does not have a PC card, this dialog is not available.

9.	Click Open.

The folder you selected is read. All Survey Controller files in the folder are displayed. The Trimble Geomatics Office project name appears in the File Name field. This is the name of the Trimble Survey Controller job that will be exported to Trimble Survey Controller. You can edit this name if necessary.

10.	Click Save. The Uploading dialog appears. The progress bar displays the progress of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, the Uploading dialog disappears and the connection to the device is broken.

You can now use the file in Trimble Survey Controller.

NOTE: If you are transferring data to or from Trimble Survey Controller version 7.60, use the version 7.50 .dc file format.


To export AutoCAD (*.dxf) files

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the CAD / ASCII tab, select the AutoCAD (*.dxf) option.

3.	Click Options to configure the .dxf version and type that you want to export to.

4.	Click OK. The Save As dialog appears.

5.	Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.

6.	Enter the name for the file and click Save.

The file is created.

By default, Trimble Geomatics Office exports the point name as an attribute of the point. To export other information about the point, edit the DXF/DWG attribute block definitions in the Options.ini file.

NOTE: You can use these steps to export a drawing (*.dwg) file. At step 4, click Options to configure the .dwg format and version.


To change the units for a project

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	In the Units and Format tab, select the field for which you want to change the units and format.

3.	Select the required option from the list and click OK to apply the changes.


To set up a project for attributes

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	In the Features tab, select the Use attributes check box. The Library field becomes available.

3.	Click Browse to locate the Feature and Attribute Library file (*.fcl) or Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file that you require.

4.	Click OK. The file you selected is used to create database tables for each feature code with attributes. You can now import the .dc files with attributes.


To select a saved site as a projects coordinate system

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Coordinate System tab.

3.	In the Coordinate Systems Settings group, click Change. The Select Coordinate System dialog appears.

4.	Select New System and click Next. The Select Coordinate System Type dialog appears.

5.	Select Calibrated Site and click Next. The Select Calibrated Site dialog appears.

6.	Select the site that you require and click Finish.

The coordinate system is applied to the database. Any existing points in the database are converted to the new coordinate system. For information on the conversion process, see the topic Coordinate Systems − Overview.

If you have point positions or enter coordinates with null elevations in your project and a default elevation is not defined, the coordinate system selection will fail because Trimble Geomatics Office cannot convert existing points from one system to the other.


To export attributes

 Overview and More Information

You can export a file containing:

  all points with a specific feature

  all attributes

To export separate files for each feature:

1.	Select points that contain the feature of interest.

2.	Configure a custom export format.


Selecting the points that contain the feature of interest

To do this:

1.	From the Plan view, choose Select / By Point Feature. For example, if you want to report on all tree attributes, select "tree" in the Select by Point feature dialog.

2.	Click OK. All points with the feature code you specified are now selected.


Configuring the custom report format

To do this:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Custom tab, click New. The Define ASCII Export Format dialog appears.

3.	In the Name field, enter a name for the export format.

4.	In the Description field, enter a description of the export format. A description is not mandatory for the format.

5.	Make sure that Point Information is selected in the Export from field. This is because you are reporting on points.

6.	Click Fill Format Automatically to fill in all of the fields from the Points table into the format header and format body.

7.	In the Insert Format dialog that appears, select the appropriate delimiters required for the format.

8.	Delete any headings and fields that you do not want to include in the format.

9.	In the Format Header list, add any attribute headings that you want to include in the format.

10.	The attribute records are not stored in the Points table. Add the fields to be included in the format from the appropriate feature table. To access these fields, right-click in the Format body list and select from the shortcut menu.

11.	Select Fields / Advanced / Attributes. All feature codes with attributes (in the feature and attribute library used to set up the project for attributes) appear.

12.	Choose the same feature code that you have selected (for example "tree"). The attributes appear in a further submenu.

13.	Click the attribute that you want to report on. The attribute you selected appears in the Format body box.

NOTE: If you want to report on all of the attributes for a particular feature, from the shortcut menu, select the asterisk (*) option. All of the attributes are added to the format body.

14.	Repeat the above steps for each attribute that you want to export to a file.

15.	Complete the export format and click OK. The format is added to the Custom list.

16.	To export a file in this format, highlight the format and click OK.


To export a single file with all attributes

To do this:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the GIS tab, select the Name, Latitude, Longitude, Height, All Attributes (Local) option or the Name, North, East, Height, All Attributes option.

3.	Click OK.

4.	The Save dialog appears. Enter a filename and location and click OK.

A file containing attributes is created.


To import a Survey Controller (*.dc) file with attributes

 Overview and More Information

NOTE: To use attributes in Trimble Geomatics Office, you must first set up a project for attributes.

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Survey Controller file (*.dc) option and click OK.

Trimble Geomatics Office checks that the Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) or Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file specified in the current Trimble Geomatics Office project is the same as the one in the .dc file.

If they are different you have the following options:

  Cancel the import.

  Import all points, and attribute information that is recognized by the current Trimble Geomatics Office project. You are warned that you may lose data. The Import report describes what attribute information was not imported.

  Import points only (no attribute information is imported).

If the feature and attribute library is not defined in the current Trimble Geomatics Office project, you can import the .dc file without attribute information or cancel the import.

NOTE: If you are transferring data to or from Trimble Survey Controller version 7.60 , use the version 7.50 .dc file format.


To add a layer

 Overview and More Information

1.	From the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Layers.

  Click the Edit Layers tool.

The Layers dialog appears.

2.	Click New. A new row appears in the Layers dialog.

3.	In the Name field enter a unique name for the new layer.

4.	From the list, select a default point style. This point style is used for all points that have <By Layer> selected for their Point Style field.

5.	From the list select a default line style. This line style is used for all lines, arcs, and curves that have <By Layer> selected for their Line Style field.

6.	From the list select a text style. This text style is used for all text that has <By Layer> selected for the Text Style field.

7.	If you want to display all entities in the layer, select the Visible check box.

8.	Clear the Locked check box to enable the entities in the layer to be selected.

9.	Click OK.


To merge points with duplicate names

 Overview and More Information

You can merge duplicate points in Trimble Geomatics Office if you know that they are the same physical point, and if you do not need them to be separate points.

CAUTION: Two points with the same name but significantly different data may be the result of an error. Merging them may produce unexpected results.

1.	Make sure the points are the same physical point. To do this, choose Select / Duplicate Points / By Name and Distance.

2.	Enter a separation distance and click OK.

3.	Select Edit / Merge Duplicate Points.

Trimble Geomatics Office merges all observations to the points and keyed-in positions for the points. The status bar shows a summary of the merge operation.


To specify how duplicate points are managed on import

 Overview and More Information

By default, Trimble Geomatics Office merges points with the same name on import, so duplicate points are not created. You can specify within what horizontal and/or vertical tolerance the software merges points, or that the software does not resolve duplicate points on import at all, in the Duplicate Point Options dialog.

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	Click Options. The Duplicate Point Options dialog appears.

Do one of the following:

  Make sure the Always merge duplicate points option is selected.

  Select the Merge duplicate points within tolerance option and enter the appropriate tolerances.

  To specify that the software does not resolve duplicate points on import, select the Merge duplicate points option and enter a horizontal tolerance value of 0.02 (that is, the horizontal survey quality tolerance) and a vertical tolerance of 0.050 (that is, the vertical survey quality tolerance).

NOTE: If you do not specify a tolerance (that is, in the tolerances group, the horizontal and vertical check boxes are not selected) the duplicate points will be merged.

NOTE: If you set the tolerance to 0.000, the duplicate point coordinates must be exactly the same for the points to be merged.

These settings apply to all import options; whether you import files using the project bar, or drag and drop files into a Trimble Geomatics Office project, the software uses the last duplicate points setting that you specified.


To rename duplicate points

 Overview and More Information

Use this procedure to rename duplicate points where, for example, two field crews have used the same names for different points in separate Survey Controller (*.dc) files:

1.	Import the files using the Merge Duplicate Points within tolerance option selected in the Duplicate Point Options dialog. Set the horizontal tolerance to 0.02 and the vertical tolerance to 0.050.

NOTE: If you do not realize that you have duplicate points until after you have imported the data, undo the import operation, set the Merge Duplicate Points within tolerance option to 0.02 for the horizontal tolerance (that is, the horizontal survey quality tolerance) and 0.05 for the vertical tolerance (that is, the vertical survey quality tolerance) in the Duplicate Point Options dialog, and reimport the data.

2.	Select the Survey Controller (*.dc) file selection set that added the duplicate points to the database. Alternatively, select Select / Duplicate Points / By name.

3.	Select Edit / Rename. The Rename dialog appears.

4.	Enter the new name of the first point in the selection.

Trimble Geomatics Office renames all points in the selection set. The points are renamed according to the starting value allocated to the set.

For example, assume that you have five points selected. If you replace the name of the first point with the name "2000", the remaining four points are renamed 2001, 2002, 2003, and 2004.


To label points using custom labels

 Overview and More Information

This example labels points by using the custom label of a point's description.

1.	Use Microsoft Windows Explorer to locate the Options.ini file for the project template or project to which you want to add the custom label option.

2.	Use a text editor to open the Options.ini file.

3.	Find the heading:

[Labels]

4.	Directly after the last of the label options, use the keyboard to enter the following text:

|X|[Y]

Where ‘X’ defines the name of the label, and ‘Y’ defines the field code with which you want to label the point.

5.	Open the project template or project in Trimble Geomatics Office.

6.	Select View / Point Labels. The Label points with dialog appears with the new option added to the list.

7.	Select the options that you require and click OK.


To annotate entities

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select the points, lines, or arcs that you want to annotate. To do this, use one of the following:

  The mouse

  The Select menu

2.	Select Insert / Annotations. The Annotate dialog appears.

3.	From the list, select the template that you require.

4.	To edit annotation templates, click Templates.

  To keep existing annotations, select the Retain existing annotations check box.

  To remove existing annotations before applying the new annotations, clear the Retain existing annotations check box.

5.	If you have selected a group of entities to annotate, check that the Annotate group is set to Selection.

If you want to annotate the whole database, select the Whole database option.

If there are no entities selected, the Annotate group is unavailable and the whole database is annotated.

6.	Click OK to apply the annotations.

The annotations are added to the database and appear in the graphics window.


To create a selection set

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select the entities (points, lines, observations, curves, arcs, text, annotations) that you want included in the selection set. To do this, use one of the following:

  The mouse

  The Select menu

2.	Choose Select / Selection Sets / Save. The Save dialog appears.

3.	Enter a name for the selection set and click OK.

The selection set now appears in the list of saved selection sets when you choose Select / Selection Sets / Retrieve. It also appears in the recently-used selection sets list when you choose Select / Selection Sets.

TIP: Use the View Filters dialog to view selection sets.


To perform a GPS site calibration

 Overview and More Information

You may need to perform a GPS site calibration in Trimble Geomatics Office for any of the following reasons:

  to transfer a calibration to Trimble Survey Controller

  you did not calibrate in the field

  to create a report for quality control records

  to add extra points to a calibration performed in Trimble Survey Controller


Preparing to perform a GPS site calibration

Before you perform a GPS site calibration, you need to make sure that you have coordinates that are derived from terrestrial (grid) or GPS data (WGS-84) for each calibration point.

If you have performed a calibration in Trimble Survey Controller, and the grid points and the GPS points had the same name, these points may have been merged on import. The merged points will be separated automatically if you choose to perform a GPS site calibration in Trimble Geomatics Office. When this occurs, a message informs you that the same name has been used for GPS and grid points in the software.

Do one of the following:

  Click Yes to create a GPS point and a separate grid point with the same name in the database.

  Click Cancel if you do not want to perform a GPS site calibration or if you want to explode points manually. If you explode points manually, you will be given the option to rename the GPS points.


Performing the GPS Site Calibration

1.	Select Survey / GPS site calibration. The GPS Site Calibration dialog appears.

2.	In the Calibration components group, select the calibration parameters that you want to calculate.

3.	Click Point List. The Point List dialog appears.

4.	Use the Point List dialog to select your point pair (GPS point and grid point) for the calibration. It can be the same point or different point with the same name, as long as separate GPS and grid values can be found.

5.	With the first GPS point that you require in the calibration, do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in to select the point.

  Enter the name of the point using the keyboard.

A box appears on the GPS point in the graphics window.

NOTE: If you have a corresponding grid point with the same name, the Point list is automatically filled in.

6.	To enter the grid point associated with the GPS point that you selected, do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in to select the point.

  Enter the name of the point using the keyboard.

A cross appears on the grid point in the graphics window and a new entry in the Point List dialog is added.

The type field updates to indicate if the point selected has a horizontal or vertical coordinate component (or both). If there are no common coordinate components, the Type is shown as invalid and the coordinates are not used.

7.	Repeat the two steps above to select all the point pairs that you require in the calibration.

8.	When you have selected all point pairs, click Close to return to the GPS Site Calibration dialog.

NOTE: The calibration statistics appear at the bottom of the Points dialog and are computed after entering a valid point pair. Use these statistics to identify incorrect point pairs.

9.	Click Compute to calculate the calibration parameters. The results of the calibration appear in the Calibration summary group.

10.	If the results are outside the expected ranges, use the GPS Site Calibration report to check for any large residuals between point pairs. Click Report to generate the GPS Site Calibration report. The report is displayed in the default HTML viewer.

11.	Check the residuals in the Residual Differences between GPS and Known Coordinates section of the report. If necessary, remove any suspect point pairs and re-apply the calibration.

12.	Click OK to apply the calibration to the project.

The coordinate system is updated with the calibration parameters.


To process feature codes

 Overview and More Information

1.	Choose Select / Selection Sets / Retrieve. The Retrieve dialog appears.

2.	Select the selection set that has the same name as the file to process (the file that the feature codes were collected in). This selection set was automatically created when the file was imported, and has a record of the order in which points were collected in the field. By using this selection set, you ensure that feature codes are processed in the correct order.

3.	Select Tools / Process Feature Codes. The Process Feature Codes dialog appears.

4.	Select the library that you require to process feature codes and click OK.

Trimble Geomatics Office processes the feature codes. The processed feature codes appear in the graphics window.


To view an inverse

 Overview and More Information

To determine the inverse between two project points:

1.	Select Survey / Inverse. The Inverse dialog appears and the pointer becomes a Field fill-in pointer.

2.	Click the first point that you require for the inverse calculation. The point name appears in the From field in the Inverse dialog.

3.	Click the second point that you require for the inverse calculation. When the mouse is positioned over a point, a dotted line appears.

The point name appears in the To field in the Inverse dialog and the inverse values are automatically displayed in the Inverse group.

NOTE: If you enter the points in the fields using the keyboard, click Calculate to compute the inverse.

4.	Click Detailed to view additional information on this inverse computation. The Details group is appended to the bottom of the dialog and displays the additional information on the inverse.

5.	Click Send to Report to generate a report on the inverse. A brief or detailed report will be created depending on the display option (brief or detailed) used.

6.	Click Show Report to view the report in the HTML viewer.

7.	To view another inverse, click in the point fields and reselect the points.


To measure areas

Use the Measure tool to view the azimuth and distance between the last two locations selected and the area created by the locations selected in the current measure operation.

1.	Select Survey / Measure. The Measure dialog appears.

2.	Click the first location (which does not have to be a point) in the graphics window.

3.	Continue to click locations in the graphics window. Each time you select a location, the coordinates are used to calculate the Measure dialog fields. A line appears linking the locations you have selected.

The fields in the Measure dialog are updated each time you click a new location. The values are not stored in the database.

4.	Click Reset to clear the values.


To perform a coordinate transformation

 Overview and More Information

Use a coordinate transformation to translate and/or rotate selected points. This example shows you how to transform all points in the database by entering known coordinates for an existing point.

1.	Select the points that you want to transform or rotate.

2.	Select Survey / Coordinate Transformation. The Coordinate Transformation dialog appears.

3.	Click Point List. The Coordinate Transformation − Point List dialog appears.

4.	Do one of the following:

  In the Point field, enter the existing point name.

  Use field fill-in to select the point.

The Point field, Current Northing field, and Current Easting field are filled, and the Known Northing field is selected.

5.	In the Known Northing and Known Easting fields, do one of the following:

  Enter the known northing and easting for the point.

  Use field fill-in to select the known northing and easting of the point.

A line appears in the graphics window to show the difference between the current and known coordinates.

The Statistics group shows the scale factor and the maximum horizontal residual. Use these to identify bad point pairs.

6.	Click OK. A dialog appears displaying the residual errors.

7.	The Coordinate Transformation dialog returns and the Translation North and Translation East fields are filled with the values calculated from the current and known coordinates.

8.	Click OK to apply the coordinate transformation to the whole database.

NOTE: You can undo a coordinate transformation.


To perform an elevation adjustment

 Overview and More Information

Use an elevation adjustment to adjust the elevations for selected points. This example shows you how to adjust the elevations of all points in the database by entering a known elevation for an existing point.

1.	Select Survey / Elevation Adjustment. The Elevation Adjustment dialog appears.

2.	Click Point List. The Elevation Adjustment − Point List dialog appears.

3.	Do one of the following:

  In the Point field, enter the existing point name.

  Use field fill-in to select the point.

A box appears over the point selected.

The Point, Current Northing, Current Easting, and Current Elevation fields are filled.

4.	Do one of the following:

  In the Known Elevation field, enter the known elevation for the point.

  Use field fill-in to select the elevation of another point.

The Statistics group shows the scale factor and the maximum adjustment inclination and the maximum vertical residual. Use these to identify bad point pairs.

5.	Click OK to return to the Elevation Adjustment dialog.

The Origin North and Origin East fields are filled with the coordinates from the first point that was used. The Correction Constant field is filled with the calculated elevation adjustment. The Correction per unit north and Correction per unit east fields are only filled if more than one point is used to define the elevation adjustment.

6.	Click OK to apply the elevation adjustment to the whole database.

NOTE: You can undo an elevation adjustment.


To use field codes

 Overview and More Information

Use field codes to display values of:

  fields

  variables in annotations, reports, export formats, text

Field codes are also useful for defining reports and export formats. This example shows you how to use field codes to define an export format. The format defines a comma delimited text file containing the point name (in uppercase), northing (with units), easting (with units), and elevation (with units).

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Custom tab, click New. The Define ASCII Export Format dialog appears.

3.	In the Name field, enter a name.

4.	Right-click in the Format Body field and from the shortcut menu, select Fields / Name.

[Name] appears in the Format Body box.

5.	Right-click to access the shortcut menu and then select Fields / Advanced / Modifiers / Uppercase.

[Name:Uppercase] appears in the format body box. This means that all point names will exported in upper case for any letters included in the point name.

6.	Enter a comma followed by a space.

7.	Right-click to access the shortcut menu and then select Fields / Northing.

[Northing] appears beside the comma.

8.	Right-click to access the shortcut menu and then select Fields / Advanced / Modifiers / Units.

[Northing] changes to [Northing:units]. This means the current coordinate unit is included in the file.

9.	Enter a comma followed by a space.

10.	Right-click to access the shortcut menu and then select Fields / Easting.

[Easting] appears beside the comma.

11.	Right-click and select Fields / Advanced / Modifiers / Units from the shortcut menu.

[Easting] changes to [Easting:units]. This means the current coordinate unit is included in the file.

12.	Enter a comma followed by a space.

13.	Right-click and select Fields / Elevation from the shortcut menu.

[Elevation] appears beside the comma.

14.	Right-click and select Fields / Advanced / Modifiers / Units from the shortcut menu.

[Elevation] changes to [Elevation:units]. This means the current coordinate unit is included in the file.

15.	Click OK to save the export format. The Export dialog appears. The format you created appears in the list in the Custom tab.

16.	To export data in this format, select the format and click OK. The Save As dialog appears.

17. 	In the File name field, enter a name for the export file.

18.	Click Save to create the file.


To use field fill-in

 Overview and More Information

Use field fill-in to enter values for fields from existing entities in the database. When field fill-in is available, the Field fill-in pointer appears in the graphics window. This example uses field fill-in to select the coordinates when adding a text entity.

1.	Select Insert / Text. The Insert Text dialog appears.

2.	In the Text Expression field, enter the text.

3.	Select the Northing field.

4.	Position the pointer over the graphics window. The Field fill-in pointer appears.

5.	Click the location in the graphics window where you want the text to appear. The coordinates are filled in the Northing and Easting fields.

6.	Click OK to add the text to the database.

TIP: You can use field fill-in to enter the times of an observation (by clicking on the observation).


To graphically set the sheet setup (plotting/printing)

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select File / Sheet Setup. The Sheet Setup dialog appears.

2.	Click Best Fit.

3.	Click the Origin North or Origin East field. The Field fill-in pointer appears.

4.	Click in the graphics window at the location you want for the top left corner of the plot area.

5.	Set the rotation to best fit the project data in the plan form selected.

6.	In the graphics window, click and drag the plot box over the project data.

7.	Change the scale to a standard value. For example, if the best fit of the plot is at 1:435, change it to 1:500.

8.	Click OK to apply the Sheet Setup settings.


To select a geoid model for a project

 Overview and More Information

To select a geoid model for a project, use the Coordinate System wizard. This also applies even if you want to change the geoid model for the current coordinate system.

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Coordinate System tab.

3.	In the Coordinate System Settings group, click Change. The Select Coordinate System dialog appears.

4.	Select the New System option and click Next. The Select Coordinate System Type dialog appears.

5.	Select the appropriate coordinate system type. The Select Geoid Model dialog appears at the end of the coordinate system selection wizard. Select the geoid model that you require. The list of available geoid models is read from the coordinate system database. The default geoid model for the coordinate system is selected by default.

6.	Click Finish.

The geoid model you selected is applied to the project.

NOTE: You can select the default geoid model for a coordinate system using the Coordinate System Manager utility.


To cut or copy points with attributes between projects

 Overview and More Information

1.	From the source project, select the points that you want to copy to the destination project. Use the Select / By Point feature command (available in the Plan view) to select points with the feature you specify.

2.	To copy the points that you require in the new project, select Edit / Copy.

3.	In the destination project, select Edit / Paste to paste the points.

4.	If the attribute definitions are different in the two projects, a dialog appears.

5.	Click Yes to paste the data that is common to both feature and attribute libraries. Any attribute data that was not pasted is recorded in the Paste.rpt report. This report is stored in the reports folder of the project that you are pasting in.

NOTE: Only points can be cut and copied between projects. If observations were used to position points, then the derived coordinates are copied. If the points were derived from GPS coordinates and observations then the WGS-84 coordinate is copied. This copied WGS-84 coordinate can be used in GPS site calibrations in the new project.


To add attributes to a point

 Overview and More Information

To add attributes, you must set up the project for attributes.

1.	Select the point that you want to add attributes to. To do this, use one of the following:

  The mouse

  The Select menu

2.	Open the Properties window.

3.	In the Attributes tab, click the Page Menu icon [image]. The shortcut menu appears.

4.	Click Insert. The list of available feature codes with attributes appears.

5.	Select the feature code with attributes that you want to add. The attributes for the selected feature code appear.

6.	Enter values for each attribute. Trimble Geomatics Office checks each value you enter. This check ensures the value is valid according to the feature and attribute library you used to set up the project for attributes.

7.	Repeat the above steps for any other feature codes with attributes that you want to add to the point.


To view attributes

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select the point(s). To do this, use one of the following:

  The mouse

  The Select menu

2.	Open the Properties window.

3.	Select the Attributes tab.

You can only view one feature code with attributes at a time. To view a different feature code with attributes, use the drop-down list.

NOTE: The Attributes tab only appears if you have set up a feature and attribute library for the project from Project Properties dialog / Features tab.


To edit attributes

 Overview and More Information

1.	Click the attribute. If the attribute is a menu, an arrow appears on the right side of the field.

2.	Click the arrow to display the list of menu options for the attribute.

All other attribute types require entry from the keyboard.

NOTE: When you edit any attribute information, Trimble Geomatics Office checks the feature and attribute library definition to make sure that valid values have been entered.


To insert a line

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select the Plan view. Do one of the following:

  Select View / Plan.

  Click the Plan view tool.

  Press Alt+2.

2.	Do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Lines.

  Select the Insert Line tool.

The Insert Linework dialog appears with the Line tab selected.

3.	In the From Point field, do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in to select the first point that you require to define the line.

  Enter the point name for the first point that you require to define the line.

4.	In the To Point field, do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in to select the second point that you require to define the line.

  Enter the point name for the second point that you require to define the line.

5.	In the Layer field, do one of the following:

  Select the layer to which you want the line added.

  Enter a new layer name to create a new layer.

6.	In the Line Style field, select the line style that you require to display the line.

7.	To add the line, do one of the following:

  Click Insert.

  Press Enter.

The point that you selected in the To Point field appears in the From Point field. You can continue adding lines without having to re-enter the "from" point.

The line appears in the graphics window (provided the layer you selected for the line has its visible property turned on).

8.	Click Close to stop inserting lines.


To insert a curve

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select the Plan view. Do one of the following:

  Select View / Plan.

  Click the Plan view tool.

  Press Alt+2.

2.	Select Insert / Curves. The Insert Linework dialog appears with the Curve tab selected.

3.	In the From Point field, do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in and click the appropriate points.

  Use the keyboard to enter the point name.

4.	In the To Point field, do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in and click the appropriate points.

  Use the keyboard to enter the point name.

5.	In the Entry tangent and Exit tangent fields, leave the values as <Automatic> to automatically enter the tangent values based on the points used to define the curve. You can enter your own tangent values.

6.	In the Billow field, enter a value between 0 and 1. The Billow defines how much width there is in the curve. The higher the billow, the larger the curve width.

7.	In the Layer field, do one of the following:

  Select the layer to which you want the curve added.

  Enter a new layer name to create a new layer.

8.	In the Line Style field, select the line style that you require to display the curve.

9.	To add the curve, do one of the following:

  Click Insert.

  Press Enter.

The curve appears in the graphics window (provided the layer you selected for the curve has its visible property turned on). Each time you add a curve from a point that is used in another curve, Trimble Geomatics Office recalculates the existing curve to ensure a smooth curve is displayed.

10.	Click Close to stop inserting curves.


To insert an arc

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select the Plan view. Do one of the following:

  Select View / Plan.

  Click the Plan view tool.

  Select Alt+2.

2.	Select Insert / Arcs. The Insert Linework dialog appears with the Arc tab selected.

3.	In the From Point field, do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in and click the appropriate point.

  Use the keyboard to enter the point name.

4.	In the To Point field, do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in and click the appropriate point.

  Use the keyboard to enter the point name.

5.	In the Center Point field to use an existing point as the center of the arc, do one of the following:

  Enter an existing point name.

  Use field fill-in to select an existing point.

The coordinates for the point are copied to the Center Northing and Center Easting fields.

6.	In the Center Northing and Center Easting fields, click on a location in the graphics window to use coordinates as the center of the arc. The coordinates are copied to these fields.

If you enter both a center point and center coordinates, the center point is used.

7.	In the Small arc field, select the False option if you want to create a large arc. Otherwise, select True. There are always two possible arcs between two points, which together define a circle. This setting defines which arc you want to draw.

8.	In the Layer field, do one of the following:

  Select the layer to which you want the arc added.

  Enter a new layer name to create a new layer.

9.	In the Line Style field, select the line style that you require to display the arc.

10.	To add the curve, do one of the following:

  Click Insert.

  Press Enter.

The arc appears in the graphics window (provided the layer you selected for the arc has its visible property turned on).

11.	Click Close to stop inserting arcs.


To insert text

 Overview and More Information

1.	Select the Plan view. Do one of the following:

  Select View / Plan.

  Click the Plan view tool.

  Press Alt+2.

2.	Do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Text.

  Click the Insert Text tool.

The Insert Text dialog appears.

3.	In the Text expression field, enter the text that you want to appear. To use field codes (for example, the project title) right-click to see the shortcut menu and select Fields.

4.	In the Northing field, enter the northing value for the location of the text. Alternatively, use field fill-in by clicking on a location in the graphics window.

5.	In the Easting field, enter the easting value for the location of the text. Alternatively, use field fill-in by clicking on a location in the graphics window.

6.	In the Orientation field, enter the orientation for the text entity. If you do not specify an orientation, the text is displayed horizontally across the window.

7.	In the Anchor type field, specify where the text is located with respect to the Northing and Easting values and select a value from the list.

8.	In the Layer field, select the layer that you want to add text to from the list. To enter text in a new layer, type a new name.

9.	In the Text style field, select the text style for the text entity from the list. If you require the default text style set for the layer you are adding the text to, select the <By Layer> option.

10.	Click Insert to add the text to the database and keep the dialog open to add more text.

11.	Click Close to stop inserting text.


To create a new project template

 Overview and More Information

1.	Do one of the following:

  Click the New tool.

  Select File / New Project.

The New Project dialog appears.

2.	In the New group, select the Template option. The Project folder in the Details group changes to the default template folder.

3.	In the Name field, enter a name for the project template.

4.	In the Template field, select a template from the list and click OK. The Project Properties dialog appears.

5.	Select the project properties that you want any projects that use this template to have as the defaults and click OK.

A message appears. To continue working in the template, click Yes. To close the project template, click No.

6.	If you select Yes, then you can continue to work in the project template. To finish working in the project template, select File / Close.

7.	When you create a new project, you will see the new template in the Template list in the New Project dialog.


To create a point style

 Overview and More Information

1.	In the Plan view, select Edit / Styles. The CAD Styles dialog appears.

2.	In the Point styles tab, click New. The Create Point Style dialog appears.

3.	Complete the Create Point Style dialog.

4.	Click OK.

The Point style is added to the database. It appears in the CAD Styles dialog − Point Styles tab.


To open the Properties window

 Overview and More Information

Do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Properties.

  Click the Edit Properties tool [image].

  Choose Properties from the shortcut menu

  Double-click on a graphical entity.

  Press Alt + Enter.


To export a data dictionary file (.ddf) to Trimble Survey Controller

 Overview and More Information

NOTE: You can only transfer .ddf files to a device running Trimble Survey Controller version 7.00 or later.

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Data Dictionary File to Survey Controller (*.ddf) option and click OK. The Select dialog appears.

3.	Select the file that you want to transfer to Trimble Survey Controller and click Open. The Save dialog appears.

4.	Select a Survey Controller device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears.

When the connection to the device is made, Main Memory (C:) appears in the box. If a PC card is currently inserted in the device, PC card (A:) appears as well.

NOTE: If your Trimble device does not have a PC card, this dialog is not available.

5.	Do one of the following:

  Select the Main Memory (C:) option to store the file in the main memory of Trimble Survey Controller.

  Select the PC card (A:) option if you have a PC card inserted and would like to store the file on the PC card.

6.	Click Open. The main memory or PC card is read. The existing Data Dictionary files appear.

7.	In the File name field, the internal name of the .ddf file you selected to export appears. This is the name you will see in Trimble Survey Controller.

8.	Edit this name if necessary.

9.	Click Save. The Uploading dialog appears and the progress bar shows the progress of the transfer.

When the transfer is complete, the Uploading dialog disappears and you are returned to the graphics window. You can now use the .ddf file with Trimble Survey Controller.

NOTE: If you are transferring data to or from Trimble Survey Controller version 7.60 , use the version 7.50 .dc file format.


To drag and drop a .dc file to a project
To drag and drop a file to a project

 Overview and More Information

To drag and drop a file to a project:

1.	Open the Trimble Geomatics Office project to transfer the files to.

2.	Open Microsoft Windows Explorer. For more information, refer to your Microsoft Windows operating system documentation.

3.	Locate the folder containing the files to import.

4.	Right-click the files to import.

5.	Drag the files onto the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window.

6.	Release the right button to see the shortcut menu.

7.	Select the appropriate file option.

8.	Left-click. The files are imported.

For information about the possible actions that take place during import, see Import − Overview. The files are stored in the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the project.


To select points by name

1.	Choose Select / Points. The Select Points dialog appears.

2,	Select the General tab.

3.	In the Name matching field, enter the name of the point you want to select. You can also use ranges and wildcard characters to select multiple points.

4.	Click OK. The point(s) matching your name are selected. The status bar shows how many points are selected.

NOTE: Any entities currently selected before you use the Select points dialog are not retained in the selection set unless you select the Append to the current selection check box.


To select points by point quality

1.	Choose Select / Points. The Select Points dialog appears.

2.	Select the General tab.

3.	In the With point quality field, select the component and quality combination you want to select. You can select multiple entries from the list.

4.	Click OK.

The point(s) matching your selection are selected. The status bar shows how many points are selected.

NOTE: Any entities currently selected before you use the Select points dialog are not retained in the selection set unless you select the Append to the current selection check box.


To select observations from a selected point

1.	In the Survey view, choose Select / Observations. The Select Observations dialog appears.

2.	In the From point field, enter the point name, or enter a range to use multiple points in the selection. You can also use field fill-in and wildcards.

3.	Click OK.

The observations from the points matching your selection are selected. The status bar shows how many observations are selected.

NOTE: Any entities currently selected before you use the Select points dialog are not retained in the selection set unless you select the Append to the current selection check box.


To disable observations

1.	From the Survey view, select an observation.

2.	Do one of the following:

  Open the Properties window. Click the Summary icon [image] and select the Disabled option from the Status field.

  Select Edit / Enable/Disable Observation.

NOTE: Disabling observations requires a recomputation to update the survey information. When you move a point, any observations to it are disabled automatically.


To import jobs from Trimble Survey Controller to Trimble Geomatics Office

1.	Do one of the following:

  Select File / Import.

  Click the Import tool.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the survey devices option. The Data Transfer Open dialog appears.

3.	Select a Trimble Survey Controller device.

4.	Click Open. The Connecting dialog appears. When a connection is made, the Open dialog updates to display the selected device.

5.	Select the files you want to transfer from one of the following options:

  Main Memory (C:) option for the file(s) stored in the Trimble Survey Controller main memory.

  PC card (A:) option for the file(s) stored in a PC card inserted in the Survey Controller.

NOTE: If your Trimble device does not have a PC card, this dialog is not available.

6.	Click Open. The Receiving dialog appears and the progress bar displays the progress of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, the Receiving dialog disappears and the connection to the device is broken.


To hide (or show) a toolbar

1.	Do one of the following:

  Right-click in the toolbar area. A shortcut menu appears.

  Select View / Toolbars. A menu appears.

The list of available toolbars appears. Each toolbar that is currently visible has a check mark beside its name.

2.	Select the toolbar you require. The toolbar disappears from (or reappears in) the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window.

3.	To view the toolbar again, repeat the steps above.


To transfer antenna details to Trimble Survey Controller

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Antenna details to Survey Controller option. The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

3.	Select a Trimble Survey Controller device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears. When a connection is made, the Save dialog appears.

4.	Do one of the following:

  Select the Main Memory (C:) option to store the file in the main memory of Trimble Survey Controller.

  Select the PC card (A:) option if you have a PC card inserted and want to store the file on the PC card.

NOTE: If your device does not have a PC card, this dialog is not available.

5.	Click Open. The directory you selected is read. All Survey Controller files in the directory are displayed. The Trimble Geomatics Office project name appears in the File Name field. This is the name of the Trimble Survey Controller job that will be exported to Trimble Survey Controller. You can edit this name if necessary.

6.	Click Save. The Uploading dialog appears and the progress bar displays the progress of the transfer.

The Antenna.ini file (located in the \Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\Config folder) is transferred to Trimble Survey Controller.

When the transfer is complete, the Uploading dialog disappears and the connection to the device is broken.


To export attribute notes

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the CAD / ASCII tab, select the DC file Attribute notes (Survey Controller V4) option and click OK. The Save As dialog appears.

3.	Enter the file name.

4.	Click Save.


To display information about Trimble Geomatics Office

1.	From the Help menu, select the About Trimble Geomatics Office command. 	The About Trimble Geomatics Office dialog appears.

2.	Click OK.


To reverse the direction of an observation

1.	From the Survey view, select the observation that you want to apply in the opposite direction.

2.	Select Edit / Reverse Observation Flowout.

3.	The direction of the observation is reversed. When the observation is applied in the opposite direction, the calculated coordinates and qualities of the point may change.

CAUTION: If the point you want the observation to flowout from does not have a known position (such as an RTK observed point), the observation is not applied.

NOTE: Terrestrial observations collected using a total station cannot be reversed.


To view errors and warnings

1.	Do one of the following:

  From the Survey view, double-click a point or observation with a warning indicator flag.

  Double-click on the flag icon in the status bar to select all points and observations with warning indicator flags.

The Properties window appears with the selected entity/entities.

2.	From the Properties window, select the point or observation you want to view (if you have more than one entity in your selection).

3.	To view the Warning page, click the Warning menu button [image].

The message displays the type of error that occurred.

4.	To view additional details for a point, select the Point Derivation report tool [image].

The Point Derivation report appears.


To transfer UK National Grid (*.pgf) files to Trimble Survey Controller

NOTE: You can only transfer .pgf files to Trimble Survey Controller version 7.50 or later:

1.	Start the Data Transfer utility. Do one of the following:

  Select Utilities / Data Transfer when no project is open.

  Select Start / Programs / Trimble / Trimble Utilities / Data Transfer at any time.

The Data Transfer dialog appears.

2.	Select the Send tab.

3.	From the Device list, select the Survey Controller device to which you want to export files. The Data Transfer utility tries to connect to the selected device. When connection is successful, the cable in the icon at top right changes to show the device is connected, and the status line under the icon at the top right reads ‘Connected to <device>’, where <device> represents the type of device (such as a Survey Controller).

4.	Click Add. The Open dialog appears. The Look in list shows the last folder you selected files from for this device, and the main list shows the folders and files in that folder.

5.	From the Files of Type list, select the UK National Grid Files (*.PGF) option.

6.	Use the Look in list and the list box to change the selected drive and folder and select the files you want to transfer.

To transfer the existing .pgf files supplied by Trimble Geomatics Office select the North.pgf or East.pgf file from the Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\Geodata folder.

7.	You can send files to the main memory or to a PC card if one is installed. Select the destination from the Destination list.

8.	Make sure the File format field is set to Job file v7.50. If necessary, select this option from the list.

9.	Click Select. The Open dialog closes and you return to the Data Transfer dialog. The files you selected appear in the Files to Send list.

10.	Click Transfer. The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from the device's file format. When all files have been converted, the Sending dialog appears, showing the progress of the exporting of the selected files.

When the transfer is completed, the Transfer Completed dialog appears displaying the results of the transfer.

NOTE: If you are transferring data to or from Trimble Survey Controller version 7.60 , use the version 7.50 .dc file format.


To calibrate using saved calibration coordinates and adjusted coordinates (derived from the Network Adjustment module)

1.	After completing a minimally constrained adjustment and establishing WGS-84 coordinates on each of the points in the network adjustment, save these coordinates for use as observed GPS coordinates for a site calibration. The calibration coordinates consist of the WGS-84 Latitudes, Longitudes and Ellipsoid Heights.

To save the calibration coordinates:

  Select Adjustment / Calibration Coordinates / Save.

The Save Calibration Coordinates dialog appears.

NOTE: This command is only available when WGS-84 is selected as your adjustment datum and there were only GPS observations included in the previous adjustment.

NOTE: If adjustment transformation parameters were created during an adjustment, then these are discarded when you carry out a GPS site calibration. Trimble Geomatics Office will only allow one or the other.

2.	Select one of the following:

  The Create Coordinates Under Existing Points option

  The Create Coordinates Under New Points with Suffix option

3.	Click OK. The calibration coordinates are saved.

NOTE: A WGS-84 coordinate is created for each point in the adjustment. You can view this coordinate in the Properties window. This coordinate cannot be edited.

4.	Perform a constrained adjustment in the project datum (refer to the appropriate Network Adjustment help topics on how to do this). 	The adjusted values are saved to the database.

NOTE: An adjusted grid coordinate is created for each unconstrained point in the adjustment. This coordinate can be viewed in the Properties window.

5.	Perform a GPS site calibration using the Network Adjustment derived point pairs. To do this, Select Survey / GPS Site Calibration. The GPS Site Calibration dialog appears.

6.	In the Calibration components group, select the calibration parameters that you want to calculate.

7.	Click Point List. The Point List dialog appears.

8.	Use the Point List dialog to select your point pairs (GPS point and grid point) for the calibration. Do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in or enter the name of the saved calibration coordinate in the GPS Point field.

  Use field fill-in or enter the name of the matching adjusted coordinate in the Grid Point field.

If the minimally-constrained coordinate was saved under the same point, the grid point field will be automatically filled. When the GPS point is entered, the values shown are from the saved calibration coordinates. When the grid point is entered, the adjusted values are selected.

9.	Repeat the step above to select all the point pairs that you require in the calibration.

10.	When you have selected all point pairs, click Close to return to the GPS Site Calibration dialog.

11.	Click Compute to calculate the calibration parameters. The results of the calibration appear in the Calibration summary group.

12.	Click OK to apply the calibration to the project. The coordinate system is updated with the calibration parameters. You can now transfer the calibration to Trimble Survey Controller.


To report and export events

You can define a report or export format to record the time an event was logged by the receiver.

To report on events, create a custom database report:

1.	Select points with events records in Trimble Geomatics Office. To do this

a.  Choose Select / Points. The Select Points dialog appears.

  	b.  Select the GPS tab.

c.  From the Field Method list, select Events.

d.  Click OK.

All of the points with events records are selected.

2.	Select Reports / Additional Reports. The Additional Report dialog appears.

3.	Do one of the following:

  Click Edit to modify an existing report format.

  Click New to create a new report format.

The Define Report Format dialog appears.

4.	In the Format body field, right-click to access the shortcut menu and then select Advanced / Subrecords / Point obs / Time.

To export events for custom export definitions:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog.

2.	In the Custom tab, do one of the following:

  Click Edit format to modify an existing format.

  Click New format to create a new report format.

The Define ASCII Export format dialog appears.

3.	In the Format body field, right-click to access the shortcut menu and select Advanced / Subrecords / Point obs / Time.


Time format layouts

The typical time display format for events is as follows: 09:12:55 8 Feb 2000.

To change this layout, right-click next to the field code to access the shortcut menu, and then select Advanced / More / Format layouts. Select a sample time format layout or create your own. For more information, refer to Time Format Layouts.

NOTE: To display event times to the nearest millisecond, add the following time format layout to the field code, <H:mm:ss.nnn>, where nnn is the number of decimal seconds. For example, [Point Obs.Time:<H:mm:ss.nnn>]. To increase the time precision, increase the number of decimal seconds. For example, nnnn outputs the first 4 decimal seconds.


To copy observation data between projects

To copy observation data between Trimble Geomatics Office  projects, use the Trimble Data Exchange Format. You cannot use the copy-and-paste function.

To copy observation data between projects:

1.	In your current Trimble Geomatics Office project, select the observation data that you wish to copy.

2.	Export data from your current project using the Trimble Data Exchange Format:

a.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

b.	In the Survey tab, select the Trimble Data Exchange Format and click OK. The Save As dialog appears.

c.	Save the file.

3.	Create a new project in Trimble Geomatics Office.

4.	Import the observation data into the new project using the Trimble Data Exchange Format:

a.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

b.	In the Survey tab, select the Trimble Data Exchange Format and click OK. The Open dialog appears.

c.	Select the file.

The observation data is imported into your Trimble Geomatics Office project.

NOTE: If you want to create a copy of all observation and points in the project, create a copy Trimble Geomatics Office project.


To manually import terrestrial data

To manually import terrestrial data into Trimble Geomatics Office, use the Softdesk Fieldbook format. This format is developed by Autodesk.

Create a file in the Softdesk Fieldbook format, using your terrestrial data:

  Import the file into Trimble Geomatics Office:

a.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

b.	In the Survey tab, select the third-party data recorder files. The Open dialog appears.

c.	Select the file you wish to import.

d.	From the Files of Type field, select Autodesk FBK fieldbook format files (*.FBK) and click OK.

The file is imported into your Trimble Geomatics Office project.

NOTE: The Autodesk Softdesk Fieldbook format is described below. This format has been taken from the AutoCAD Land Development Desktop help files.

Consider the following:

  Any line in the format that does not start with one of the recognized commands is ignored.

  Items included in parentheses () are optional.

  Trimble Geomatics Office requires that you use a point number.

  The point description (descript) must be included in double quotes (") as this is part of the Fieldbook format file definition. This means that spaces can be used in the point description.


Point creation commands

AD (point) [angle] [distance] (descript)

AD [VA] (point) [angle] [distance] [vert angle] (descript)

AD [VD] (point) [angle] [distance] [vert distance] (descript)

BD (point) [bearing] [quadrant] [distance] (descript)

BD [VA] (point) [bearing] [quadrant] [distance] [vert angle] (descript)

BD [VA] (point) [bearing] [quadrant] [distance] [vert dist] (descript)

DD (point) [angle] [distance] [vert angle] (descript)

DD [VA] (point) [angle] [distance] [vert angle] (descript)

DD [VD] (point) [angle] [distance] [vert distance] (descript)

F1/F2 (point) [angle] [distance] (descript)

F1/F2 [VA] (point) [angle] [distance] [vert angle] (descript)

F1/F2 [VD] (point) [angle] [distance] [vert distance] (descript)

NE (point) [North] [East] (descript)

NEZ (point) [North] [East] (elev) (descript)

NE SS (point) [North] [East] (elev) (descript)

PRISM [height]

PT OFFSET (point) [offset] (ahead)

STADIA (point) [angle] [distance] [rod] (vert angle) (descript)

ZD (point) [azimuth] [distance] (descript)

ZD [VA] (point) [azimuth] [distance] [vert angle] (descript)

ZD [VD] (point) [azimuth] [distance] [vert distance] (descript)


Point Location Commands

AZ [point 1] [point 2] [azimuth]

BS [point] (orientation)

STN [point] (inst. height) (descript)


Equipment Correction Commands

ANGLES [RIGHT, LEFT] [ZENITH, NADIR, HORIZ]

ATMOS [ON, OFF]

CR [ON, OFF]

EDM OFFSET  [offset]

HORIZ ANGLE [RIGHT, LEFT]

PRESS [pressure] [INCH, MBAR, MM]

SF [factor]

PRISM CONSTANT  [constant]

PRISM OFFSET  [offset]

TEMP [temperature] [F, C, K]

UNITS [METER, FOOT] [DMS, DECDEG, GRAD, MILS, RADIANS]

VERT ANGLE [ZENITH, NADIR, HORIZ]


To add coordinates in the Properties window

Trimble Geomatics Office lets you add coordinates for a point in the Properties window, using the Add Coordinate tool [image] in the Summary page.

To do this:

1.	Double-click the point in the project. The Properties window appears.

2.	In the Summary page, select [image] and then select the type of coordinate that you need to add; that is, grid, local, or WGS 84.

In the Properties window tree structure, a new coordinate appears under the point you selected. A prefix is added to the name to denote whether the coordinate is a grid (G), local (L), or WGS-84 (W) coordinate. The Summary page for the new coordinate shows all fields as null.

NOTE: You can only enter one WGS-84 coordinate and one grid or local coordinate for each point. When you add a WGS-84 coordinate, this option becomes unavailable in the Add Coordinate list. If a point already has both a WGS-84 coordinate and a grid or local coordinate, the Add Coordinate button becomes unavailable.

3.	To populate the Northing, Easting, Elevation, and Height fields for the coordinate, click in each field and then click the Insert Current Value button [image]. Each field fills with the current point position and quality. You can then edit this information as necessary.

TIP: Only add a coordinate when you are sure that you want to use this coordinate instead of observations. Recomputations use keyed-in coordinates in preference to observations of the same quality. This ensures that a design point is used in preference to a stakeout observation.

NOTE: Additional coordinates can be generated by Trimble Geomatics Office and stored for a point. These coordinates can include:

  Coordinates derived from an adjustment

  WGS-84 coordinates saved for calibration


To edit coordinates in the Properties window

 Overview and More Information

Trimble Geomatics Office lets you edit coordinates for a point in the Properties window.

To do this:

1.	Double-click the point in the project. The Properties window appears.

2.	In the Properties window tree structure, expand the tree structure for the point and select the keyed-in coordinate (WGS-84 or grid/local) that you want to edit.

3.	Edit the coordinate components and coordinate quality.

NOTE: For the coordinate field to be editable, the coordinate view setting and the Coordinate Type setting must be the same.

4.	After editing the coordinate, select Survey / Recompute to perform a recomputation.

For more information about adding and editing coordinates in the Properties window, refer to the Properties window - Coordinates topic.


To import Digital Level files

The Digital Level Import dialog appears when you import Digital Level (*.dat, *.raw) files  or download files using a DiNi digital level (using survey devices). To do this:

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select Digital Level Files (*.dat, *.raw) and click OK. The Open dialog appears.

3.	Select the Digital Level file. The Digital Level Import dialog appears.

4.	In the Digital Level Import dialog, define station points by selecting the check box in the Station Points column.

Delta elevations are computed between station points. When station points are imported, they will be merged with other points with the same name. Make sure that the point names are unique. You can edit point names in the Digital Level Import dialog.

NOTE: Points that are not defined as station points will not be imported.

5. 	In the Digital Level Import dialog, enter an elevation for starting points. This elevation is used to compute elevations for other points. To edit starting point elevations, click on any point in the loop. The starting point elevation for the loop is shown in the Elevation group. In the Elevation group, edit the elevation and quality and click Enter. The elevation will be computed for all station points. Use these computed elevations to check with known values and validate data.

NOTE: Elevations with the elevation symbol are the only elevations imported. All other station points will have delta elevations imported. Their elevations will be computed during recomputation.

TIP: Any changes you make in the Digital Level Import dialog only affect the data that is imported. The changes do not affect the Digital Level (*.dat, *.raw) file.

6.	Click OK. The Digital Level file is imported.

NOTE: The observations that are imported may not have horizontal coordinates, so may not appear in the graphic window. To view the level data in the Properties window, select the level observations using one of the selection tools and then open the Properties window. To do this, do one of the following:

  Select Edit / Properties.

  Select the Properties window tool [image] in the toolbar.

TIP: When you collect digital level data, Trimble recommends that you store the points that you want to import into Trimble Geomatics Office with a unique prefix or suffix. For example, store all of the points that you wish to use as station points with the prefix STN. This makes it easier to select points using the Select by Filter button in the Digital Level Import dialog.


To view a background map in Trimble Geomatics Office

 Overview and more information

To view a background map in Trimble Geomatics Office:

1.	Select View / Options. The View Options dialog appears.

2.	In the Background Map tab, click Add. The Add dialog appears.

3.	Select the Background Map file and click OK.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office can display background files in the graphics window. You can import Drawing Exchange Format (.dxf), Windows Bitmap (.bmp) or Tagged Image File Format (.tif) files to display. Windows Bitmap (.bmp) and Tagged Image File Format (.tif) files must be georeferenced in order to be displayed correctly. ESRI’s World file format is used to georeference background files. These files must be in the same folder as the corresponding background files.

The Background Map file appears in Trimble Geomatics Office.

For more information about using background maps in Trimble Geomatics Office, refer to View Options - Background Map.


To view grid lines in Trimble Geomatics Office

1.	Select View / Options. The View Options dialog appears.

2.	In the Grid Lines tab, select the Show grid lines check box. The options in this group become available.

3.	Select the Fixed number of grid lines or Grid interval options, and enter the appropriate values in each field.

4.	Select the grid line type and color.

5.	If you want the grid lines labeled, select the Label grid lines check box.

6.	Click OK.


To select independent baselines

An independent baseline set consists of the minimum number of baselines required to connect all point occupations in a given GPS field session. For any given set of n simultaneous GPS point occupations, there are n-1 independent baselines. For example, in a field session with five receivers, there are 10 possible baselines, but only 4 independent baselines. In the diagram below, the independent baselines are represented by dashed lines.

The concept of an independent baseline set applies primarily to surveys conducted using Static and FastStatic techniques, and is particularly important for projects that include network adjustment.

Using independent baseline sets ensures that a network adjustment is not affected by an artificial sense of redundancy (inflated Degrees of Freedom), which could result in an underestimation of the error in the adjusted coordinates.

The baselines derived from GPS field sessions using more than two receivers can be formed into multiple independent baseline sets. The choice of baselines included in the independent set can be based on the quality of the baseline solutions, or on achieving a desired network geometry.

To specify an independent baseline set, you can do one of the following:

  Select and process only an independent set of baselines from among all potential baselines for a GPS field session.

  Process all potential baselines for a GPS field session and select an independent set at the time the results are saved to the project.

  Process all potential baselines for a GPS field session and save all the results to the project, then remove the dependent baselines from consideration by network adjustment.

To do this, use the Dependent baseline view tool [image]. This tool lets you link the observations in the graphics window and Timeline. When you select it, the software only shows the postprocessed baselines in the current Timeline view, and the postprocessed baselines that were observed at the same time. All other postprocessed baselines in the Survey view are hidden. Use the Dependent baseline view tool to show baselines that were observed at the same time, and then prevent the dependent baselines from being used in an adjustment.

To do this, do one of the following:

  In the Properties window, change the status of the dependent baselines to Disabled.

  In the Properties window, change the status of the dependent baselines to Enable as check.

  In the Properties window, clear the Use in Network Adjustment check box for the dependent baselines.

  Use the Observations dialog to clear the Use check box for the dependent baselines.

The best way to perform these operations is to use the Multiple Edit dialog. For example, to change the status of dependent baselines to Disabled:

1.	Select the Dependent baseline view tool.

2.	Select the dependent baselines in the graphics window.

3.	Select Edit / Multiple Edit. The Multiple Edit dialog appears.

4.	Select the Set observation status to check box.

5.	From the list, select Disabled and click OK.

The selected observations will now have a disabled status.


To import Trimble 3600/5600 GDM files

NOTE: When survey data is contained in both a job and area file, import the Area file first.

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select Trimble 3600/5600 GDM files (*.job, *.are) and then click Options. The Settings dialog appears.

3.	Specify the settings for the Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit and duplicate point settings.

4.	Click OK to accept any changes and return to the Import dialog.

5.	Click OK. The Open dialog appears.

6.	Select the file to be imported and then click Open.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office assumes that all 3600/5600 GDM files are defined as a Scale factor-only coordinate system. For more information, see Scale factor-only.

See Also


To export to a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM Area (*.are) file

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select Trimble 3600/5600 GDM files (*.are) and then click Options. The Settings dialog appears.

3.	Specify the Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit settings.

4.	Click OK to accept any changes and return to the Export dialog.

5.	Click OK. The Save As dialog appears.

6.	Specify a file name and location and click Save. (By default the project name determines the file name.)

NOTE: Coordinates exported to the Area file use the coordinate system defined in the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

See Also


To export a Pcode (*.pco) file to a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM instrument
To export a Pcode (*.pco) file to a Trimble 3600/5600 instrument

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select Pcode file to Trimble 3600/5600 GDM (*.pco) and then click OK.

The Select dialog appears.

3.	Select a Pcode file and click Open. The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

4.	Select a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears. When a connection is made the Save dialog appears.

5.	Click Save. A dialog shows the progress of the file transfer. When the transfer is complete the connection to the device is broken.

See Also


Import - Overview
Import − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also

Overview

You can import data in a variety of file formats to a Trimble Geomatics Office project. For example, you can import files containing control points, raw GPS (*.dat) files, Survey Controller (*.dc) files, and custom formats.

For a description of the import formats supported, see the topic Import dialog.

You can import data from:

  a device running Trimble Survey Controller

  a Trimble GPS receiver

  A Trimble 3600/5600 GDM instrument

  a file on a computer

  a total station

  a digital level

When a file is imported, the points in the file are added into the database. If a point is imported with the same name as a point that is already in the database, the way that points are merged will depend on the option set in the Duplicate Point Options dialog.

What happens when you import a file depends on the file type. However, for all file types, a recomputation is automatically performed and an import report (named <imported file name>.html) is created and stored in the Reports folder of the project.

All entities imported from a file are saved in a selection set. With .dc files, the selection set is named according to the internal job name in the file. With other file types the selection set is given the name of the import file. To manage selection sets, use the Select / Selection Sets command.

TIP: To view only data in a selection set, use the Show only data in the selection set option in the View Filters dialog.

TIP: To reverse an import operation, use the Undo command. If you have closed the project after import, use the From source option in the Select Points dialog / General tab and delete the selection to undo the import operation.

NOTE: If you import a file more than once to the same project, the file will be added to the appropriate folder, with a dash and a number at the end of the file name. For example, if you import a Trimble raw GPS data (.dat) file called MyGPSFile twice, a folder named MyGPSFile is created (during the first import of the file). In this folder will be MyGPSFile.dat and MyGPSFile-1.dat. Duplicate data is identified on import and not added to the database.


Import dialog

Use this dialog to import data to your project.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select File / Import.

  Click the Import button [image] on the standard toolbar.

The Import formats are organized in three tabs:

  Survey

  CAD / ASCII

  Custom

New format

This button becomes available when the Custom tab is selected.

To create a new custom format, click New format. The Define ASCII Import Format dialog appears.

Use this dialog to define the import format.

Edit format

This button becomes available when the Custom tab is selected.

Click Edit format to modify existing ASCII import formats. The Define ASCII Import Format dialog appears.

Use this dialog to edit the import format.

Delete format

This button becomes available when the Custom tab is selected.

Click Delete to delete a custom import format. You are asked to confirm your action.

To confirm the delete, click Yes.

Customize

Use the Customize button to select the list of import options shown in the Import dialog.  Select the required import options from the checklist.

You can add an external filter from the Customize dialog. External filters are separate programs that you can write to integrate with Trimble Geomatics Office. Any external filter written for use within Trimble Geomatics Office must conform to specific requirements if it is to be added to the system. Only the currently installed filters for the selected tab in the Import dialog appear.

Any filter program must be compiled as a Dynamically Linked Library (*.dll) file with specific exported functions and must be created as a COM (Component Object Module) object.

Once you select the appropriate file, Trimble Geomatics Office registers the filter COM object in the computer and verifies that the .dll interface conforms to the system requirements. If this is not successful, the system reports that it is unable to register the filter. If the filter is successfully installed then the filter short description is listed in the dialog.

For more information, see External Import/Export filters.

Options

For the imported file, click the Options button to:

  specify how to manage duplicate points on import.

  set the quality for the import data.

  specify the units of imported data.

  specify the settings in the imported file.

  change the options for importing data to a device, 3300/3600/5600 Elta M5, or 3600/5600 GDM.

If you select a coordinate system that is different from the one being used for the project, Trimble Geomatics Office reads the file, converts the coordinates to the project coordinate system, stores the points, and displays them in the project coordinate system. The data file remains the same.

NOTE: The coordinate values displayed in Trimble Geomatics Office for points imported from the data file can differ from those in the file.


Import Formats - Survey tab
Import Formats − Survey tab

 Overview and More Information

Use the Survey tab to import data from Trimble Survey Controller, a Trimble GPS receiver, a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM instrument, a total station, a digital level, or survey data files on a computer.

To access the Import / Survey tab:

1.	Select File / Import.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

You can move custom formats to this tab. For more information, see Asciiimp.dat file.

NOTE: You can also use drag and drop to import files.

Use the Survey tab to import the following formats:

Format	Use this format to import …
Digital Level files (*.dat, *.raw)	Digital Level files
GPS data files (*.dat)	Trimble GPS .dat files from your computer.
Gridded DTM file (*.dtx)	a gridded digital terrain model that was created using the DTMLink utility.
NGS data sheet files (*.dat, *.dsx, *.htm, *.html)	National Geodetic Survey (NGS) standard format data files.
Trimble Data Exchange Format	an ASCII file with data in the Trimble Data Exchange Format. This format is primarily used to transfer survey data to other software packages.
Precise ephemeris files (*.sp3, *.e18)	a precise ephemeris format file to use for baseline processing. This file is stored in the Common Files area. To select it, use the GPS Processing Styles dialog.
RINEX files (*.Xxo, *.XXn, *.obs, *.nav)	Receiver Independent Exchange format files. This format lets you transfer GPS raw data files from any GPS receiver manufacturer. You require both a navigation file and an observation file in the same folder.
Sokkia Data Recorder files (*.sdr)	a Sokkia Data Recorder format file from a computer.
SSF/SSK files (*.ssf, *.ssk)	postprocessed kinematic solution files or postprocessed static solution files created using the Trimble GPSurvey software.
Survey Controller files (*.dc)	a Trimble Survey Controller format file from a computer. When .dc files are imported, all the GPS vectors or observations with associated antenna, instrument, and prism heights are stored in the project. This data is used to compute
Survey Devices	data directly from supported total stations, devices, survey data cards, digital levels and GPS receivers.
Third party data recorder files	third-party data recorder files provided using an external import/export filter. The following third party formats are supplied with Trimble Geomatics Office: Leica GS1-16 SDMS (imports coordinated points) Nikon AP-700 ASCII data Topcon GTS-700 and FC-5 format data
Trimble 3600/5600 GDM files (*.job, *.are)	Trimble 3600/5600 GDM data files
TDS Survey Pro CE job file (*.job)	Imports TDS Survey Pro CE job files
TDS Survey Pro CE raw file (*.raw)	Imports TDS Survey Pro CE raw files
Trimble 3300 / 3600 / 5600 Elta M5 files (*.dat)	Imports a 3300 / 3600 / 5600 Elta M5 file
Trimble 3600 / 5600 TDS Coord file (*.cr5)	Imports Trimble 3600 / 5600 TDS Coord files
Trimble 3600 / 5600 TDS raw file (*.rw5)	Imports Trimble 3600 / 5600 TDS raw files
Trimble Elta GPS Controller M5 files (*dat)	Imports Trimble Elta GPS Controller M5 files


NGS Data Sheet File (*.dat, *.dsx, *.htm, *.html) Option

You can import National Geodetic Survey (NGS) standard format data files.

Trimble Geomatics Office assumes all NGS data that is imported into a project is in a NAD-83 datum (that is, it is consistent with a WGS-84 datum).

If you import NGS data into a project that is not recognizably based on a NAD-83 datum, Trimble Geomatics Office cannot be sure that the NGS data is appropriate.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office recognizes a NAD-83 datum by name (that is, any datum starting NAD-83).

If your datum is not equivalent to NAD-83, the following warning message appears:

Your project doesn’t seem to be in a NAD 1983 datum. This will cause problems as the data being imported is in a NAD 1983 datum and no conversion to the project datum will be attempted.

Do you want to continue with the import?

WARNING: If you choose to continue with the import, the NGS coordinates are interpreted using whatever datum is defined for the project. If this datum is not equivalent to NAD-83 this interpretation will be incorrect.


CAD / ASCII Import Formats

To access the Import / CAD/ASCII tab:

1.	Select File / Import.

2.	Select the CAD/ASCII tab.

NOTE: Any import formats that handle ASCII files always expect to receive numeric data in standardized form. Standardized form does not include any thousand separators or dots for the decimal point.

You can move custom formats to this tab. For more information, see Asciiimp.dat file.

NOTE: You can also use drag and drop to import files.

Use the CAD/ASCII tab to import the following formats:

Format	Use this format to import …
AutoCAD file (*.dwg, *.dxf)	coordinated points and linework using ASCII and binary .dxf and .dwg files (up to .dxf Release 14).
C & G standard format	a C & G software standard ASCII file.
C & G with no quotes	a C & G software ASCII file with no quotes.
CMM COR and LEV files (*.cor, *.lev)	standard ASCII format files used by Bureaux of Land Management. The CMM COR and LEV files option is provided using an external import filter.
NMEA file	points from NMEA format files (GGA, GGK, and PJK strings). NMEA is a standard developed by the National Marine Electronics Association that defines data formats for communicating navigation data among marine navigation instruments.
Pacsoft format	a Pacsoft software standard ASCII file.
SDRmap coordinates	a SDRmap coordinate text file.
TPLANE (LLHE)	a Trimble GPSurvey ASCII file.
TRIMMAP Graphics File (*.tgf)	a TRIMMAP (or SDRmap) *.tgf graphics file.
WILDsoft format	a WILDsoft software standard ASCII file.
Terramodel Project files (*.pro)	points, linework and layers from Terramodel Project files.


Custom Import Formats

To access the Import / Custom tab:

1.	Select File / Import.

2.	Select the Custom tab.

NOTE: Alternatively, use drag-and-drop to import files.

You can move custom formats to other tabs. For more information, see Asciiimp.dat file.

Use the Custom tab to:

  import data files in a custom format

  add new custom import formats

  edit existing custom import formats

  delete custom import formats.

The following custom formats are supplied:

  Delimited Points

  Fixed-width Points

  Name,East,North,Elevation,Code

  Name,Latitude,Longtitude,Height,Code (Local)

  Name,Latitude,Longtitude,Height,Code (WGS-84)

  Name,North,East,Elevation,Code

When importing values from an ASCII file, Trimble Geomatics Office can read values that use the digit grouping symbol and decimal symbol defined in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel / Regional Settings / Number tab. The system will also read in values in a standardized form. That is, no digit grouping symbol (thousands separator) and a dot for the decimal symbol.

All custom import formats are written to the Asciiimp.dat file.


Define ASCII Import Format dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to define ASCII import formats.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Custom tab, do one of the following:

  To create a new format, click New Format.

  To modify an existing format, click Edit Format.

Name

Enter or edit the name of the import format. This name appears in the Types list on the Custom tab of the Import dialog. Duplicate names are not permitted.

Null string

Enter the null string for the import format definition. This field is optional. The null string you specify here is interpreted during the import of a file to indicate that there is no value available for a particular record.

If Trimble Geomatics Office finds the specified null string, it does not assign any value to the appropriate database field as the data is being added to the database.

NOTE: Some file types may require a particular string such as "99999.99", "*****" , or similar. By specifying the setting, you can request Trimble Geomatics Office to use your preference.

Description

Enter a description of the import format. The description appears on the status bar when the format is highlighted in the Import dialog. This field is optional.

Default extension

Enter the default extension for the import format. For example, .dat or .fbk. This field is optional and if omitted, ".txt" is assumed.

TIP: To accept all file extensions, enter ???

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office uses the extension in the List Files of Type field in the Open dialog. It puts the name(s) of the file(s) with the specified extension in the Name list. Trimble Geomatics Office automatically assumes the dot in between the name and an extension.

Import as

Select the appropriate record type as the destination for the data in the imported file(s). This is normally the Points table.

Fill Format Automatically

Click Fill Format Automatically and the Insert Format dialog opens. Use this dialog to automatically initialize the format header and body definitions. For more information, see Fill Format Automatically.

Format header

Using the available field codes from the shortcut menu, you can build up a definition to match or skip the initial fixed part of an import file. The header definition is used once (and only once) by Trimble Geomatics Office at the start of the file. If the header lines in an import file fail to match the definition then the reading of the file will halt. This is useful for file format verification.

NOTE: To add blank lines into the header definition press Ctrl+Enter.

For example, a header definition consisting of the field codes [$Skip.Line:7] causes Trimble Geomatics Office to skip the first seven lines in a file and interpret the remainder of the file as defined by the format body.

Format body

Using the available field codes from the shortcut menu, you can build up a definition matching the data in the file to be read. If the data relating to a single entity is defined over multiple lines, this is handled in the definition by pressing Ctrl+Enter to begin a new definition line.

For more information on all the fields available in the system, see Field Codes − Overview.

As a file is imported, Trimble Geomatics Office repeatedly attempts to interpret the lines read in the field code(s) in the definition. If the import file contents do not match the definition, the mismatch will be recorded in the Import report and the program will then attempt to find further data in the file matching the definition.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office automatically starts the Format Body definition on a new line after the header definition.

Format footer

Using the available field codes from the shortcut menu, you can build up a footer definition to match or skip the final fixed part of an import file.

The footer definition is used only once by Trimble Geomatics Office at the end of the file. If the footer lines in an import file fail to match the definition then the reading of the file will halt. This is useful for file format verification.

NOTE: To add blank lines into the footer definition press Ctrl+Enter.

Trimble Geomatics Office automatically starts the Format Footer definition on a new line after the body definition.

For examples of custom ASCII import, see Custom ASCII Import Format − Examples.


Custom ASCII Import Format - Examples
Custom ASCII Import Format − Examples

 See also

These examples show how to define some ASCII import formats.

Example 1

To read a file with the following lines in it:

File Format Version 1.00

Date: 8/11/99

Project: Example

1000,534247.541,263104.807,10.118,STN

1024,534220.249,263104.249,10.129,MH

1025,534222.850,263100.894,10.133,TREE

1026,534222.218,263095.934,10.136,TREE

1027,534224.816,263092.579,10.140,POLE

1028,534228.398,263089.101,10.732,FENCE

1041,534236.948,263084.989,11.054,FENCE

1042,534237.326,263087.964,10.982,FENCE

1087,534243.575,263099.773,10.154,MH

The Format Header could be defined as:

File Format Version 1.00	Verifies first line of file
[$Skip.Line:2]	Skips the next two lines that have undefined content

The Format Body would be defined as:

[Name],[Easting],[Northing],[Elevation],[Feature Code]

Example 2

To read a file with the following lines in it:

1000  534247.541  263104.807      10.118 STN

1024  534220.249  263104.249      10.129 MH

1025  534222.850  263100.894      10.133 TREE

1026  534222.218  263095.934      10.136 TREE

1027  534224.816  263092.579      10.140 POLE

1028  534228.398  263089.101      10.732 FENCE

1041  534236.948  263084.989      11.054 FENCE

1042  534237.326  263087.964      10.982 FENCE

1087  534243.575  263099.773      10.154 MH

No Format Header would be defined.

The Format Body would be defined as:

[Name:4][Easting:12.3][Northing:12.3][Elevation:12.3] [Feature Code]


Fill Format Automatically / Insert Format dialog

Click Fill Format Automatically to automatically initialize the body definitions of a user-defined import or export format(s), or database report. The Insert Format dialog appears when you click the button.

NOTE: This button appears in the following dialogs:

  File / Import / Define ASCII Import Format dialog

  File / Export / Define ASCII Export Format dialog

  Reports / Custom Reports / Define Report Format dialog

Trimble Geomatics Office creates a default set of field codes for all the data involved. By using this initial default as a basis for your new format, you can modify the definition as required.

Layout

The Layout group gives you control over the format of the report or definition.

NOTE: Once you have created a report, you can edit it further using an HTML editor.

Fixed width

Choose the Fixed width option to assign each field a default fixed width in the definition.

NOTE: No default Header information is created with this option in the Import or Export definitions.

Delimited

Choose the Delimited option to enter the fields. The option lets you set the delimiter to be used between the fields of the report or definition.

NOTE: Default Header information is created in all cases with this option.

Field separator

Use the Field separator field to specify the character(s) to be inserted between the fields in the report or definition.

TIP: The field provides defaults, but you can enter any character(s) you prefer in the field.

Text delimiter

Use the Text delimiter field to specify the character(s) to be added before and after each text field in the report or definition.

TIP: The field provides defaults, but you can enter any character(s) you prefer in the field.


Export - Overview
Export − Overview

How to ...	Dialog	See also

Export data from your project if you require data in a different format. For example, if you want to use the data in a different software package or if you want to send files to Trimble Survey Controller.

You can export data in a variety of file formats from a Trimble Geomatics Office project. For example, you can export data to:

  Trimble Survey Controller (if you require files to complete field work, for example feature and attribute libraries)

  a number of ASCII formats (if you require data in another format, for example)

  a number of common GIS formats

  custom formats (and define custom formats)

For a description of the export formats supported, see Export dialog.


Export dialog

Use this dialog to export data from your project.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select File / Export.

  Select the Export tool.

NOTE: Any export formats that output ASCII files always output numeric data in standardized form (no thousand separators and dot for the decimal point). The exported data in ASCII files is expressed in the units that Trimble Geomatics Office uses for display. However, you can specify different units for export in the Units for Export data list. Alternatively, change the Trimble Geomatics Office display units by selecting File / Project Properties, and then select the Units and Format tab in the Project Properties dialog that appears.

To show a description of an export format on the status bar, highlight the export format. The Export formats are organized in the following tabs:

  Survey

  CAD / ASCII

  GIS

  Custom

New format

The New Format button becomes available when the Custom tab is highlighted.

To create a new custom Report format, click New format and then use the Define ASCII Export Format dialog  to define the export format.

Edit format

The Edit format button becomes available when the Custom tab is highlighted.

To modify an existing ASCII export format, click Edit format and then use the Define ASCII Export Format dialog to modify the export format. For more information about defining a custom format, see the examples in the topic Define ASCII Export Format − Examples.

Delete format

The Delete format button becomes available when the Custom tab is highlighted.

To delete a custom export format, click Delete format and then confirm your action or cancel.

Customize

Use the Customize button to select the list of export options shown in the Export dialog. Select the required export options from the checklist.

You can add an external filter from the Customize dialog. External filters are separate programs that you can write to integrate with Trimble Geomatics Office. Any external filter written for use within Trimble Geomatics Office must conform to specific requirements if it is to be added to the system. Only the currently installed filters for the selected tab in the Export dialog appear.

Any filter program must be compiled as a Dynamically Linked Library (*.dll) file with specific exported functions and must be created as a COM (Component Object Module) object.

Once you select the appropriate file, Trimble Geomatics Office registers the filter COM object in the computer and verifies that the .dll interface conforms to the system requirements. If this is not successful, the system reports that it is unable to register the filter. If the filter is successfully installed then the filter short description is listed in the dialog.

For more information, see External Import/Export filters.

Options

For the exported file, click Options to:

  specify the units of exported data.

  specify the settings in the exported file.

  change the coordinate system of the data file that you are exporting.

  change the options for exporting data to a device, 3300/3600/5600 Elta M5, or 3600/5600 GDM.

When an export format cannot be configured, this button is unavailable.

To set configuration details about the specific file to be exported, click Options. For example, in the case of the AutoCAD (*.dxf or *.dwg) format you can select the AutoCAD Export Options data format (.dwg, Ascii .dxf, Binary .dxf), the AutoCAD version number and reference a prototype drawing.

Coordinate system for Export data

To select the coordinate system of the data file you want to export, click Change in the Options dialog. This button is available if the format currently highlighted does not have a coordinate system definition included in the file. If you select a coordinate system that is different from the one being used for the project, Trimble Geomatics Office converts the coordinates of the points to be exported to the coordinate system selected, writes the export file, and stores points in the selected coordinate system.

NOTE: The coordinate values for points displayed in Trimble Geomatics Office can differ from those written to the file.

Export

If a current selection has been made using the Selection tools then you can choose whether to export the selected data or the whole database.

Two options are available:

Selection	Exports selected points
Whole database	Exports all database points
Where there is no current selection, the selection buttons are unavailable and the export is applied to the whole database.

Sort Data

You can choose the order in which data is exported:

1.	Select the Sort data check box.

2.	Select a sorting order from the list. Choose from:

Database order	Elevation
Name	Quality
Start time	Data type
Occupation length

NOTE: The same sorting options are available in the Properties window.

TIP: If you add your own sorting queries, these will be added to the list. For more information, refer to the Database Queries – Overview.


Export Formats - Survey tab
Export Formats − Survey tab

 Overview and More Information

Use the Survey tab of the Export dialog to export survey data to a file or to a device.

To access this tab:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

You can move custom formats to this tab. For more information, see Asciiexp.dat file.

This tab contains the following formats:

Option	Use this option to export …
Antenna details to Survey Controller	new antenna details to Trimble Survey Controller. For example, if Trimble releases a new antenna, use this export option to transfer the antenna details to your Trimble Survey Controller.
Background map to Trimble Survey Controller (*.dxf)	A dxf file to Trimble Survey Controller (version 10 or later).
Comma delimited coordinate file to Trimble Survey Controller (*.csv)	A csv file to Trimble Survey Controller (version 10 or later).
Data Dictionary to Survey Controller (*.ddf)	a Data Dictionary (.ddf) file to a device running Trimble Survey Controller. To do this, you need a Survey Controller device set up. You can create a .ddf file in the Data Dictionary Editor utility. This utility is part of Trimble’s GPS Pathfinder software. NOTE: you can only export a .ddf file to Trimble Survey Controller (version 7.00).
Datum grid to Survey Controller (*.cdg)	the datum grid to Trimble Survey Controller (version 7.00 or later). You can reduce the size of the datum grid file that is transferred (subgrid). Earlier versions of Trimble Survey Controller do not support datum grids. To do this, you need a Survey Controller device set up. NOTE: You can only subgrid the datum grid file used in the current project coordinate system, but you can export any combined datum grid.
Description file to TDS device (*.txt)	a description file (*.txt) to a device running TDS software. To do this, you must first set up a TDS device. You can create a description file manually, or export one from the Feature Code Editor utility.
DTM points to file (*.dtx)	a Trimble Survey Controller compatible Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) file of the selected points in the project.
DTM points to Survey Controller	a Trimble Survey Controller compatible Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) file of the selected points for export directly to Trimble Survey Controller. To do this, you need a Survey Controller device set up.
Feature and Attribute Library to SDR33 file. (*.sdr)	an SDR33 file containing note records for each feature code in the library you select. You cannot export attributes with this option.
Feature and Attribute Library to Survey Controller (*.fcl)	a feature and attribute library to a device running Trimble Survey Controller. The file may or may not contain attributes. (If attributes are to be exported, select the check box). To do this, you need a Survey Controller device set up. No other information from the feature and attribute library (for example, point styles) is transferred to Trimble Survey Controller.
Feature and Attribute Library to TDS device (*.fcl)	a description file (*.txt) based on the selected Feature and Attribute Library to a device running TDS software. To do this, you must first set up a TDS device. Attributes are not exported to TDS software.
Geoid file to Survey Controller (*.ggf)	a Geoid Grid file to a device running Trimble Survey Controller (version 6 or later). You can select the area in which you are working. This reduces the size of the transferred geoid grid file. To do this, you need a Survey Controller device set up. NOTE: To subgrid, you must be using a coordinate system that has a geoid model defined. You can only subgrid the geoid grid file currently used, but you can export any geoid file.
Geoid file to TDS Survey Pro (CE)	a Geoid Grid file to a device running TDS Survey Pro (CE).  You can select the area in which you are working. This reduces the size of the transferred geoid grid file
NGS Bluebook Files	B, G and SERFIL files. The NGS Bluebook format is primarily used to transfer GPS baselines to the US National Geodetic Survey for inclusion in the national control network.
Pcode File to 3600/5600 GDM (*pco)	a pcode file to a 3600/5600 GDM.
Trimble Data Exchange Format	survey data from your Trimble Geomatics Office project. Use this format to copy survey data between Trimble Geomatics Office projects. This format is primarily used to export data into third-party network adjustment software packages. The format has been defined by Trimble and is used to produce an ASCII file that contains stations and coordinates, processed GPS vectors, terrestrial observations, laser observations, leveling and azimuth information. Check with your network adjustment software vendor to see if they support this format.
SDR files (*.sdr)	an .sdr file using the current project in the version configured. Click Options to change the configuration.
STAR*NET 2D control points	control points in the STAR*NET 2D format. Only points in the database that have a Northing/Easting quality of Control are exported. The Elevation quality can be of any quality. When working with the STAR*NET package you will find that it is best if you combine the control points and observation files into a single file using an appropriate text editor.
STAR*NET 3D control points	control points in the STAR*NET 3D format. Only points in the database that have a Northing/Easting quality of Control, and an elevation quality of Control are exported. When working with the STAR*NET package you will find that it is best if you combine the control points and observation files into a single file using an appropriate text editor.
STAR*NET observations	all conventional observations in the project database in the STAR*NET observation format. When working with the STAR*NET package you will find that it is best if you combine the control points and observation files into a single file using an appropriate text editor.
Survey Device	data directly to supported total stations, devices, survey data cards and GPS receivers.
Survey Controller (*.dc)	a .dc file using the current project in the version configured. Click Options to change the configuration.
Trimble 3300 / 3600 /5600 Elta M5 files	a Trimble 3300 / 3600 /5600 Elta M5 file
Trimble 3600/5600 GDM files (*.are)	Trimble 3600/5600 GDM area file
Trimble Elta GPS Controller M5 files (*.dat)	a Trimble Elta GPS Controller M5 coordinate file
TDS Survey Pro (CE) Job files (*.job)	a job file to a TDS Survey Pro CE device.
Trimble 3600/5600 TDS coordinate files (*.cr5)	a coordinate file to a Trimble 3600/5600 TDS device.
Trimble Data Exchange Format files (*.asc)	a TDEF file


CAD / ASCII Export Formats

 Overview and More Information

Use the CAD/ASCII tab to export data to a variety of ASCII and CAD formats.

To access the Export / CAD/ASCII tab:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the CAD/ASCII tab.

You can move custom formats to this tab. For more information, see Asciiexp.dat file.

NOTE: Any export formats that output ASCII files always output numeric data in standardized form (no thousand separators and dot for the decimal point). The values output to an ASCII file are in the same units as are currently being used for display in the system, unless you change the units using the Units for Export data list. To change the system display units, select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog opens. Select the Units and Format tab.

The CAD / ASCII tab has the following options:

Option	Use this option to export ...
AutoCAD files (*.dxf, *.dwg)	a drawing exchange or a drawing file for AutoCAD. To configure the data format, version, and prototype drawing, click Options.
C&G standard format	a C&G software standard ASCII format file.
C&G with no quotes	a C&G software ASCII format file with no quotes.
CMM file (*.cor, *.lev)	the standard ASCII format files used by the Bureaux of Land Management. The CMM file (*.cor, *.lev) option is provided using an external export filter.
DC file attribute notes (Survey Controller V4)	a Trimble Survey Controller version 4 .dc file that has attributes with values separated by colons (:). Attributes collected using a feature and attribute library are not exported in this format.
Pacsoft format	a Pacsoft ASCII format file.
SDMS format	data in the Survey Data Management System format of AASHTO.
SDRmap coordinates	an SDRmap coordinate file.
Autodesk fieldbook file (*.fbk)	a file in Autodesk’s ‘fieldbook’ format.
TERRAMODEL – P,N,E,Z,20D – file (*.pts)	a basic, comma-delimited format file
TPLAN (LLHE)	a Trimble GPSurvey ASCII format file. The WGS-84 latitude and longitude coordinates are exported with this option.
TRIMMAP Graphics File (*.tgf)	a TRIMMAP (or SDRmap) graphics file.
WILDsoft format	a WILDsoft ASCII format file.


Export Formats - Custom tab
Export Formats − Custom tab

To access the Export / Custom tab:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Custom tab.

You can move custom formats to other tabs. For more information, see Asciiexp.dat file.

Use the Custom tab to:

  export data files in a custom format

  add new custom export formats

  edit existing custom export formats

  delete custom export formats.

The following custom formats are supplied:

  Delimited Points

  Fixed-width Points

  Name,East,North,Elevation,Code

  Name,Latitude,Longtitude,Height (Local Decimal degrees)

  Name,Latitude,Longtitude,Height (WGS-84 Decimal degrees)

  Name,Latitude,Longtitude,Height,Code (Local)

  Name,Latitude,Longtitude,Height,Code (WGS-84)

  Name,North,East,Elev,Lat,Long,Height,Code (Local)

  Name,North,East,Elev,Lat,Long,Height,Code (WGS-84)

  Name,North,East,Elevation,Code

  Point on road

  Points – As staked

  Road – Catch point

  Road – Story board

The user-defined formats appear alphabetical order.

NOTE: The values exported to an ASCII file are always written in standardized form. That is, with no digit grouping symbol (thousands separator) and a dot for the decimal symbol. The Microsoft Windows Control Panel / Regional Settings / Number options are not used.

All custom export formats are written to the Asciiexp.dat file.


Feature and Attribute Library Options dialog

Use this dialog to configure the Trimble Survey Controller version to which you are exporting.

Version

If you select a version earlier than version 7.00, the Export Attributes check box in the Select Feature and Attribute Library Options dialog is unavailable. This is because earlier versions do not support attributes.


AutoCAD Export Options dialog

Use this dialog to configure the AutoCAD version to which you are exporting.

Data format

Select the data output format from the available choices:

  DWG (a binary AutoCAD drawing file)

  ASCII DXF (a standard AutoCAD Data eXchange File)

  Binary DXF (a standard AutoCAD Data eXchange File in binary format)

NOTE: The data format is determined by your (or your customer’s) requirements.

Version

Select the appropriate AutoCAD version for the export file. This is determined by the system to which you export.

Prototype Drawing

Use this field to reference an AutoCAD prototype drawing from which you want to inherit block definitions for use in *.dxf and *.dwg files created by the system.

As Trimble Geomatics Office creates an AutoCAD file, it tries to match up the names of the symbols used in the project with blocks defined in the specified prototype drawing. Any spaces in the symbol names are matched up with underscores in the AutoCAD block names.

When a symbol name matches up with a block name in the prototype drawing, the appropriate block is inserted into the export file with the required scaling and rotation. Any symbols not able to be matched with a block from the prototype drawing are inserted as points. A supplied prototype drawing (Symbols.dxf) includes block definitions for all the default symbols provided with the system.

NOTE: The block definitions in the prototype drawing are interpreted as being 200 units by 200 units where the units are the display units at the time of export. The 200-by-200 definition is to match up with the grid used by the Trimble Symbol and Line Type Editor utility. If you want to build your own prototype drawing with block definitions, make sure that the blocks are based on a 200-by-200 definition to get correct scaling of symbols.

Browse

Click Browse to browse your system and find the AutoCAD files you require.


Define ASCII Export Format dialog

Use this dialog to define ASCII export formats.

Name

Enter the name of the export format. This name appears in the Types list on the Custom tab of the Export dialog. Duplicate names are not allowed.

Null string

Enter the null string for the export format definition. This field is optional. Each time a database field is encountered that has not had a value assigned to it, Trimble Geomatics Office outputs the specified null string within the file format.

NOTE: Some file types may require a particular string such as "99999.99", "*****", or similar. By specifying the setting, you can request Trimble Geomatics Office to use your preference.

Description

Enter a description of the export format. This description appears on the status bar. This field is optional.

Default extension

Enter the file extension for the export format. For example, dat or fbk. This field is optional and if omitted, "*.txt" is assumed.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office specifies the extension in the Save as Type field in the Save As dialog. The file name for the new file can be entered into the File name field. Any files with the appropriate extension in the selected folder are displayed so that they can be overwritten if required. Trimble Geomatics Office automatically assumes the dot in an extension.

Export from

Select one of the primary tables or queries as the source for the exported file(s). The default source is the point records. This lets you export any records from the point table.

Fill Format Automatically

Click Fill Format Automatically to automatically initialize the header and body. For more information, see Fill Format Automatically.

Format header

Enter the text, field code definitions, or both (from the shortcut menu) that Trimble Geomatics Office will use to create any initial fixed part of the export file. This field is optional.

For full details on all the field codes available in the system, see Field Codes − Overview.

To add blank lines into the header definition, press Enter.

Format body

Enter the appropriate field code definition (from the shortcut menu) to indicate what data Trimble Geomatics Office is to export from the database. An output definition must be entered in this field. If the data for a single entity is to be exported over multiple lines, use the definition. To do this, press Enter to begin a new definition line.

NOTE: For more information on all the field codes available in the system, see Field Codes − Overview.

Format footer

Enter (from the shortcut menu) the text, field code definitions, or both that Trimble Geomatics Office will use to create any final fixed part of the export file. This field is optional.

For full details on all the field codes available in the system, see Field Codes − Overview.

To add blank lines into the footer definition, press Enter.

For examples of custom ASCII export, see the topic Define ASCII Export Format − Examples.


Define ASCII Export Format - Examples
Define ASCII Export Format − Examples

See also

These examples show how to create some ASCII export formats, assuming a project has the following points present in it:

Name: 1000	East: 534247.541	North: 263104.807	Elev: 10.118	Code: STN

Name: 1024	East: 534220.249	North: 263104.249	Elev: 10.129	Code: MH

Name: 1025	East: 534222.850	North: 263100.894	Elev: 10.133	Code: TREE

Name: 1026	East: 534222.218	North: 263095.934	Elev: 10.136	Code: TREE

Name: 1027	East: 534224.816	North: 263092.579	Elev: 10.140	Code: POLE

Name: 1028	East: 534228.398	North: 263089.101	Elev: 10.732	Code: FENCE

Name: 1041	East: 534236.948	North: 263084.989	Elev: 11.054	Code: FENCE

Name: 1042	East: 534237.326	North: 263087.964	Elev: 10.982	Code: FENCE

Name: 1087	East: 534243.575	North: 263099.773	Elev: 10.154	Code: MH

Example 1

The export format:

Format header:

File Format Version 1.50

Date: [$System.Date]

Project: [$Project.Name]

Format body:

[Name],[Easting:0.3],[Northing:0.3],[Elevation:0.3],[Feature code]

Format footer:

[$System.About]

This Format body produces the following export file (assuming the appropriate date, Microsoft Windows date format settings and project name):

File Format Version 1.50

Date: 8/11/96

Project: Example

1000,534247.541,263104.807,10.118,STN

1024,534220.249,263104.249,10.129,MH

1025,534222.850,263100.894,10.133,TREE

1026,534222.218,263095.934,10.136,TREE

1027,534224.816,263092.579,10.140,POLE

1028,534228.398,263089.101,10.732,FENCE

1041,534236.948,263084.989,11.054,FENCE

1042,534237.326,263087.964,10.982,FENCE

1087,534243.575,263099.773,10.154,MH

Trimble Geomatics Office, Version 1.50

Example 2

The export format:

No format header

Format body:

[Name:4][Easting:12.3][Northing:12.3][Elevation:12.3] [Feature code]

This Format body produces the following export file:

1000  534247.541  263104.807      10.118 STN

1024  534220.249  263104.249      10.129 MH

1025  534222.850  263100.894      10.133 TREE

1026  534222.218  263095.934      10.136 TREE

1027  534224.816  263092.579      10.140 POLE

1028  534228.398  263089.101      10.732 FENCE

1041  534236.948  263084.989      11.054 FENCE

1042  534237.326  263087.964      10.982 FENCE

1087  534243.575  263099.773      10.154 MH

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office assumes a new line is inserted at the end of the header and the body. To add an additional new line(s), press Enter. The insertion point moves down one line, returns to the left margin, and creates a blank line for you to insert the new text.


SDMS format option

The Survey Data Management System (SDMS) format, defined by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), consists of a special format for survey data. You export data from Trimble Geomatics Office in this format.

This option exports points and their attribute notes. These notes can contain extra point features. These attribute notes are entered into the device running Trimble Survey Controller during a survey. The special attribute note functionality of Trimble Survey Controller helps with this. Additionally, any note records entered with a two character identifier followed by a colon (:) or space then the attribute details are exported to a SDMS file.

For example, a note containing I0:information or I0 information is exported to an SDMS file as I0:information where ‘information’ is the text associated with the SDMS identifier I0.

To have the attribute notes associated with the correct points in the created SDMS file, during export you must choose the selection set automatically created when your Trimble Survey Controller *.dc file was imported into the project. This selection set retains all data (including recorded notes) in the order of survey as found in the .dc file.


External Filters - Overview
External Filters − Overview

Trimble Geomatics Office provides the option to add in external import and export filters. You can write these filters independently of the main system program as Dynamically Linked Libraries (.dll) with specific exported functions. The .dll files must be created as Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) modules. These modules are also referred to as Component Object Module (COM) objects.

The following exported functions must be provided in an external filter:

GetGUID Function

Pascal function declaration:	function GetGUID: TGUID; stdcall; export;

C/C++ function declaration:	GUID __stdcall __export GetGUID()

This function must return the unique component class OLE identifier (GUID - Globally Unique IDentifier) that has been assigned to the program. This unique identifier is obtained using an appropriate program which generates a unique identifier generally based on information such as the computer’s time and date and any network card ID or similar information. The idea is that the ID should be unique in the world and it is hoped this will be achieved by using large enough numbers (they consist of 32 digits) that it is statistically impossible to come up with two random numbers having the same value. An example GUID is 07F750A3-594B-11D1-8E4C-0000C04FCAF9.

Convert Function

Pascal function declaration:	function Convert(const FileName: WideString): WordBool;

C/C++ function declaration:	BOOL __stdcall __export Convert(BSTR FileName)

This is the function that carries out the actual work of the filter. The filter program must be designed to convert data from a source file into appropriate format data stored in a destination file. This function lets Trimble Geomatics Office specify the destination file name for the file to be created by the filter. In the case of an import filter Trimble Geomatics Office expects the filter to present a standard File / Open dialog allowing the selection of the source file. The destination file name, defined by the system for the filter program to create, is passed to the filter in the Convert function. The file created by the import filter program must be in a valid .dc file format (Survey Controller or SDR file format).

With an export filter Trimble Geomatics Office expects the filter to present a standard File / Save dialog allowing the selection of the destination file. Trimble Geomatics Office creates the source file for the filter according to the file format defined in the Format function discussed below. The file name of the source file is passed to the Convert function so that the filter knows which file to work with. Trimble Geomatics Office extracts the data from the database according to the selection set criteria defined for the export operation. The field code definition, as defined in the Format function, controls the format of the data written out to the source file by Trimble Geomatics Office. The export filter program must read the source file, convert the data into the appropriate export format, then write it out to the specified destination file.

GetLongDesc Function

Pascal function declaration:	function GetLongDesc: WideString; safecall;

C/C++ function declaration:	BSTR __stdcall __export GetLongDesc()

This function is used to provide the text which is displayed in the Trimble Geomatics Office status bar when the import or export filter option is highlighted in the Import or Export dialog. The definition of this function is optional and if it is not defined then nothing is displayed on the status bar when the filter option is highlighted.

GetShortDesc Function

Pascal function declaration:	function GetShortDesc: WideString; safecall;

C/C++ function declaration:	BSTR __stdcall __export GetShortDesc()

This function is used to provide the text for the import or export filter name displayed in the Import or Export dialog in Trimble Geomatics Office allowing the selection of the filter.

Format Function

Pascal function declaration:	function Format: WideString; safecall;

C/C++ function declaration:	BSTR __stdcall __export Format()

This function is only required in export filter programs and lets the program specify the format of the source file to be created by Trimble Geomatics Office. The text string returned by this function must consist of valid Trimble Geomatics Office field codes. If there is no Format function defined in an export filter program Trimble Geomatics Office assumes a format of ‘[Name],[Northing],[Easting],[Elevation],[Feature code]’ thus creating a file of comma separated Name, Northing, Easting, Elevation and Feature code values to be read by the export filter.


GPS data files (*.dat) option

A .dat file contains GPS raw data from a GPS receiver. These files can include postprocessed kinematic data and static data. GPS .dat files do not contain any coordinate system information.

You can transfer a .dat file to a Trimble Geomatics Office project from:

  Trimble Survey Controller (with .dc file)

  a Trimble Survey GPS receiver

  a computer

NOTE: If you import a .dat file more than once to the same project, existing occupations in the project database are not selected by default in the DAT Checkin dialog.


RINEX Files Option

Receiver INdependent EXchange format (RINEX) is a standard GPS raw data file format used to exchange files from multiple receiver manufacturers.

To use this format, you need the following files on your computer:

RINEX File	File Extension	Optional
Observation data file	*.obs, *.XXo	−
Navigation message file	*.nav, *.XXn	−
Meterological file	*.met or *.XXm file	These files are optional.
To import RINEX files on your computer to Trimble Geomatics Office, do one of the following:

  Use the Import dialog and select the RINEX files (*.obs, *.??o).

  Use the drag-and-drop functionality.

Select the observation data file(s). If the observation and navigation files do not have the same name, you can match the observation and navigation files in the Navigation File Matching dialog. Navigate to the matching .nav file or select from the Navigation file list.

The DAT Checkin dialog appears where you can check the values in the files before the GPS observations are imported. Make sure that the antenna type and receiver type are not "unknown".

When the RINEX files are transferred and all GPS observations imported to the project database, a selection set is created with the same name as the RINEX file.

When RINEX files are imported into a Trimble Geomatics Office project, you can use Trimble Geomatics Office to process GPS baselines (if you have the Baseline Processing module installed) and use the Timeline module to view the raw GPS observations (if you have the Baseline Processing module installed).


Survey Controller Classes and how they are handled in Trimble Geomatics Office

When points are created in Trimble Survey Controller, they are assigned a point class. When you import points to a project, Trimble Geomatics Office uses this class, and the method used to determine the point’s position to assign a point quality to the point. A recomputation uses the quality to determine the calculated position for the point.

The following table shows the classes given to points by Trimble Survey Controller and how they are handled by Trimble Geomatics Office on import.

Class	Description	What happens on import
Control	A control class is the highest quality you can assign to a point in Trimble Survey Controller.	Import as control coordinates for the point.
Normal	A normal class is given to all measured points apart from staked points. Keyed in points can also be given this class.	Import the observations and coordinates for the point. Coordinates are given a survey quality.
Stake	A stake class is given to points measured during stakeout.	Import observations and stake details for a point. You can view the As Staked details in the Properties window Stakeout tab.
Backsight	A backsight class is given to points defined as a backsight point in the field.	A backsight class is treated the same way as a normal class in Trimble Geomatics Office.
Check	A check class is given to a check observation, or a position keyed in as a duplicate point and stored as a check point.	Import observations with "enabled as check" class.
Deleted	A deleted class is given to a point overwritten or deleted in Trimble Survey Controller.	Points with deleted class are not imported into Trimble Geomatics Office project. A list of the deleted points in the .dc file is found in the report created on import of the file.


Qualities Assigned to Coordinates and Observations From a .dc File using Survey Controller Classes

When GPS positions are stored in Trimble Survey Controller they can be derived from different measurement techniques or from keying in coordinates. The quality given to the point depends on the observation method or the quality given to the point when keyed in.

The following table shows the qualities assigned to coordinates using the Trimble Survey Controller classes.

Coordinate Method	Quality assigned
Keyed in control	Control
Keyed in normal	Survey
RTK fixed	Survey
RTK float	Mapping
L1 code	Mapping
Autonomous	Unknown
WAAS	Mapping
Wide area fixed	Survey
Wide area float	Mapping
RTCM code	Mapping
Copied	Quality of copied point
NOTE: For Trimble Survey Controller .dc files version 7.5 or later, if you used the Here key to determine the position of the base, an Autonomous method is written and the position is imported with an unknown quality. This means all points measured from the base will have an unknown quality.

If you have performed a GPS site calibration and are confident with the results, you can increase the quality of the base to survey, and all points measured from the base will be assigned this quality.

For Trimble Survey Controller .dc file versions earlier than version 7.5, if you use the Here key to determine the position of the base, the base position will be given a Survey quality.

The following table shows the qualities assigned to observations using the Trimble Survey Controller classes.

Observation method	Quality assigned
Conventional	Survey
Laser rangefinder	Mapping
L1 Fixed	Survey
L1 Float	Mapping
L1 Code	Mapping


Importing Leica GSI-16 Files

When importing Leica GSI-16 format files, Trimble Geomatics Office only reads Measurement Blocks, and Rem words associated with these blocks. The import operation uses the specific Words (records) available for station information. The following Word Indices are read and interpreted during the import operation:

Index	Meaning	Index	Meaning
11	Point Id (Measurement block identifier)	82	Point northing
21	Horizontal angle	83	Point elevation
22	Vertical angle	84	Station easting
31	Slope distance	85	Station northing
32	Horizontal distance	86	Station elevation
33	Vertical distance	87	Reflector height
71…79	Remark words (used for codes and notes)	88	Instrument height
81	Point easting
Based on these Word Indices, Trimble recommends that you set up the following station data and measurement data recording masks on your Leica instrument:

Station Data Mask	Measurement Data Mask
Point Id (11)	Point Id (11)
Station easting (84)	Horizontal angle (21)
Station northing (85)	Vertical angle (22)
Station elevation (86)	Slope distance (31)
Instrument height (88)	ppm and prism constant (51)
Code (71)	Reflector height (87)
Note (72)	Code (71)
	Note (72)
NOTE: During import, the software assumes that the first observation recorded after a station record is an observation to the backsight point. The first remark word (71) is interpreted as the point code, and any other remark words (72…79) are interpreted as Note records.


Digital Level Files (*.dat, *.raw) Option

Digital Level files contain data stored in a digital level.

Data files from the following digital levels are supported:

  Trimble DiNi Digital Level

  Leica NA 2002/3003

When a Digital Level file is imported, the Digital Level Import dialog appears.

NOTE: You must transfer data files from a Zeiss DiNi digital level in the M5 format.


NGS Bluebook Export

The NGS Bluebook Export lets you generate standard National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Bluebook files from Trimble Geomatics Office.

Bluebook files are defined by the United States government and are required for surveys that are submitted to the National Spatial Reference System. The rules for these surveys are contained in a blue book, and submitting these surveys is known as "bluebooking".

The NGS Bluebook utility creates the following bluebook files for GPS baselines:

  NGS

  B – project information

  G – baseline information

  SERFIL – an ASCII file containing the station SSN, ID, and names of stations from an existing project

The NGS Bluebook Files dialog uses data associated with the selected set of independent processed baselines in your project. Before you export your NGS files; you must complete all fieldwork, processing, and quality assurance. Once you select baselines and initiate the export, you cannot add any baselines to the Bluebooking dialog without starting the export process again.

NOTE: For a description of the required data for each field of the NGS Bluebook Export dialog, refer to the "Input Formats and Specifications of the National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data Base". The NGS reference is available at: http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/FGCS/BlueBook


NGS Bluebook Files dialog

The NGS Bluebook Export filter lets you generate standard National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Bluebook files from Trimble Geomatics Office.

The NGS Bluebook Files dialog uses data associated with the selected set of independent processed baselines in your project. Before you export your NGS files, you must complete all fieldwork, processing, and quality assurance. Once you select baselines and initiate the export, you cannot add any baselines to the NGS Bluebook Files dialog without starting the export process again.

To access the NGS Bluebook Files dialog:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select NGS Bluebook files.

NOTE: If you have previously saved a bluebooking session, you are asked if you want to load the saved information.

Use the tabs in the NGS Bluebook Export dialog to enter information about the project.

Project tab

This tab contains general information about the project.

Station tab

This tab contains a list of all stations associated with the selected baselines:

  Fill the 4 Character ID and Station SN, using the Auto-Generate buttons. The ID is generated using the first four characters of the station name. The SNs are generated sequentially starting at 0001, or the first available number.

  The State/Country Code column is automatically filled in from information in the Project tab.

  Select the order from the list.

  The Type column automatically defaults to A-Interferometric Satellite Relative Positioning Main Scheme since all bluebooked data is from GPS collection methods.

  Use the SERFIL button to import existing Station 4 Character IDs and SNs, using a SERFIL from a previous project. The SERFIL must contain the station name for each station. This format is slightly different from the NGS SERFIL format, but the NGS can still use the file. The following is the format that must be used:

4 character ID   Station SN    Station Name

COWB   0004   COWBOY

Session Information tab

This tab contains information about each field session from the selected baselines. The alternating colors represent each individual baseline session.

  The Start Time represents the latest start time of all the receivers in the session and may not represent the start time of each individual baseline. The time is to be used only as a reference when matching the sessions to the field sheets.

  The Receiver column is automatically filled with the receiver type and serial number.

  The Antenna column is automatically filled with the antenna type. However, you must enter the serial number. Once each antenna SN is entered, it can be selected from a drop-down list.

  The Antenna Height (Meters/APC L1) column is automatically filled with the true vertical measurement to the L1 phase center, which is computed from the antenna height entered in the field or during check in.

Pre Session Weather and Post Session Weather tab

The Pre and Post Session Weather tabs contain information about the weather for each occupation associated with the selected baselines. The fields are required when performing a B order or above survey. The asterisk is automatically removed from the tab heading when 1st Order survey is selected in the Project tab.

This field …	defaults to …
Dry Bulb	Celsius
Wet Bulb	Celsius
Humidity	Percentage
Pressure	Millibar units
  The Weather Code field is filled by entering the code directly or using the Edit Current Field button.

  The Edit Current Field button lets you view and select the codes from the description of each variable.

  The Copy to Pre- (Post) Session Weather field is used to copy the same data from the Pre- to the Post-Session Weather tab and vice-versa.

Miscellaneous tab

The Miscellaneous tab contains general information about the processing.

Equipment

The Equipment button lets you view, add and edit information about each receiver and antenna. Only the equipment associated with the project is listed.

OK

The OK button closes the NGS Bluebook Files dialog and saves the information in each tab. When you are entering large amounts of data, you can save your work and return to it later.

Export

The Export button is available after all required fields are filled. The Export button lets you enter a name and select a location for each file. The default location is Trimble Geomatics Office\Projects\<Project Name>\Export.

NOTE: As each tab's required fields are completed, the * next to its name is removed. When there are no more fields to complete in the dialog, the Export button becomes available.

NOTE: For a description of the required data for each field of the NGS Bluebook Export dialog, refer to the "Input Formats and Specifications of the National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data Base". The NGS reference is available at: http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/FGCS/BlueBook/


Trimble Data Exchange Format

 How To

The Trimble Data Exchange Format was designed by Trimble Navigation Limited to do the following:

  Transfer survey data between Trimble Geomatics Office projects

  Export survey data to other applications for network adjustments or other geodetic operations

NOTE: Check that your network adjustment software vendor supports this format.

To import or export data using this format, select the Trimble Data Exchange Format option in the Import or Export dialogs.

The following information is stored in an ASCII file:

Stations and coordinates	GPS vectors
Terrestrial observations	Laser observations
Leveling information	Azimuth information
The file is organized into the following sections:

[General]

This section provides general information about the contents of the file, the project it is from, and the units used for various fields.

[Stations]

This section includes the name and coordinates of all the points selected for transfer. Coordinates in this section are always in the local datum. Individual observations are in station records, which include latitude, longitude, northing, and easting. Ellipsoid and orthometric height can also appear in each record.

The station record also contains information about which coordinate components are identified as control, and the feature and point description assigned to the station.

[GPS]

This section includes the GPS vector baselines selected for transfer. Individual observations are in vector records, which include:

From and to station names	Vector components
Covariance information	Antenna heights
Type of processing	Ratio
RMS	Reference variance
Time and date of observations
[Terrestrial]

This section includes the terrestrial observations selected for transfer. Individual observations are in TerrObs records, which include:

Instrument point	Backsight point
Foresight point	Horizontal angle and error
Vertical angle and error	Slope distance and error
Prism constant	Instrument height
Date and time of observation (if available)	Target height
[Laser]

This section includes the laser observations selected for transfer. Individual observations are in LaserObs records, which include:

Instrument point	Magnetic declination
Magnetic azimuth	Slope distance
Vertical angle	Target height
Instrument height	Target point
Date and time of observation (if available)
[Level]

This section includes leveling observations selected for transfer. Individual observations are in LevelObs records, which include:

Points at the start and end of the level run	Delta elevation and error
Distance (if available)	Number of turns (if available)
Date and time of observation (if available)
[Azimuth]

This section includes the azimuth records, which contain individual observations.

NOTE: When you export Trimble Data Exchange Format files from Trimble Total Control, Trimble Geomatics Office imports data from only the keyed-in coordinates section. In this case, coordinates with either control or adjusted coordinate qualities are imported with control quality.


Terramodel Project Files
Terramodel Project Files (*.pro)

Trimble Geomatics Office supports the Terramodel Project file (*.pro) format.

Use Trimble Geomatics Office to import a Terramodel Project file (*.pro) to a Trimble Geomatics Office project:

1.	Select File / Import.

The Import dialog appears.

2.	Select the CAD / ASCII tab.

3.	Select the Terramodel Project files (*.pro) option.

The Open dialog appears.

4.	Select the file to import and click Open.

NOTE: Only points, linework, and layers are imported from Terramodel Project files (*.pro).


TDS Software - Overview

See Also

Trimble Geomatics Office supports files from the following TDS software:

  TDS Survey Pro CE

  TDS 3600 onboard

  TDS 5600 onboard

You can import and export TDS files from your PC, or transfer them directly to and from the TDS software using the Survey Devices import and export options.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office does not support TDS control files. You must import the points from any control files used into the main job before transferring files. For more information, refer to your TDS documentation.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office does not support TDS features and attributes.

TDS Survey Pro CE

Trimble Geomatics Office supports the following files from TDS Survey Pro CE:

Name	Extension	Import	Export	Description
Job	*.job			Contains points and coordinate information. Import a Job file (*.job) when you only want to import points from a TDS Survey Pro CE project.
Raw	*.raw		X	Contains observational information. Import a Raw file (*.raw) when you want to import both points and observations from a TDS Survey Pro CE project.
Description	*.txt	X		Simple text file of feature codes to help you enter point descriptions in TDS Survey Pro CE.
Geoid Grid	*.ggf	X		Separations from the WGS84 reference ellipsoid (TDS Survey Pro CE version 3.5 or later)

To export:

  a road definition (*.job, *.rd5, *.tp5) from RoadLink, refer to the RoadLink Help.

  a DTM (*.dtm) from DTMLink, refer to the DTMLink Help.

For more information about any of these files, refer to your TDS documentation.

Trimble Geomatics Office also provides coordinate system support for all versions of TDS Survey Pro CE software. This includes support for the enhanced geodetic functionality that is available in the TDS Survey Pro CE 3.5 or later, when used with a Trimble GPS receiver. Any file imported from TDS Survey Pro CE contains a full coordinate system definition, identical to the one in a Survey Controller (*.dc) file.

NOTE: GPS observations are only imported from TDS Survey Pro CE 3.5 or later when used with a Trimble GPS receiver. Terrestrial observations from any brand of total station are supported from all versions.

Trimble 3600/5600 TDS

Trimble Geomatics Office supports the following files from the Trimble 3600/5600 TDS software:

Name	Extension	Import	Export	Description
Coordinate	*.cr5			Contains points and coordinate information. Import a Coordinate file (*.cr5) when you only want to import points from a Trimble 3600/5600 TDS project.
Raw	*.rw5		X	Contains observational information. Import a Raw file (*.rw5) when you want to import both points and observations from a Trimble 3600/5600 TDS project.
Description	*.txt	X		Simple text file of feature codes that helps you to enter point descriptions in TDS Survey Pro CE.
To export:

  a road definition (*.cr5, *.rd5, *.tp5) from RoadLink, refer to the RoadLink help.

  a Digital Terrain Model (*.dtm) from DTMLink, refer to the DTMLink help.

  Refer to your TDS documentation for more information about any of these files.

Files imported from Trimble 3600/5600 TDS software do not contain full coordinate system definitions. Files are imported using scale-only coordinate systems, the same as Survey Controller (*.dc) files.

When importing files, Trimble Geomatics Office defines the coordinate system using the scale factor most recently used in the TDS Survey Pro CE job.

NOTE: When importing Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Coordinate files, Trimble Geomatics Office imports the Coordinate (*.cr5) file, and then imports data from the associated Raw file (*.rw5) if it is in the same folder on your computer. If you only want to import coordinates, make sure that a Raw file with the same name as the Coordinate file being imported does not exist in the same folder on your computer. Raw files can also be imported individually.


TDS Survey Pro CE Job Files (*.job)

Trimble Geomatics Office supports data in the TDS Survey Pro CE Job file (*.job) format.

Use Trimble Geomatics Office to:

 Import  a TDS Survey Pro CE Job  file to a Trimble Geomatics Office project.

 Export a Trimble Geomatics Office project to a TDS Survey Pro CE Job file.

You can also transfer files directly to and from the TDS Survey Pro CE software using the Survey Devices export and import options.

To import a TDS Survey Pro CE Job  file:

1.	Select File / Import.

The Import dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Survey Pro CE Job file (*.job) option and click OK.

The Open dialog appears.

4.	Select the file to import and click Open.

NOTE: The TDS Survey Pro CE Job file format contains points and associated coordinates. Use this option when you only want to import points from a TDS Survey Pro CE project.

To export the current Trimble Geomatics Office project to a TDS Survey Pro CE Job file:

1.	Select File / Export.

The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the TDS Survey Pro CE Job file (*.job) option and click OK.

The Save As dialog appears.

4.	Select a folder to save the file to.

5.	Enter a name in the File name field and click Save.

NOTE: If duplicate points exist in the selection being exported, the TDS Survey Pro CE Job file will not be created. Make sure that all points being exported have unique names.


TDS Survey Pro CE Raw Files (*.raw)

Use Trimble Geomatics Office to import a TDS Survey Pro CE Raw file to a Trimble Geomatics Office project. You can also transfer files directly from the TDS Survey Pro CE software using the Survey Devices import option. The TDS Survey Pro CE Raw file format contains all of the information in a Survey Pro CE project. Use this option when you want to import both points and observations from a TDS Survey Pro CE project.

To import a TDS Survey Pro CE Raw file:

1.	Select File / Import.

The Import dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the TDS Survey Pro CE Raw File (*.raw) option and click OK.

The Open dialog appears.

4.	Select the file from a folder that you want to import and click Open.


Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Coord Files (*.cr5)

Use Trimble Geomatics Office to:

 Import a Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Coordinate file to a Trimble Geomatics Office  project.

 Export a Trimble Geomatics Office project to a Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Coordinate file.

You can also transfer files directly to and from the Trimble 3600/5600 TDS software using the Survey Devices export and import options.

To import a Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Coordinate file:

1.	Select File / Import.

The Import dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Trimble 3600/5600 TDS file (*.cr5) option.

The Open dialog appears.

4.	Select the file to import and click Open.

NOTE: When importing Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Coordinate files, Trimble Geomatics Office imports the Coordinate file, then imports the associated Raw Data file (*.rw5) if it is in the same folder on your computer. If the Raw Data file is not in the same folder as the Coordinate file chosen for import, only points are imported.

To export the current Trimble Geomatics Office project to a Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Coordinate file:

1.	Select File / Export.

The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Coord file (*.cr5) option.

4.	Click OK.

The Save As dialog appears.

5.	Select a folder to save the file to.

6.	Enter a name in the File name field and Click Save.

NOTE: If duplicate points exist in the selection being exported, or a point has an alphanumeric name, the Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Coordinate file will not be created. Make sure that all points being exported have unique numeric names.


Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Raw File (*.rw5)

Use Trimble Geomatics Office to Import a Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Raw file to a Trimble Geomatics Office project. You can also transfer files directly to and from the Trimble 3600/5600 TDS software using the Survey Devices export and import options. The Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Raw file format contains nearly all of the information in a Survey Pro CE project. Use this option when you want to import both points and observations from a Trimble 3600/5600 TDS project.

To import a Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Raw file:

1.	Select File / Import.

The Import dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Trimble 3600/5600 TDS Raw file (*.cr5) option.

The Open dialog appears.

4.	Select the file to import and click Open.


TDS Description files (*.txt)

The TDS Survey Pro CE and Trimble 3600/5600 TDS software uses Description files to automatically enter descriptions for points that are stored in a job. For more information on description files, refer to your TDS documentation.

Use Trimble Geomatics Office to:

 Export a description file (*.txt) from Feature Code Editor.

 Export an existing description file (*.txt) to either the TDS Survey Pro CE or Trimble 3600/5600 TDS software.

 Export a description file (*.txt) from a Feature Code Library to either the TDS Survey Pro CE or Trimble 3600/5600 TDS software.

To export a description file from the Feature Code Editor, refer to the Feature Code Editor Help.

To export an existing description file to either the TDS Survey Pro CE or Trimble 3600/5600 TDS software:

1.	Select File / Export.

The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Description file to TDS Device (*.txt) option and click OK.

The Select dialog appears.

4.	Select the file that you want to export and click Open.

The Save as dialog appears.

5.	Select a TDS device and click Open.

The file is exported.

To export a new description file from a Feature Code Library to either the TDS Survey Pro CE or Trimble 3600/5600 TDS software:

1.	Select File / Export.

The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Feature and Attribute Library to TDS Device (*.txt) option and click OK.

The Select Feature and Attribute Library dialog appears.

4.	Select the library to export and click OK.

The Save as dialog appears.

5.	Select a TDS device and click Open.

The file is exported.


Zeiss - Overview

Trimble Geomatics Office supports M5 files from the following Zeiss instruments:

  Trimble 3300

  Trimble 3600 Elta

  Trimble 5600 Elta

  Trimble Elta GPS Controller

  Trimble DiNi Digital Level

You can import or export M5 files from your PC, or transfer files directly to and from the instrument using the Survey Devices import and export options.

Zeiss files are supported by Trimble Geomatics Office as follows:

File format	Supported
Elta M5  (English and German languages only)	Yes
Rec 500, R4 and R5	No.  The Trimble Geomatics Office CD includes a program for converting between M5 and Rec 500 file formats if necessary.
Elta Codelist	No

Export

Trimble Geomatics Office exports grid point names, codes, descriptions, and coordinates to M5 files. Other data, such as observations, is not exported.

NOTE: Coordinates in the exported file are written with the same number of decimal places that the Trimble Geomatics Office project uses, but with a maximum of three decimal points for the Trimble 3300 instrument and four decimal points for the Trimble 3600/5600 Elta and Trimble Elta GPS Controller instruments.

Import

NOTE: The M5 file format does not support full coordinate system definitions. Files are imported using scale-only coordinate systems, which is the same as importing a scale-only coordinate system in a Survey Controller (*.dc) file. You can key in a scale factor when you define the import coordinate system in Trimble Geomatics Office.

Units

The M5 format has units of "m" (for both meters and Namibian Meters) or "ft" (for both International Feet and US Survey Feet).

When exporting to or importing from an M5 file, if the project and the instrument are not using the same units, Trimble Geomatics Office assumes that "m" in the M5 file is meters, and "ft" is International Feet.

Trimble DiNi Digital Level

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office does not export to the Trimble DiNi digital level instrument.

For information about importing from a Trimble DiNi digital level instrument, see the Digital Level Files (*.dat, *.raw) import option.


Trimble 3300/3600/5600 Elta M5 files (*.dat)

Use Trimble Geomatics Office to:

  Import Trimble 3300/3600/5600 Elta M5 files (*.dat) to a Trimble Geomatics Office project.

  Export a Trimble Geomatics Office project to a Trimble 3300/3600/5600 Elta M5 Coordinate file (*.dat).

You can also transfer files directly to and from the Trimble 3300, 3600 Elta or 5600 Elta onboard software via the Survey Devices export and import options.

Make sure that the M5 File Options for Trimble 3300/3600/5600 Elta M5 files (*.dat) are configured before importing or exporting Elta M5 files.

To import Elta M5 files (*.dat):

1.	Select File / Import.

The Import dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Trimble 3300/3600/5600 Elta M5 files (*.dat) option.

4.	Click Options to open the M5 Files dialog and configure the file.

5.	Click OK to accept the settings and return to the Export dialog.

6.	Click OK.

The Open dialog appears.

7.	Select the file to import and click Open.

NOTES:

 	 Local (relative) coordinates (for example, "neh" or "xyz") in the M5 file are converted to absolute coordinates when you import.

  	After importing an M5 file, all prism constants appear in Trimble Geomatics Office as "?". To change this, in the prism constant field of the properties window, enter the difference between the prism constant entered in the field and the actual prism constant. For example, if you entered a prism constant of "20", and the actual prism constant is "5", enter "–15".

  	Trimble Geomatics Office does not support orthogonal stakeout deltas. These are converted to Polar stakeout deltas when imported. Trimble recommends that you configure the instrument to store grid coordinate stakeout deltas only.

  	Trimble Geomatics Office does not support horizontal angles increasing left. Do not use this setting on the instrument.

Instrument Configuration

When importing meaned 2-face observations from a Trimble 3600/5600 Elta instrument, make sure that the instrument is configured to store Single Values only. If both Single Values and Average are selected, Trimble Geomatics Office will calculate incorrect values. Also, if only Average is selected, Trimble Geomatics Office shows meaned observations as Face 1 observations.

Trimble Geomatics Office assumes that the Trimble 3600/5600 Elta instruments always have atmospheric corrections turned on. Do not turn off these corrections on the instrument.

You must use the R-MC storage option on the Trimble 3600/5600 Elta instruments (when possible) and MEM/3 storage on the Trimble 3300 instrument to ensure that that you have both coordinates and observation data for your calculations.

Stationing

To ensure that Trimble Geomatics Office correctly interprets data, before measuring, always perform a stationing routine on the instrument.

Backsight records that were deleted from the Station setup are still imported into Trimble Geomatics Office. Disable these observations through the Properties window.

Trimble Geomatics Office does not support multiple backsights. When multiple backsight points are measured in the stationing routine, Trimble Geomatics Office will use the last point as the backsight.

Unsupported Elta Routines

The following Elta instrument routines output special data which is not supported by Trimble Geomatics Office. However, in most situations Trimble Geomatics Office will still import the observations from these routines:

  Vertical Plane

  Area

  Connecting Distances

  Transformations

  Roadline Lite

  Multiple Rounds

  3D Plane

To export the current Trimble Geomatics Office project to an Elta M5 file (*.dat):

1.	Select File / Export.

The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Highlight the Trimble 3300/3600/5600 Elta M5 files (*.dat) option.

4.	Click Options to open the M5 File Options dialog  and configure the file.

5.	Click OK to accept the settings and return to the Export dialog.

6.	Click OK.

The Save As dialog appears.

7.	Select a folder to save the file to.

8.	Enter a name in the File name field and click Save.


Trimble Elta GPS Controller M5 files (*.dat)

In Trimble Geomatics Office, you can:

  Import Elta GPS Controller M5 files to a Trimble Geomatics Office project.

  Export from a Trimble Geomatics Office project to an Elta GPS Controller M5 Coordinate file.

You can also transfer files directly to and from the Trimble Elta GPS Controller software via the Survey Devices export and import options.

Make sure that you configure the M5 File Options for Trimble Elta GPS Controller M5 files before importing or exporting Elta GPS Controller M5 files.

To import Elta GPS Controller M5 files:

1.	Select File / Import.

The Import dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Trimble Elta GPS Controller M5 files (*.dat) option.

4.	Click Options to open the M5 File Options dialog and configure the file.

5.	Click OK to accept the settings and return to the Import dialog.

6.	Click OK.

The Open dialog appears.

7.	Select the file to import and click Open.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office imports all coordinates in the M5 file as grid points only. To ensure that the coordinates in Trimble Geomatics Office match the coordinates on the Trimble Elta GPS controller, you must perform a calibration (transformation) in the field at the start of your survey.

To export the current Trimble Geomatics Office project to an Elta GPS Controller M5 file:

1.	Select File / Export.

The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Highlight the Trimble Elta GPS Controller M5 files (*.dat) option.

4.	Click Options to open the M5 File Options dialog and configure the file.

5.	Click OK to accept the settings and return to the Export dialog.

6.	Click OK.

The Save As dialog appears.

7.	Select the folder to save the file to.

8.	Enter a name in the File name field and click Save.


M5 File Options dialog

Use the M5 File Options dialog to configure the following files to import and export:

  Trimble 3300/3600/5600 Elta M5 files

  Trimble Elta GPS Controller M5 files

Specify the instrument type, file markings, coordinate settings, and duplicate point settings  (for importing).

To access the options dialog:

1.	Select File / Export (or Import).

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select one of the following options:

  Trimble 3300/3600/5600 Elta M5 files (*.dat)

  Trimble Elta GPS Controller M5 files (*.dat)

4.	Click Options.

File markings

Select one of the following:

  Default. (Trimble recommends this option)

Click the Advanced button to view the Default option’s Line format settings and Format preview

NOTE: The Default values are different depending on the instrument type you have selected.

  User-defined

The User defined option lets you change the line format settings and view the changes in the Format preview section. Select User defined, and click Advanced. In the Advanced marking options dialog:

a.	Specify the position of the start character for point name, code, and description.

b.	Specify the field widths of the point name, code, and description.

c.	Enter a Markings number.

NOTE: If the user-defined line format settings are invalid, Trimble Geomatics Office requests valid configuration settings.

Coordinate settings

From the Coordinate order and Elevation drop down lists, select the coordinate order and coordinate labels in the file to be imported or exported.

NOTES:

The available fields depend on the Instrument type you select.

Point names, codes, and descriptions that are longer than the available space are truncated on export.

Points with alphanumeric names are not exported to the Trimble 3300 instrument.


Points - Overview
Points − Overview

Points are the main focus of a Trimble Geomatics Office project. Points are added to the project whenever you import data, or add a point using the Insert Point dialog or the Insert Points by Azimuth and Distance dialog.

Points are visible in both the Survey view and the Plan view. To view the details of a point, select it and open the Properties window.

A point has a calculated position, which is determined by a recomputation. This position is the best position for the point using any keyed-in coordinates and observations to the point.

In the Survey view, points appear as dots, with any observations between them shown. In the Plan view, points display according to their point style. The database allows points with duplicate names.


Insert Points dialog

Use this dialog to insert points into the database. The fields change depending on which option you choose in the Coordinate Type field.

To access it, do one of the following:

  From the Survey view, select Insert / Points.

  From the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Points.

  Click the Insert Points tool [image].

Insert

Click Insert to insert the point to the database. The dialog remains available to add another (new) point.

NOTE: When adding the first grid or GPS position to a project with an undefined default (Transverse Mercator) projection, Trimble Geomatics Office presents an appropriate dialog to help you correctly initialize the projection.

Close

Click Close to finish inserting points and exit the dialog.

Name

Enter a name using the keyboard. You can enter a name of up to 16 characters in length.

You cannot use the following characters in names:

  braces {}

  square brackets []

  round brackets ()

  percentage sign %

  equals sign =

  quotes " " or ' '

NOTE: When inserting points in succession, the names are automatically incremented if the previously entered point name ends in a number.

NOTE: To set the default point name in the Project Properties dialog, select the Units and Format tab and then use the Start auto point name from field.

Coordinate details group

For each coordinate component (horizontal, elevation, height) select the appropriate quality. These qualities are used by a recomputation to determine the best position for the point.

The Coordinate details group changes depending on whether you select the WGS-84, Grid, or Local option in this dialog. Each different Coordinate details group represents a coordinate view.

If you selected the Grid option, the following fields appear:

Northing	Use field fill-in or enter a value from the keyboard. If you use field fill-in, the Northing and Easting fields are filled in with the position where you clicked.
Easting	Use field fill-in or enter a value from the keyboard. If you use field fill-in, the Northing and Easting fields are filled in with the position where you clicked.

If you selected the WGS-84 or Local option, and have the Display WGS-84 as setting (in the Units and Format tab of the Project Properties dialog) set to L,L,H, then the following fields appear:

Latitude	Use field fill-in or enter a value from the keyboard. If you use field fill-in, the Latitude and Longitude fields are filled in with the position where you clicked.
Longitude	Use field fill-in or enter a value from the keyboard. If you use field fill-in, the Latitude and Longitude fields are filled in with the position where you clicked.

The following fields appear with any option:

Elevation	Enter a value from the keyboard, or click an existing point. If you click on an existing point, the Elevation value for that point will be filled in the Elevation field.
Height	Use field fill-in or enter a value from the keyboard. If you click an existing point, the Height value for that point will be filled in the Height field.
TIP: To place a point along an observation line in the Survey view or any linework in the Plan view, hold Ctrl while using field fill-in. You can use field fill-in to get an approximate coordinate and then edit this value.

NOTE: If you have the Display WGS-84 as setting in the Units and Format tab of the Project Properties dialog set to X,Y,Z; then the X,Y,Z fields appear. Use field fill-in or enter a value from the keyboard. If you use field fill-in, the fields are filled in with the position where you clicked.

Coordinate Type

In this field, select the option (WGS-84, Local, Grid) that you want to use to save the coordinates in the database. Selecting the coordinate type changes the coordinate view to the same setting as the coordinate type.

NOTE: If you want to edit fields in the Coordinate details group, the coordinate type and coordinate view settings must be the same.

CAD details group

This group contains all the fields for a point that are visible in the Plan view.

Feature code

Enter a value from the keyboard, or click on an existing point. If you click on an existing point, the Feature Code value for that point will be filled in the Feature Code field.

Description

Enter a value from the keyboard, or click an existing point. If you click on an existing point, the Description value for that point will be filled in the Description field.

Layer

Do one of the following:

  Select an existing layer from the list.

  Enter a new layer using the keyboard. The New Layer dialog appears.

  Click an existing point. If you click on an existing point, the Layer value for that point will be filled in the Layer field.

Point style

Do one of the following:

  Select an existing point style from the list.

  Enter a new point style using the keyboard. The Create Point Style dialog appears.

  Click an existing point. If you click on an existing point, the Point style value for that point will be filled in the Point style field.


Points by Azimuth and Distance command

Use this command to insert points by an azimuth and distance from a known point.

To access it, select Insert / Points by Azimuth and Distance.

The Insert Points by Azimuth and Distance dialog appears.


Insert Points by Azimuth and Distance dialog

Use this dialog to insert points by an azimuth and distance from a known point.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Points by Azimuth and Distance.

  In the Plan view, click the Add Points by Azimuth and Distance [image] tool.

NOTE: The qualities for the new point are the same as the From point. If a delta elevation is not specified, the Elevation and Height fields for the new point will be unknown.

Point name

Enter a point name using the keyboard. You can enter a name of up to 16 characters in length.

You cannot use the following characters in names:

  braces {}

  square brackets []

  round brackets ()

  percentage sign %

  equals sign =

  quotes " " or ‘ '

From Point

Enter an existing point name using the keyboard, or click an existing point.

Azimuth

This field depends on the azimuth type setting. Enter an azimuth value in the format set for the Angle format (degrees) in the Units and Format tab.

Distance

This field depends on the setting for the Display distance as field in the Units and Format tab. If you do not specify a unit, the current units for the project are used; however you can specify m, ift (international feet), or sft (US Survey feet).

Delta elevation

This value is added to the elevation of the From point to derive an elevation for the new point. A positive change means the new point has a greater elevation than the From point. Enter a negative number if the new point has a smaller elevation than the From point. If you do not specify a unit, the current units for the project are used, however you can specify m, ift (international feet), or sft (US Survey feet). If you do not specify a delta elevation, the elevation of the new point will be null.

Azimuth Type

Use this group to select the grid or normal section forward azimuth.

 Grid − Select this option to display the Grid azimuth.

 Normal section fwd − Select this option to display the Normal section forward azimuth.

Method

Use this group to select how the software prepares the dialog after a point has been inserted.

  Sequential − When a new point is added, this option inserts the new point’s name into the From point field. Use this option to enter a traverse.

  Radial − Keeps the From point name the same. Use this option to enter in radiations to points from the same point.

Join

Use this check box to draw a line between the "from" point and the new point. The line is added to the current layer and is drawn in the default line style for the current layer. It is only visible in the Plan view.


Insert Azimuth dialog

An azimuth is used to orient terrestrial observations. Use this dialog to insert an azimuth between two points.

To access it:

  In the Survey view, select Insert / Azimuth.

From point and To point

In these fields, use the keyboard or field fill-in to enter an existing point name.

Azimuth

If you enter existing "from" and "to" points, then a calculated azimuth value is shown. If necessary, you can edit this value and the azimuth's quality. The azimuth displayed in this field depends on the azimuth view you specify below.

If an azimuth already exists for your point pair, you are asked if you want to overwrite it.

Azimuth type

Use this field to determine how the azimuth is saved in the database; that is, as a grid or normal section forward azimuth.

Grid/Normal Section Fwd

Select one of these options to determine how your coordinates are displayed in the Insert Azimuth dialog; that is, the azimuth view.

NOTE: If you want to edit the fields in this dialog, then the azimuth type and the azimuth view must be the same.

NOTE: If the "to" point does not have a coordinate, the conversion between the grid azimuth and the normal section forward azimuth cannot be calculated, so the azimuth is displayed as Null.

Insert

Use this button to insert the azimuth into the project. The azimuth is displayed between the two defining points, and with an arrow indicating the direction.

Close

Use this button to close the dialog.


    Lines command

Use this command to insert lines into the database.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Lines.

The Insert Linework dialog appears with the Line tab selected.


    Insert Linework dialog

Use this dialog to insert new linework (line, curve, or arc) into the database.

To access it, do one of the following:

Lines	Select the Insert Lines tool [image].   Select Insert / Lines.
Curves	Select the Insert Curves tool [image].    Select Insert / Curves.
Arcs	Select the Insert Arcs tool [image].    Select Insert / Arcs.

The Insert Linework dialog appears with the appropriate tab selected.

Use field fill-in or enter the details from the keyboard to complete the dialog. To quickly add linework, double-click field fill-in while you are in the To Point field.

You can change the linework type at any time. In this case, it is possible to join sequences of lines, curves, arcs, or any combination.

You can add three types of linework into the database:

  lines

  arcs

  curves

Insert

Click Insert to add linework to the project and keep the dialog open to add new linework.

The "from" point value becomes the "to" point value ready for the next piece of linework.


Lines - Overview
    Lines − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

You can insert lines between points in Trimble Geomatics Office. Insert lines in your project to define line boundaries (for example fence lines, buildings, and pipelines).

Lines appear in the graphics window when you view your project in the Plan view. To view the properties of the line, select the line and open the Properties window.

Lines are displayed according to their line style. You can use the Trimble line styles or create your own.

Lines can be exported in some formats (for example the AutoCAD and TRIMMAP formats).


Arcs - Overview
    Arcs − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

You can create arcs to display smooth circular arcs between points.

Arcs appear in the graphics window when you view your project in the Plan view. To view the properties of the arc, select the arc and open the Properties window.

Arcs are displayed according to their line style. You can use the Trimble line styles or create your own.

Arcs are exported in some formats (for example the AutoCAD and TRIMMAP formats).


Curves - Overview
    Curves − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

Insert curves to create curves of best fit between points. Use curves to define boundaries that are not straight lines (for example water courses or tracks).

Curves appear in the graphics window when you view your project in the Plan view.

Curves are displayed according to their line style. You can use the Trimble line styles or create your own.

Each time you insert a curve from a point which is used in another curve, Trimble Geomatics Office re-calculates the existing curve to ensure a smooth curve is displayed.

Curves are exported in some formats (for example the AutoCAD and TRIMMAP formats).


Insert Linework dialog - Line tab
    Insert Linework dialog − Line tab

Use this dialog to insert lines into the database.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Lines.

  Select the Insert Lines tool [image].

The Insert Linework dialog appears with the Line tab selected.

From Point

Do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in to select the first point you want to use to define the line.

  Enter the point name for the first point you want to use to define the line.

To Point

Do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in to select the second point you want to use to define the line.

  Enter the point name for the second point you want to use to define the line.

Layer

Do one of the following:

  Select the layer into which you want the line added.

  Enter a new layer name to create a new layer. The New Layer dialog appears.

Line style

Select the line style you want to use to display the line. The available styles are the line styles in the CAD Styles dialog.

Insert

Click Insert to insert the line. The point selected in the To Point field is selected in the From Point field by default. You can change this if necessary.

Close

Click Close to stop inserting lines.


    Arcs command

Use this command to insert arcs into the database.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Arcs.

  Select the Insert Arc tool [image].

The Insert Linework dialog appears with the Arc tab selected.


Insert Linework dialog - Arc tab
    Insert Linework dialog − Arc tab

Use this dialog to insert arcs into the database.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Arcs.

  Select the Insert Arc tool [image].

The Insert Linework dialog appears with the Arc tab selected.

From Point

Do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in and click the appropriate point.

  Use the keyboard to enter the point name.

To Point

Do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in and click the appropriate point.

  Use the keyboard to enter the point name.

Center Point

To use an existing point as the center of the arc, do one of the following:

  Enter an existing point name.

  Use field fill-in to select an existing point.

The coordinates for the point are copied to the Center Northing and Center Easting fields.

Center Northing, Center Easting

To use coordinates as the center of the arc, use field fill-in to click on a location in the graphics window. The coordinates are copied to these fields.

NOTE: If you enter both a center point and center coordinates, the center point is used.

Small Arc

Select the True option if you want to create a small arc. Otherwise, select False. There are always two possible arcs between two points, which together define a circle. This setting defines which arc you want to draw. This is explained in the following figure:

NOTE: Center of arc is either the center point of a straight line between the 2 points, or the coordinates from the Center Northing and Center Easting fields.

Layer

Do one of the following:

  Select the layer into which you want the arc added.

  Enter a new layer name to create a new layer. The New Layer dialog appears.

Line Style

Select the line style you want to use to display the arc. The available styles are the arc styles in the CAD Styles dialog.

Insert

Click Insert to insert the arc. The point selected in the To Point field is selected in the From Point field by default. You can change this if necessary.

Close

Click Close to stop inserting arcs.


    Curves command

Use this command to insert curves into the database.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Curves.

  Select the Insert Curve tool [image].

The Insert Linework dialog appears with the Curve tab selected.


Insert Linework dialog - Curve tab
    Insert Linework dialog − Curve tab

Use this dialog to insert curves into the database.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Curves.

  Select the Insert Curve tool [image].

The Insert Linework dialog appears with the Curve tab selected.

From Point

Do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in and click the appropriate points.

  Use the keyboard to enter the point name(s).

To Point

Do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in and click the appropriate points.

  Use the keyboard to enter the point name(s).

Entry Tangent, Exit Tangent

To automatically enter the tangent values based on the points used to define the curve, leave the values as <Automatic>. You can enter your own tangent values if necessary.

Billow

Enter a value between 0 and 1. The Billow defines how much width there is in the curve.

The higher the billow, the larger the curve width.

Layer

Do one of the following:

  Select the layer into which you want the curve inserted.

  Enter a new layer name to create a new layer. The New Layer dialog appears.

Line Style

Select the line style you want to use to display the curve. The available styles are the line styles in the CAD Styles dialog.

Insert

Click Insert to insert the curve. The point selected in the To Point field is selected in the From Point field by default. You can change this if necessary.

Close

Click Close to stop inserting curves.


    Text command

Use this command to open the Insert Text dialog.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Text.

  Click the Insert Text tool [image].


    Insert Text dialog

Use this dialog to insert new text into the database.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Text.

  Click the Insert Text tool [image].

Text expression

Enter the text that you want to appear. To use field codes (for example, the project title) right-click and from the shortcut menu, select Fields.

Northing

To enter the Northing value for the location of the text, do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in by clicking a location in the graphics window.

  Enter the Northing value using the keyboard.

Easting

To enter the Easting value for the location of the text, do one of the following:

  Use field fill-in by clicking on a location in the graphics window.

  Enter the Easting value using the keyboard.

Orientation

Enter an orientation for the text entity. If you do not specify an orientation, the text is displayed horizontally across the window.

Anchor type

Specify where the text is located with respect to the Northing and Easting values. Select a value from the list.

Layer

Select the layer that you want to add text to from the list. To enter text in a new layer, type a new name. The New Layer dialog appears.

Text style

Select the text style for the text entity from the list. If you want to use the default text style set for the layer to which you are adding the text, select the <By Layer> option.

To edit and create text styles, select Edit / Styles.

Insert

Click Insert to add the text to the project and keep the dialog open to add more text.


Text - Overview
Text − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

You can add text in a project. For example, add text to describe figures, or to display project headings.

Text appears in the graphics window. To view the properties of the text, select the text and open the Properties window. You can also drag text to a new location in the graphics window, or rotate the text.

Text is exported in some formats (for example the AutoCAD and TRIMMAP formats).


Annotations - Overview
    Annotations − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

Annotations are text associated with entities (points, lines, and arcs). The text that appears is defined by an annotation template.

Annotation templates define:

  what is annotated

  the position of the annotation in relation to the entity

Annotation templates can contain combinations of user-defined text and field codes. Field codes are expanded whenever the field being annotated changes. For example, if a point is annotated with its elevation, and the elevation for the point changes, the annotation is updated.

Annotations are stored in the project.

Annotation templates

Trimble supplies some predefined annotation templates for you. If you process feature codes, and the feature and attribute library contains annotation templates, they are added to this annotation templates list. As the annotation templates from the feature and attribute library do not have a text style setting, the standard text style is used by default when the annotation templates are added to the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

Adding annotations

To add annotations, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Annotations

  Select Edit / Annotation Templates. Click New.

  Use feature code processing to annotate entities. For more information, see the Feature and Attribute Editor Help.

NOTE: To edit existing annotations, use the Properties window.


    Annotations command

Use this command to annotate the selected points, lines, or arcs.

To access it, select Insert / Annotations.

The Annotate dialog appears.


    Annotate dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to annotate the selected points, lines, or arcs.

To access it, select Insert / Annotations.

The insertion position for annotations of paper sized entities is determined with reference to the entity dimension and the plot scale set in the File / Sheet Setup dialog. A clearance of one third of the character height is added between the annotation and the annotated entity.

Annotation template

Select a template from the list.

Retain existing annotations

Select this check box to retain existing annotations that have been assigned to the entities about to be annotated. The new annotations are added in addition to the existing ones, even if they are at the same location.

TIP: You can use this facility to provide multiple annotations for entities separated into different layers in the Annotation Template dialog.

If you clear this check box, annotations assigned to the entities about to be annotated are removed from the database before the new annotation is added.

Annotate

There are two ways to annotate entities:

Selection	Select this option to annotate the selected entities.
Whole database	Select this option to annotate all entities.
These buttons are unavailable when nothing is selected. In this case, all entities are annotated.

Remove

To remove all annotations from selected entities, do one of the following:

  Click Remove.

  Select the annotations and choose Edit / Delete.

Templates

Click Templates to display the Annotation Templates dialog. Use this dialog to select the Annotation templates you want to create, modify, or delete. For more information, see Annotation Templates dialog.


    Annotation Templates dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to manage annotation templates.

To access it:

1.	Select Insert / Annotations.

2.	Click Templates.

An annotation template defines the style, position, and content of one or more annotations. Once assigned, each annotation is a discrete piece of text information independent of the annotation template. Annotations are stored in the project.

Trimble Geomatics Office uses field codes to specify the values the annotation shows. An annotation is live—any field codes are re-expanded whenever the parent entity changes.

Annotation templates

This list contains all of the annotation templates currently in the project.

To modify or delete an existing annotation template, highlight the appropriate template name.

New

Click New to create a new annotation template. The Annotation Template dialog appears.

Edit

Click Edit to modify an existing annotation template. The Annotation Template dialog appears.

Delete

Click Delete to delete the selected Annotation template. This deletes it from the project.


    Annotation Template dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use the tabs in this dialog to configure the annotation template being created or modified.

To access it:

1.	Do one of the following:

  Select Insert / Annotations. Click Templates.

  Select Edit / Annotation Templates.

The Annotation Templates dialog appears.

2.	Click New or Edit.

Use the four tabs to define the annotation template:

  Settings

  Points

  Lines

  Arcs


Annotation Template dialog - Settings tab
    Annotation Template dialog − Settings tab

 Overview and More Information

Use the Settings tab to edit the general settings for the annotation template.

To access it:

1.	Select Insert / Annotations.

2.	Click Templates.

3.	Click New or Edit.

4.	Select the Settings tab.

Name

Enter a name to view or rename the current name of the template.

Text style

Define the text style for the annotation.

To define text styles for the annotation, select Edit / Styles from the Plan view. If you select the <By Layer> option, the text style is inherited by the text style setting for the layer to which the annotation is added.

To set up layer defaults, select Edit / Layers from the Plan view.

Point annotation orientation

Enter the Point annotation orientation you require. You can use any orientation from 00°00'00" to 360°00'00". The default is 90°00'00".

Layer

Place in	To place the annotations in a specified layer, use this option. You can either select from the list of existing layers or enter a new layer name. If you enter a new layer name, this layer is automatically created when the template is applied.

Place in the current layer

To place the annotations in the current layer, use this option. The current layer is displayed in the Layer Selection tool in the Plan view, and the Layers dialog.

Place in the annotated entity's layer

To place annotations in the annotated entity's layer, use this option.


Annotation Template dialog - Points tab
    Annotation Template dialog − Points tab

 Overview and More Information

Use the Points tab to define annotations for points, when points are annotated using this template.

To access it:

1.	Select Insert / Annotations.

2.	Click Templates.

3.	Click New or Edit.

4.	Select the Points tab.

The annotation text in each of the four positions (Left, On, Right, Floating) can have a maximum of 100 alphanumeric characters. The values in each position can consist of user-defined text and field codes. The field codes are used to extract annotation details from the database. For example, the field code ‘[name]’ is used to annotate a point with its name—in this case to the right of the point.

You can annotate a point with any combination of four default positions. To move an annotation from a default position, use the mouse to drag the annotation to a more suitable location. The annotation is still linked to the point.

Location	The annotation appears:

Left	to the left of the point.

On	on the point.

Right	to the right of the point.

Floating	in a position clear of the point but linked to the point.


Annotation Template dialog - Lines tab
    Annotation Template dialog − Lines tab

Use the Lines tab to define annotations for lines when lines are annotated using this template.

To access it:

1.	Select Insert / Annotations.

2.	Click Templates.

3.	Click New or Edit.

4.	Select the Lines tab.

The annotation text in each of the seven positions (see below) can be up to a maximum of 100 alphanumeric characters. The values in each location can consist of user-defined text and field codes. The field codes are used to extract annotation details from the database. For example, the field code ‘[azimuth]’ is used to annotate a line with its azimuth value (in this case above center of the line) and the field code ‘[distance]’ to annotate a line with its distance value (in this case below center of the line).

You can annotate a line with any combination of seven default positions. To move an annotation from a default position, use the mouse to drag the annotation to a more suitable location. The annotation is still linked to the line.

Location	The annotation appears:

Above left	above and at the left end of the line.

Above center	above and in the center of the line.

Above right	above and at the right end of the line.

Below left	below and at the left end of the line.

Below center	below and in the center of the line.

Below right	below and at the right end of the line.

Floating	in a position clear of, but linked to, the line.


Annotation Template dialog - Arcs tab
    Annotation Template dialog − Arcs tab

Use the Arcs tab to define annotations for arcs, when arcs are annotated using this template.

To access it:

1.	Select Insert / Annotations.

2.	Click Templates.

3.	Click New or Edit.

4.	Select the Arcs tab.

The annotation text in each of the seven positions (see below) can have a maximum of 100 alphanumeric characters. The values in each location can consist of user-defined text and field codes. The field codes are used to extract annotation details from the database. For example, the field code ‘[length]’ to annotate an arc with its length value (in this case above center of the arc) and the field code ‘[Radius]’ to annotate an arc with its radius value (in this case below center of the arc).

You can annotate an arc with any combination of seven default positions. To move an annotation from a default position, use the mouse to drag the annotation to a more suitable location. The annotation is still linked to the arc.

Location	The annotation appears:

Above left	above and at the left end of the arc.

Above center	above and in the center of the arc.

Above right	above and at the right end of the arc.

Below left	below and at the left end of the arc.

Below center	below and in the center of the arc.

Below right	below and at the right end of the arc.

Floating	in a position clear of, but linked, to the arc.


Points command

Use this command to insert new points into the database.

To access this command, select Insert / Point.

The Insert Point dialog appears.


Adding Entities to the Project

You can add entities into the project from within Trimble Geomatics Office. An entity is defined as a point, line, arc, curve, annotation, or text. You can add all of these entity types using the Insert menu in Plan view. You can also add points in the Survey view using the Insert menu.

For information about each entity type, use the following links:

  points

  lines

  arcs

  annotations

  text


 	Linework for Current Observations command

Use this command to create CAD linework for selected observation types. To access it, from the Plan view, select Insert / Observation Lines.

The Insert Linework for Observations dialog appears.


 	Insert Linework for Current Observations dialog

Use this dialog to create CAD lines for all observations in the project.

To access it, from the Plan view, select Insert / Linework for Current Observations.

Observation type

Displays the observation type. Possible types are:

RTK Vectors
PostProcessed Vectors	Static, FastStatic and Postprocessed Kinematic
Terrestrial Observations	Conventional, Laser Rangefinder and Reduced
CAD Layer

Select the layer to add lines to the observation type. The lines are drawn using the default line style for the layer you select. If you enter a new layer using the keyboard, the New Layer dialog appears.


Project Properties - Overview
Project Properties − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog
Overview

The properties of a project contain all of the project-wide settings (for example, the coordinate system and display units). You can change them at any time. When you change a project property, the project is updated to reflect the change. Some project properties can change project data (for example, changing the coordinate system). Therefore, be careful when you change a project property that changes existing data.

You cannot undo any changes to a project’s properties.


Project Properties dialog

Use this dialog to configure the project-wide settings.

To access it:

  Select File / Project Properties.

The Project Properties dialog has the following tabs:

  Coordinate System tab

  Reporting tab

  Project Details tab

  Recompute tab

  Units and Format tab

  Features tab


Project Properties dialog - Project Details tab
Project Properties dialog − Project Details tab

Use this tab to enter data about the project/template that you want included in reports and plots.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Project Details tab.

NOTE: In the Project Details list, right-click to access a shortcut menu which lets you rename or delete existing items, and insert new ones.

All of the fields in this tab are optional.

Title

Enter a title for the current project/template in this field.

Description

Enter a description of the project/template if required.

Reference

Enter a project reference number to enable you to link the project to your office costing process.

Field Surveyor

Enter the name of the surveyor who completed field work for the project, if required.

Computer Operator

Enter the name of the computer operator for the project, if required.

Date

The default settings enable this field to record the creation date of the project. This is carried out automatically using the date field code in this field in a template project.

Vertical Datum

Enter the name of the vertical datum.

Equipment

Enter the serial number(s) of your equipment.

NOTE: When a template is opened, any field code definitions are not expanded. You can use this facility to enter suitable field code definitions into your templates. When a project is first opened, the field code definitions are expanded.


Project Properties dialog - Coordinate System tab
Project Properties dialog − Coordinate System tab

 Overview and More Information

Use this tab to select and view the coordinate system for the project.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Coordinate System tab.

Coordinate System Settings

This group shows a summary of the current coordinate system. It shows the project site, system, zone, datum, and geoid model.

The Change button opens the Select Coordinate System dialog. This dialog is the first page of a wizard that you use to select a coordinate system.

NOTE: To create and edit coordinate systems, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.

Local Site Settings

This group shows a summary of the site location. It shows the project latitude, longitude, and height, and the method of coordinate display.

The Change button opens the Local site settings dialog. In this dialog you can change the project location and specify whether you want to use ground coordinates.

Details

The Details button opens the Coordinate System Details dialog. Use this dialog to view the full parameters for the current coordinate system projection, datum transformation, adjustment, geoid model, and local site.

If you perform a GPS site calibration in the project then the coordinate system details are a combination of the underlying coordinate system and GPS site calibration (horizontal adjustment and vertical adjustment) parameters.

If you perform a network adjustment the parameters are used as the adjustment.

A coordinate system can have either a site calibration or network adjustment transformation parameters, not both.

Save as Site

The Save as Site button opens the Save as Site dialog. Use this dialog to save the coordinate system details (including any current GPS site calibration) in the coordinate system database as a site definition.

Once you name the site definition, you can use it as the coordinate system definition for future projects. To edit the site, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.

NOTE: Network adjustment parameters are not saved in a site.


Coordinate System Details dialog - Projection tab
Coordinate System Details dialog − Projection tab

To access this tab:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	In the Coordinate System tab, click Details. The Coordinate System Details dialog appears.

3.	Select the Projection tab.

To view the projection parameters, use this tab. It shows the projection type (for example, Transverse Mercator or Lambert). The fields that display depend on the projection.

The South Azimuth field refers to the azimuth reference. Most countries use North as the azimuth reference (North = 0°). However some places, such as South Africa and Hawaii, use South as the azimuth reference (South = 0°). This box is selected if you are working in a region that uses this method when you set the projection parameters in the Coordinate System wizard or defined south azimuth coordinate system in the Coordinate System Manager utility.

The positive North or South and East or West options refer to the direction in which coordinates increase.


Coordinate System Details dialog - Datum Transformation tab
Coordinate System Details dialog − Datum Transformation tab

 See also

To access this tab:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	In the Coordinate System tab, click Details. The Coordinate System Details dialog appears.

3.	Select the Datum Transformation tab.

To view the datum transformation parameters, use this tab. It shows the transformation method and parameters used to transform from the WGS-84 ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid. The local ellipsoid parameters are shown in the Local ellipsoid group.

The datum transformation options that are available are:

  Molodensky (Three-parameter)

  Seven-parameter

  Multiple regression

  Datum grid

The following table shows the fields that are available for each option:


Coordinate System Details dialog - Adjustment tab
Coordinate System Details dialog − Adjustment tab

To access this tab:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	In the Coordinate System tab, click Details. The Coordinate System Details dialog appears.

3.	Select the Adjustment tab.

To view the adjustment parameters, use this tab. The adjustment is in the form of a site calibration or network adjustment transformation parameters applied to survey data from:

  a computed GPS site calibration

  a calibration imported from a Survey Controller (*.dc) file

  a site definition

  a network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed)

NOTE: The Slope north and Slope east fields in the Calibration Vertical Adjustment group are displayed in parts per million (ppm).


Coordinate System Details dialog - Geoid Model tab
Coordinate System Details dialog − Geoid Model tab

To access this tab:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	In the Coordinate System tab, click Details. The Coordinate System Details dialog appears.

3.	Select the Geoid Model tab.

To view the geoid model details, use this tab. It shows the name and definition file for any geoid model that is used to determine elevations for GPS positions.

NOTE: To view the quality of the geoid model, use the Project Properties / Recompute tab.


Coordinate System Details dialog - Geoid Model tab
Coordinate System Details dialog − Local Site tab

Use this tab to view the local site details.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	In the Coordinate System tab, click Details. The Coordinate System Details dialog appears.

3.	Select the Local Site tab.

The tab shows:

  the latitude, longitude, and height of the project location

  the ground scale factor, false northing offset, false easting offset, and whether ground coordinates are being used


Local Site Setting dialog

Use the Local Site Setting dialog to edit the project location, and specify whether ground coordinates are used in the project. To access it:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Coordinate System tab.

3.	From the Local site settings group, click Change.

Project location

Use this group to define the project location, using a point in the center of the project. The project location can be defined in grid, local, or WGS-84 coordinates.

NOTE: You can enter the grid coordinates by selecting the location in the graphics window.

You need to define the project location at the start of the project, because the software uses the information in its calculations. It uses:

  the project latitude to calculate the earth radius

  the project latitude and longitude to define the grid scale factor

  the project height as the default elevation and to calculate the elevation factor.

If the coordinate system is undefined, then the Default Projection Definition dialog appears. Enter an origin latitude and longitude before you select the Use ground coordinates option.

Use ground coordinates

Select this check box if you want to use ground coordinates in your project. However, make sure you define the project coordinate system and location first.

When this check box is selected, all of the items in the Use ground coordinates group become available. The Compute scale factor from project location check box is clear the first time you use the Local site setting dialog.

NOTE: The software can only calculate the ground scale factor if the northing, easting, and elevation fields are entered in the Project location group.

NOTE: If you perform a GPS site calibration and then select the Use ground coordinates check box, the calibration defined in the project becomes invalid. A message warns you that continuing with the operation will remove the calibration.

Ground coordinate display

The Ground coordinate display option lets you change the way that ground coordinates are displayed in a Trimble Geomatics Office project. This change will make it easier to distinguish between projection coordinates and ground coordinates. Select one of the following:

  Northing offset/Easting offset − adds an offset to the coordinates which are displayed

  4 digit coordinates − displays 4 digits in the ground coordinates display. For example, if the project coordinate is 264150.000, the ground coordinate is displayed as 4510.000.

  5 digit coordinates − displays 5 digits in the ground coordinates display. For example, if the project coordinate is 264150.000, the ground coordinate is displayed as 64510.000.


Save as Site dialog

Use this dialog to save the current coordinate system as a site.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Click Save as Site.

Site Name

Enter the name for the saved site definition.

OK

Click OK to save the site. The site is saved to the coordinate system database. Any site that you save appears in the Sites tab in the Coordinate System Manager utility. You can use the site definition as the coordinate system definition for future projects.

TIP: When using the Coordinate System Manager utility, click the Sites tab. The site appears in blue.

NOTE: You cannot save adjustment transformation parameters as a site.


Project Properties dialog - Units and Format tab
Project Properties dialog − Units and Format tab

Use this tab to set the unit values used throughout Trimble Geomatics Office (such as on the screen display, importing, exporting, and reporting).

To access it:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog opens.

2.	Select the Units and Format tab.

Coordinate

Set the display units for coordinate (Northing and Easting) values. Options are International feet, Links, Meters, US survey feet, or Namibian meters.

Elevation/Height

Set the display unit for elevations. Options are International feet, Links, Meters, US survey feet, or Namibian meters.

Coordinate decimal places

Set the number of decimal places to display for coordinates. You can specify up to five decimal places.

Coordinate order

Set the ordering of coordinates. Options are North first or East first.

Display cursor position as

Set the display of the cursor position in the status bar. Options are Grid, Local Lat long, and WGS Lat long.

Distance

Set the display of distances. Options are Chains, International feet, International miles, Kilometers, Links, Meters, US survey feet, or Namibian meters.

Distance decimal places

Set the number of decimal places to display for distances. You can specify up to five decimal places.

Display distance as

Set the type of distances to be displayed. Options are:

  Ellipsoidal distances (Sea level distances)

This is the distance between two database points computed on the reference ellipsoid surface (at zero height).

  Grid

This is the Pythagorean distance between the projection coordinates of the two end points. That is, no projection adjustment is applied meaning that the projection scale factor for the line is not applied to it.

  Ground

This is the distance parallel to the ellipsoid which is computed at the average height above the ellipsoid. That is, the mathematically computed ellipsoidal distance adjusted for the average height of the endpoints. If ground coordinates are used, the grid distance should equal the ground distance. This is described as:

Where

H	represents the database height

R	represents the earth radius

DE	represents the ellipsoidal distance

Area

Set the display units for areas. Options are Acres, Hectares, Square feet, and Square meters.

Area decimal places

Set the number of decimal places to display for areas. You can specify up to five decimal places.

Angle units

Set the angle units used for all horizontal directions and azimuths. Options are Degrees, Grads, and Mils.

Angle format (degrees)

Set the format of angles or azimuths when in degrees. Options are:

  DDD.dddd	Decimal degrees

  DDDMM'SS	Degrees, minutes, and seconds

  DDDMM'SS.s	Degrees, minutes, and decimal seconds

  DDDMM.mm	Degrees and decimal minutes

Angle format (grads / mils)

Set the format of angles or azimuths when in grads or mils. Options are three, four, or five decimal places.

Azimuth format

Set the format of azimuth values. Options are:

  Quadrant bearing (presented in the form N6207'40"W)

  Whole circle (presented in the form 29752'20")

Display WGS-84 as

Set the Display WGS-84 as option to L,L,H or X,Y,Z. The setting here determines how the WGS-84 coordinates are displayed for points in the Properties window, when you insert a point or edit coordinates for a point using the Coordinate System Manager utility. This setting is also used if you create a custom import, report, or export format with the WGS-84 values.

Lat, long format

Set the format of Latitude and Longitude values. Options are:

  DDD.ddddddddd	Decimal degrees

  DDDMM'SS.sssss	Decimal seconds

  DDDMM.mmmmmmm	Decimal minutes

Scale format

Set the display and interpretation of scale values. Options are:

  1 in to X ft	Imperial measurement units

  1:X	Metric measurement units

Display thousands separator

Set the thousands separator display.

Options are Yes or No. If you select Yes, the thousands separator as set in your Microsoft Windows system is to be applied to numeric values. For more information, refer to the Regional Settings in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel.

NOTE: When this display setting is set to Yes, the thousands separator is expected to be present in imported ASCII files and is used in exported ASCII files and reports. This could cause file imports to fail and result in exported files that do not conform to the expected format. (Consider, for example, a comma delimited file with numeric values that uses a comma thousands separator.) The field code modifier "standard" can be used in format definitions to force numeric value handling to suppress thousands separators and always expect the decimal point to be a dot.

Display units

Determines if the coordinate units are displayed in the Properties window and status bar. The default setting is Yes.

Display nulls as

Set the display for null values.

Start auto point name from

Set the auto point numbering name. This value is used when coordinates are added or created by the software. The point name automatically increments.

Grade format

Set the grade format. It is used and shown in the RoadLink utility. Options are Percentage or Ratio.

Side Slope Grade Format

This is used and shown in RoadLink. Options are Percentage or Ratio.

Ratio Units

Set the order of the ratio format that is used and shown in RoadLink. Options are Rise to Run or Run to Rise. For example, Rise to Run appears as 1:100. Run to Rise appears as 100:1.

Station format

Set the format for the display of station values throughout RoadLink. The format options are:

  1000.0

  10+00.0

  1+000.0

  1/000.0

Volume units

Set the volume units that are used and shown in the RoadLink. Options are cubic meters, cubic feet, or cubic yards.

GPS Time Display Type

Determines the format in which to display the time. Options are Local time, GPS time, and UTC time.


Project Properties dialog - Reporting tab
Project Properties dialog − Reporting tab

Use this tab to set the report settings for the project.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog opens.

2.	Select the Reporting tab.

View generated reports

The View generated reports option controls the display of any reports generated by operations such as data importing, recomputation and feature code processing. Reports are always created for these operations and stored in the appropriate folder in the Reports folder for the project.

These options control the display of reports following a processing operation:

Always	A report on any processing carried out is always displayed—if there have been no errors or warnings issued during the processing, then the report consists of a heading only plus any information relating to the processing operation carried out.
On error	If an error has occurred during any processing, then the report on this processing, that includes details of the error(s) encountered, is automatically presented.
Prompt on error	If an error has occurred during any processing, then a warning is presented to indicate that an error occurred, and you can have the report detailing the error(s) presented.
Never	You are not warned that an error has occurred during any processing and the report giving details is not presented.
Always prompt	You are prompted to see a report on any processing carried out.


Project Properties dialog - Recompute tab
Project Properties dialog − Recompute tab

Use this tab to set the recompute settings for the project.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Recompute tab.

Multiple Sideshot Observations

Use this group to specify how a recomputation determines the position for sideshot points observed multiple times. A sideshot point does not have:

  observations flowing from it

  control coordinates

  Static or FastStatic observations flowing to it

Use best observation

Select this option if you do not want the recomputation to mean observations to sideshot points. The best observation for the point will be used to determine its position. This option is selected by default.

Calculate mean from the same type of observations (GPS, Conventional, Reduced, Laser)

Select this option if you want the recomputation to mean the coordinates derived for each observation of the same type. A recomputation never means coordinates derived from different observation types. For example, the coordinates determined from a conventional observation will never be meaned with those determined by a GPS observation. Only sideshot points are meaned.


Tolerance Checking

Select these check boxes to use tolerance checking during the recomputation process. A recomputation uses the tolerance values to determine the mean coordinates when the Calculate mean from the same type of observations option is selected.

You can set tolerances for the Survey, Mapping, and Unknown quality positions.

The tolerance values are used to determine when a misclosure is displayed for a point that has multiple coordinates or observations. If the coordinates derived from all observations and coordinates are outside the tolerance, a misclosure is reported and a warning flag appears on the point. An out-of-tolerance error is displayed in the Properties window / Warning page.

Horizontal

Enter the tolerance value for the horizontal component for a position.

Vertical

Enter the tolerance value for the vertical component for a position.

Reduce terrestrial observations to ellipsoid (Sea Level correction)

Select this check box if you want conventionally observed distances corrected to the ellipsoid during recompute.

Sea level corrections should be applied unless you know that the field distance measurements stored in the database have already had this correction applied, or coordinates entered are ground and not grid coordinates. If this correction is not applied and the conventional data has been collected at a significant height above sea level, then the computed coordinates will not be correct.

This correction does not apply to GPS data since this data is always collected in terms of the WGS-84 ellipsoid.

NOTE: If you are combining GPS and terrestrial measurements, you must reduce observations to the ellipsoid.

NOTE: You can use the Display distance as option on the Units and Format tab to control how distances between database points are reported. When you set this option to Ground distances this lets you view what is effectively the horizontal component of any measured ground distance.

For more information, see the topic Sea Level Correction.

Geoid Model Quality

Select the quality for the geoid model used for the project. If it is in the order of 5 m accuracy, select Mapping. If you know the geoid model to be of survey accuracy, select the Survey option. Recompute uses this quality to determine the quality of elevations (for a GPS point) or height (for terrestrial points) derived from the geoid model. This field is unavailable if there is no geoid used in the project’s coordinate system.


Project Properties dialog - Features tab
Project Properties dialog − Features tab

Use this tab to specify the feature and attribute settings for the project.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Features tab.

Feature code on import

Select the Feature code on import check box to automatically process feature codes when a device file is imported. Select the feature and attribute library you want to use to process the feature codes automatically.

NOTE: If you select this option you can still process feature codes later using the Tools menu in the Plan view, and select any feature and attribute library to use. (You do not have to use the library that you have selected here.)

Library

Enter the name of the feature and attribute library you want to use or click Browse and locate it. This field is unavailable unless you select the Feature coding check box.

Use Attributes

To set up the project/template for attributes, select the Use Attributes check box.

This field only refers to the library used for attribute definitions.

Library

To select the library, enter the path and name in the Library field, or click Browse.

Browse

Click Browse and locate the required Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file or Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file. The default folder is the Trimble Geomatics Office system folder.

If you do not have any points in the database that contain features, you can change the feature and attribute library associated with the project.

However, once you import a Survey Controller (*.dc) file containing attributes, or add attributes using the Properties window, you cannot change the feature and attribute library used to set up the project for attributes. This ensures that you have consistent attribute data in the project.


Trimble Geomatics Office files - Overview

Trimble Geomatics Office that is installed on your computer includes several files that store various settings about the system and each project.

WARNING: Do not edit these files unless it is necessary. You may introduce errors and Trimble Geomatics Office may not work as expected. If you want to edit these files, take a backup copy first.

These files are divided into the following sections:

Trimble files

These are located in the Program Files\Common Files\Trimble folder:

  Current.csd

  Antenna.ini

  Receiver.ini

Trimble Geomatics Office system files

These are located in Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder:

  Asciiexp.dat

  Asciiimp.dat file

  Asciirpt.dat

  Html files

  Symbols.sym

  Linetype.ltp

  Default.fcl

  Frm files

Project files

These are located in each project's root directory (normally C:\Trimble Geomatics Office\Projects\<project name>:

  Options.ini

  TGO_v150.mdb

  TGO_v150.dbs


Options.ini File

 See also

An Options.ini file is associated with every project. It is located in the project name's folder. This file gives control over the data shown in the Properties window, point summary, and report headings.

The Options.ini file is split into three sections:

  [Summary]

  [Report]

  [Labels]

Configuring the Summary definition

The Summary definition in the Options.ini file lets you specify the point details shown on the status bar as points are selected, as well as the ToolTip that displays when you position the mouse pointer over a point. By default it is set to [Name] : [Feature code] so that you get points summarized with both their name and feature code.

If you prefer points to be summarized with their name and point style separated by a '/' define the [Summary] section of the Options.ini file as:

Point=[Name]/[Point style]

You can also assign specific summaries for Line, Arc, Curve, and Text entities. For example, if you want the Azimuth and Distance reported as the summary for a line, add the following definition in the [Summary] section:

Line=Az: [Azimuth] Dist: [Distance]

You can include text along with field codes in the summary specification.

By default, the summary for lines, arcs, and curves consists of the point summaries for the start and end points, separated by a comma.

Configuring the Report heading

The [Report] section lets you specify a standard report heading that can be included in all reports produced using a single field code called [$Report.Heading]. The report heading can consist of a mixture of text and field codes. Use ‘\n’ to indicate where a new line is to start. This lets you split the heading over a number of lines. For example you can include your company name in the standard report heading.

Configuring the Labels options

The [Labels] section lets you add new label options that appear in the Labels dialog.

You can use a mixture of field codes and text to define a label definition. Use the ‘|’ character to separate each label option and again to separate the name of the label option and what text is actually displayed as the label. For example, directly after the last of the label options, enter the following using the keyboard:

|Description|[description]

This will add a new label option in the Labels dialog called ‘Description’. When selected, each point being labeled will have its description field value displayed.

NOTE: You cannot define label options for lines, curves, or arcs.


TGO_v160.mdb file

 See also

WARNING: Trimble Navigation Limited supports use or modification of this database only by the use of Trimble’s proprietary Trimble Geomatics Office software. Trimble does not support or authorize use or modification, or warrant the performance, of this database by means of other software applications. Trimble may at any time modify the format of this database making it incompatible with other software applications.

Each project has a Microsoft Access Database (*.mdb) file named TGO_v160.mdb. It is located in the project folder. This file contains all of the project data, including tables and queries. If you have Microsoft Access (Access 2000 or later) you can:

  view the project’s data

  create your own queries


TGO_v160.dbs file

The first time you close a new Trimble Geomatics Office project, a database schema (*.dbs) file is created. It is based on the Microsoft Access Database (*.mdb) file.

Both the .dbs file and the .mdb file are located in the project root folder.

If you add a custom query to the database you need to delete this .dbs file after you create the query.

A new .dbs file (containing the new query) is created when you next open the project and the query becomes available for use.


Antenna.ini file

This file lists the available GPS antennas in Trimble Geomatics Office. It is used by other Trimble software as well as this software.


Receiver.ini file

This file contains a list of the available receivers. You should not edit this file.


Asciiexp.dat file

This file is located in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder.

It contains all the ASCII and Custom export formats for Trimble Geomatics Office. This file is read each time you access the Export dialog.

To access this dialog, do one of the following:

  Select the Export tool [image].

  Select File / Export.

The following symbols indicate in which tab the format appears. Only ASCII definitions are included in this file:

Symbol	Tab
=	Survey
+	CAD/ASCII
*	GIS
None	Custom
You can only edit the formats available in the Custom tab. Therefore, if you want to edit the format of one of the formats available in the CAD/ASCII tab, remove the plus sign (+) from the beginning of the format definition.

For example, the following line is included in the Asciiexp.dat file:

+SDRmap coordinates

To make this format one you can edit, remove the plus sign (+).

When you next access the Export dialog, the format appears in the Custom tab and the Edit button becomes available.

Similarly, you can make a custom format into a format which you cannot edit by inserting one of the symbols above at the beginning of the format name.

For example the following line is included in the Asciiexp.dat file:

Delimited Points

Change this line to:

+Delimited Points

When you next access the Export dialog, the format appears in the CAD/ASCII tab and the Edit button is not available.


Asciiimp.dat file

This file is located in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder. It contains all of the ASCII and Custom import formats for Trimble Geomatics Office. This file is read each time you access the Import dialog.

To access this dialog, do one of the following:

  Select the Import tool [image].

  Select File / Import.

The following symbols indicate in which tab the format appears. Only ASCII definitions are included in this file:

Symbol	Tab
=	Survey
+	CAD / ASCII
None	Custom
You can only edit the import formats available in the Custom tab. Therefore, if you want to edit the format of one of the formats available in the CAD/ASCII tab, remove the plus sign (+) from the beginning of the format definition.

For example, the following line is included in the Asciiimp.dat file:

+WILDsoft format

To make this format into one you can edit, remove the plus sign (+).

When you next access the Import dialog, the format appears in the Custom tab and the Edit button becomes available. Similarly, you can make a custom format into a format which you cannot edit by inserting one of the symbols above at the beginning of the format name.

For example, the following line is included in the Asciiimp.dat file:

Delimited Points

Change this line to:

+Delimited Points

When you next access the Import dialog, the format appears in the CAD/ASCII tab and the Edit button is not available.


Asciirpt.dat file

This file is located in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder. It contains all of the database report formats for Trimble Geomatics Office. This file is read each time you access the Additional Reports dialog.

To access the Additional Reports dialog, select Reports / Additional Reports.

You can make any system database format from the Additional Reports dialog into a format that you can edit by removing the equals sign (=) from the format name in the file.

For example, the following line is included in the Asciirpt.dat file:

=Points

To make this format one you can edit, remove the equals sign (=).

The format will now appear in the Additional Reports dialog where it can be edited. Similarly, you can make a custom format from the Additional Reports dialog into a format that cannot be edited by inserting an equals sign (=) at the beginning of the format name.

For example, the following line is included in the Asciirpt.dat file:

Fixed width point listing

Change this line to:

=Fixed width point listing

The format now appears in the Additional Reports dialog and cannot be edited.


.html files

A number of template Hypertext Markup Language (.html) files are installed in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder. These templates are used to create system reports. You should not delete these files.

Reports (for example, Recompute.html) generated by Trimble Geomatics Office are stored in the appropriate project’s Reports folder. To open an .html report, double-click on the report in Microsoft Windows Explorer. It opens in the default HTML viewer.

NOTE: You can modify these .html files to customize the information that appears in the system reports. However, Trimble does not support or guarantee that modified .html files will operate as expected. Trimble recommends that you make a backup of any .html file before altering it.


Symbols.sym file

The Symbols.sym file is located in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder.

Use the Symbol Editor utility to view and edit this file. The file contains symbols. In Trimble Geomatics Office, or in the Feature and Attribute Editor utility, you can create new point styles using the available symbols from this file.

You can also create your own .sym files. For more information on using .sym files, see the Utilities chapter in the Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide.


Linetype.ltp file

The Linetype.ltp file is located in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder. Use the Line Type Editor utility to view and edit this file.

The file contains line types. In Trimble Geomatics Office, or in the Feature and Attribute Editor utility, you can create new line styles using the available line types from this file.

You can also create your own .ltp files. For more information on using .ltp files, see the Utilities chapter in the Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide.


Default.fcl file

The Default.fcl file is located in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder. To view and edit this file, use the Feature and Attribute Editor utility. All .fcl files are feature and attribute libraries.

This file contains predefined feature codes (with and without attributes), point styles, line styles, annotation styles, and control codes.

To use this file:

1.	Transfer it to Trimble Survey Controller to collect feature code information.

2.	Use the file in Trimble Geomatics Office to process the feature codes and to set up the project for attributes if you are collecting attribute information.

You can create your own feature and attribute libraries using the Feature and Attribute Editor utility. For information on creating feature and attribute libraries, see the Feature and Attribute Editor Help.


Current.csd file

The Current.csd file is located in the Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\Geodata folder.

Current.csd is the coordinate system database for Trimble Geomatics Office. This file is used when you select a coordinate system for a project.

To view and edit this file, use the Coordinate System Manager utility. For information about creating coordinate systems, see the Coordinate System Manager Help.


.frm files

Plan form templates are stored as .frm files. They are located in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder.

When you configure the sheet setup for printing or plotting, you must select a plan form to use.

NOTE: The .frm files are text files. To view and edit them, use a text editor.


Microsoft Access 97
Microsoft Access 2000

WARNING: Trimble Navigation Limited supports use or modification of this database only by the use of Trimble’s proprietary Trimble Geomatics Office software. Trimble does not support or authorize use or modification, or warrant the performance, of this database by means of other software applications. Trimble may at any time modify the format of this database making it incompatible with other software applications.

Trimble Geomatics Office uses a Microsoft Access 2000 database. If you have an earlier version of the Microsoft Access software, you cannot open the <project>.mdb file. If you have Microsoft Access 2000 (or later) you can use this software to view your project data and create new queries.


Database Queries - Overview
Database Queries − Overview

More Information

 How to ...

WARNING: Trimble Navigation Limited supports use or modification of this database only by the use of Trimble’s proprietary Trimble Geomatics Office software. Trimble does not support or authorize use or modification, or warrant the performance, of this database by means of other software applications. Trimble may at any time modify the format of this database making it incompatible with other software applications.

Overview

Trimble Geomatics Office uses a Microsoft Access 2000 database. You can use Microsoft Access to create your own queries.

NOTE: Trimble does not support any user-defined queries.

The details provided here give limited information regarding the design of queries for use in Trimble Geomatics Office. If you need to review these techniques, we suggest you consult the documentation that comes with Microsoft Access.

Defining Microsoft Access queries

Usually, the queries that you want to define to use in projects can be predefined in the project templates.

You can export query definitions to other Microsoft Access databases. Therefore, if useful query definitions have been created in a particular project, you can later export these definitions to the main project template(s) so that they are available in other Trimble Geomatics Office projects.

The key to using Microsoft Access queries within Trimble Geomatics Office is that the ID field(s) specified in the query define the entity types that are to be selected by the query.

Two conditions relate to the use of ID fields in a selection query:

  The query must be defined with the first output column (select the Show check box for column) being an ID field or an entire table (* option used).

  If the query is to be designed to select multiple entity types (for example, selecting all the points associated with Arc entities), then the ID fields relating to each of the entities to be selected must be the only output fields in the query.

Defining queries for Trimble Geomatics Office

If you want to define a query to be used in Trimble Geomatics Office, you must prefix the query name correctly so the query appears in the required list.

NOTE: In the report and export queries, the selection set data table must be referenced in the query name. For example, to export a points list, the query should be called Export(Point)_Point List.

If you create a query for selecting purposes and want it to appear in the Select / By Query list, the query must have the prefix Select_. Any queries with a Select_ prefix will also be available when creating custom reports.

If you want to design a query just for reporting, use the Report(Selection Set data table)_ prefix. Queries with a Report(Selection Set data table)_ prefix will not appear in the Select / By Query list.

If you want to add a query to filter out items in the Properties window selection list, use the SS_ prefix. The query appears in the list when you click the Filter tool in the Properties window.


Passing Parameters to Queries in Microsoft Access

WARNING: Trimble Navigation Limited supports use or modification of this database only by the use of Trimble’s proprietary Trimble Geomatics Office software. Trimble does not support or authorize use or modification, or warrant the performance, of this database by means of other software applications. Trimble may at any time modify the format of this database making it incompatible with other software applications.

To be able to use the same custom queries for selecting different entities at different times it is possible to specify parameters as part of the query definition with the Microsoft Access software.

When a parameter is specified, Trimble Geomatics Office lets you enter the appropriate value when the query is started. An example of the use of a parameter in a query is the provision of a query for selecting point entities by their feature code.

For example, you can select all the points with the feature code "Tree" at one stage and then all of the points with the feature code "Post" at a later stage.

A parameter can be specified for a column in a query definition by entering in square brackets (that is, []) the prompt you want displayed, along with the comparison condition to be met (that is, =, >, <, Like), in the Criteria field.

For example, in the case of a query for selecting points by their feature code, the Feature code field must be added to the query definition. The Criteria field must define the condition to be met, for example: "Like [Code]".

In this example the Like string comparison operator is used to check for matching codes.

A further refinement is possible in the specification of query parameters. This lets you fill Trimble Geomatics Office parameter entry field by clicking on entities in the graphical model. This refinement is defined by following the parameter prompt with a colon, then the name of the database field being filled in. In the code example above this would become:
Like [Code:Feature code]

In addition to defining the parameter condition in the Criteria field, you must also enter the parameter definition into the dialog for the query. The dialog appears from the shortcut menu when the pointer is in the upper portion of the query dialog.

NOTE: The Parameter field must contain exactly the same text as that entered in the square brackets of the Criteria field.

The Data Type field for each parameter is set according to the type of data being entered. In the example above, since the feature code is a text type field this is set to Text. If a real number type parameter such as a point height is being specified, then the Data Type field should be set to Double.

The details provided here give limited information regarding the design of queries for use in Trimble Geomatics Office. If you need to review these techniques, we suggest you consult the documentation that comes with Microsoft Access.


Using Custom Queries to Filter a Selection Set

WARNING: Trimble Navigation Limited supports use or modification of this database only by the use of Trimble’s proprietary Trimble Geomatics Office software. Trimble does not support or authorize use or modification, or warrant the performance, of this database by means of other software applications. Trimble may at any time modify the format of this database making it incompatible with other software applications.

Using Microsoft Access, you can generate more complex queries that work with the Selection Set Data table, and let the selection query effectively filter a database selection set.

The Selection Set Data table contains the record IDs of all the entities that are in any selection set.

To achieve this filtering functionality, the Selection Set Data table must be included in the query definition, along with the table containing the entities to be selected (for example, the Point table). In this case the Record ID field in the Selection Set Data table has to be joined to the appropriate ID field in the other table included in the query. This joining of fields in the two tables can be carried out by dragging and dropping the name of the appropriate field in one table onto the field name in the other table.

As with the other selection queries discussed above, the first field shown in the query must be an ID field or entire table. For the query to only select entities from a specific table, the query must define the table name containing the entities to be selected from the Selection Set Data table. This means that if points are being selected, the Table Name field from the Selection Set Data table must be added to the query, with the Criteria set to ‘Point’.

The Selection Set Data table contains the record IDs of all the entities that are in any selection set. Each selection set is allocated a unique identifying number that is listed in the Selection Set Name ID column of the Selection Set Data table. The number 0 indicates that the entity is a member of the current selection set, so the query can use this value to make sure that only the current selection set is filtered. This is done by adding a further column to the query specifying the Selection Set Name ID and setting the Criteria field to 0. Setting Criteria to another value lets you make a current selection based on an existing selection set if you require.

The details provided here give limited information regarding the design of queries for use in Trimble Geomatics Office. If you need to review these techniques, we suggest you consult the documentation that comes with Microsoft Access.


Project Templates - Overview
Project Templates − Overview

More Information

How to...	Dialog
Overview

When you create a new project you must select a template. A template contains all the settings, data, and file structures. Information in the template is copied to the project when you create it. For example, if you have a Survey Controller (*.dc) file in the Checkin folder for the template, the project will have the same .dc file in its Checkin folder. Any edits made to the project are not made to the template.

Templates are useful for:

  selecting CAD styles that you want to use

  adding control points to the database

  adding any required files

  selecting the appropriate coordinate system

  selecting the required units

  selecting the duplicate point settings

Trimble supplies a number of templates with Trimble Geomatics Office. For example, the metric template lets you use metric measurements throughout the projects created using that template.

Templates are stored in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\Template folder.


Recompute Report command

Use this command to view the Recompute report. The report is created from the most recent recomputation of the survey data.

To access it, select Reports / Recompute Report.

The report is displayed in your default HTML viewer.


System Reports - Overview
System Reports − Overview

 See also

System reports are generated following a processing operation or computation of survey data. These reports are created in the Reports folder. With the exception of the Import report, when a new report is generated, it overwrites any existing report of the same name in the folder.

The following reports are automatically created by the system after a processing operation:

  Import report

  Recompute report

  Feature Code Processing report

  Project paste report

To receive notification about these reports, select the View generated report option in the Project Properties dialog − Reporting tab.

You can generate the following system reports after you have performed a surveying operation. These reports provide details on the surveying computations or changes to survey data.

  Recompute

  Point Derivation report

  GPS Baseline Processing report (if you have the WAVE Baseline Processing module installed)

  GPS Loop Closures report

  Network Adjustment report (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed)

  GPS Site Calibration report

  Coordinate Transformation report

  Elevation Adjustment report

  Inverse report

  Rename Points report

  Level report

NOTE: The availability of some reports depends on the modules (Baseline Processing and Network Adjustment) that you have installed.


Database Reports - Overview
Database Reports − Overview

 See also

Database reports are reports you generate from the primary table records and queries defined in the database. That is, they report on information from the project database.

These reports are useful if you want to obtain a summary of the project or provide reports to clients.

Database reports fall into two categories:

  System Database reports

  Custom reports

Both of these reports are accessed from the Additional Reports dialog.

You can use or modify an existing database report provided by Trimble Geomatics Office, or customize your own report format.


Reports - Overview
Reports − Overview

Trimble Geomatics Office generates all reports in HyperText Markup Language (HTML) format and displays them in an HTML viewer installed on your computer. Normally, your default HTML viewer will be a Web browser.

All reports are created in the Reports folder in the Trimble Geomatics Office\Projects directory. The reports are organized into folders with the name of the report type. With the exception of the Import report and the Network Adjustment report, when a new report is generated, it overwrites any existing report of the same name in the folder.

Two types of reports can be generated:

  System reports

  Database reports

Commonly used reports can be accessed from the Reports menu. The availability of some system reports depends on what modules (Baseline Processing and Network Adjustment) you have installed and if a report has already been generated.

NOTE: The Trimble Geomatics Office reports cannot be viewed in Microsoft Internet Explorer version 2 or 3. If you have either of these versions, Trimble recommends that you install Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 or 5 from the Web.


Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser - Report Viewer
Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser − Report Viewer

The Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser is available from the Web if you do not have an HTML viewer installed. The Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser lets you view and print the report you have created. You can use the other useful features of Microsoft Internet Explorer to suit your reporting purposes.

Customize the appearance of the report

Trimble Geomatics Office reports are displayed in a standardized format. The fonts, font sizes, colors, and backgrounds are the same throughout all reports. You can override these settings with your own preferences. Do this if you want to display the report in a format that is easier for you to read.

TIP: To change the background of the report, replace the backgrnd.gif file with another CompuServe Graphics Interchange (GIF) graphics file of the same name in the Reports folder.

You can set your printing options to stop the report background from being printed. By default, this option is turned off.

Open it in another software application

Many software applications support documents in HTML format. In addition, you can save the report as a Text (*.txt) file to be opened in another application such as a text editor, spreadsheet, or word processor. You can also copy a selection of the report into the clipboard and paste it into another software application.

These features can be useful if you want to insert the report into a document, edit the contents of the report, or use the data to perform further computations in another application.

For information on using Microsoft Internet Explorer features for your reports, see the Internet Explorer Help.


Define Report Format dialog

Use this dialog to define a report format.

To access it:

1.	Select Reports / Additional Reports. The Additional Reports dialog appears.

2.	Do one of the following:

  Click New to define a new report format.

  Choose an existing report format from the Reports list and click Edit to modify the selected format.

NOTE: You cannot edit the Points, Elevation Range, Coordinate System Details, or Point Comparison reports.

Name

Enter the name of the report format. This name appears in the Reports list of the Custom Reports dialog. Duplicate names are not allowed.

Null string

The Null string shows the null string that has been set in the File / Project Properties / Units and Format tab. The string specified in this field is used in fields of the generated custom report that have a null value. This field is optional.

Description

You can enter a description of the report format in the Description field. This description appears on the status bar. This field is optional.

Default extension

The Default extension is not used in the definition of a report format.

Report on

Select one of the primary tables or queries as the source for the report. The default source is the Point information record. This lets you report on any records from the point table.

Fill Format Automatically

Click Fill Format Automatically to automatically initialize the header and body. For more information, see Fill Format Automatically.

Format header

Enter the fixed text and any field code definitions (available from the shortcut menu) that are to make up the report header. This field is optional and does not need to have a definition specified.

Press Enter to add blank lines into the header definition.

Format body

Enter the appropriate field code definitions (available from the shortcut menu) to indicate what data Trimble Geomatics Office is to report from the project.

For example, to give a fixed width point listing report use the following format:

[Name:10][First ordinate:14.3][Second ordinate:14.3][Elevation:14.3][Feature code:20]

The format header or the format body (but not both) can be left blank.

Format file footer

Enter the fixed text and any field code definitions (available from the shortcut menu) that are to make up the report footer. This field is optional and does not need to have a definition specified. For example, use this footer to display an EOF (end of file command).

Press the Enter key to add blank lines into the footer definition.

For more information on all the field codes available in the system, see Field Codes − Overview.


Recompute Report - Overview
Recompute Report − Overview

The Recompute report is an HyperText Markup Language (HTML) report that summarizes the results of the recomputation process. Use the Recompute report to eliminate warning flags by:

  checking occupation details

  checking that points are named correctly

  disabling the coordinate if you suspect that the coordinate has been keyed in incorrectly

  re-observing if necessary

The Recompute report reports on the following:

  Tolerance errors where multiple observations or coordinates result in positions outside tolerance. (Tolerances are defined in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog.)

  Closures where more than one observation or set of keyed-in coordinates could be used to determine the calculated position of the point, and the positions are within tolerance.

  Unused observations and errors.

  Starting coordinates and the order in which the coordinates were derived.

  Observations and coordinates referenced in the report.

Trimble Geomatics Office creates a Recompute report every time it does a recomputation. How you are notified that a Recompute report has been created depends on the View generated report field in the Reporting tab of the Project Properties dialog. The Recompute report is always stored in the Reports folder for the project. Like all system reports, if a report already exists, then the old report is overwritten by the new report.

The Recompute report includes the following parts:

  Project Details

  Errors

  Warnings

  Closures

  Point Derivations

  Starting Points

  Traverse report

  Survey Data (Observations and Coordinates)


Recompute Report - Project Details Section
Recompute Report − Project Details Section

The Project Details section of the Recompute report summarizes the project name and coordinate system details.


Recompute Report - Error and Warning Sections

The Error and Warning sections of the Recompute report list all of the points where more than one set of coordinates is derived for a point and the coordinates are outside tolerance. They also shows which observations are not used, and which points cannot be coordinated.

Use these sections to examine the errors and warnings, and decide if you should edit your project to resolve them. To look at the derivation for a point, click the point. This takes you to the Point Derivation section.

The horizontal and vertical tolerances are also shown. These are set in the Project Properties dialog − Recompute tab.


Recompute Report - Point Derivations Section
Recompute Report − Point Derivations Section

The Point Derivations section of the Recompute report shows the calculated position for a point. Only points with errors or closures included in the Recompute report have their derivation reported. The qualities of the horizontal (Northing, Easting) component, elevation component and height component for the calculated position are shown.

Below the calculated position and qualities is a list of the survey data that could be used to coordinate the point.

Each observation shows the:

  type of observation

  observation ID

  ‘from’ and ‘to’ points

To view the observation details, click on the ID. This is linked to the Survey Data section of the Recompute report.

To select the observation in the graphics window (and the Properties window), select the icon to the left of the observation ID. This link lets you easily view observations with out-of-tolerance closures in the Survey view.

Each coordinate shows the:

  type of coordinate (grid, geodetic, or position solution)

  source of the coordinate

  coordinate ID

To view the coordinate details, click on the ID. This is linked to the Survey Data section of the Recompute report.

Again, to select the point in the graphics window and the Properties window, select the icon to the left of the observation ID.

The Used to calc column shows which position components (NE,e,h) were calculated from the observation or coordinate. For example, if an observation determines the Northing, Easting and height components for the point, and the coordinate determines the elevation, the Used to calc column displays NEh next to the GPS observation and e next to the coordinate.

The delta north, delta east, delta elevation, and delta ellipsoid height columns display the difference between the final calculated position and the position calculated using just the observation or coordinate.

If the delta values are above the tolerance setting configured for the project, flags appear and the numbers become red. Observations marked in red do not necessarily indicate an incorrect observation or keyed-in coordinates—the recomputation may have used a poor observation or set of keyed-in coordinates. You should determine the cause of the error and disable any poor observations.

Use the survey section of the report to examine each observation.

TIP: You can use the Properties window and the Reports / Point Derivation Report command to view the derivation report for any point in the project, including points not reported in the Recompute report.


Recompute Report - Traverse Report Section
Recompute Report − Traverse Report Section

The Traverse report section of the Recompute report shows how a recomputation traverses from the starting point, and the observations that it uses.

A traverse is only reported if there is more than one leg from the starting point. This is to avoid offsets being reported.

For example: if observations are:

  From starting point 1 − to point 2 − to point 3 and then back to point 1, it is reported.

  From starting point 1 − to point 2, it is not reported.


Recompute Report - Closures Section
Recompute Report − Closures Section

The Closures section of the Recompute report shows the list of station points with multiple observations to a point that are within the tolerance specified for the project. The closures from all survey data for the point are shown in the delta North, East, Elevation, and Ellipsoid Height columns.

Click on a point to view the derivation details. This is linked to the Point Derivations section.


Recompute Report - Survey Data Section
Recompute Report − Survey Data Section

The Survey Data section shows all of the observations and coordinates for the points shown in the Recompute report. The survey data is organized by observation type. Use this section when you are trying to determine which observations are incorrect.

Only observations and coordinates referenced in the Recompute report are listed in this section.

You can view all survey data in the Properties window.


Recompute Report - Starting Points Section
Recompute Report − Starting Points Section

The Starting Points section of the Recompute report shows the points from which the recomputation started to flow out observations.


Recompute Report - Additional Coordinate System Details
Recompute Report − Additional Coordinate System Details

The Additions Coordinate System Details section lists information about the local site settings.

The local site settings are set in the Project Properties dialog − Coordinate System tab.


Point Derivation Report command

Use this command to view the Point Derivation report for the selected point(s).

To access it:

1.	Select the point(s) you want to view.

2.	Select Reports / Points Derivation Report.

The Point Derivation report is displayed in the default HTML viewer.


Point Derivation Report

The Point Derivation report is a section of the Recompute report that shows the calculated position for a point. The qualities of the horizontal (Northing, Easting) component, elevation component and height component for the calculated position are shown.

The format of the report is the same as the Point Derivations section of the Recompute report.

To access the report:

1.	Select the point(s) you want to view.

2.	Do one of the following:

  Select Reports / Point Derivation Report.

  Open the Properties window / Survey tab / Summary page and select the Point Derivation tool [image].

The report is displayed in the HTML viewer.

NOTE: To select a point in the Survey view, click on the point or observation icon to the left of the ID. This is useful for linking back to the point in the Survey view.


Inverse Report command

Use this command to view the most recent Inverse report generated from the Inverse dialog after an inverse has been computed.

To access it:

  Select Reports / Inverse Report.

The report is displayed in the default HTML viewer.


Inverse Report

The Inverse report can be generated after an inverse computation and displays brief, detailed, or combined information about the inverse.

The brief Inverse report shows the grid azimuth, grid distance and delta elevation between the "from" and "to" points used to define the inverse.

The detailed report shows the positions of the "from" and "to" points in grid, local (geodetic) and cartesian (WGS-84) coordinate systems, and the calculated inverse parameters.

Use the Inverse dialog to generate the report.

After a report has been created, you can view the most recent report anytime by selecting Reports / Inverse Report.


Rename Points Report

The Rename Points report is a report that you can generate to show the original and new names of the points renamed after using the Rename Points command.

Use the Rename dialog to generate the report.


Import Reports

Each time a file is transferred to a project, Trimble Geomatics Office creates an Import report for each file imported. This is named <imported file name>.html. It contains the following sections:

Project Details

This section summarizes the project name and coordinate system details.

Messages

This section lists any messages that have occurred on import. If no messages occur on import, this section is not displayed.

Recompute Report

The report includes a link to the Recompute report automatically generated after the import process. The Recompute report summarizes the results of the recomputation process.

Feature Code Processing Report

The report includes a link to the feature coding report if feature codes were processed on import.

NOTE: If the Recompute report or Feature Code Processing report links are red, then this indicates errors were encountered during the process and displayed in the reports.

An Imported Files report named Import.html is also created during the import process. This report lists all the files that are imported to the project. Any files that are imported in another session to the same project are automatically added to this report.

The way that you are notified about these reports is set by the View generated report option in the Project Properties dialog − Reporting tab.


Additional Reports command

Use this command to generate the system database or custom reports provided by Trimble Geomatics Office.

To access it, select Reports / Additional Reports. The Additional Reports dialog appears.


Additional Reports dialog

Use the Additional Reports dialog to generate the system database or custom reports provided by Trimble Geomatics Office. To access this dialog, select Reports / Additional Reports.

System database reports

System database reports are predefined report formats that give a summary of the current project. Although you cannot usually edit the reports, you can edit the report formats. To do this, edit the Asciirpt.dat file located in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder.

Custom reports

Custom reports use the primary record types or queries defined in the database, according to your specifications.

You can create, define, or edit a custom report format. However, you can also prevent these report formats from being edited, by editing the Asciirpt.dat file located in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder.

If the name of the report that you want to run is followed by an ellipsis, then you need to enter certain information first. For example, when you choose to run an Elevation report, Trimble Geomatics Office asks you to enter a minimum and maximum elevation.

Report On

Two options to report on selected entities or record types are available:

Selection	Select this option to report on selected entities or record types.
Whole database	Select this option to report on all entities or record types.
When nothing is selected, these buttons are unavailable and all entities or record types are reported on.

NOTE: When the Coordinate System Details report is selected, this option is unavailable.

Sort data

You can choose the order in which data is reported.

To do this:

1.	1.	Select the Sort data check box.

2.	2.	Select a sorting order from the list.  You can choose to sort by:

Database order	Elevation
Name	Quality
Start time	Data type
Occupation length
NOTE: The same sorting options are available in the Properties window.

TIP: If you create your own sorting queries, they are also shown in this list.

Reports

The Reports group lists the system database or custom reports. A variety of reports have already been defined for use in Trimble Geomatics Office.

OK

Generates the report and displays it on the default HTML viewer.

New

Creates and defines a new report format.

Edit

Modifies an existing report format.

Delete

Deletes a report. You are asked to confirm your action.

NOTE: The separation values you enter are interpreted in terms of the database coordinate units rather than the current display units. The database units are set based on the display units at the time the first data is saved in the database.

TIP: You can modify these reports by editing the Asciirpt.dat file located in the Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\System folder, using a text editor.


    GPS Site Calibration Report command

Use this command to view the most recent GPS Site Calibration report generated from the GPS Site Calibration dialog after a calibration computation.

To access it, select Reports / GPS Site Calibration Report.

The report is displayed in the default HTML viewer.

NOTE: This command is not available in the Survey view.

To access the GPS Site Calibration Report in the Survey view, click Report from the GPS Site Calibration dialog.


GPS Site Calibration Report

The GPS Site Calibration report is generated after a calibration computation. It shows all the computed parameters as well as a listing of the computed point positions compared with their known positions and individual residual values.

Use the GPS Site Calibration dialog to generate the report.


Coordinate Transformation Report command

Use this command to view the most recent Coordinate Transformation report generated from the Coordinate Transformation dialog after a transformation computation.

To access it, select Reports / Coordinate Transformation Report.

The report is displayed in the Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser.

NOTE: This menu command is not in the Survey view. To generate the report from the Survey view, select the Generate the Coordinate Transformation report check box from the Coordinate Transformation dialog.


Coordinate Transformation Report

The Coordinate Transformation report is generated after a coordinate transformation computation and shows the original and transformed coordinates.

Use the Coordinate Transformation dialog to generate the report.

After a report has been created, you can view the most recent report anytime by selecting Reports / Coordinate Transformation Report in the Plan view.


Elevation Adjustment Report command

Use this command to view the most recent Elevation Adjustment report generated from the Elevation Adjustment dialog after an adjustment is performed.

To access it, select Reports / Elevation Adjustment Report.

The report is displayed in the default HTML viewer.

NOTE: This command is not available by default in the Survey view. To generate the report from the Survey view, select the Generate the Elevation Adjustment report check box from the Elevation Adjustment dialog.


Elevation Adjustment Report

The Elevation Adjustment report is generated after an elevation adjustment is performed and shows the original and adjusted coordinates.

Use the Elevation Adjustment dialog to generate the report.

After a report has been created, you can view the most recent report anytime by selecting Reports / Elevation Adjustment Report in the Plan view.


Feature Code Processing Report

The Feature Code Processing report is generated following a feature code processing operation.

By setting the View generated report option in the Project Properties dialog − General tab you receive notification when this report is generated.

The report summarizes the processing operation and includes details on the Feature and Attribute Library (.fcl) file used and any problems encountered while processing the feature codes.


Project Paste Report

The Project Paste report is generated after points have been copied and pasted to a project.

By setting the View generated report option in the Project Properties dialog − General tab you receive notification when this report is generated.

The report summarizes any features and attributes assigned to a copied point that are not pasted if the attribute definitions between the projects differ.


Level Report command

Use this command to view the Level report for the selected file.

To access it:

1.	1.	Select Reports / Level Report.

2.	2.	Select the level file.

The Level report for the level file that you have selected is displayed in the default HTML viewer.


Level Report

The Level report shows the level observations and data for your Level file.

To access it:

1.	1.	Select Reports / Level Reports.

2.	Select the Level file.

The report is displayed in the default HTML viewer. It displays the following information:

Leveling data

This section shows the level run in a level fieldbook format. It shows backsight, intermediate sight, foresight observations, and the computed elevation information that was displayed in the Digital Level Import dialog.

Leveling observations

The leveling observations table shows the following information:

  ID

  From Point

 To Point

  Quality

  Δ Elevation − these values are computed between station points.

TIP: To select the leveling observation in the graphics window, select the observation ID. This link lets you easily view the level observation in the Properties window.

NOTE: The Level report will be stored in the <Project name>\Reports\Level folder.


All command

Use this command to select all the entities in the current project.

To access it, choose Select / All.

Survey view

If you are working in the Survey view, all visible entities are selected.

For example, if you use the View / Filters command to hide some observations, then use the Select / All command, the hidden observations are not selected.

Plan view

If you are working in the Plan view, all entities are selected that are in a layer that has:

  its Visible Property set to on

  its Locked Property set to off.

For example, if you use the Layer selection tool
to turn on the Locked property of a layer, then use the Select / All command, all entities in the layer that is locked will not be selected.

TIP: The status bar shows a summary of the number of entities selected.


None command

Use this command to clear the selection.

To access it, choose Select / None.

TIP: The status bar shows a message indicating that the selection is empty.


Points command

Use this command to open the Select Points dialog.

To access it, choose Select / Points.


Select Points dialog

Overview	How to ...

Use this dialog to select points using the criteria specified. You can use wildcards and ranges. You can also enter criteria in more than one tab. Trimble Geomatics Office only selects points that satisfy all the criteria.

To access it, choose Select / Points.

If you access this dialog using the Survey view, Trimble Geomatics Office only considers the points that are currently visible. This means that if you have used the View Filters dialog to filter observations, these will not be selected. When using the Survey view, layer information (which is available in the Plan view) is ignored in the selection criteria.

If you access this dialog using the Plan view, Trimble Geomatics Office only considers the points that are currently visible and not locked. When using the Plan view, any view filters applied in the Survey view are ignored.

The tabs are:

  General

  GPS

  Occupation

Add to current selection

If you have one or more entities selected when you access this dialog, this check box becomes available. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the selection resulting from this dialog, clear this check box.


Select Points dialog - General tab
Select Points dialog − General tab

Use this tab to enter criteria on the general point fields.

Name matching and Feature code matching

Use these fields to select by name (and feature code). Names separated by a comma can be entered. For example, "100,250,1020" selects singly these names if they exist in the project. The ellipsis (...) or a dash (-) selects every point with the specified name within the range.

With a range including alphanumeric names, some unexpected entities may be selected since a full alphabetic sort is used.

NOTE: If the start and end range names are numeric then a numeric range is selected.

You can use wildcards in these fields.

NOTE: Where the name contains a hyphen, include the hyphen within the quotes. For example, the point name "a-2" is entered as "a-2". Otherwise, Trimble Geomatics Office sorts the range from a to 2.

Use double quotes to prevent pattern matching in names that contain wild card characters. For example, "URS#1"..."URS#8" prevents # being used as a wildcard in the selection range, and selects the points with explicit names between URS#1 and URS#8.

Names are not case sensitive.

With point quality(s)

From the list, select the point position component quality(s) in your criteria. You can select multiple point qualities.

From Source(s)

From the list, select the point source(s). You can select multiple source(s). Points with survey data from at least one selected source will be selected.

With Feature Code

Enter the feature code(s) to be used to select points.

From layer(s)

This option is unavailable when you access this dialog from the Survey view.

Use the list to select layers in your criteria. You can select multiple layers. All points in the selected layers will be selected.

With point style(s)

From the list, select point CAD styles in your criteria. You can select multiple point styles. All points with the point style specified in the Properties window − CAD tab are selected.

Add to current selection

If you have one or more entities selected when you access this dialog, this check box becomes available. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the selection resulting from this dialog, clear this check box.


Select Points dialog - GPS tab

Use this tab to enter selection criteria using the GPS data. The criteria applies to both postprocessed and RTK GPS baselines.

If a point has at least one baseline to it that satisfies the criteria, the point is selected.

Horizontal Precision, Vertical Precision

Click the less-than-and-equal-to or greater-than-and-equal-to button to select the sign for your criteria.

Enter values using the keyboard to enter the precision values.

If you leave one of the fields as a question mark (?), that field is not used in the selection criteria.

Solution type(s)

To use solution type(s) in your criteria, select from the list. You can select multiple solution types. Any points with GPS observations (with the selected solution types) to them are selected.

Field Method(s)

From the list, select the field method that you want to use in your criteria. You can select multiple field methods.

NOTE: Only points satisfying both solution type and field method are selected.

Add to current selection

If you have one or more entities selected when you access this dialog, this check box becomes available. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the selection resulting from this dialog, clear this check box.


Select Points dialog - Occupation tab
Select Points dialog − Occupation tab

Use this tab to enter selection criteria using the occupation details. All points with at least one occupation satisfying the criteria are selected.

All base stations and instrument setups

Select this check box to choose all GPS base station points and terrestrial setup points.

With antenna or target height between

Use these fields to enter an antenna height or target height range in your criteria. The value you enter in the first field must be less than the value you enter in the second field. The values you enter are inclusive.

Occupied between times

Select this check box to enter a date and time range to use in your criteria. Occupations for points with the start and stop time within this range are selected. The software saves the values that you enter for the next time you use this option.

Observed from point

Enter a point name that has observations from it. The point can be either a GPS base station, or a terrestrial setup point.

Use field fill-in to select a point in the graphics window.

Add to current selection

If you have one or more entities selected when you access this dialog, this check box becomes available. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the selection resulting from this dialog, clear this check box.


Selecting Entities - Using Wildcards
Selecting Entities − Using Wildcards

 Overview and More Information

When you select points using the Select / Points dialog, or select observations using the Select / Observations dialog, you can use wildcards in some fields to select a range of values.

You can use the following wildcards:

You can also use multiple wildcards. For example, 1?0*0 matches  1500, 1A0250, 15020.

The following table shows how you can use the kinds of match to test for the patterns.

The point name "10" is considered to fall between "1" and "a". It will not fall in the range "1" to "9" because both names are numeric.


    Observations command

Use this command to open the Select Observations dialog.

To access it, choose Select / Observations.


    Select Observations dialog

More Information

Overview	How to ...

To access it, choose Select / Observations.

Use this dialog to select observations using the criteria specified. You can use wildcards and ranges. You can also enter criteria in more than one tab. Trimble Geomatics Office only selects observations that satisfy all the criteria.

The tabs are:

  General

  GPS

Add to current selection

If you have one or more entities selected when you access this dialog, this check box is available. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the selection resulting from this dialog, clear this check box.


Select Observations dialog - General tab
    Select Observations dialog − General tab

Use this tab to enter general criteria for selecting observations.

From point matching, To point matching

Names separated by a comma can be entered. The ellipsis (...) or a dash (-) selects every baseline with the specified name within the range denoted by the ellipsis. With a range including alphanumeric names, some unexpected entities may be selected since a full alphabetic sort is used.

NOTE: If the start and end range names are numeric, a numeric range is selected.

You can use wildcards.

With slope distance between

Use these fields to enter a slope distance range in your criteria. The value you enter in the first field must be less than the value you enter in the second field. The values you enter are inclusive.

If you have a reduced observation with a horizontal distance within the specified range, the observations are also selected.

Types

From this list, select the observation type. For example you can select RTK, Laser, or Azimuth observations.

From Source(s)

From the list, select the observation source(s). You can select multiple sources. All observations with at least one observation source are selected.

With status

From the list, select the observation status in your criteria.

With Observation ID

Enter the observation ID, or a series of observation ID’s, to select the observation(s). For example, to select GPS baseline 8, enter B8. Enter B8−B12 to select all observations in that range.

Side Shots Only

When this check box is selected, only side shots are selected.

Add to current selection

If you have one or more entities selected when you access this dialog, this check box becomes available. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the selection resulting from this dialog, clear this check box.


Select Observations dialog - GPS tab
    Select Observations dialog − GPS tab

Use this tab to enter criteria for selecting GPS baselines.

Ratio

Select the less than or greater than sign. Enter the ratio value that you want to use in your criteria.

Ref variance

Select the less than or greater than sign. Enter the reference variance that you want to use in your criteria.

RMS

Select the less than or greater than sign. Enter the RMS value that you want to use in your criteria.

Horz Prec

Click the less-than-or-equal-to or greater-than-or-equal-to button to select the sign for your criteria. Enter the horizontal precision value that you want to use in your criteria.

Vert Prec

Click the less-than-or-equal-to or greater-than-or-equal-to button to select the sign for your criteria. Enter the vertical precision value that you want to use in your criteria.

NOTE: The Horz prec and Vert prec queries are based on exact values. Displayed values such as the fields in the Properties window use rounded numbers.

Solution Type(s)

From the list, select the solution type(s) that you want to use in your criteria. You can select multiple solution types.

Field Method(s)

From the list, select the GPS field method(s) that you want to use in your criteria. You can select multiple field methods.

NOTE: Only observations satisfying both solution types and field methods are selected.

Observed between

Use these fields to specify a date and time range for your criteria. Observations with a start and end time within the specified criteria are selected. The software saves the values that you enter for the next time you use this option.

Observed longer than (sec)

Use this field to select GPS baselines that have been observed for longer than the time you specify. The field has the format hh:mm:ss.

NOTE: You can use field fill-in to specify the time.

Add to current selection

If you have one or more entities selected when you access this dialog, this check box becomes available. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the selection resulting from this dialog, clear this check box.


    By Layer command

Use this command to select all entities in specified layers.

To access it:

  Choose Select / By Layer.

The Select By Layers dialog opens.


    Select By Layers dialog

Use this dialog to select entities in the chosen layers.

To access it:

  Choose Select / By Layer.

Layers

The Layers list shows the names of the layers in the project.

To select entities that appear in a layer, select the check box beside the layer name.

If a layer has its Locked property set to on, or Visible property set to off, the check box for the layer appears shaded. To enable the layer to be selected, use the Layer Selection tool or the Layer dialog to change the Locked and Visible properties. The check box for the layer then becomes available.

All

Click All to select every layer displayed in the Layers list.

None

Click None to clear the check boxes for all layers in the Layers list.


    By Styles command

Use this command to select all entities using specified styles.

To access it, choose Select / By Styles.

The Select By Styles dialog opens.


    Select By Styles dialog

Use this dialog to select all CAD entities (points, lines, arcs, curves, annotations, text) in the Plan view that have the styles specified.

To access it, choose Select / By Styles.

Styles

Select the tab of a particular style type. The styles are the same as those available in the CAD Styles dialog. Select a style from the list that appears. You can only use one tab to select entities. If you choose one or more styles from one tab, then choose another tab, any selections that you made in the previous tab are lost.

To select multiple entity types (for example, points and lines) use this dialog to make a selection, save the selection set, and then select the other entity type(s). Save the new selection set. You can retrieve both selection sets at the same time using Select / Selection Sets / Retrieve.

Use the <By Layer> option to select entities that have the appropriate field set to <By Layer>.

All

Click All to select every style displayed in the Styles list box.

None

Click None to clear all the check boxes for the style displayed in the Styles list box.


    By Types command

Use this command to select all the entities of a specified type.

To access it, choose Select / By Types.

The Select By Types dialog opens.


    Select By Types dialog

Use this dialog to select entities with a specified type(s).

To access it, choose Select / By Types.

Types

The Types list shows the names of all the different entity types (points, lines, curves, arcs, annotations, text).

Select the check box of a particular type to select entities of that type.

All

Click All to select every type displayed in the Types list box.

None

Click None to clear the check boxes for every type displayed in the Types list box.


By Query command

Use this command to select entities matching conditions specified in queries.

To access it, choose Select / By Query.

The Select By Query dialog appears.


Select By Query dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to choose a query for selecting entities.

To access it, choose Select / By Query.

Queries

The list of available queries includes any custom queries that you have defined in the project as well as the following:

Query Name	Selects …
All events	Observations with event records
Autonomous GPS points	points that have autonomous positions. For example points in a .dat file that has not been processed.
Baselines using receiver…	baselines that were observed using the same receiver. Enter the value in the Parameter Entry dialog.
Conventionally observed points	points that were observed using conventional instruments.
Elevation range	points that have elevations within the range specified. Enter values in the Parameter Entry dialog.
Keyed in WGS-84 points	points that were keyed in WGS-84 points.
Laser rangefinder points	points that were observed using a laser rangefinder.
Notes	all note records in the project. Notes can be added in the field when using Trimble Survey Controller. Use this selection option to select notes for creating custom reports.
Null coordinates	points that have null coordinates. This can happen if you observed to a backsight point that has no coordinates.
Null elevations	points that have null elevations.
Points by description	points that have a description field the same as you specify. Enter values in the Parameter Entry dialog. You can use wild card characters.
Points observed multiple times	points that have been observed more than once. This query uses all observation types. For terrestrial observations, the query uses target setups. For RTK occupations, it uses GPS occupations for the point. For static and faststatic occupations, it uses the occupations where the point is the "to" point for the observations. The query then sums all of the above and selects the points where the total is more than one.
Points with different names within distance	points that have different names and are within the distance specified. Enter values in the Parameter Entry dialog.
Points with no names	points that do not have names.
RTK vectors with covariances (QC2)	RTK vectors that have QC2 records. These points can be used in a Network Adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed.)
Unprocessed baselines	baselines that can be but have not been processed.
The queries select entities according to the query definition and a description of the query is displayed on the status bar.

For example, you can select points that have a particular range of elevations.

Where queries require parameters, the name is followed by an ellipsis. If you choose such a query, you will be asked to provide the parameter values.

Selection

In the Selection group, you can perform three selection operations:

  New − creates a new selection set.

  Add to current − adds the selection set that you are about to create to the current selection set.

  Refine current − finds points which are common with the selection set you are about to create, using the current selection set.

For example, if you have a project in which you want to find all unprocessed baselines observed using a GPS receiver with serial number 1234, do the following:

1.	Use the query to select all unprocessed baselines.

2.	Use the query again to select the Baselines using receiver option.

3.	In the Selection group, select the Refine current option.

4.	Enter the receiver serial number (1234) in the Select by Query − Parameters dialog.

All unprocessed baselines which were observed with receiver 1234 will be selected.


By Point Feature command

Use this command to select points that have feature codes with attributes matching the names you specify.

To access it, choose Select / By Point Feature.

The Select by Point Feature dialog appears.


Select by Point Feature dialog

Use this dialog to select points that have feature and attribute information collected for it. To view the features and attributes collected for the point, use the Properties window − Attributes tab.

Features

The Features list displays all the features with attribute definitions that exist in the Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file or Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file that you used to set up the project for attributes.

Select the check boxes for the features. Points with at least one of the features specified are selected.

All

To select all the check boxes, click All.

None

To clear all the check boxes, click None.


Selection Sets - Overview
Selection Sets − Overview

More Information

 How to ...

Overview

A selection set is anything that you currently have selected in Trimble Geomatics Office. You can save your current selection set at any time and retrieve it later. For example, you can record a selection set of all the control points within a project and report these on a regular basis by retrieving the selection set. These saved selection sets maintain the order of their entities. If you delete entities that are part of the selection set, the selection set still works with the remaining entities.

NOTE: You can display selection sets using the Show only data in the selection set option in the View Filters dialog.

When you import a file, Trimble Geomatics Office automatically produces a named selection set. A selection set records the order in which data was collected. This is important for tasks such as feature coding. For Survey Controller (*.dc) files, Trimble Geomatics Office gives the new selection set the name of the job identifier you import. For other files, such as ASCII files, Trimble Geomatics Office gives the new selection set the name of the file.

NOTE: If you import RTK data in which initialization was lost within the first 15 minutes, a high RMS selection set is created on import.


Selections Sets - Save command
Selections Sets − Save command

Use this command to save the current selection set.

To access it:

  Choose Select / Selection Sets / Save.

The Save dialog appears.

This command is not available if there is nothing currently selected.


Selection Sets - Save dialog
Selection Sets − Save dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to save the current selection set.

To access it, choose Select / Selection Sets / Save.

Name

Enter a unique name for the selection set.

OK

Click OK to create the selection set.

The selection set appears in the Retrieve dialog when you next open it. The new selection set is added to the recently used selection set list. To open the Retrieve dialog and view the recently used selection sets, choose Select / Selection Sets.


Selection Sets - Retrieve command
Selection Sets − Retrieve command

Use this command to retrieve a selection set. This command is not available if there are no selection sets to retrieve.

To access it:

  Choose Select / Selection Sets / Retrieve.

The Selection Sets − Retrieve dialog appears.


Selection Sets - Retrieve dialog
Selection Sets − Retrieve dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to retrieve one or more selection sets at once. For example, if you have two saved selection sets use this dialog to select all the entities in both selection sets.

To access it, choose Select / Selection Sets / Retrieve.

Selection Sets

This list contains all the saved selection sets for the project.

All

Click All to select every selection set.

None

Click None to clear the check boxes for all selection sets.


Selection Sets - Edit command
Selection Sets − Edit command

Use this command to edit the details of saved selection sets. This command is not available if there are no selection sets to edit.

To access it, choose Select / Selection Sets / Edit.

The Edit dialog appears.


Selection Sets - Edit dialog
Selection Sets − Edit dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to rename or delete saved selection sets.

Selection Sets

Highlight the selection set that you want to edit or delete.

Rename

Click Rename to rename the highlighted selection set.

Delete

Click Delete to delete the highlighted selection set.


Selection Sets - Rename dialog
Selection Sets − Rename dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to rename the highlighted selection set.

To access it:

1.	Choose Select / Selection Sets / Edit. The Edit dialog appears.

2.	Click Rename. The Rename dialog appears.

Name

Enter a unique name for the selection set.

OK

Click OK to apply the changes.

The selection set appears in the Edit dialog. The new selection set appears in the recently-used selection set list.


Selecting Entities - Overview
Selecting Entities − Overview

Sometimes you only want to perform an action on a subset of the project (for example, processing feature codes). You can select entities (points, lines, arcs, curves, text, annotations, observations) in the project in two ways:

  Using the mouse.

  Using the Select menu.

Using the mouse to select entities

To select an entity, click it using the mouse. (To select multiple entities, hold down the Shift key at the same time.)

You can then perform the required tasks on the selected entities.

To make an inverse selection, press Ctrl. Any currently selected entities are un-selected and vice versa.

Note: You can use the mouse to view entities in the Properties window without having to continually reselect them. Press and hold the mouse button over a point for a few seconds, then drag the pointer over the entities that you want to view.

Using the Select menu to select entities

The Select menu contains many different methods of selecting points. The options in the Select menu depend on whether you are in the Survey view or the Plan view.


Duplicate Points - By Coordinates command
Duplicate Points − By Coordinates command

Use this command to select points that have identical coordinates.

To access it, choose Select / Duplicate Points / By Coordinates.


Duplicate Points - By Name command
Duplicate Points − By Name command

Use this command to select points that have duplicate names.

To access it:

  Choose Select / Duplicate Points / By Names.

TIP: Use this command before merging duplicate points.


Duplicate Points - By Name and Distance command
Duplicate Points − By Name and Distance command

Use this command to select points that have duplicate names and are within the distance specified. Enter values in the Parameter Entry dialog.

To access it:

  Choose Select / Duplicate Points / By Name and Distance.


Select Staked Points dialog

Use this dialog to select staked points using a series of queries. These selection tools can be used with the additional reports and the custom export options.

To access it, choose Select / Staked Points.

Queries

The list of available queries includes any custom queries that you have defined in the project as well as the following:

Query Name	Selects …	Enter this information in the Parameter Entry dialog …
All staked points	all points that have been staked out in the field.
Arc points	points that have reference to an arc. For example, points that have been staked out on, from, or to an arc.	arc name
DTM points	points that have reference to a DTM. For example, points that have been staked out on, from or to a DTM.	DTM name
Line points	points that have reference to a line. For example, points that have been staked out on, from or to a line.	line name
Design points	points that have reference to a design point. For example, points that have been staked out from, to or on a design point.	design point name
Road points	points that have reference to a road point. For example, points that have been staked out from, to or on a road.	road name
Catch points for a road	catch points for a road.	road name
Points on a road with feature	points on a road with a feature.	road name and feature
All points with stakeout errors greater than	points with stakeout errors greater than the horizontal error and vertical error specified in the Parameter Entry dialog.
Where a query requires parameters, the name is followed by an ellipsis. If you choose one of these queries, you are asked to provide the parameter values.

Selection

In the Selection group, you can perform three selection operations:

  New − creates a new selection set

  Add to current − adds the selection set that you are about to create to the current selection set

  Refine current − using the current selection set, finds points which are common with the selection set you are about to create.

For example, you may have a project in which you want to find all unprocessed baselines which were observed using a GPS receiver with serial number 1234. To do this:

1.	Use the query to select all unprocessed baselines.

2.	Use the query again to select the Baselines using receiver… option. In the Selection group, select the Refine current option. Enter the receiver serial number (1234) in the Select by Query − Parameters dialog.

All unprocessed baselines that were observed with receiver 1234 will be selected.


Select Calibration Points

Use this option to select the calibration points that appear in the GPS Site Calibration − Point List in your Trimble Geomatics Office project.

To access it, choose Select / Calibration Points.

All the calibration points that appear in the GPS Site Calibration − Point List will be selected in your project.

NOTE: If there are no points in the calibration Points list, the option is unavailable.


Technical Support

If you have a problem and cannot find the information you need in the product documentation, contact your local dealer. Alternatively, request technical support using the Trimble World Wide Web site (http://www.trimble.com/support/support.htm).


Toolbars - Overview
Toolbars − Overview

A toolbar consists of one or more tools. Toolbars are separated by vertical lines in the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window. A tool is a shortcut to a frequently-used menu command.

To view a description of the tool, position the mouse pointer over the tool and view:

  the ToolTip

  the status bar

To change the order in which the toolbars are positioned in the Trimble Geomatics Office window, drag a toolbar using the vertical line that separates the toolbar from the other items in the window.

The following toolbars are available in both the Survey view and the Plan view:

  Standard

  Views

  View Controls

The following toolbars are available in the Survey view only:

  Filters

  Timeline (if you have the Baseline Processing module installed)

  Timeline Plots (if you have the Baseline Processing module installed)

  Ellipse Controls (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed)

The following toolbars are available in the Plan view only:

  Layers

  CAD


CAD toolbar

The CAD toolbar provides quick access to the common features of the Insert menu.

This tool …	opens this dialog …	Use it to add these items to the database …
	Insert Points	point records
	Insert Points by Azimuth and Distance	point records
	Insert Linework	line records
	Insert Linework	curve records
	Insert Linework	arc records
	Insert Text	text records


Standard toolbar

The Standard toolbar provides quick access to some of the main options available in the File menu and Edit menu.

Tool	Select it to …
	create a new project
	open an existing project
	import data from a file, device or GPS receiver
	export data to a file, device or GPS receiver
	cut the selection and put it on the clipboard
	copy the selection and put it on the clipboard
	paste the clipboard contents
	undo the last action
	redo the last action that was undone
	open the Properties window and view or edit the properties of your current selection.


Edit Layers tool

Select [image]  to display the Layers dialog. Use this dialog to manage layers.


    Layer Selection tool

The layer displayed is the current layer. To change the current layer, click the arrow and select the layer from the drop down list.

The light bulb icon indicates whether the layer is visible or not. To change the visibility of any layer, click the light bulb for the appropriate layer.

The light bulb icon is dimmed. To make the layer visible, click the light bulb icon again. If one or more layers have the Visible property turned off, a light bulb icon appears in the status bar.

The padlock icon indicates whether the layer is locked or not. If the locked property is switched on, you cannot select any entities in the layer, even though you can see them in the graphics window.

To change the locked property of any layer, click the padlock icon for the appropriate layer. To make the layer selectable, click the padlock icon again. If one or more layers have its Locked property selected, the padlock icon appears in the status bar.

NOTE: You can also change these properties using the Layers dialog.


View Controls toolbar

The View Controls toolbar provides navigational tools to assist viewing in the main graphics window.

The following buttons operate in a sticky mode. Sticky mode means the cursor remains as the selected tool until you select a different tool by clicking another button:

Tool	Select it to …
	change to selection mode
	shift the center of the zoom area
	zoom in by a factor of 2
	zoom out by a factor of 2

The following tools are not sticky. They perform an operation each time you select them:

Tool	Select it to …
	zoom to the model’s extents
	zoom to the previous settings
	switch the Project bar on or off
	display grid lines in the graphics window. (You can also choose this setting in the View Options dialog.)


Views toolbar

Use the tools in the Views toolbar to do the following:

This tool …	switches to this view …
	Survey
	Plan


    Filters toolbar

The Filters toolbar is available in the Survey view. It contains the View Filters and the Timeline tools

Tool	Select it to …
	determine which observations are to be displayed, or how they are to appear in the Survey view.
	open the Timeline window
	link the observations in the graphics window and Timeline. When you select this tool, the software only shows the postprocessed baselines within the current Timeline view, and the postprocessed baselines that were observed at the same time. All other postprocessed baselines in the survey view are hidden. This is a useful tool for selecting independent baselines.


    Layers toolbar

The Layers toolbar is available in the Plan view. It contains the Edit Layers tool and the Layers Selection tool. Use this toolbar to manage your layers.


    Process Feature Codes command

Use this command to process feature codes.

To access it, select Tools / Process Feature Codes.

The Process Feature Codes dialog appears.


    Process Feature Codes dialog

 Overview

Use this dialog to process feature codes.

To access it, select Tools / Process Feature Codes.

Feature and Attribute Library

Select the feature and attribute library that you want to process the data with.

Browse

Click Browse to locate the feature and attribute library.

NOTE: In Trimble Geomatics Office, all feature and attribute libraries are .fcl file types. If you select a feature and attribute library from a TRIMMAP system or an SDRmap system,  automatically converts that feature and attribute library to an .fcl file type.

For example, if you select a ‘Fclib??.dat’ file (which is the file name pattern of a TRIMMAP system or an SDRmap system feature code library), when you process this library Trimble Geomatics Office asks if you would like the library converted. The system also requests a name to save the library as. The default name suggested follows the pattern Fclib??.fcl and this is stored by default in the system folder.

If Trimble Geomatics Office encounters any code definitions that it cannot convert, it warns you that the resultant library needs to be edited. If any errors are encountered, the system generates a report.

Process

Feature codes are processed in the order in which they are selected.

Select the Current selection option to process the currently selected entities.

Choose the Selection set option and choose a selection set from the list to process.

The Current selection option is unavailable if there is no selection set available.

OK

Click OK to process feature codes.

The library is processed and the results of the feature coding appear in the graphics window. If any errors occur during processing, you can view an error report. To find where the errors occur, view the report. The report is kept in the Reports folder for the project for later viewing.


Trimble RoadLink - Overview
Trimble RoadLink − Overview

Trimble RoadLink™ is a Trimble Geomatics Office utility. It is a powerful interface between third-party road definitions and Trimble survey devices.

Use it to:

  enter data

  view data graphically

  edit data

You can then transfer the road definition to Trimble survey devices for use during stakeout.

RoadLink provides two ways to transfer road definitions:

  Automated conversion of files (horizontal and vertical alignment, and cross section) provided by third-party design software

  Manual input of the road definition, including horizontal and vertical alignments, templates, and superelevation

An integral component of Trimble Geomatics Office, RoadLink also calculates cut and fill volumes for earthworks between the road definition and a surface model defined in Trimble’s DTMLink utility.


Trimble DTMLink - Overview
Trimble DTMLink − Overview

Trimble DTMLink™ is a Trimble Geomatics Office utility. This utility generates digital terrain surfaces. With this software you can import surfaces defined by third-party software, create new surfaces and edit your previously created surfaces. You can also transfer these surfaces to a Trimble survey device for setting out in the field.

The software has the capacity for including boundaries and breaklines in the contour surface model, and allows for advanced triangle editing features to give more control over the model formation.

A gridded or triangulated Digital Terrain Model is created from the contour surface model for export to a device or a data file.

The model you create can also be used by Trimble RoadLink for earthworks calculations.

Trimble DTMLink lets you create volume reports.

Typical applications for the volume calculations are:

  stockpile calculations

  volumes of layers of materials, such as coal seams

  volumes of voids, such as lakes behind proposed dams

DTMLink uses the method of computing the volumes of individual triangular prisms. These are defined by the triangular planes forming the contour surface model by using the base areas and average heights of prisms.

DTMLink lets you create comparison surfaces. A comparison surface is a contour model of the difference between two surfaces. You can use this surface in conjunction with the volume calculation type ‘Above an elevation’ to calculate the cut and fill volumes between the two surfaces.


    Start command

This command starts Trimble's DTMLink utility.

To access it:

  Select Tools / DTMLink / Start.

Use this command to start DTMLink to import a 3D faces AutoCAD DXF file without creating a new surface or opening an existing surface.

To do this:

1.	Select Tools / DTMLink / Start.

2.	Select File / Import.

For more information, see the DTMLink Help.


    New Surface command

Use this command to create a new surface model.

To access it, select Tools / DTMLink / New Surface.

The New Surface dialog appears.


    New Surface dialog

Use this dialog to create a new surface model.

To access it, select Tools / DTMLink / New Surface.

Name

Enter an appropriate name for the new surface.

Points

The Points options let you select which points from the project database should be used for the surface formation.

  If there is no current database selection, the Current selection option is unavailable.

  When there is a current selection, the Current selection option uses the points in the current selection for the surface formation.

The Whole database option uses all the database points for the surface formation.

The Selection set option lets you choose an existing selection set, which holds the points you want to use to form the surface.

Use Breaklines

The Use Breaklines options let you select linework from the database that is to be used as breaklines when the surface is formed.

Breaklines, in terms of surface model formation, are lines that are to be considered to have a constant grade and so assist in controlling the model formation.

These options are only available if the Use Breaklines option is selected. Use Breaklines must be selected for any breakline information to be passed to the surface formation operation.

The Selection set option lets you use the linework from an existing selection set as breaklines during the surface formation. The Layer option lets you use the linework from an existing layer as breaklines during the surface formation. In both cases the associated list provides lists of the available selection sets or layers.

Use Exclude Boundaries

The Use Exclude Boundaries options operate in the same way as the Use Breaklines options discussed above. These options enable you to specify that existing linework in either a selection set or a layer is to be used for the definition of one or more exclude boundaries during the surface model formation.

An exclude boundary is a set of lines that define a closed figure within which no surface triangles are to be formed. If the linework specified for the exclude boundary definition does not form fully-closed figures, the surface model formation operation adds default closing lines.

Use Include Boundaries

The Use Include Boundaries options operate in the same way as the Use Exclude Boundaries options discussed above. These options enable you to specify that existing linework in either a selection set or a layer is to be used for the definition of one or more include boundaries during the surface model formation.

An include boundary is a set of lines which define a closed figure within which the surface triangles are to be formed. No triangles are formed outside any defined include boundary. If the linework specified for the include boundary definition does not form fully-closed figures, the surface model formation operation adds default closing lines.

NOTE: The linework used for Breaklines, Exclude Boundaries, and Include Boundaries can include arcs and curves. In these cases DTMLink interprets the arcs or curves as series of short, straight-line segments for use in the triangle formation. The software ensures that no line segment departs by more than two centimeters from the arc or curve line.

For more information about boundaries and breaklines, see the Trimble DTMLink online Help.


    Existing Surface command

Use this command to edit an existing surface model.

To access it, select Tools / DTMLink / Existing Surface.

The Existing Surface dialog appears.


    Existing Surface dialog

Use this dialog to edit an existing surface model. This dialog lets you specify points and linework in the project that you want to add to an existing surface.

To access it, select Tools / DTMLink / Existing Surface.

NOTE: If you specify points and linework in this dialog that are already in the existing surface the system will recognize this and not add them into the surface a second time.

Name

This field presents a list of the existing surfaces in the project. Select the surface you want to load and edit.

Add Points

Select the points from the project database that are to be added to the existing surface.

If there is no current database selection, the Current selection option is unavailable.

When there is a current selection, the Current selection option adds the points in the current selection to the existing surface.

The Whole database option passes all of the points currently in the database to the surface model. This lets you automatically add to the model any new points in the database.

The Selection set option lets you choose an existing selection set which hold the points you want to add to the existing surface.

Add Breaklines

The Add Breaklines options let you select linework from the database that is to be added to the breaklines already in the existing surface. These options are only available if the Add Breaklines option is selected.

The Add Breaklines option must be selected for any breakline information to be added to the existing surface. Breaklines, in terms of surface model formation, are lines that are to be considered to have a constant grade and assist in controlling the model formation.

The Selection set option lets you add the linework from an existing selection set to the existing surface as breaklines.

The Layer option lets you add the linework from an existing layer to the existing surface as breaklines.

In both cases the lists show the available selection sets or layers.

Add Exclude Boundaries

The Add Exclude Boundaries options operate in the same way as the Add Breaklines options discussed above.

These options enable you to specify that existing linework in either a selection set or a layer is to be added as exclude boundary lines to the exclude boundary definition in the existing surface.

An exclude boundary is a set of lines that define a closed figure within which no surface triangles are to be formed.

If the linework specified for the exclude boundary definition does not form fully-closed figures, the surface model formation operation adds default closing lines.

Add Include Boundaries

The Add Include Boundaries options operate in the same way as the Add Exclude Boundaries options discussed above.

These options enable you to specify that existing linework in either a selection set or a layer is to be added as include boundary lines to the include boundary definition in the existing surface.

An include boundary is a set of lines which define a closed figure within which the surface triangles are to be formed. No triangles are formed outside any defined include boundary.

If the linework specified for the include boundary definition does not form fully-closed figures, the surface model formation operation will add default closing lines.

NOTE: The linework used for Breaklines, Exclude Boundaries, and Include Boundaries can include arcs and curves. In these cases DTMLink interprets the arcs or curves as series of short straight line segments for use in the triangle formation. The software ensures that no line segment departs by more than two centimeters from the arc or curve line.

For more information about boundaries and breaklines, see the DTMLink online Help.


    Start command

This command starts Trimble’s RoadLink utility. Use this software to import or manually enter road definitions to transfer to Trimble survey devices for staking out.

To access it:

  Select Tools / RoadLink / Start.


    Export command

Use this command to export points from a selection set, the whole database, or the current selection to RoadLink.

To access it:

  Select Tools / RoadLink / Export.

The Export dialog appears.


    Export dialog

Use this dialog to export points from a selection set, the whole database, or the current selection to RoadLink. The display of existing database points in RoadLink can assist when entering or verifying a road definition.

To access it:

  Select Tools / RoadLink / Export.

Points

Select the set of points.

Three options are available:

Current selection	Exports selected points
Whole database	Exports all database points
Selection set	Choose the selection set from the list.
For more information, see the RoadLink Help.


Trademarks

The Globe & Triangle logo, Trimble, DTMLink, GPSurvey, RoadLink, Trimble Geomatics Office, Trimble Survey Controller, Trimble Survey Office, Trimble Total Control, TRIMMAP, TRIMNET, TSC1, and TSCe are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited.

The Sextant logo with Trimble, Geodimeter, and GPS Pathfinder, are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited, registered in the US Patent and Trademark Office.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Standard Template Library, © 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company, Standard Template Library, © 1996,97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc., Standard Template Library, © 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology.


Compact and Repair Project command

Use this command to compact and repair your project’s database.

To access it:

  Select Utilities / Compact and Repair Project.

The Compact and Repair Project dialog opens.


Compact and Repair Project dialog

Use this dialog to compact and repair your project’s database.

Compact

Compacting saves hard disk space and helps the software to perform better. It is good practice to regularly compact your project’s database.

Repair

Your database can be damaged if, for example, you have a power failure when Trimble Geomatics Office is running.

If you are editing the database and Trimble Geomatics Office closes unexpectedly, your last change to data may be lost after you repair the database. You will need to reopen the project, return to where you were editing, and check that your changes were saved.

To use the Compact and Repair Project dialog:

1.	Select Utilities / Compact and Repair Project.

2.	Select the project that you want to compact and repair.

An error message appears if your project’s database cannot be compacted or repaired.

TIP: If your hard disk is badly fragmented, defragment it before compacting the database.


Trimble Geomatics Office Utilities

The following Trimble Geomatics Office utilities are available with the Typical install option of Trimble Geomatics Office:

Trimble Coordinate System Manager™ utility

Trimble Convert to RINEX™ utility

Trimble Data Transfer utility

Trimble DC File Editor™ utility

Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor™ utility

Trimble Line Type Editor™ utility

Planning utility

Trimble Symbol Editor™ utility

Trimble A1 Viewer utility

NOTE: The Trimble Grid Factory™ utility is available from the Custom install option.

For more information, refer to the Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide.

Adding Utilities

To add extra utilities to the Utilities menu:

1.	Use Microsoft Windows Explorer to locate ...\Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\Utility.

2.	Right-click in a clear part of the right-hand Explorer window.

3.	Select the New / Shortcut option.

This opens the Create Shortcut wizard.

4.	To set up the shortcut, enter the path for the utility you want to add to the Utilities menu.

5.	Click Next and complete the ‘Select a name for the shortcut’ field to define the name for the utility you want shown in the Utilities menu.

The next time you run Trimble Geomatics Office, the utility for the shortcut that you added appears in the Utilities menu.


Symbol Editor

The Trimble Symbol Editor™ utility lets you edit point symbol libraries (*.sym) used by Trimble Geomatics Office.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Utilities / Symbol Editor when no project is open.

  Select it from the Microsoft Windows Start menu at any time.

To create or modify existing point symbols, use this utility. Once you register the edited file as the system file, the symbols you create are the available symbols when you add or modify point styles in Trimble Geomatics Office or in the Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor utility.

A point style

  is a definition explaining how a point is drawn in Trimble Geomatics Office

  includes a symbol that has been created in the Symbol Editor utility.

Creating a symbol in the Symbol Editor utility does not automatically make the symbol available as a point style in Trimble Geomatics Office. A point is assigned a point style, not a symbol. A point style must be defined using the newly created symbol.

The Symbol Editor automatically opens with the current symbol library in use by Trimble Geomatics Office. The names of the symbols in the opened library are presented in a list on the screen. Use this list to select the symbol you want to edit.

You can run the editor independently of Trimble Geomatics Office. Select the Symbol Editor utility shortcut icon from Trimble Geomatics Office folder.

NOTE: When you run the editor independently of Trimble Geomatics Office, any changes you make to the current symbol type are not reflected in any currently open projects. To see these changes applied, close and reopen your project. The changes saved become available in the Symbol library.

For more information, see the Trimble Symbol Editor utility Help.


Line Type Editor

The Trimble Line Type Editor™ utility lets you edit line type libraries (*.ltp) used by Trimble Geomatics Office.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Utilities / Line Type Editor when no project is open.

  Select it from the Microsoft Windows Start menu at any time.

To create or modify existing line types, use this utility. Once you register the edited file as the system file, the line types you create are the available line types when you add or modify line styles in Trimble Geomatics Office or in the Feature and Attribute Editor utility.

A line style

  is a definition explaining how a line is drawn in Trimble Geomatics Office

  includes a line type that has been created in the Line Type Editor utility.

Creating a line type in the Line Type Editor utility does not automatically make it available as a line type in Trimble Geomatics Office. A line is assigned a line style. A line style must be defined using the newly created line type.

The Line Type Editor utility automatically opens with the current symbol library in use by Trimble Geomatics Office. The names of the line types in the opened library appear in a list on the screen. To edit line types, use this list.

You can run the editor independently of Trimble Geomatics Office. Select the Line Type Editor utility shortcut icon from the Trimble Geomatics Office folder.

NOTE: When you run the editor independently of Trimble Geomatics Office, any changes you make to the system line type library are not reflected in your current project. To see these changes applied, close and reopen your project after saving the changes to the line type library. The changes saved become available in the line type library.

For more information, see the Trimble Line Type Editor utility Help.


Grid Factory

To install the Trimble Grid Factory™ utility, use the Custom install option.

To access it once it is installed, do one of the following:

  Select Utilities / Grid Factory when no project is open.

  Select it from the Microsoft Windows Start menu at any time.

Use the Trimble Grid Factory utility to work with Datum Grid (*.dgf) files and Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files.

Use this utility to create subgrids from existing grids or to combine multiple existing grids into a single grid. You can subgrid datum grid files and geoid model grid files using Trimble Geomatics Office.

If you use the Grid Factory utility to create geoid grid files, make sure the name you enter for the new file is the same as the geoid model name you create in the Trimble Coordinate System Manager™ utility.

Grids are large if the geographic area that is covered is large.

For example, the OSU91 geoid grid is approximately 2 Mb. Dataloggers and receivers do not normally have enough spare memory to hold this much data. The OSU91 grid covers the entire globe but most surveyors do not need that much coverage. Surveyors typically only need a few tens or hundreds of square kilometers. A grid that covers a smaller area is usually only a few hundred bytes in size.

With the Grid Factory utility you can create geoid model subgrid files covering a local area. These files are small enough to be uploaded to a Trimble Survey Controller (version 6 or later) device for use in the local area.

Many Trimble products are supplied with grid files for datum conversion and geoid modeling which you can use in the Grid Factory utility. The Grid Factory utility also imports foreign grid files and converts them to the Trimble grid format.

For more information, see the Trimble Grid Factory utility Help.


DC File Editor

The Trimble DC File Editor™ utility lets you edit Survey Controller (*.dc) files.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Utilities / DC File Editor when no project is open.

  Select it from the Microsoft Windows Start menu at any time.

NOTE: Trimble recommends that you complete all editing in Trimble Geomatics Office. This ensures that you always have the original device file to go back to if any problems occur during your editing in Trimble Geomatics Office.

Use Trimble’s DC File Editor utility to edit files from the following devices:

  Trimble

  Sokkia SDR (up to version 4-03)

  Any device file that can be converted to the SDR format

To edit the contents of a .dc file, use the Trimble DC File Editor utility. For example, you can change erroneous data collected in the field or add information that was unavailable in the field.

NOTE: You cannot edit attributes or change the feature and attribute library information.

For more information, see the Trimble DC File Editor utility Help.


Feature and Attribute Editor

Use the Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor™ utility to manage feature and attribute library (*.fcl) files for feature code processing and GIS attribute data collection.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Utilities / Feature and Attribute Editor when no project is open.

  Select it from the Microsoft Windows Start menu at any time.

Use the Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor utility to view or edit feature and attribute library files. A feature and attribute library is used for:

  feature code processing

  attribute collection

An .fcl is a text file containing the definitions of features, CAD styles, and control codes. A feature definition can include:

  a code for the feature

  the CAD procedures to be carried out on points which have that feature associated with them

  the attributes required for the feature

You can create new feature and attribute libraries. You can also use Trimble Geomatics Office’s default feature and attribute library in its current form, or modify the library to better suit your individual requirements.

For more information, see the Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor utility Help.


Coordinate System Manager

The Trimble Coordinate System Manager™ utility gives you access to your coordinate system database (Current.csd).

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select Utilities / Coordinate System Manager when no project is open.

  Select it from the Microsoft Windows Start menu at any time.

With the Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility you can define new:

  ellipsoid parameters

  datum transformations

  coordinate systems

  site definitions

  geoid models

NOTE: Most users do not need to use the Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility because Trimble has provided an extensive set of predefined coordinate system definitions. Only use the Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility if you want to add an additional coordinate system definition.

Trimble Geomatics Office uses the coordinate system database to determine which coordinate systems, geoid models, and sites are available for selection in a project.

NOTE: Sites can be created in Trimble Geomatics Office or in the Coordinate System Manager utility, and are stored in the geodetic database.

For more information, see the Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility Help or Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide.


Planning

The Planning utility helps you plan and schedule GPS field sessions. Use the utility before planning GPS sessions to determine suitable conditions for GPS surveying.

To access the Planning utility, do one of the following:

  Select Utilities / Planning when no project is open.

  Select it from the Microsoft Windows Start menu at any time.

Mission planning is usually the first phase of managing a surveying project. The objective is to define all significant aspects of the project so that it can be performed effectively and efficiently under all foreseeable conditions. If you are performing real-time kinematic (RTK) surveys:

  use the Planning utility to check that at least four satellites will be available to gain a known-point initialization, and that five satellites will be available to gain an on-the-fly initialization.

  inspect Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) values to confirm that satellite geometrical conditions are suitable for accurate real-time positioning.

NOTE: The Planning utility is not directly related to a Trimble Geomatics Office project and does not store session descriptions. You can define sessions and use them during the same run of the program.

The Planning utility can help you:

  visualize and predict satellite availability through tables and graphical representations

  experiment with satellite selection, almanacs, time zones, site visibility obstructions, and elevation masks

  determine the best observation periods for a session, given necessary constraints on PDOP and on the hours during which the field crew can work

For more information see the Help within the Planning utility.


Convert to RINEX

The Receiver INdependent EXchange (RINEX) format is an ASCII representation of GPS data collected by receivers. The Convert to RINEX utility converts a binary .dat format file collected using Trimble survey receivers into ASCII RINEX format files. You can run the utility independently from Trimble Geomatics Office.

To access the Convert to RINEX utility, do one of the following:

  Select Utilities / Convert to RINEX when no project is open.

  Select it from the Microsoft Windows Start menu at any time.

Use the utility to:

  select files for conversion

  configure the conversion parameters

  configure the output file information for antennas and headers

  convert the selected files to the RINEX format

The Convert to RINEX utility can create three types of RINEX files:

  Observation (raw GPS observations with station antenna information)

  Navigation (GPS orbits)

  Meteorological (pressure, temperature, and relative humidity)

The utility creates RINEX Observation and Navigation files by default. You may also choose to create a RINEX Meteorological file.

For more information, refer to the Trimble Convert to RINEX utility Help.


A1 Viewer

The A1 Viewer utility lets you view the contents of a GPSurvey Project Archive (*.A1) file, then extract (save) selected files to a destination directory. The A1 Viewer utility works independently of GPSurvey, so you do not need to load this software onto your computer. After saving the GPSurvey project data files, you can use the import functions in Trimble Geomatics Office to import the data into the current project.

To access the A1 Viewer utility, do one of the following:

 Select Utilities / A1 Viewer when no project is open,.

 Select it from the Microsoft Windows Start menu at any time.

GPSurvey Coordinates Importer

The GPSurvey Coordinates Importer option (GPSurvey Coordinates [curr_net.dat] ) lets you import adjusted coordinates from a Curr_net.dat file. To access this software:

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select GPSurvey Coordinates (Curr_net.dat) and click OK. The Open dialog appears.

NOTE: The file must have the name curr_net.dat for it to be successfully imported.

3.	Navigate to the file and click OK.

You can now import adjusted coordinates from a Curr_net.dat file.

Files supported by the A1 Viewer utility

Only the files that were archived by GPSurvey are available for viewing:

  .ssf/.ssk files − these files contain the baseline solution results from the GPSurvey WAVE processor. They are imported into a Trimble Geomatics Office project using the SSF/SSK files (*.ssf,*.ssf) import format, which is available in the Survey tab of the Import dialog.

  GPS Data files − these files contain the raw GPS data that was collected in the field. The two types of files—*.dat (raw GPS data files from a Trimble receiver) and *.rnx (raw RINEX data files converted for use in the WAVE processor)—are available when selecting this filter. Again, both file types (.dat and .rnx) are imported into a project using the GPS Data (*.dat) files import format.

NOTE: To view the available *.rnx files in the Open file dialog of the GPS Data files import format, in the Files of type field, select All files *.*.

  Adjusted Coordinate files − these files, Curr_net.dat and Coords.log, contain the adjusted coordinates from a GPSurvey archived project. The Curr_net.dat file is used to import your coordinates into Trimble Geomatics Office. The Coords.log file is in ASCII format and only available for viewing with a text editor. The points in the GPSurvey project can be in geographic or grid coordinate format, and in any coordinate system. For the coordinate import to work correctly, the coordinate system of the Trimble Geomatics Office project coordinate system properties must match the GPSurvey project coordinate system properties exactly.

The file (Curr_net.dat) is imported into a project using the GPSurvey Coordinates (Curr_net.dat) import format. When the file (Curr_net.dat) is read, the software identifies which coordinates were fixed during the GPSurvey adjustment. There must be at least one fixed coordinate component (NE, e, h) in the file before all coordinate components of the same type are imported. For example, one fixed elevation is required before elevations are imported. All imported components are given a quality of control.

  .ggf files − these files contain the geoid data of local Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files created in, or imported into, a GPSurvey project. They are created using the Residual Geoid Modeling function in the TRIMNet Plus software. This filter will not display the Global .ggf files (that is, WW15MGH, GEOID99) that were available in GPSurvey. To use the .ggf file in Trimble Geomatics Office, save the .ggf file to the Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData folder, then use the Coordinate System Manager utility to add the geoid to the coordinate system database. For more information about using this utility, refer to the Coordinate System Manager Help.

Using One-Height Mode in TRIMNet Plus

When you are importing GPSurvey coordinates from a project using the One-Height Mode in TRIMNet Plus, the Height field in the Trimble Geomatics Office project contains the elevation value. This is because during a One-Height Mode adjustment, TRIMNet Plus uses the Ellipsoid Height field for the elevation (orthometric height). If you do not know what mode was used for a GPSurvey project, open the project in GPSurvey and check the special control settings in TRIMNet Plus.

Using Precise Ephemeris Information

The GPSurvey project archive function will not archive precise ephemeris information used during baseline processing in the WAVE software. If precise ephemeris information was used during the baseline processing in the GPSurvey project, you must import it into Trimble Geomatics Office from the original source.


NGS Antenna Models

You can use one of two antenna model sets—Trimble or NGS— with Trimble Geomatics Office. Your survey requirements determine which antenna model set to use. You would generally use the NGS antenna model set when you use different antenna types to those defined in Antenna.ini.

The Trimble antenna set is installed as the default. However, to install the NGS antenna models, in the Global tab of the GPS Baseline Processing Styles dialog, select the NGS option from the Antenna model list.


Survey View command

Use this command to view the project in the Survey view.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Survey.

  Select the Survey View tool.


Survey View - Overview
Survey View − Overview

 See also

You can view a project in the Survey view or the Plan view.

Use the Survey view to perform survey-related tasks such as:

  to check GPS and terrestrial observations

  correct erroneous data.

Some menu options and toolbars are only available in the Survey view. They let you perform survey-related tasks, such as baseline processing, and Network Adjustment.

TIP: To view different parts of the project at the same time, create multiple windows. For more information, see New Window command.

Viewing survey data

GPS and terrestrial observations are displayed as lines in the Survey view.

Double-click an observation line to view the observation using the Properties window, and edit the observation if necessary. Error flags appear on points or observations if there is a misclosure outside of tolerance or a GPS observation fails a rejection criterion.

Different line colors represent a different status derived from the legend style setting in the Survey Legend tab of the View Options dialog. Control points and network adjusted points also have special displays in the Survey view.

Tasks available in the Survey view

The following tasks are only available in the Survey view:

  View Filters

  Select Observations

  GPS loop closures report options

Further survey-related tasks are available if you have the Baseline Processing module and Network Adjustment module installed. The following tables show the additional tasks available from each module.

Baseline Processing module

Network Adjustment module

Changing views

You can change views at any time.

To change to the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Select the Plan View tool.

  Select View / Plan.


Plan View command

Use this command to view the project in the Plan view.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Plan.

  Select the Plan View tool.


Plan View - Overview
    Plan View − Overview

See also
You can view a project in the Plan view or the Survey view.

Use the Plan view to view the topographic features observed during the field survey.

You can add points, lines, styles, and annotations to improve the presentation of the project. Any changes you make in Plan view do not affect the underlying survey observations.

Some menu options and toolbars are only available in the Plan view. These options let you perform CAD-related tasks (such as feature coding, layer control, and style management).

TIP: To view different parts of the project at the same time, create multiple windows. For more information, see New Window command.

Entities (points, lines, curves, arcs, text, and annotations) are displayed according to the style given to them. You can change the style of an entity by feature coding or by using the Properties window. GPS and conventional observations are not displayed. If you add a line in the Plan view, you are adding a new entity to the database.

If you change to the Survey view, CAD lines do not display.

Once you have completed the tasks in the Plan view you can print or export the plan to your design software package.

Tasks available in the Plan view

The following tasks are only available in the Plan view:

  Layers

  Styles (Point, Line, Text)

  Insert Points

  Insert Linework

  Insert Text

  Insert Annotations

  Insert Linework for Current Observations

  Select by Layers

  Select by Styles

  Select by Types

  Select by Point Feature

  Feature coding

  DTMLink

  RoadLink

Changing Views

You can change views at any time.

To change to the Survey view, do one of the following:

  Select the Survey View tool.

  Select View / Survey.

  Press Alt+1.


Zoom In command

Use this command to magnify a section of the graphics window.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Zoom / In.

  Select the Zoom In tool [image].

If you have the Zoom Navigator displayed, the area in view in the graphics window is shown as a black box in the Zoom Navigator window.

To use the Zoom In tool:

1.	Move the pointer over the graphics window.

The magnifying glass pointer appears enclosing a plus sign. Cross-hairs above the magnifying glass pointer mark the hot spot.

2.	Do one of the following:

  Click on a position in the graphics window to zoom in by a factor of two, centered on the hot spot.

  Click and drag the pointer across the graphics window to produce a rectangle containing the area you want to Zoom In on. The smaller the area, the greater the scale change. The contents of the area contained by the rectangle will occupy the entire graphics window when the mouse button is released. To cancel the current operation of the Zoom In tool, press Esc while the mouse button is pressed.

If you have a mouse with a wheel, use the wheel to zoom in and out. To pan with the wheel, hold the wheel down and drag the mouse. The contents of the graphics window move as you move the mouse.


Zoom Out command

Use this tool to increase the area viewed on a graphics window.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Zoom / Out.

  Select the Zoom Out tool [image].

If the Zoom Navigator is displayed, the area in view in the graphics window is shown as a black box in the Zoom Navigator window. If you zoom out beyond the extents of the project, no black box is displayed in the Zoom Navigator.

To use the Zoom Out tool:

1.	Move the pointer over the graphics window.

The magnifying glass pointer appears enclosing a minus sign. Cross-hairs above the pointer mark the hot spot.

2.	Do one of the following:

  Click on a position in the graphics window. The scale of the graphics window changes and becomes centered on the position of the hot spot.

  Click and drag the pointer across the graphics window to produce a rectangle that contains the area you want, then release the mouse button. The scale of the graphics window changes, and the information previously presented in the graphics window appears in the selected rectangular area. The smaller the rectangle, the greater the scale change. To cancel the current operation of the Zoom Out tool, press Esc while the mouse button is pressed.

If you have a mouse with a wheel, use the wheel to zoom in and out. To pan with the wheel, hold the wheel down and drag the mouse. The contents of the graphics window move as you move the mouse.


Zoom Extents command

Use this command to view all the visible points in the current project. When you select the Zoom Extents command, the graphics window automatically adjusts so that all data is visible.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Zoom / Extents.

  Press Ctrl+E.

  Select the Zoom Extents tool [image].

  Position the pointer in the graphics window. Right-click, and from the shortcut menu select Zoom Extents.


Zoom Previous command

Use this command to go back through each of your previous zoom views from when you entered the project.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Zoom / Previous.

  Select the Zoom Previous tool [image].

If the Zoom Navigator is displayed, the area in view in the graphics window is shown as a black box in the Zoom Navigator window. If you zoom out beyond the extents of the project, no black box is displayed in the Zoom Navigator.

If you have more than one graphics window open, a separate zoom stack is stored for each window.


Pan command

Use this command to shift the center of the zoom area to display a different area of the screen view.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Pan.

  Select the Pan tool [image].

The hand pointer appears.

If the Zoom Navigator is displayed, the area in view in the graphics window is shown as a black box in the Zoom Navigator window. If you pan beyond the extents of the project, no black box is displayed in the Zoom Navigator.

A pan is not remembered as a zoom. Therefore, you cannot perform a Previous Zoom to return to the original view before from the pan.

To use the Pan tool:

1.	Move the pointer over the graphics window.

Cross-hairs above the pointer mark the hot spot.

2.	Click and drag the pointer to where you want to pan. The contents of the graphics window move in real time as you move the mouse.

If you have a mouse with a wheel, use the wheel to zoom in and out. To pan with the wheel, hold the wheel down and drag the mouse. The contents of the graphics window move as you move the mouse.


Pan To command

Use this command to pan and scale to a particular location on the graphics window.

The Pan To dialog appears.


Pan To dialog

Use this dialog to pan and scale to a particular location on the graphics window.

To access it, select View / Pan To.

Center of view

These fields let you complete field fill-in actions, such as specifying a name or a location for the center of the view.

Point name	Use this field to specify the name of the point in the database. If you use field fill-in for this field, the Point name, Northing, and Easting fields are filled in.
Northing/Easting	Use these fields to locate the center of the view. If you use field fill-in, the Northing and Easting fields are filled in.
Radius to view

The Radius to View field sets the extent of the view. If you do not specify a unit, the distance unit set in Units and Format tab of the Project Properties dialog is used.


    Filters command

Use this command to open the View Filters dialog.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Filters.

  Select the View Filter tool [image].

  Click the View Filters icon [image] in the status bar.


    View Filters dialog

Use this dialog to filter out any observations you do not want to see while working in the Survey view.

NOTE: Data that has been hidden by the view filter cannot be selected using any of the commands in the Select menu.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Filters.

  Select the View Filters tool.

  Press Ctrl+F.

Observations

Use this group to select the observation groups that you want to view. This is useful if you have a project with several observation types, for example RTK and conventional, and you want to only view the RTK observations.

Show all observations

Select this option to view all the observations in the project. This option appears if you have the Network Adjustment module installed.

Show only observations marked for adjustment

Select this option to view only the observations that have the Use in Network Adjustment check box selected. (This check box is available in the Summary page of the Properties window.)

This option appears if you have the Network Adjustment module installed. If you select this option, some of the fields in the Observation Groups are not available.

Show only observations able to be adjusted

Select this option to view only the observations that can be used in a Network Adjustment, but do not necessarily have the Use in Network Adjustment check box selected. (This check box is available in the Summary page of the Properties window).

For example, disabled observations and observations enabled as check can be selected if they can be used in a network adjustment.

Potential baselines and conventional observations (which cannot be used in a Network Adjustment) are filtered out.

NOTE: This option appears if you have the Network Adjustment module installed. If you select this option, some of the fields in the Observation Groups are not available.

Types of observations to show

The Types of observations to show group contains the following check boxes:

  RTK

  PP Kinematic

  Laser

  Delta Elevations

  Static

  Terrestrial

  Reduced

  Azimuth

  Unprocessed baselines

Use these check boxes to select which observation types you want to view. For example, to view only RTK vectors, select the RTK check box and clear the other ones in the group.

  Sideshot observations

  Continuous

  Disabled observations

  Check observations

Use these check boxes to select which observations from the selected observation types you want to view. You must specify which observation type in the upper group that you want the observations in the lower group to filter.

For example, to view only RTK check observations, select the RTK and Check observation check boxes and clear the other ones in each group.

NOTE: If an observation has more than one observation property, you must select all check boxes relevant to the observation type to view it.

Show unconnected points

Select this check box to show points with no observations flowing from or to it, for example, keyed-in points.

Show events

Select this check box to display events.

Show only data in the selection set

Select this check box to display data that you have previously saved as a selection set. Select the selection set from the list.

Use Timeline to show dependent GPS baselines

When this check box is selected, only the observations that are shown in the Timeline view will be displayed in the graphics window.

You can use this tool to select independent baselines for network adjustment.

Use the Dependent Baseline View button in the toolbar to turn this option on and off.

NOTE: This option only applies to postprocessed GPS data. All other data will be shown in the graphics window, with the appropriate view filters applied.

NOTE: This option is only available if you have the Baseline Processing module installed.

Time

Select this check box to show only GPS observations that are within a specified date and time range. The From and To fields are enabled.

From / To

Use field fill-in (select the time from the time ruler in Timeline or use the keyboard to enter the time and date range of the GPS observations to be displayed). You can also enter the Julian day.


Point Labels - Overview
Point Labels − Overview

More Information

How to ...	See also
Overview

To display information in the graphics window about entities without storing that information to the database, use labels. Labels are available in both the Survey view and the Plan view.

Labels settings are restored when you re-open a project between working sessions. To store information about entities in the project database, use annotations. You can only add annotations in the Plan view.

You can label points with combinations of fields and user-definable text. To add custom label options, use a text editor to edit the Options.ini file. Labels always appear to the right of the point being labeled.

Labels are displayed using the font and size assigned to the ToolTips in your Microsoft Windows Appearance settings.


Project Bar command

Use this command to show and hide the Project bar.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Project Bar.

  Select the Project Bar tool [image].


Refresh command

Use this command to refresh the screen.

To access it, do one of the following:

  Select View / Refresh.

  Press F5.

Select this command to redraw the plan view when the graphics window becomes overwritten and difficult to read.


View Options dialog

Use this dialog to customise your view of data. To access it, select View / Options.

The View Options dialog has the following tabs:

  Grid Lines

  Survey Legend

  Survey Data

  Error Ellipse Controls

  Background Map


Point Labels dialog

Use this dialog to display point labels for the project.

To access it, from the main menu, select View / Point Labels.

Label points with

Select the fields with which you want to label points. The following options are provided with Trimble Geomatics Office. Any custom label options that you add using the Options.ini file appear in this list:

  Name

  Feature code

  Elevation

  Grid scale factor

  Elevation scale factor

  Combined scale factor

  Convergence angle

  Horizontal quality

  Elevation quality

  Height quality

Apply to

Two options for labelling points are available:

  Selection − select this option to label the selected points.

  Whole database − select this option to label all points. When nothing is selected in the Survey view, this option is selected by default.

When you label a selection, Trimble Geomatics Office automatically produces a named selection set of the labeled points.

NOTE: You can only label one selection at a time. If you have a selection of points labeled, and then label a new selection, the labels in the first selection are deselected.

Clear

Click Clear to remove all current labels.

NOTE: Label settings are restored if you reopen a project with point labels.

TIP: To change the font and size of the text, use your Microsoft Windows' standard Windows display settings for ToolTips.


View Options dialog - Grid Lines tab
View Options dialog − Grid Lines tab

Use this tab to display grid lines in the graphics window.

To access it:

1.	Select View / Options. The View Options dialog appears.

2.	Select the Grid Lines tab.

Show grid lines

Select this check box to show grid lines in the graphics window. When the grid lines are displayed, the grid interval is shown in the status bar.

NOTE: You can also show grid lines by selecting the grid lines [image] button in the toolbar.

The following items become available:

Fixed number of grid lines

Use this option to set the number of grid lines shown on the screen. When you zoom in or out, the same number of grid lines will be displayed.

NOTE: The fixed number of grid lines will be shown along the shortest side of the screen.

Grid interval

Use this option to specify the grid interval. The distance units will be those specified for the project.

NOTE: If there are too many grid lines to be displayed clearly on the screen, the grid lines are not displayed.

Grid line type

Use this option to select the style of the grid lines, for example, solid or dotted.

Grid line color

Use this option to select the color of the grid lines. You may need to change the color of the grid lines so that they show clearly against the background color of the graphics window.

Label grid lines

Select this check box to label grid lines with the northing and easting values.

NOTE: Grid lines will be printed when you select the Plot/Print command.


View Options dialog - Survey Legend tab

Use this tab to change the colors used to display your project in the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window. It determines:

  how different observation types and points are displayed in the Survey view

  the background color of the graphics window

  the default color for text

To access it:

1.	Select View / Options. The View Options dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey Legend tab.

Legend Style

In this field, select Black or Default. The following table describes the color settings that each option determines:


View Options dialog - Survey Data tab
View Options dialog − Survey Data tab

Use this tab to change the way survey data is displayed in the graphics window.

To access it:

1.	Select View / Options. The View Options dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey Data tab.

NOTE: This tab is only visible when you are in the Survey view.

Use stub vectors for sideshots

Select this check box to display sideshot observation vectors as stubs.

Show number of observations (where >1)

Select this check box to display the number of observations on multiply observed lines.

When an observation is filtered, the number of observations is shown as a ratio of what is being displayed to the total number of observations, for example, 1/3.


View Options dialog - Error Ellipse Controls tab
View Options dialog − Error Ellipse Controls tab

Use this tab to determine whether error ellipses, height error arrows, and elevation error arrows will appear in the graphics window after an adjustment. You can also determine the scale of error ellipses and the size of check marks.

To access it:

1.	Select View / Options. The View Options dialog appears.

2.	Select the Error Ellipse Controls tab.

NOTE: This tab is only available when you are in the Survey view.

Show point error ellipses & arrows

Select this check box to show point error ellipses and arrows.

Show elevation errors

Select this check box to show elevation errors.

Show height errors

Select this check box to show height errors.

Scale of error ellipse

The Scale of error ellipse slider, shown below, controls the size of the error ellipses that appear in the graphics window after an adjustment.

To make the ellipses smaller, move the slider to the left. To make the ellipses bigger, move the slider to the right.

Size of tick mark

Use this field, shown below, to determine the distance between the tick marks that appear on error ellipse bar scales in the graphics window.

Bar scales become longer when increased in size, while the distance between tick marks changes to match the value that appears in the Size of tick mark field.


View Options dialog - Background Map tab
View Options dialog − Background Map tab

Trimble Geomatics Office can display background files in the graphics window. You can import background files such as Drawing Exchange Format (.dxf), Windows Bitmap (.bmp), or Tagged Image File Format (.tif) files to display. Windows Bitmap (.bmp), or Tagged Image File Format (.tif) files must be georeferenced so that they can be displayed correctly.

ESRI’s World file format is used to georeference background files. A World file is an ASCII text file with a .tfw or .wld extension. Trimble Geomatics Office has the following requirements for World files. They must:

  be stored in the same location as the related .dxf, .bmp or.tif file

  have the same coordinate system as your Trimble Geomatics Office project

  have the same units as your Trimble Geomatics Office project

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office supports uncompressed TIFF files, and the following compression schemes: CCITT, PackBits, Thunder, Next, LogLuv. However, it does not support the following compressed files: OJPEG, JPEG, ZIP, LZW, PixarLog.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office also does not support RLE compressed .bmp files.

Use the Background Map tab to select a background file to display.

To access it:

1.	Select View / Options. The View Options dialog appears.

2.	Select the Background Map tab.

File names

This group shows a list of files that have been selected for use as background maps.

Add

Use the Add button to select the background files. You can select a .dxf, .bmp, or .tif file.

NOTE: Make sure that the related World file is stored in the same location. You do not need to select this file in the list.

Remove

Use the Remove button to remove a background file from the list.

World file format

An example of a World file format is shown below:

20.17541308822119

0.00000000000000

0.00000000000000

−20.17541308822119

424178.11472601280548

4313415.90726399607956

These 6 values are used to calculate an image-to-world transformation using a six-parameter affine transformation in the form of:

x1 = Ax + By + C

y1 = Dx + Ey + F

Where

x1	calculated x-coordinate of the pixel on the map

y1 	calculated y-coordinate of the pixel on the map

x 	column number of a pixel in the image

y 	row number of a pixel in the image

A 	x-scale; dimension of a pixel in map units in x direction

B, D	rotation terms

C, F	translation terms; x,y map coordinates of the center of the upper-left pixel

E 	negative of y-scale; dimension of a pixel in map units in y direction

The transformation parameters are stored in the World file in the following order:

20.17541308822119 − A

0.00000000000000 − D

0.00000000000000 − B

-20.17541308822119 − E

424178.11472601280548 − C

4313415.90726399607956 − F

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office does not support the rotation of images. If your World file has non-zero rotation terms (D and B parameters), they will not be used.

NOTE: The sign of the x-scale (A) or the y-scale (E) changes depending on the orientation of the coordinate system. This is because the origins of an image and a geographic coordinate system are different. The origin of an image is always the upper-left corner, whereas the origin of a geographic coordinate system changes depending on the coordinate direction.

For example, for a NE coordinate system, the origin of the map coordinate system is located in the lower-left corner. Row values in the image increase from the upper-left corner downward, while y-coordinate values in the map increase from the lower-left corner upward. Therefore, for a NE system, the y-scale (E) is negative. The following table summarises the sign of the x- and y-scales that you should use for NE, SE & NW coordinate systems:

	NE	SW	NW
x(A)	+ve	-ve	-ve
y(E)	-ve	+ve	-ve


Warranty

Software and Firmware Limited Warranty

Trimble warrants that this Trimble software product (the "Software") shall substantially conform to Trimble’s applicable published specifications for the Software for a period of ninety (90) days, starting from the date of delivery.

Warranty Remedies

Trimble's sole liability and your exclusive remedy under the warranties set forth above shall be, at Trimble’s option, to repair or replace any Product or Software that fails to conform to such warranty ("Nonconforming Product") or refund the purchase price paid by you for any such Nonconforming Product, upon your return of any Nonconforming Product to Trimble.

Warranty Exclusions

These warranties shall be applied only in the event and to the extent that: (i) the Products and Software are properly and correctly installed, configured, interfaced, stored, maintained and operated in accordance with Trimble's relevant operator's manual and specifications, and; (ii) the Products and Software are not modified or misused. The preceding warranties shall not apply to, and Trimble shall not be responsible for, any claim of warranty infringement is based on (i) defects or performance problems that arise from the combination or utilization of the Product or Software with products, information, systems or devices not made, supplied or specified by Trimble; (ii) the operation of the Product or Software under any specification other than, or in addition to, Trimble's standard specifications for its products; (iii) the unauthorized modification or use of the Product or Software; (iv) damage caused by lightning, other electrical discharge, or fresh or salt water immersion or spray; or (v) normal wear and tear on consumable parts (e.g., batteries).

THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE'S ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT, TRIMBLE FURNISHES THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE AS-IS, WITH NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND THERE IS EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE STATED EXPRESS WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF TRIMBLE ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Limitation of Liability

TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TRIMBLE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE, REGARDLESS WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND REGARDLESS OF THE COURSE OF DEALING WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

IN ANY CASE, TRIMBLE'S SOLE LIABILITY, AND YOUR SOLE REMEDY UNDER OR FOR BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT, WILL BE LIMITED TO THE REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OR LICENSE FEE PAID FOR THE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE.


Welcome to the Trimble Geomatics Office™ Help.

This Help is designed to provide the information that you need to effectively use the full power and capabilities of the Trimble Geomatics Office software. It also describes how to set up and use Trimble Geomatics Office.

  Using the Help

  Trimble Geomatics Office - Overview

  About Trimble

  Feedback


New Window command

Use this command to open another window for the current project.

To access it, select Window / New Window.

Each new window is added to the list of windows in the Window menu.

The new window has the same contents as the active window. You can open multiple windows to display different parts or views of the project at the same time. For example, you can open different windows and display a different layer of the project in each window.

If you change the contents in one window, all other windows containing the same project reflect those changes provided they are displaying that information.

When you open a new window, it becomes the active window and is displayed on top of all other open windows.


Cascade command

Use this command to overlap multiple-opened project windows.

To access it, select Window / Cascade.

The windows are overlapped so that you can see the title bar of each one.


Tile command

Use this command to rearrange all project windows that are currently open.

To access it, select Window / Tile.

The windows are arranged to form a tile pattern.


Arrange Icons command

Use this command to rearrange any icons of minimized windows into a tidy pattern on the screen.

To access it, select Window / Arrange Icons.

The icons are arranged at the bottom of the window.


Split command

Use this command to view two parts of a project simultaneously.

To access it, select Window / Split.

The split within the window can be resized by clicking and dragging on the split bar. Changes made to one part occur simultaneously in the other.


Display list command

Use this command to open a window in the display list. The list shows all the open windows.

To access it, select from the Window display list menu.


World Wide Web Site

For an interactive look at Trimble, visit our site on the World Wide Web
www.trimble.com/


Properties Window - Overview
Properties Window − Overview

The Properties window lets you view information on all entities (points, observations, lines, arcs, curves, text, annotation, notes).

Use the Properties window to view and edit properties of an entity that is selected. You can only view the properties of one entity at a time. Any changes made to entities in the Properties window are applied immediately.

The Properties window is resizable by clicking and dragging on the window frame. Click on the top right corner button to close the window.

You can keep the Properties window open while you use other parts of Trimble Geomatics Office. The Properties window is automatically updated to show the correct information about the selection set.

If you have defined a current selection set and select an entity to view from the Properties window selection list, the current selection in the graphics window updates to include only the entity that you are viewing. The Properties window selection list retains the original selection set. Any entities highlighted in the Properties window selection list become the current selection set in the graphics window.

The tree view in the Properties window shows the names and the values of the selected item on-screen. The tree view shows the relationship between the entities. For example, you can view the "from" and "to" point for any observation or linetype entity by clicking on the plus sign (+) and selecting the point you want to view and edit.

The view can be collapsed or expanded at the nodes:

  Click the plus sign (+) to expand the view of the tree.

  Click the minus sign (−) to collapse the view of the tree.

The information and tabs available on the right side of the Properties window depend on the entity type that is currently selected.

Properties window selection tools

The Properties window selection tools let you configure your selection list.

Selection	Icon	Click this button to ...
Group Survey Data		group survey data by source, data type, or observation direction.
Sort		sort the entities in the selection list. Select the option you want from the list. You can choose to sort points by database order, elevation, name, quality, start time, occupation length, or data type.
Filter		keep only points, observations, flagged observations, or the current selection set. You can also remove the current selection. NOTE: You can add your own queries to the filter list.
Quality indicators

Quality indicators are small symbols which appear to the right of each field in the Summary page. These symbols show the quality of the survey data. The quality can be fixed control, control, survey, mapping, unknown, or adjusted. The quality indicators are also used in the Point Derivation report and the Recompute report.

Geoid indicators

Geoid indicators show if the elevation or height component of a point has been derived from the geoid defined for your project. The geoid indicator appears with the quality indicator.

For example, if you measure an RTK point, it has a WGS-84 height and an elevation derived from the geoid. If you collect a terrestrial point, it has an elevation and a WGS-84 height derived from the geoid.

Geoid indicators are also used in the Point Derivation report and the Recompute report.

The geoid quality of the geoid model is determined in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog.

Auto rollup tool

Use this tool [image]  to minimize the Properties window when you are selecting the entities in the Graphics window.

Lock window open

Use this tool [image] to ensures that when the Properties window is open it stays the same size.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? Overview
Properties window − Survey tab − Overview

Use the Survey tab to view and edit the survey-related properties of an entity in the selection. You can view the properties of entities that appear in the Survey view such as:

  Points

  GPS observations

  Conventional observations

  Level Observations

  Laser rangefinder observations

  Reduced observations (offsets)

Pages

Survey information is organized in pages. Only one page can be viewed at a time. You can access the pages using the available menu buttons. The menu buttons access all survey information and depend on the entity type that is currently selected.

Deleting points and observations

To delete a point or observation, use the Delete button [image] in the Properties window. If a point or observation cannot be deleted, the Delete button is unavailable.

NOTE: A fixed coordinate cannot be deleted. "Unfix" the coordinate before you delete it.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? Points
Properties window − Survey tab − Points

 Overview

Use the Survey tab in the Properties window to view and edit the survey-related information of the selected point. The survey information is organized in pages.

You can access the following pages by clicking the appropriate menu button:

Summary
Warning
Occupations and setups
Error estimate


Properties window ? Survey tab ? Summary page (Points)
Properties window − Survey tab − Summary page (Points)

More Information

 How To

Use the Summary page to view the derived position and qualities for the selected point in the Properties window.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Survey tab, click the Summary menu button

Point name

Displays the name of the point. Enter a value in this field to change the name.

Coordinate fields

Displays the derived position of the point and the qualities assigned to each component. The coordinate fields displayed are dependent on the display option set.

Grid / Local / WGS-84

Select the coordinate display option for the point.

NOTE: If the display option is set to WGS-84, the coordinate fields displayed will depend on what is set for the Display WGS-84 as setting in the Units and Format tab of the Project Properties dialog. For example, if the Display WGS-84 as field is set to L,L,H the coordinate fields in the Summary page are labeled as Latitude, Longitude, Height. If the Display WGS-84 as field is set to X,Y,Z the WGS-84 fields are displayed as X, Y, Z.

Derivation Report

Select the Derivation Report tool [image] to show the Point Derivation report.

Add Coordinate

Select the Add Coordinate tool [image] when you want to key in a grid, local or WGS-84 office-entered coordinate. (You should only do this when you want the software to use your office-entered coordinate in preference to the coordinates derived from observations.) The keyed-in coordinate will have an office-entered source.

You can only have one grid/local and one WGS-84 office-entered coordinate associated with a point. If a WGS-84 and a grid or local coordinate already exist, the Add coordinate tool is unavailable.

NOTE: When you add a coordinate, the coordinate component fields and the quality are null. To enter the current point position and quality, select the Insert Current Value tool [image].


Properties window - Survey tab - Warning page
Properties window − Survey tab − Warning page

Use the Warning page to view and suppress the messages associated with warning flags that appear on points or observations in the Survey view.

To do this:

1.	Do one of the following:

  Double-click on a point or observation with a warning indicator flag that you want to view.

  Double-click on the warning flag icon in the status bar to select all points with warning indicator flags.

The Properties window appears.

2.	If you have more than one entity in the selection, select the entity that you want to view.

3.	To access the Warning page, click the Warning menu button [image].

You should resolve or suppress all warning flags before exporting coordinates. When an Out-of-Tolerance Closure is resolved by disabling a bad observation or renaming the point if the observation was to a different physical point, the error flag will disappear.

The following table describes the messages that may appear with the warning flags:

Suppress this message

Select this check box to suppress the warning flag associated with the selected point or observation, if you decide the error is acceptable for the survey. The flag becomes white in the Properties window and disappears from the graphics window.

NOTE: If you suppress all warning flags, the flag icon in the status bar turns white.

If you have a point selected, then you can select the Point Derivation tool [image] to view the Point Derivation report.

Use this to determine how the point’s position was derived and why the error has occurred.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? Occupations and Setups pages
Properties window − Survey tab − Occupations and Setups pages

Use the Occupations and Setups pages to view and correct the GPS occupation or terrestrial setup details of the selected point or observation in the Properties window.

The following pages are available depending on the entity type selected and the field method used:

To access these pages, from the Properties window:

1.	Select the observation.

2.	Click the Occupations and Setups menu button [image].

NOTE: If there is more than one occupation or setup for the point, a shortcut menu appears. Select the page you want to view. As you hold the mouse over the different occupations and setups in the shortcut menu, the details are updated in the page.

A point can have more than one occupation. However, an observation will only have one "from" point and one "to" point.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? GPS Occupation page
Properties window − Survey tab − GPS Occupation page

Use the GPS Occupation page to view and correct the GPS occupation details of the selected point. The page content is the same if the point was used as the base station or rover position.

To access it, from the Properties window:

1.	Select the Survey tab.

2.	Do one of the following:

  If you have a point selected, click the Occupations and setups menu button [image].

NOTE: If there is more than one occupation or setup for the point, a shortcut menu appears. Select the page you want to view.

  If you have a GPS observation selected, click the Base Occupation page button [image] to view the base occupation details; or click the Rover Occupation Menu button [image] to view the rover occupation details.

Point

Displays the name of the occupied point.

Time

Displays the length (in time) of the occupation and the start time of the occupation.

NOTE: During data import the Start and End times are converted from GPS Time to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated—effectively Greenwich Mean Time). The times are then displayed as local times using the current Time Zone set in Microsoft Windows.

TIP: Position the pointer over the field to display a ToolTip of the stop time of the occupation.

Antenna details

The Antenna details group contains details of the GPS antenna used for the occupation of the observed point.

Height

Displays the antenna height. If the height has been incorrectly entered during the occupation, use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Type

Displays the type of antenna connected to the receiver. If the antenna has been incorrectly entered during the occupation, select an antenna type from the list to change this field.

Measured to

Displays where the antenna height was measured to. If the method has been incorrectly entered during the occupation, select an option from the list to change this field.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? Instrument Setup page
Properties window − Survey tab − Instrument Setup page

Use the Instrument Setup page to view and correct the setup details of the conventional instrument used for the observation.

To access it, from the Properties window:

1.	Select the Survey tab.

2.	With a point selected, click the Occupations and setups menu button [image].

NOTE: If there is more than one occupation or setup for the point, a shortcut menu appears. Select the Instrument Setup page you want to view. All occupations for the point, both GPS and terrestrial, can be viewed in this page.

Instrument Point

Displays the name of the point from which the observation was taken.

Instrument height

Displays the height of the instrument when the observation was taken. If the height has been incorrectly entered during the setup, use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

BS point

Displays the name of the observed back sight point.

BS azimuth

Displays the computed azimuth to the observed back sight.

NOTE: If the backsight point has coordinates, these coordinates are used to determine the azimuth to the backsight point. If a keyed-in azimuth also exists, the quality of this keyed-in azimuth is compared to the azimuth computed using the backsight point coordinates, and the azimuth with the highest quality is used. If the quality of the computed azimuth and the keyed-in azimuth is the same, then the computed azimuth is used.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? Target Setup page
Properties window − Survey tab − Target Setup page

Use the Target Setup page to view and correct the setup details of the target used for the conventional observation.

To access this page, from the Properties window:

1.	In the Survey tab, select the conventional observation

2.	Click the Target Setup menu button [image] to view the target setup details.

FS Point

Displays the name of the foresight point.

Target height

Displays the height of the target when the foresight observation was taken. If the height has been incorrectly entered during the setup, use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Prism constant

Displays the prism constant of the target that is applied to the observation. If the constant has not been entered or has been incorrectly entered during the setup, use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

The field may show ‘?’ because the observation has already had the prism constant applied in the file, and the file does not specify what the constant is. If an error was made during setup, and the prism constant was entered incorrectly, then apply the difference between the prism constant entered in the field, and the constant which should have been entered. For example, if you entered "20" in the field, and you should have entered "5", then enter a correction of "–15" in the prism constant field.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? GPS Coordinate (APC) page
Properties window − Survey tab − GPS Coordinate (APC) page

Use the GPS Coordinate (APC) page to view a GPS position solution. A position solution can be obtained from:

  Differential GPS

  Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS)

  Using the [image] key in Trimble Survey Controller

Autonomous positions

VRS – wider area RTK (fixed and float)

Position solutions will be displayed for a point if they are survey or mapping quality. You can have more than one position solution, but these values cannot be edited.

To access the page, from the Properties window:

1.	In the graphics window, double-click the point that includes a GPS Coordinate (APC).

2.	Expand the point in the Properties window tree.

3.	Select the C?soln from the tree structure [image], where ? indicates the coordinate number.

The GPS Coordinate (APC) page is displayed.

Point

Displays the point name.

Latitude, Longitude, Height

Displays the WGS-84 coordinates and the point qualities determined for the point.

NOTE: The height displayed is the height of the Antenna Phase Center of the GPS antenna used for the occupation. The antenna height is not applied.

Processor Type

Displays the processing method.  For example, WAAS, wide area RTK.

Status

Displays the status of the position solution. The status is considered by a recomputation, or when a surveying computation is performed. To change this field, click the arrow and select the option from the drop-down list that you want applied to the point.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? Coordinate page
Properties window − Survey tab − Coordinate page

More Information

 See also

You can use the Coordinate page to view the coordinates of a selected point. You can also use it to change the qualities and status of the coordinates.

A point can have one WGS-84 coordinate, one grid/local coordinate, and adjusted coordinates. An adjusted coordinate can occur after you have performed a network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed).

Use the Summary page to view the coordinates for the point.

To access the Coordinate page:

1.	In the graphics window, double-click on the point. The Properties window appears.

2.	Expand the tree for the point and select the coordinate.

The coordinates for the point are shown.

Coordinate fields

Displays the coordinate component values of the point and the qualities assigned to them. The coordinate fields displayed depend on the display option set and are only editable if the current view is the same as the saved coordinate type.

Grid / Local / WGS-84

Select the coordinate display option for the point.

NOTE: If the display option is set to WGS-84, the coordinate fields displayed will depend on what is set for the Display WGS-84 as setting in the Units and Format tab of the Project Properties dialog. For example, if the Display WGS-84 as field is set to X,Y,Z, the coordinate field in the Summary page displays as X,Y,Z. If the Display WGS-84 as field is set to L,L,H, the WGS-84 fields are labeled Latitude, Longitude and Height.

Quality Selector Control

Use the Quality Selector control to assign a quality to the coordinate component. The qualities are listed in descending order:

  Control

  Survey

  Mapping

 Unknown

Status

Displays the status of the selected point. The status of a point is considered by a recomputation, or when a surveying computation is performed. To change this field, click the arrow and select the option from the drop down list you want applied to the point.

Disable a coordinate if you do not want it used to derive the position of the point.

Enable a coordinate as a check if you only want the coordinate used if there are no other observations or coordinates that can be used to derive the position of the point.

The Recompute report will report on coordinates enabled as check but not on disabled coordinates.

Coordinate Type

The coordinates are saved to the database as the coordinate type you select. If you save the coordinate as a different type, any existing coordinate with the same type is overwritten.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? GPS Observations
Properties window − Survey tab − GPS Observations

You can view the information on any GPS observation type such as RTK, Static, FastStatic, and postprocessed kinematic vectors.

Use the Survey tab in the Properties window to view and edit the survey-related information of the selected GPS observation. The survey information is organized in pages.

You can access the following pages by clicking the appropriate menu button:

Summary
Warning
Base Occupation
Rover Occupation
Observation
Observation statistics


Properties window ? Survey tab ? Summary page (GPS Observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Summary page (GPS Observations)

The Summary page summarizes the observation details of the selected GPS observation in the Properties window.

1.	Select a GPS observation in the Survey view.

2.	To access it, from the Properties window, click the Summary menu button [image].

From

Displays the name of the reference point that the observation is made from.

To

Displays the name of the roving point that the observation is made to.

Time

Displays the length in time of the observation and when it was started.

NOTE: During data import the Start and End times are converted from GPS Time to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated - effectively Greenwich Mean Time). The times are then displayed as local times using the current time zone set in Microsoft Windows.

TIP: Position the pointer over the field to display a ToolTip of the stop time of the occupation.

Processor Type

Displays the processor type of the selected observation. The classification relates to the processor used to determine the observation solution. The processor type field can be:

  RTK

  Static or FastStatic

  PPKinematic

  Unprocessed − indicates the observation solution can be, but has not been, determined by the baseline processor.

Field Method

Displays the GPS survey method used for the observation.

  Topo

  Continuous

  Observed Control

  Rapid

  Static or FastStatic

  Event

  Stop and Go

Status

Displays the status of the selected observation. The status of an observation is considered by a recomputation, or when a surveying computation is performed. Use this field to disable bad observations (such as when the observation produces a misclosure).

To change this field, click the arrow and select the option from the drop down list you want applied to the observation.

Disable an observation if you do not want it used to derive the position of the point.

Enable an observation as a check if you only want the observation used if there are no other observations or coordinates that can be used to derive the position of the point.

The Recompute report will report on observations enabled as check but not on disabled observations.

Use in Network Adjustment

Clear this check box if you do not want the selected observation to be used in a network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed), but still used when the database is computed by a recomputation.

If the observation does not have covariance information or standard error information, this option is disabled.

If the observation is disabled, this option is unavailable.


Properties window - Survey tab - Observation page (GPS Observations)

Use the Observation page to select the active solution and view the baseline components for the selected observation:

1.	Select the baseline in the Survey view.

2.	To access it, from the Properties window, click the Observation menu button [image].

Active solution

Displays the active baseline solution. If you have processed the baseline more than once (when the Baseline Processing module is installed) using different processing styles, and have chosen not to overwrite duplicate baseline solutions in the GPS processing dialog, the baseline can have more than one solution. However, the baseline can only have one active solution. This is the solution used in a recomputation and a network adjustment. Click the arrow and select the best solution from the drop down list that you want active for the observation.

TIP: Hold the pointer over the solutions to display a ToolTip of the baseline results.

Solution type

Displays the observation solution type of the selected observation.

dX, dY, dZ

Displays the delta values of the GPS baseline in terms of the WGS-84 Cartesian coordinate system when the display option is set to XYZ.

NS forward azimuth, Ellipsoid distance, Delta height

Displays the GPS baseline components in terms of the local ellipsoid when the display option is set to Geodetic.

NOTE: NS forward azimuth refers to the normal section forward (geodetic) azimuth in the direction from the reference point to the roving point.

dN, dE, dU

Displays the delta Northing, Easting, and Up values on the local geodetic horizon when the display option is set to NEU.

Show ground to ground details

Select this check box to show the baseline component values reduced to the ground heights of the marks occupied by the receivers at the reference and roving points.

If the check box is cleared, the baseline component values are shown from reference antenna phase center to rover antenna phase center. The following figure shows this difference.


Properties window - Survey tab - Observation page (Position Solution)

Use the Observation page to select the active solution and view the baseline components for the selected observation:

1.	Select the baseline in the Survey view.

2.	To access it, from the Properties window, click the Observation menu button [image].

Processor Type

Displays the processing method.  For example, WAAS, or wide-area RTK.

Field Method

Shows the field method used, for example, continuous.

Solution type

Displays the observation solution type of the selected observation, for example, L1 float.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? Observation Statistics Page (GPS Observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Observation Statistics page (GPS Observations)

The Observations Statistics page displays the appropriate solution statistics and quality indicators depending on the baseline observation type. The statistics are different for an RTK observation than for a static/post-processed observation.

Use this page to check the quality of the solution.

1.	Select the baseline in the Survey view.

2.	To access it, from the Properties window, click the Observations Statistics menu button [image].

If you are viewing an RTK observation, the following fields in the Observation Statistics page appear:

Number of measurements

Displays the number of measurements (epochs) taken to complete the observation.

Minimum number of satellites

Displays the minimum number of satellites tracked by the reference and roving receivers during the observation.

RMS

Displays the Root Mean Square (RMS). The RMS value shows the accuracy of the measurements used to determine the baseline solution.

Slope distance

Displays the slope distance of the observation.

Horizontal precision

Displays the horizontal precision of the measurements used to determine the observation solution.

Vertical precision

Displays the vertical precision of the measurements used to determine the observation solution.

PDOP/RDOP

Displays the Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) value for kinematic baselines, or the Relative Dilution of Precision (RDOP) value for static baselines. RDOP decreases with time.

If you are viewing a post-processed baseline, the following fields in the Observation Statistics page appear:

Ratio

Displays the ratio of two variances generated in the integer-search of the processor that best fit the measurements.

Reference variance

Displays the reference variance. The reference variance is an indicator of how well the observed data for the baseline fits into the computed solution.

RMS

Displays the Root Mean Square. The RMS value expresses the accuracy of the measurements used to determine the baseline solution.

Slope distance

Displays the slope distance of the observation.

Horizontal precision

Displays the horizontal precision of the measurements used to determine the observation solution.

Vertical precision

Displays the vertical precision of the measurements used to determine the observation solution.

RDOP

Displays the Relative Dilution of Precision value.


Properties window - Survey tab - Observation Statistics Page (Position Solution)

The Observations Statistics page displays the appropriate solution statistics and quality indicator type.

Use this page to check the quality of the solution:

1.	Select the baseline in the Survey view.

2.	To access it, from the Properties window, click the Observations Statistics menu button [image].

Horizontal precision

Displays the horizontal precision of the measurements used to determine the position solution.

Vertical precision

Displays the vertical precision of the measurements used to determine the position solution.

RMS

Displays the Root Mean Square (RMS). The RMS value shows the accuracy of the measurements used to determine the baseline solution.

PDOP

Displays the Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) value for baselines.

Minimum number of satellites

Displays the minimum number of satellites tracked during the observation.

Number of GPS positions

Shows the number of GPS positions used in the solution.


Properties window − Survey tab − Conventional Observations

You can view the information on any terrestrial observation measured in the field using a conventional instrument such as a total station or theodolite.

Use the Survey tab in the Properties window to view the survey-related information of the selected conventional observation and to edit the setup details. The survey information is organized in pages.

You can access the following pages by clicking the appropriate menu button:

Summary
Target setup
Observation
Observation Statistics
NOTE: A conventional observation is shown in the tree structure in the following order: backsight point name, Instrument point name, and foresight point name.


Properties window ? Survey tab ? Summary page (Conventional Observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Summary page (Conventional Observations)

The Summary page summarizes the observation details of the selected conventional observation in the Properties window.

1.	Select the observation in the Survey view.

2. 	To access it, from the Properties window, click the Summary menu button

Instrument Point

Displays the name of the point used for the instrument setup that the observation is made from.

Instrument Height

Displays the height of the instrument.

Backsight Point

Displays the name of the point used as the backsight.

Foresight Point

Displays the name of the target point that the observation is made to.

Status

Displays the status of the selected observation. The status of an observation is considered by a recomputation, or when a surveying computation is performed.

To change this field, click the arrow and select the option from the drop down list you want applied to the observation.

Disable an observation if you do not want it used to derive the position of the point.

If the observation is a check on a backsight point, enable the observation as a check. This will ensure a closure will be reported but the observation will not be used to determine the coordinate.

The Recompute report will report on observations enabled as check but not on disabled observations.

Use in Network Adjustment

If you do not want the selected observation used in a network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed), but still want it used in a recomputation, clear this check box.


Properties window - Survey tab - Observation page (Conventional Observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Observation page (Conventional Observations)

Use the Observation page to view the observation components between the instrument and target setups for the selected observation.

1.	Select the observation in the Survey view.

2.	To access it, from the Properties window, click the Observation menu button [image].

Backsight Azimuth

Displays the computed azimuth and quality between the instrument point and the backsight point.

NOTE: If the backsight point has coordinates, these coordinates are used to determine the azimuth to the backsight point. If a keyed-in azimuth also exists, the quality of this keyed-in azimuth is compared to the azimuth computed using the backsight point coordinates, and the azimuth with the highest quality is used. If the quality of the computed azimuth and the keyed-in azimuth is the same, then the computed azimuth is used.

Horizontal angle, Vertical angle, Slope distance

Displays the observed values of the observation components when the display option is set to HA,VA,SD.

Azimuth, Horizontal distance, Delta elevation

Displays the values of the observation components reduced to the grid coordinate system when the display option is set to AZ,HD,VD.

NOTE: During import, the atmospheric corrections and curvature and refraction corrections are applied to the observation. The horizontal observation is reduced to an angle from the backsight point. The vertical angle is corrected for curvature and refraction. The PPM correction is applied to the slope distance.

Observation type

Displays the face (one, two) of the instrument used when the observation was taken, or if the face one and face two observations have been meaned. A meaned observation is a mean of one face one/face two pair, observed between the backsight point and the observed point in the same setup.

The observation can also be derived from a mean-turned angle from Trimble Survey Controller (for example when rounds are observed).

Show ground to ground details

Select this check box to show the observations reduced to the ground heights of the marks that are occupied by the instrument point and the foresight point.


Properties window - Survey tab - Level Observations
Properties window − Survey tab − Level Observations

You can view information on any level observation measured in the field. To view the survey-related information of a selected level observation, use the Survey tab of the Properties window.

The information in the Survey tab is organized into pages. To access a page, click the appropriate menu button, as shown below:

Summary
Observation Statistics
NOTE: If you intend to perform a network adjustment using level observation data, you must have standard errors defined for the level observations. Standard errors are calculated in the following cases:

  If you import digital level data, the standard error is calculated using the number of turns and the error when reading staff in the Edit Adjustment Style dialog (Terrestrial controls tab).

  When you import level data in the Trimble Data Exchange Format. If you include the number of turns in the Trimble Data Exchange Format, the Delta elevation standard error is calculated based on the number of turns. If you include the Delta elevation standard error value in the Trimble Data Exchange Format, this value is used.

If a standard error is not defined or computed, the level observations are not available for adjustment.

You can input the standard error for each observation in the Properties window.


Properties window - Survey tab - Summary page (Level Observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Summary page (Level Observations)

The Summary page in the Properties window summarizes the observation details of a selected level observation.

1.	Select the level observation.

2.	To access the page, from the Properties window, click the Summary menu button [image].

From Point

Displays the name of the point that the level run started from.

To Point

Displays the name of the point that the level run ended on.

Delta elevation

Displays the change in elevation between the "from" and "to" points.

Status

From this list, select the status that you want the observation to have. This status is considered during recomputations, or surveying computations.

If the observation is a check on a point, enable the observation as a check. This ensures that a closure is reported but the observation will not be used to determine the elevation. If you do not want the observation used to determine the position of the point, disable it.

The Recompute report shows enabled as check level observations, but not disabled observations.


Properties window - Survey tab - Observation Statistics page (Level Observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Observation Statistics page (Level Observations)

The Observations Statistics page displays the appropriate statistics and quality indicators.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Survey tab, click the Observation Statistics menu button [image].

Standard Error (Delta Elev)

This value shows the Delta elevation standard error. The error is computed when you:

  import digital level files (the Delta elevation standard error is calculated based on the number of turns and errors when reading the level rod).

  import level data in the Trimble Data Exchange Format. If you include the number of turns in the Trimble Data Exchange Format, the Delta elevation standard error is calculated based on the number of turns. If you include the Delta elevation standard error value in the Trimble Data Exchange Format, this value is used.

You can also enter your own standard error.

Number of turns

This is the number of instrument setups taken to determine the delta elevation between the two points.

Length of line

This is the length of the level loop. It is calculated by adding the backsight and foresight distances.


Properties window - Survey tab - Laser Rangefinder Observations
Properties window − Survey tab − Laser Rangefinder Observations

You can view the complete information on any terrestrial observation measured in the field using a laser rangefinder instrument.

Use the Survey tab in the Properties window to view and edit the survey-related information of the selected laser rangefinder observation. The survey information is organized in pages.

You can access the following pages by clicking the appropriate menu button:

Summary
Observation


Properties window - Survey tab - Summary page (Laser Rangefinder Observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Summary page (Laser Rangefinder Observations)

The Summary page summarizes the observation details of the selected laser rangefinder observation in the Properties window.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Survey tab, click the Summary menu button [image].

Instrument Point

Shows the point the laser rangefinder observation is made from.

Instrument Height

Shows the height of the instrument.

Target Point

Shows the point that the laser rangefinder observation is made to.

Target Height

Shows the height of the target.

Status

Displays the status of the selected observation. The status of an observation is considered by a recomputation, or when a surveying computation is performed. To change this field, click the arrow and select the option from the drop down list you want applied to the observation.

Disable an observation if you do not want it used to derive the position of the point.

Enable an observation as a check if you only want the observation used if there are no other observations or coordinates that can be used to derive the position of the point.

The Recompute report will report on observations enabled as check but not on disabled observations.


Properties window - Survey tab - Observation page (Laser Rangefinder Observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Observation page (Laser Rangefinder Observations)

Use the Observation page to view the observation components and to edit the magnetic declination between the instrument and target setups used for the selected observation.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Survey tab, click the Observation menu button

Magnetic azimuth

Shows the observed magnetic azimuth of the observation.

Declination

Shows the magnetic declination between magnetic north and true north. This value is required to calculate the true azimuth. Use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Vertical angle

Shows the vertical angle measured when the observation is taken. If this value is null, it is assumed the distance is horizontal.

Slope Distance

Shows the slope distance of the observation.


Properties window - Note tab
Properties window − Note tab

 Overview

Note records are non-graphical entities in the database. That is, they do not appear and cannot be selected in the graphics window.

Use the Note tab in the Properties window to view and edit note records if you have imported a job from Trimble Survey Controller containing user-entered notes.

To access it,

1.	Do one of the following:

  Select / Selection Sets. Choose the .dc file that contains the notes you want to view.

  Choose Select / By Query / Notes.

2.	Open the Properties window.

The Properties window displays all note entities with a pencil icon [image].


Properties window - CAD tab (Points)
Properties window − CAD tab (Points)

Use the CAD tab in the Properties window to view and edit the CAD-related information on the selected point.

Layer

Displays the layer that the selected point is assigned to. Select a layer from the list or use the keyboard to enter a new layer name to change this field.

Point style

View or select the point style from the list.

Feature code

View or enter the feature code value for the selected point.

Description

View or enter the Description for the selected point.


Properties window - Line tab
Properties window − Line tab

Use the Lines tab to view and edit the fields of the selected line entity.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Double-click on the line entity.

  Select the line entity from the graphics window and open the Properties window.

From

Displays the name of the "from" point of the selected line. Use the keyboard to enter the point name to change this field.

To

Displays the name of the "to" point of the selected line. Use the keyboard to enter the point name to change this field.

Azimuth

Displays the azimuth between the "from" and "to" point.

Distance

Displays the distance between the "from" and "to" point.

Layer

Displays the layer that the selected line entity is assigned to. Select a layer from the list or use the keyboard to enter a new layer name to change this field.

Line style

Displays the line style of the selected line. Select a line style from the list to change this field.


Properties window - Curve tab
Properties window − Curve tab

Use the Curves tab to view and edit the fields of the selected curve entity.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Double-click on the curve entity.

  Select the curve entity from the graphics window and open the Properties window.

From

Displays the name of the "from" point of the selected curve. Use the keyboard to enter the point name to change this field.

To

Displays the name of the "to" point of the selected curve. Use the keyboard to enter the point name to change this field.

Entry tangent, Exit tangent

Displays the tangents of the selected curve. Use the keyboard to enter a value to change these fields.

Billow

Defines how much width there is in the selected curve. Enter a value between 0 and 1 to change this field.

Layer

Displays the layer that the selected curve entity is assigned to. Select a layer from the list or use the keyboard to enter a new layer name to change this field.

Line style

Displays the line style of the selected curve. Select a line style from the list to change this field.


Properties window - Arc tab
Properties window − Arc tab

Use the Arc tab to view and edit the fields of the selected arc.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Double-click on the arc entity.

  Select the arc entity from the graphics window and open the Properties window.

From

Displays the name of the "from" point of the selected arc. Use the keyboard to enter the point name to change this field.

To

Displays the name of the "to" point of the selected arc. Use the keyboard to enter the point name to change this field.

Center

Displays the name of the "center" point of the selected arc. Use the keyboard to enter the point name to change this field.

Northing, Easting

Displays the coordinates at the center point of the arc. Use the keyboard to enter values to change these fields.

NOTE: If the center point has been defined for the arc, the coordinates are not used. The center point is used.

Layer

Displays the layer that the selected arc entity is assigned to. Select a layer from the list or use the keyboard to enter a new layer name to change this field.

Line style

Displays the line style of the selected arc. Select a line style from the list to change this field.

Arc is less than 180 degrees.

This check box is selected by default. Clear this check box to apply the selected arc angle to be greater than 180 degrees.


Properties window - Point Annotation tab
Properties window − Point Annotation tab

Use the Point annotation tab to view and edit the fields of the selected annotation entity assigned to a point.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Double-click on the annotation entity.

  Select the annotation entity from the graphics window and open the Properties window.

Point

Displays the name of the point that the selected annotation entity is assigned to.

Text expression

Displays the text expression of the selected annotation entity. The text expression can be a text definition or a field code inserted into the annotation template. Use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Easting, Northing

Displays the coordinates with respect to the default "baseline left" anchor position of the selected annotation entity. Use the keyboard to enter values to change these fields.

Orientation

Displays the orientation for the annotation entity. Use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Layer

Displays the layer to which the selected annotation entity is assigned. Select a layer from the list or use the keyboard to enter a new layer name to change this field.

Text style

Displays the text style of the selected annotation entity. Select a text style from the list to change this field.


Properties window - Line Annotation tab
Properties window − Line Annotation tab

Use the Line annotation tab to view and edit the fields of the selected annotation entity assigned to a line entity.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Double-click on the annotation entity.

  Select the annotation entity from the graphics window and open the Properties window.

Line

Displays the names of the points that are used to define the line that the selected annotation entity is assigned to.

Text expression

Displays the text expression of the selected annotation entity. The text expression can be a text definition or a field code inserted into the annotation template. Use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Easting, Northing

Displays the coordinates with respect to the default "baseline left" anchor position of the selected annotation entity. Use the keyboard to enter values to change these fields.

Orientation

Displays the orientation for the annotation entity. Use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Layer

Displays the layer that the selected annotation entity is assigned to. Select a layer from the list or use the keyboard to enter a new layer name to change this field.

Text style

Displays the text style of the selected annotation entity. Select a text style from the list to change this field.


Properties window - Arc annotation tab
Properties window − Arc Annotation tab

Use the Arc annotation tab to view and edit the fields of the selected annotation entity assigned to an arc entity.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Double-click on the annotation entity.

  Select the annotation entity from the graphics window and open the Properties window.

Arc

Displays the names of the points that are used to define the arc to which the selected annotation entity is assigned.

Text expression

Displays the text expression of the selected annotation entity. The text expression can be a text definition or a field code inserted into the annotation template. Use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Easting, Northing

Displays the coordinates with respect to the default "baseline left" anchor position of the selected annotation entity. Use the keyboard to enter values to change these fields.

Orientation

Displays the orientation for the annotation entity. Use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Layer

Displays the layer that the selected annotation entity is assigned to. Select a layer from the list or use the keyboard to enter a new layer name to change this field.

Text style

Displays the text style of the selected annotation entity. Select a text style from the list to change this field.


Properties window - Text tab
Properties window − Text tab

Use the Text tab to view and edit the fields of the selected text entity.

To access it, from the Plan view, do one of the following:

  Double-click on the text entity.

  Select the text entity from the graphics window and open the Properties window.

Text expression

Displays the text expression of the selected text entity. The text expression can be a text definition or an inserted field code. Use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Easting, Northing

Displays the coordinates with respect to the specified anchor type specified of the selected text entity. Use the keyboard to enter values to change these fields.

Orientation

Displays the orientation for the text entity. Use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Layer

Displays the layer that the selected text entity is assigned to. Select a layer from the list or use the keyboard to enter a new layer name to change this field.

Text style

Displays the text style of the selected text entity. Select a text style from the list to change this field.


Properties window - Attributes tab
Properties window − Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab of the Properties window to manage the attributes in your project. The Properties window lets you view, edit, add and delete attributes in Trimble Geomatics Office.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  Select the Attribute tab.

NOTE: You must set up the project for attributes before the Attributes tab will be available.

Attribute Selection tool

The Attribute Selection tool displays the current attribute selected for the point. If the point has more than one attribute associated with it, click the arrow and select the attribute from the drop down list that you want to view.

Attribute Name

Displays the names of any attribute properties selected that are associated with the selected point.

Value

Displays the values of any attribute properties selected that are associated with the selected point. To edit an attribute value, click the appropriate field and select a value from the list; or use the keyboard to enter a value in the field if a menu list is not available.


Properties window - General tab
Properties window − General tab

The General tab of the Properties window is displayed when you open the Properties window without any entities selected, or you have more than one entity highlighted in the Properties window selection list.

The General tab displays the message "No properties available".

To view the properties of an entity, select an entity in the graphics window or from the selection list in the Properties window.


Properties window - Survey tab - Reduced Observations
Properties window − Survey tab − Reduced Observations

You can view the complete information on reduced terrestrial observations such as offsets that have been measured in the field using Trimble Survey Controller.

Use the Survey tab in the Properties window to view and edit the survey-related information on the selected observation. The survey information is organized in pages.

To access a page from the Survey tab, click a menu button. The following pages can be accessed:

Summary
Observation


Properties window - Survey tab - Summary page (Reduced Observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Summary page (Reduced Observations)

The Summary page summarizes the details of the selected reduced observation in the Properties window.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Survey tab, click the Summary page button

From

Displays the name of the point from which the measurement is taken.

To

Displays the name of the point to which the measurement is made.

Status

Displays the status of the selected offset observation. The status of an observation is considered by a recomputation, or when a surveying computation is performed. To change this field, click the arrow and select the option from the drop down list you want applied to the observation.


Properties window - Survey tab - Observation page (Reduced Observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Observation page (Reduced Observations)

Use the Observation page to view the observation components of the reduced observation.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Survey tab, click the Observation menu button [image].

Azimuth

Shows the observed azimuth of the observation.

Horizontal distance

Shows the measured horizontal distance of the observation.

Vertical distance

Shows the measured vertical distance of the observation.


Office-Entered Coordinates - Overview
Coordinates − Overview

More Information

 See Also

When you enter known coordinates for a point into a Trimble Geomatics Office project, a coordinate is stored with other survey data for the point. Each point can have a maximum of one user-entered WGS-84 coordinate and one user entered grid/local coordinate.

If you edit an existing user entered coordinate, the old coordinate is replaced with the new one.

You can enter coordinates for existing points using:

  Properties window / Add new coordinate button

  Points dialog (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed)

  Import of a file with coordinates for points that already exist in the database.

You can enter coordinates for new points with keyed-in coordinates using:

  Insert Points dialog

  Import of a file with coordinates for points that do not already exist in the database.

Any coordinates entered into Trimble Geomatics Office are added as underlying coordinates for the point and can be viewed in separate Coordinate pages in the Properties window.

NOTE: To view the point’s position, use the Summary page. The entered coordinate will be used to position the point if it is the same quality as (or higher than) observations to the point.


Properties Window - Stakeout tab - Overview
Properties window − Stakeout tab − Overview

The Stakeout tab displays information about points that have been staked out in the field using Trimble Survey Controller. The following pages are available from the Stakeout tab:

  As staked Deltas

  Linear Details

  Catch Point

  Story Board

  DTM


Properties Window - Stakeout tab - As Staked Deltas page
Properties window − Stakeout tab − As Staked Deltas page

Use the As Staked Deltas page to view the differences between the location of the design point and staked out point.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Stakeout tab, click the As Staked Deltas menu button [image].

Method

This field shows the element staked. For example, a point, a line, an arc, or a road.

If the Polar option is selected, the following fields are displayed:

Azimuth

This field shows the azimuth from the design point to the staked out point.

Length

This field shows the distance from the design point to the staked out point.

If the Grid deltas option is selected, the following fields are displayed:

Delta Northing

This field shows the difference in northing between the design point and the staked out point.

Delta Easting

This field shows the difference in easting between the design point and the staked out point.

If the Station and offset option is selected, the following fields are displayed:

Delta Station

This field shows the difference in distance (parallel to the design centerline) between the design point and the staked out point.

Delta Offset

This field shows the difference in distance (at right angles to the design centerline) between the design point and the staked out point.

Delta Elevation

This field shows the difference in elevation between the design point (at the point to be staked) and the staked out point.

Cut/Fill

This field shows the difference in elevation between the design point (at the point which has actually been staked) and the staked out point.

The delta elevation and cut/fill values will be the same unless:

  The design surface is not a horizontal plane, and

  There is a significant error in the horizontal error in staking the point

The following figure shows the difference between delta elevation and cut/fill when the design surface is not a horizontal plane.

If the staked out point was a catch point, then the deltas reported are from the staked position to the calculated catch point.


Properties Window - Stakeout tab - Linear Details
Properties window − Stakeout tab − Linear Details

Use the Linear Details page to view the stakeout details from a linear feature (for example, a line, an arc, or a road).

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Stakeout tab, click the Linear Details menu button [image].

Name

This field shows the name of the linear feature that the point is being staked from.

Station

This field shows the design station for the point selected for stakeout.

Horizontal Offset

This field shows the horizontal offset from the design to the staked out point. For a road this field shows the horizontal construction offset.

Vertical Offset

This field shows the vertical offset from the design to the staked out point. For a road, this field shows the vertical construction offset.

If a road has been staked out, the following fields are also displayed:

Design Offset

This field shows the design offset of the point to be staked.

Design Elevation

This field shows the design elevation of the point to be staked.

Feature Name

This field shows the feature name.

Horz offset method

This field shows how the horizontal offset was applied. The horizontal offset can be applied:

  horizontally

  at the slope of the previous template element


Properties Window - Stakeout tab - Catch Point
Properties window − Stakeout tab − Catch Point

Use the Catch Point page to view the details about the catch point. This option is only available where the point staked out was a catch point on a road.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Stakeout tab, click the Catch Point menu button [image].

The point where a design surface intersects the natural surface is known as the catch point. The following diagram shows the typical cross section of a road:

Where:

A = Distance to center line

B = Horizontal distance from catch point to hinge point

C = Vertical distance from catch point to hinge point

D = Side slope

E = Slope distance to hinge point

F = Construction horizontal offset

G = Cut ditch width

H = Hinge point

J = Catch point

Side slope

This field shows the side slope value.

Cut ditch width

This field shows the cut ditch width value. It is shown as "G" in the above diagram.

Side slope type

This field shows the side slope type (for example, cut or fill).

Horz distance to centerline

This field shows the horizontal distance from the staked catch point to the centerline.

Elevation

This field shows the as-staked elevation of the catch point.

Horizontal distance to hinge

This field shows the horizontal distance from the catch point to the hinge.

Vertical distance to hinge

This field shows the vertical distance from the catch point to the hinge.

Slope distance to hinge

This field shows the slope distance from the catch point to the hinge.

Slope dist + construct offset

This field shows the slope distance from the staked out point to the hinge point. In the diagram above it is shown as the slope distance from the hinge point "H" to a defined point. This point is defined by projecting the side slope until it intersects with the staked position. This value will be null (?) if:

  no horizontal construction offset is applied

  the horizontal construction offset is applied horizontally


Properties Window - Stakeout tab - Story Board
Properties window − Stakeout tab − Story Board

Use the Story Board page to view the distances from the catch point to points on the template.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Stakeout tab, click the Story Board menu button [image].

Name

This field shows the name of the point on the template.

Horizontal distance from catch point

This field shows the horizontal distance from the catch point to the point on the template.

Vertical distance from catch point

This field shows the vertical distance from the catch point to the point on the template.


Properties Window - Stakeout tab - DTM
Properties window − Stakeout tab − DTM

Use the DTM page to view details about the staked DTM points.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Stakeout tab, click the DTM menu button [image].

DTM Name

This field shows the name of the DTM.

Vertical Offset

This field shows the vertical offset specified between the DTM and the surface to be staked.

Cut/Fill

This field shows the difference in elevation between the DTM (including the vertical offset) and the staked out point.


Properties Window - Survey tab - Azimuth Observations
Properties window − Survey tab − Azimuth Observations

Use the Survey tab in the Properties window to view and edit azimuth observations. The survey information is organized into pages.

You can access a page by clicking the appropriate menu button, as shown below:

Summary
Warning
Observation Statistics


Properties Window - Survey tab - Summary Page (Azimuth observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Summary page (Azimuth Observations)

The Summary page summarizes the observation details of the selected azimuth observation in the Properties window.

1.	Select the azimuth observation in the Survey view.

2.	To access it, from the Properties window, click the Summary menu button [image].

NOTE: Azimuth observations are given the AZ prefix.

From Point

Displays the name of the reference point that the observation is made from.

To Point

Displays the name of the point that the azimuth observation is made to.

Azimuth

This field displays the azimuth between the "from" and "to" points. A grid or a normal section forward azimuth can be displayed. This field is only editable when the Azimuth Type and the Azimuth view fields are the same.

Quality

This shows the quality of the azimuth observation.

Azimuth Type

This group shows whether the azimuth is stored in the database as a grid or normal section forward azimuth. You cannot edit this field.

NOTE: If the "to" point does not have an azimuth, the conversion between the Grid azimuth and the Normal section forward azimuth cannot be calculated. In this case, the Azimuth is displayed as a Null (?).

Azimuth View

Use these view options to select how the azimuth is displayed in the Properties window:

  Grid − select this option to display the Grid azimuth.

  Normal section Fwd − select this option to display the Normal section forward azimuth

NOTE: If you want to edit the Azimuth field, the information in the Azimuth Type field and these view options must be the same.

Status

From this list, select the status that you want the observation to have. This status is considered during recomputations, or surveying computations.

If you only want an observation used to determine the position of a point if there are no other observations or coordinates available, enable the observation as a check. If you do not want the observation used to determine the position of the point (for example, if the observation produces a misclosure), disable it.

The Recompute report shows enabled as check observations, but not disabled observations.

Use in Network Adjustment

Clear this check box if you do not want the selected observation to be used in a network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed), but still used when the database is recomputed.


Properties Window - Survey tab - Observation Statistics Page (Azimuth observations)
Properties window − Survey tab − Observation Statistics page (Azimuth Observations)

The Observations Statistics page displays the appropriate solution statistics and quality indicators, depending on the observation type selected. For an azimuth observation, the standard error is shown. Use this page to check the quality of the solution.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Survey tab, click the Observations statistics menu button [image].

Standard Error

Use this field to enter the standard error of the azimuth observation.

NOTE: A standard error of 0°00'00" will fix the azimuth in adjustment.


Coordinates in the Properties window

Trimble Geomatics Office lets you add coordinates for a point in the Properties window, using the Add Coordinate button [image]. When you click this button, a shortcut menu appears. From this menu, select the coordinate type that you need to add; that is, WGS-84, Grid, or Local. The coordinates saved for a point, and the source of the coordinate, are displayed in the left-hand tree list of the Properties window.

There are a limited number of entered coordinates that can be associated with a point. You can only enter one WGS-84 coordinate and one grid/local coordinate for each point. If you have already added a WGS-84 coordinate, the WGS-84 coordinate option becomes unavailable.

Only add a coordinate when you are sure that you want to use this coordinate instead of observations, because recomputations use keyed-in coordinates in preference to observations of the same quality. This ensures that a design point is used in preference to a stakeout observation.

NOTE: A prefix is added to the entered coordinate name to show whether the coordinate is a grid (G), local (L) or a WGS-84 (W) coordinate.

Additional coordinates can be generated by Trimble Geomatics Office and stored for a point. These coordinates can include:

  coordinates derived from an adjustment

  adjusted WGS-84 coordinates saved for calibration

When you add a coordinate, the coordinate components appear as null (?). You can use the Insert Current value button [image] to populate each coordinate component field with the coordinate components’ current value and quality as shown in the Summary page. This button is only available when you have selected the coordinate component field that you want to populate.

Editing Coordinates

You can edit entered coordinates. However, you cannot edit additional coordinates, such as adjustment and calibration coordinates that the software creates.

You can only edit coordinate components if the current view is the same as the Save as coordinate type setting. When coordinate components are edited, the source is changed to office entered, or multiple sources if only some of the components are edited.

Coordinates from Multiple Sources

The source of a coordinate is shown in the Properties window. If a coordinate has been derived from two or more sources, then it is shown as from multiple sources. For example, if the horizontal coordinate of a point is derived from an imported file, and the height has been entered in Trimble Geomatics Office, the point is shown as having coordinates derived from multiple sources.

TIP: You can use the ToolTip in the coordinate page to examine the sources of each of the coordinate components.

Moving Coordinates

When a coordinate is moved or transformed in Trimble Geomatics Office, all of the observations are disabled, so you must re-enable them if you want to compute the coordinates again. To do this, use the Multiple Edit dialog.

Deleting Coordinates

To delete a coordinate, use the Delete button [image].

NOTE: Coordinates fixed for adjustment cannot be edited.

Coordinate Quality

Each coordinate shown in the Properties window will have a coordinate quality assigned to it. The following coordinate qualities can be edited:

  Control Quality

  Survey Quality

  Mapping Quality

  Unknown Quality

You cannot change the quality of a fixed control point.


Properties Window - Survey tab - Events page
Properties window − Survey tab − Events page

Use the Survey tab in the Properties window to view event data.

To access it, from the Properties window:

  In the Survey tab, click the Events menu button [image].

Receiver event ID

This field shows the ID of the event.

Interpolation method

This field shows whether the interpolation method is linear or quadratic.

Points in fit

This field shows the number of points that are used to fit to the interpolation arc.

Receiver port ID

This field shows the receiver port ID.

Solution type

This field shows the solution type.

RMS

Shows the RMS value.

Status

From this list, select the status that you want the observation to have. This status is considered during recomputations, or surveying computations.


Properties Window - Station and Offset Tab

The Station and Offset tab displays information about points that have been measured using a Station and Offset program in a Trimble device.

From the Properties window:

1.	Select the Station and Offset tab.

2.	Click the Station/Offset button.

Name

This field contains the name of the linear feature.

Station

This field contains the station on the linear feature for the measured point.

NOTE: For the Trimble 3300 instrument, if there is a construction offset used from the reference line, the offset is shown in the name field alongside the name of the start and end point of the line.

Offset

This field contains the offset from the linear feature for the measured point.

Delta Elevation

This field contains the difference in elevation between the station on the linear feature and the measured point.


GPS Site Calibration - Overview
    GPS Site Calibration − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog
Overview

The GPS site calibration process establishes the relationship between WGS-84 data collected by GPS receivers and local control positions (expressed as a local map grid with elevations above sea level). This relationship is defined by a series of mathematical transformations. The GPS site calibration functionality allows you to pair up the GPS and local control points to be used in the calibration. (The GPS coordinates must be derived from GPS points and observations, and the grid points must be derived from grid points and terrestrial observations). Trimble Geomatics Office then computes and applies the mathematical transformations using least squares. You can recalibrate at any time.

The mathematical transformations that are applied in order to convert WGS-84 positions to grid coordinates are:

1.	A datum transformation to convert the WGS-84 latitude, longitude, and ellipsoidal height coordinates to latitude, longitude, and ellipsoidal height coordinates relative to the ellipsoid of the local map grid.

2.	A map projection to convert the local ellipsoid latitude and longitude coordinates into local map grid Northing and Easting coordinates (the height value is not altered in this process).

3.	A geoid model to WGS-84 height to get approximate elevation above sea level.

4.	A horizontal adjustment of the transformed grid coordinates to best fit local control data. This adjustment allows for any local variations in the projection system that cannot be catered for in the overall datum transformation.

5.	A height adjustment to convert the heights above the local ellipsoid or elevations derived from the geoid to local control elevations above sea level.

To change the calibration settings (which define the highest residuals allowed), use the computer's registry.

The above horizontal and vertical adjustment are stored as part of the coordinate system definition for the project. All GPS points in the database are updated using the calibration parameters, resulting in more accurate local grid coordinate values.

To save the new coordinate system definition (which includes the calibration parameters) as a site for use in future projects in the same area, click Save As Site from the Calibration dialog.

If you save a calibration as a site with the intention of using the site in another project, make sure that the project area is fully enclosed by the points used in the calibration. For example, in the following diagram, it is valid to use the site definition for project B, but not for project C.

If you use the [image] key in Trimble Survey Controller to start a Real Time Kinematic (RTK) base, and transfer the Survey Controller (.dc) file to Trimble Geomatics Office, the base position (and therefore all rover points from the base) are of unknown quality (for all components, horizontal, height, and elevation.)

If you are confident that the GPS site calibration has improved the quality of the points, use the Properties window to change the quality of the base point.

NOTE: By default, if you perform a GPS site calibration using an RTK base station point with WGS-84 coordinates, the grid coordinates for the point will be disabled. However, you can use the grid position for a GPS site calibration. If you choose to do this, you need to enable the grid coordinate (make sure it has a higher quality than the WGS-84 coordinate), explode points by data type, and then recalibrate. If you do not do this and GPS vectors do flow out from the grid position:

  any GPS point derived from the base cannot be used in the calibration

  an error, equivalent to the calibration residual error, may be introduced

NOTE: If you have performed a GPS site calibration and select the Use ground coordinates check box in the Local Site Setting dialog, the calibration that you have defined in the project becomes invalid. An error message warns you that continuing with the operation will remove the calibration.

Using Geoid Models

If the coordinate system for the project defines the use of a Geoid model for point elevation determination then elevations are determined directly off the WGS-84 heights by interpolation on the Geoid model grid. However, it is still possible to apply a height adjustment on top of the elevations produced by a Geoid model to allow for small local variations that a large scale Geoid model cannot take into account. Elevations determined from a vertical calibration are given a survey quality.

Rules for ensuring a useful calibration

  WGS-84 coordinates must be relatively correct.

It is possible to generate autonomous GPS points. However, you should not use more than one autonomous WGS-84 point in a calibration, for example make sure that only a single base station has been set up using the [image] key in Trimble Survey Controller. Other base stations should be set up on positions measured by a GPS vector in terms of the autonomous base station. This defines the relationship between them and allows you to perform a calibration with points used from either base station correctly. This is described below:

The following figure shows no relationship between the base stations:

Points from Base 1 and Base 2 should not be used for calibration.

In the following figure, a relationship is defined between the base stations by occupying the second base station using the first base station:

Points from Base 1 and Base 2 can be used for a calibration.

  The best possible WGS-84 coordinates should be used for the initial base station in a survey.

The precision of GPS vectors (real-time or postprocessed) is affected by the accuracy of the base coordinate. An error of up to one part per million (1 ppm) can be introduced for each ten meters of error in the base coordinates. For example, if your primary WGS-84 reference point has an error of one hundred meters and your baseline is two kilometers long, you may have an unnecessary extra error of two centimeters in your GPS vectors.


Changing Calibration Settings Using the Registry

 Overview and More Information

When Trimble Geomatics Office is installed, a registry setting is added to your computer controlling:

  the number of iterations carried out in the least squares computation of the calibration parameters

  the maximum error allowed between the calibrated and known grid positions for the calibration points

Using the entries, you can control when a warning is presented. The warning indicates that the computation did not meet the specified maximum error criterion.

Registry Entries

The entries (Maximum Error and Maximum Iteration Count) are under the registry key:

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\1.6\Calibration

Maximum Error

To change the Maximum Error, use this entry. The value is the maximum horizontal polar error (residual) which is allowed between any computed calibration point position and its associated known grid position.

If this specified error is exceeded an error message indicating that the calibration computation exceeded the defined maximum horizontal residual appears.

The calibration results can exceed the specified maximum error in any of the following situations:

  an error was made in the entry of any of the grid control points

  any of the control points were misidentified or incorrectly fixed during the survey

  the calibration computation did not converge within the specified number of iterations

The smaller the value in the Maximum Error field, the greater the possibility of getting the message that the maximum error was exceeded. This is because tighter criteria for the matching of computed positions to known positions have been defined.

The default value for this field (always defined in meters) is 0.1 m.

Maximum Iteration Count

To change the maximum number of iterations, use this entry. It provides control over the maximum number of iterations to be carried out in the least squares computation of the calibration parameters. Setting this value to a higher number causes the computations to carry out more iterations, unless the computation detects that the computed parameters are no longer changing with each iteration.

The valid range for this value is from 5 to 5000. If you set a value lower than 5, the minimum value of 5 is used. If you set a value greater than 5000, the maximum value of 5000 iterations is used. The default number of iterations is 10.


GPS Site Calibration command

Use this command to perform a GPS site calibration.

To access it, select Survey / GPS Site Calibration.

The GPS Site Calibration dialog appears.

NOTE: Before the GPS Site Calibration dialog appears, if you have network adjustment transformation parameters defined, they are discarded when you perform a GPS site calibration. If you have points with the same name that have been merged, a message asks you if you want to explode points by data type.


GPS Site Calibration dialog

 Overview and More Information

Use this dialog to perform a GPS site calibration.

To access it, select Survey / GPS site calibration.

To perform a GPS site calibration:

1.	Specify which calibration components are to be computed.

2.	Define the list of coordinate pairs. A pair is a grid-derived position and a GPS-derived position for the same physical point.

3.	Apply the current calibration to the database.

Calibration components

The Calibration components group contains the following check boxes and fields:

Datum transformation

Typically there will be a predefined datum transformation available as part of the coordinate system definition. This datum transformation may be a three or seven parameter transformation, a multiple regression definition or be based on datum grid files (for example, NADCON). In these cases it is unlikely that you will want to compute a different datum transformation, so leave the Datum transformation check box cleared. However, if there is no datum transformation information available or if you have reason to doubt the available parameters then compute a datum transformation.

To compute a datum transformation between the WGS-84 ellipsoid and the local ellipsoid used as part of the coordinate system definition for the project, select this check box. The Three-Parameter Transformation and Seven-Parameter Transformation options are available. Select which type of datum transformation to compute.

NOTE: This option is not available on projects that have a Default (Transverse Mercator) projection coordinate system since the Default projection is based directly on the WGS-84 ellipsoid meaning no datum transformation is needed.

If a datum transformation is computed and the calibration is applied to the database, the Datum field in the Coordinate System tab in the Project Properties dialog displays ‘Calibration’.

Update Default projection origin

This option is only active if the current coordinate system definition uses a Default projection. To update the projection origin using the first two-dimensional control point in the Point List, use this option. As the default projection does not have a latitude and longitude origin of a false northing and false easing defined, updating the origin will ensure the origin of the project is local (that is, close to the survey data in your project).

If you are carrying out a GPS calibration on a project that already has the default projection defined, then you need to make sure this check box is cleared so that the default projection definition is not altered.

Horizontal adjustment

To compute a horizontal adjustment, select this option. The Set scale factor to one check box becomes available. If you do not want your distances to be scaled, use this option to set the scale factor to 1. The horizontal adjustment is a plane transformation consisting of translations in the north/south and east/west directions, a rotation around a defined origin and a scale factor. The transformation parameters are computed using least squares methods to find the transformation that gives the adjustment parameters that, when applied to the GPS positions, best fit the control grid coordinates.

The horizontal adjustment reduces any residual error between the control coordinates and the grid coordinates calculated from the GPS positions.

TIP: It is usually wise to compute a horizontal adjustment without the scale factor set to one initially to check if the computed scale factor is close to one. If the computed scale factor is not close to one then this could indicate a problem in the selected calibration point pairs.

Vertical adjustment

To compute a vertical adjustment, select this option. It is an inclined plane adjustment consisting of a vertical shift at a defined origin and inclinations in the north and east directions. The parameters for this adjustment are computed using least squares methods to find an adjustment plane that best fits the elevations derived from the GPS heights with the Control point elevations. This requires three three-dimensional calibration point pairs. With a single three-dimensional calibration point pair, only the vertical shift parameter can be computed. If there are two three-dimensional calibration point pairs available the system defines a correction plane that exactly fits these pairs.

If the project uses a Geoid model, then the vertical adjustment is computed and applied on top of the Geoid model corrections.

Geoid model

The Geoid model field shows the name of the Geoid model that is selected as part of the coordinate system definition. If there is no Geoid model, "None" is displayed. This is a display-only field. The Geoid model setting can only be changed using the Coordinate System tab in the Project Properties dialog.

Point List

Click Point List to select the calibration point pairs that will be used in the calibration computations. The GPS Site Calibration dialog is hidden and the Point List dialog appears.

Computation summary

The fields in this group present a summary of the last calibration computation carried out. Use the summary to confirm that the computed calibration is valid without having to look at the computation report.

Horizontal adjustment scale factor

The Horizontal adjustment scale factor field presents the computed scale factor for the Horizontal adjustment. If you have selected the Set scale factor to 1 check box then this will display one. Use this field to confirm that the computed scale factor is close to one. If it is not then this would indicate that there is a problem with one or more of the calibration point pairs.

Max vertical adjustment inclination

The Max vertical adjustment inclination field presents the maximum inclination for the computed height adjustment based on the computed Slope north and Slope east values.

Max horizontal residual and Max vertical residual

The Max horizontal residual and Max vertical residual fields show the maximum residuals for the last computation carried out.

OK

Click OK to apply the last computed calibration to the database.

A recomputation is carried out to make sure that all GPS points are updated according to the GPS calibration. The coordinate system details are updated with the calibration parameters.

To view the calibration details:

1.	Select File / Project Properties.

2.	Select the Coordinate System tab.

3.	Click Details.

4.	Select the Horizontal Adjustment tab or the Vertical Adjustment tab.

Cancel

Click Cancel to exit the GPS Site Calibration dialog without applying the computed calibration.

Compute

Click Compute to compute the GPS calibration parameters after you have changed any of the calibration component settings. Once the computation has been carried out the results are summarized in the Computation summary fields.

Save as Site

Click Save as Site to save the current calibration and coordinate system details in the coordinate system database as a site definition. The Save as Site dialog appears. Enter the name for the saved site definition and click OK. You can use this site definition as the coordinate system definition for future projects.

Coord System

Click Coord System to view the current coordinate system details for the project. The same dialog appears as the Details dialog in the File / Project Properties / Coordinate System tab.

Report

Click Report to view a detailed report of the calibration computation. This report shows all the computed parameters as well as a listing of the computed control point coordinates compared with their known positions and individual residual values.


GPS Site Calibration - Point List dialog
GPS Site Calibration − Point List dialog

Use this dialog to select the calibration point pairs you want to use to calculate the GPS site calibration parameters.

To access it:

1.	Select Survey / GPS Site Calibration. The GPS Site Calibration dialog appears.

2.	Click Point List.

The GPS Site Calibration − Point List dialog appears.

This dialog presents a scrolling list of calibration point pair groupings. There is no specific limit to the number of pairs that may be defined to compute a calibration. Adding a great number of pairs will not always improve the calibration results but it will provide extra checks on the validity of the computed parameters.

Each calibration point pair consists of one GPS point (a point with a GPS position or, one derived from a GPS vector) and one grid point (which is normally a control point, an adjusted point, or a point derived from terrestrial observations) that cannot be a GPS derived point.

NOTE: A GPS point has to come from a GPS vector flowing out from a WGS-84 coordinate. You cannot use a GPS vector flowing out from a grid coordinate to define a GPS point.

As you select or specify points for inclusion in the point list, the system checks that each GPS point does in fact have a GPS derivation and that each grid point does not have a GPS derivation.

The positions of the calibration point pairs are highlighted in the graphics window with a box symbol on the GPS point and a cross symbol on the control point and a line joining the two positions. You need to zoom in on one of the calibration point pairs to see this detail. The symbols and joining line for the current calibration point pair in the point list is displayed with dotted lines.

Typically, you select the points for the calibration point pairs using field fill-in to pick the appropriate points from the graphics window. Field fill-in only lets GPS derived points be selected as a GPS point and points without a GPS derivation as a grid point. You can also enter the names of the points you want to use into the GPS Point and Grid Point fields.

If a GPS point has a grid elevation that is used (and which is not derived from the GPS height and geoid model), then you can use the same point in both the GPS point and grid point in the calculation of a vertical adjustment. If you do this, the Type field is set to Vertical.

NOTE: If you have two separate points (a GPS point and a grid point) with the same name, when the GPS point is selected, the grid point with the same name is automatically selected. If the GPS and grid coordinates are saved under the same point, you need to explode the points by type.

If you do not have appropriate grid control points or GPS points in the database then you can specify the appropriate coordinate values for such points in the fields provided. In this case, you must not specify the point name for the point since Trimble Geomatics Office expects a point with this name in the database. Positions entered in this manner are not stored in the database.

To specify coordinate values (GPS or Grid point) for the calibration:

1.	Click the plus (+) icon next to the GPS Point or Grid Point in the Name fields.

The tree view expands to show the coordinate fields.

2.	Use field fill-in or enter a value using the keyboard to complete the coordinate fields.

If you cannot select a GPS point for use in a GPS site calibration, see the topic Problems with selecting points for a GPS site calibration.

Type

To specify how the calibration point pair is to be used in the calibration computation, use this field. Trimble Geomatics Office automatically fills in this field with the appropriate type when you selected a coordinate pair. You can change the type, provided that the option you select is valid. For example, if the control point does not have an elevation, you cannot set the Type field for the pair to Horz and Vert.

The options available are:

  Horz and Vert − specifies that the calibration point pair is suitable for use in the determination of both horizontal and vertical adjustments.

  Horizontal  − specifies that the calibration point pair is suitable only for use in the determination of a horizontal adjustment. Effectively the elevation value for the grid point is not reliable.

  Vertical − specifies that the calibration point pair is suitable only for use in the determination of a vertical adjustment. Effectively the Northing and Easting values for the grid point are not reliable.

  (Ignored) − specifies that the calibration point pair is not to be used in the computation of any transformation parameters. This is a useful option if you have found a problem in your calibration computation and are trying to locate a suspect calibration point pair. You can use this setting to remove a calibration point pair temporarily from the computation to see if the results are improved.

  (Invalid) − shows that the select point pair is not a valid point pair.

Statistics

The fields in this group present the results of the calibration based on the values that you have added in the Point list. Use the summary to check the calibration statistics and identify bad point pairs before accepting the Point list.

Horizontal adjustment scale factor

The Horizontal adjustment scale factor field shows the computed scale factor for the horizontal adjustment. If you have selected the Set scale factor to 1 check box then this will display "one". Use this field to confirm that the computed scale factor is close to one. If it is not close to one, then this shows that there is a problem with one or more of the calibration point pairs.

Max vertical adjustment inclination

The Max vertical adjustment inclination field presents the maximum inclination for the computed height adjustment, based on the computed slope north and slope east values.

Max horizontal residual and Max vertical residual

The Max horizontal residual and Max vertical residual fields show the maximum residuals.

Insert

Click Insert to insert an empty calibration point pair record. This is useful if you are using the Default projection, and want to update the projection origin. The first point pair is used to update the origin, so use this button to insert a new blank calibration point pair at the top of the list.

Delete

Click Delete to remove a calibration point pair from the list.


Problems with Selecting Points for a GPS Site Calibration

If you are using the GPS Site Calibration − Point List dialog to select points for a GPS site calibration, and the system does not let you select a point for the GPS point or the Grid point of the calibration point pair:

A GPS point cannot be selected because the from point is derived from a grid.

The point is the result of a vector where the ‘from point’ of the vector has been derived from a grid position. This can happen if you have keyed in a grid position for a base station after a Real Time Kinematic (RTK) survey. Any vectors flowing from the base station are applied. However, the position for any of these points is derived using a combination of WGS-84 values (the vector) and grid values (the base WGS-84 position). You cannot use any points that have vectors applied from the base. This is shown in the following figures:

  Point 1 cannot be used as a GPS point in a GPS site calibration.

The base grid position is converted to WGS-84 and then vector applied to position point 1.

  Point 1 can be used as a GPS point in a GPS site calibration.

The vector is applied to the base WGS-84 position to determine the position of point 1.

To fix this, use the Properties window to edit the coordinates for the point and enter a WGS-84 position. This will be used in preference to the grid position, and all vectors flowing from the base station will be available as GPS points in a GPS site calibration.

In the same way that a GPS point cannot be selected because the "from" point is derived from a grid position, a grid point cannot be used if the from point is derived from a GPS position. A grid point must flow from a terrestrial observation.


Three-parameter Transformation

Use a GPS site calibration to define a datum transformation if you do not have a defined coordinate system and want to create your own datum transformation parameters for your project area.

The three-parameter transformation algorithm computes translation values along the X, Y, and Z Cartesian axes from the center of the WGS-84 ellipsoid to the center of the ellipsoid for the local projection. The control point positions are used to determine the spatial positioning of the local ellipsoid and hence its relationship to the WGS-84 ellipsoid.


Seven-parameter Transformation

Use a GPS site calibration to define a datum transformation if you do not have a defined coordinate system and want to create your own datum transformation parameters for your project area.

The seven-parameter transformation algorithm computes three translation values, three rotation values, and a scale change between the WGS-84 ellipsoid and the ellipsoid for the local projection. The three translation values are computed along the X, Y, and Z Cartesian axes from the center of the WGS-84 ellipsoid to the center of the local ellipsoid as in the three-parameter transformation. It computes rotations about each axis between the two ellipsoids and a scale factor allowing for any size differences between the two ellipsoids (due to different ellipsoidal semi-major axes and flattening values).

The control point positions are used to determine the spatial positioning of the local ellipsoid and hence its relationship to the WGS-84 ellipsoid. There are close correlations between the computed translation and rotation values (that is, the result of a very small rotation angle applied over a large radius such as the earth's radius is very similar to a translation). This means that it is easy to end up with large compensating computed values that are not accurate if the control points do not cover a large enough area. Typically, a seven-parameter transformation should not be computed unless the control points cover an extent of approximately eighty kilometers by eighty kilometers. In addition any computed rotation values should not exceed 10° of arc.


GPS Observations - Overview
GPS Observations − Overview

 See also

A GPS observation, or baseline, is a vector between two points observed using GPS. The two points used to determine a baseline depend on the surveying technique used. For example, in a Real Time Kinematic (RTK) survey or PostProcessed Kinematic (PPK) survey, a baseline exists from the base station to each roving point.

However, with static and fast static surveys, there is no base station. With these surveying techniques, a GPS vector exists between points that have been occupied at the same time, as shown in the following table:

To view the baseline type, select it and open the Properties window.

Static, Fast Static, and Postprocessed Kinematic (PPK) Vectors

Static, Fast Static, and PPK observations that have not been postprocessed, are unprocessed baselines. When the baselines have been postprocessed, they become postprocessed baselines.

When you delete a postprocessed baseline, the baseline will revert back to a potential baseline. You can remove the baseline by deleting the points. Alternatively, disable the baseline if you do not want it to be used in further surveying computations, and you still want to keep the points.

PPK Continuous Vectors

When PPK continuous vectors have been postprocessed, they are displayed in the same color as PPK baselines, but show the Field method as ‘Continuous’ in the Properties window.

RTK vectors

RTK vectors cannot be potential baselines, they are displayed as ‘RTK baselines’ in the Properties window. Continuous RTK vectors are displayed in the same color as RTK baselines, but show the Field method as ‘Continuous’ in the Properties window.

Check Vectors

If a baseline’s status is set to ‘Check’, the baseline will display with dashed lines.

Disabled Vectors

If a baseline’s status is set to ‘Disabled’, the baseline will display with the appropriate color for disabled baselines.


GPS Occupations

A GPS Occupation record is created each time a point is observed using GPS.

To view GPS Occupation records using the Properties window:

1.	Select one of the following:

  a point observed using GPS

  the baseline (in the Survey view)

2.	Click the [image] icon to view the GPS Occupation record.

If you select a point observed using GPS in the Properties window, you can view all GPS Occupation records for that point. If you select a baseline using the Properties window, you can view the GPS Occupation that produced the baseline.

The GPS occupation record includes:

  The point name.

  The length (in time) for the occupation and the start time of the occupation.

  GPS antenna details including antenna height, type, and method.

During data import the Start and End times are converted from GPS Time to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated − effectively Greenwich Mean Time). The times are then displayed as local times using the current time zone set in Microsoft Windows.


Prism Constant

The prism constant is a correction to the slope distance measured with a total station. It is applied during a recomputation. It is necessary because the prism reflector surface is not directly above the survey point being measured. The constant is normally a negative value.

Where:

	is the corrected slope distance
	is the measured slope distance
	is the prism constant

The prism constant value is stored with the target setup information.

To view and edit a prism constant value:

1.	Select a target setup point or a conventional observation.

2.	Open the Properties window.

Click the [image] button.

NOTE: In the 3300/3600/5600 Elta and 3600/5600 GDM software, the prism constant is applied in the instrument, but is not stored in the file. The prism constant is displayed as ‘?’.

If an incorrect prism constant was set in the instrument and you want to correct the value in Trimble Geomatics, in the prism constant field of the properties window, enter the difference between the incorrect prism constant and the correct one. For example, if you entered a prism constant of "20", and you should have entered "5", enter "–15".

TIP: You can use the Multiple Edit dialog to edit multiple observations.


Corrections for Electronic Distance Measurement Equipment (EDM) Mounting Eccentricity

Most modern total stations do not require a mounting eccentricity correction, as the Electronic Distance Measurement (EDM) measurement path is coincident with the line of sight of the telescope. This correction is not required if a telescope mounted EDM is used with a tilting reflector where the reflector/target is designed to match up with the EDM/telescope setup.

However, in some cases it may be necessary to compute a correction to the measured slope distance to find the true slope distance that you would have observed had the EDM measurement path been coincident with the line of sight of the telescope. The mounting eccentricity correction depends on the type of mounting system, and is applied automatically by Trimble Geomatics Office using the appropriate formulae shown below.

The appropriate offset values are stored in the instrument record in the device file.

1. Standards mounted EDM with non-tilting reflector.

Where:

	is the corrected slope distance
	is the EDM offset (at instrument)
	is the reflector offset (at target)
	is the zenith vertical angle (observed)
	is the measured slope distance (after prism constant correction applied)

2. Telescope mounted EDM with non-tilting reflector.

Where:

	is the corrected slope distance
	is the EDM offset (at instrument)
	is the reflector offset (at target)
	is the zenith vertical angle (observed)
	is the measured slope distance
This correction is applied during the importing of a device file.


Pressure and Temperature Correction

Pressure and temperature corrections are made to electronically measured distances to correct for variations in the measured length due to the temperature and pressure. You can enter the appropriate values during field work or edit the device file before importing it.

The electronic distance measurements made by EDMs are based on the speed of light through the air. The temperature and pressure affect this speed.

This atmospheric correction is only made to distance measurements if the EDM has not already applied an appropriate correction.

Where:

	is the corrected slope distance
	is the measured slope distance
	is a pre-set group refractive index for the EDM instrument’s carrier and modulation frequencies
	is a constant for the EDM instrument’s carrier wavelength (mm Hg)
	is the atmospheric pressure in mm of mercury
	is the dry air temperature in degrees Celsius

NOTE: Trimble recommends that you record the pressure and temperature in Trimble Survey Controller. This correction is applied to the slope distance(s) when importing the .dc file.

NOTE:  In the 3600/5600 Zeiss Elta, 3600/5600 GDM, and TDS Survey Pro software, the pressure and temperature corrections are applied in the instrument. Therefore, the observations are already corrected before being imported into Trimble Geomatics Office.


Vertical Collimation

The vertical collimation correction is an angular correction that is applied directly to the vertical angle.

The vertical collimation of an instrument is established by careful observation of an object using both faces of the instrument. The correction value established indicates a constant error due to slightly incorrect positioning of the crosshairs in the telescope.

When the collimation error in an instrument has been established there will be a collimation record stored in the device file and the vertical collimation is applied to all following vertical angles:

Face 1:
Face 2:
Where:

	is the corrected vertical angle
	is the observed vertical angle (zenith angle)
	is the vertical collimation correction. This correction is applied during the importing of a device file.
NOTE: Trimble Survey Controller does not have a collimation program. No collimation correction is performed during import.

NOTE: In the 3300/3600/5600 Elta, 3600/5600 GDM, and TDS Survey Pro software, the vertical collimation is applied before it is imported into Trimble Geomatics Office.


Curvature and Refraction

The curvature and refraction correction is made to the observed vertical angle to allow for the effect of earth curvature and the atmospheric vertical refraction of light paths.

Where:

	is the corrected zenith vertical angle
	is the observed zenith vertical angle
	is the corrected slope distance
	is the coefficient of refraction − typically 0.142 or 0.20 depending on the value in the Job record in the device file
	is the earth radius
NOTES:

  This format returns a value in radians.

  The curvature and refraction correction is applied during import of a Trimble Survey Controller file.

  In the 3300/3600/5600 Elta software, the curvature and refraction is applied in the instrument. Therefore, the observations are already corrected before being imported into Trimble Geomatics Office.

  In the 3600/5600GDM software, the curvature and refraction is applied to calculated coordinates.  Raw observations are imported and corrected in Trimble Geomatics Office.

  In the TDS Survey Pro software, the curvature and refraction correction is applied on import into Trimble Geomatics Office.


Horizontal Collimation

NOTE: Trimble Survey Controller does not have a collimation program. No collimation correction is performed during import.

If there is a collimation record encountered, Trimble Geomatics Office applies the horizontal collimation according to the following formula:

Face 1:
Face 2:
Where:

	is the corrected horizontal angle
	is the observed horizontal angle
	is the horizontal collimation correction

This collimation correction, when required, is applied during the importing of the device file.

NOTE: In the 3300/3600/5600 Elta, 3600/5600 GDM, and TDS Survey Pro software, the horizontal collimation is applied before it is imported into Trimble Geomatics Office.


Horizontal Orientation

 See also

Terrestrial horizontal angles are oriented during a recomputation by using the azimuth to the backsight. The horizontal angle is added to the azimuth and the result is the azimuth to the foresight point. This orientates all observations for the set up.

The azimuth to the backsight point is determined using the following rules (for conventional observations only):

  If only the position of the instrument point and the backsight point are known (that is, there is no keyed-in azimuth), the recomputation uses the backsight azimuth determined from the inverse between the two points.

  If only a keyed-in azimuth is available and the "to" point does not have a coordinate, the recomputation uses this as the backsight azimuth.

  If both positions of the instrument point and the backsight point are known, and a keyed-in azimuth is available, the recomputation determines the quality of each azimuth and uses the hierarchy in the table below to determine which azimuth to use as the backsight azimuth.

For example, if a survey-quality instrument and backsight point pair exist, along with a control quality keyed-in azimuth, the keyed-in azimuth is used for the backsight azimuth.

NOTE: To compute the quality of the backsight azimuth, the horizontal quality for the instrument point and the backsight point are examined and the lowest quality is taken. For example, if the instrument point has a control quality and the backsight point has a mapping quality, the backsight azimuth will have a mapping quality.

Type	Quality
Derived from coordinates	Control
Keyed in Azimuth	Control
Derived from coordinates	Survey
Keyed in Azimuth	Survey
Derived from coordinates	Mapping
Keyed in Azimuth	Mapping
NOTE: If you want a recomputation to use the keyed-in azimuth in preference to the azimuth determined between the instrument and the backsight point, increase the quality of the keyed-in azimuth position so that it is higher in the hierarchy than the azimuth determined between the instrument and the backsight point.

TIP: You can edit the quality of a keyed-in azimuth.


Horizontal Angles

 See also

For terrestrial observations, Trimble Geomatics Office stores non-oriented horizontal angles between two points. The angles are oriented during a recomputation.

During import, the horizontal angle is determined by:

Where:

	is the stored horizontal angle in Trimble Geomatics Office
	is the horizontal observation to the forward point
	is the horizontal observation to the backsight point
The BSObs value is stored in the BKB record in the device file. (The BKB record is a record type in a .dc file that the backsight record has.)

If there is no back bearing record, Trimble Geomatics Office treats the first point observed as the back bearing point.


Slope Reduction

 Overview

For each terrestrial observation, Trimble Geomatics Office reduces the slope distance to its horizontal and vertical components during A recomputation.

The following two formulae are used:

Where:

	is the horizontal distance at elevation of source point
	is the difference in height between source and target points
	is the slope distance (after observational corrections)
	is the vertical angle (zenith)
See the reduction diagram. The diagram clarifies the values used in the two formulae above.


Ellipsoid Level Correction

The sea level correction (or ellipsoid level correction) is applied to the computed horizontal distance. To see if sea level corrections are applied, select File / Project Properties / Recompute tab.

This correction reduces a horizontal distance to the distance that would have been measured at ellipsoid level (not geoid level, that is sea level). This difference is not significant with reduction.

If the ellipsoid level corrections check box is selected, terrestrial observations are applied along the local ellipsoid. If the ellipsoid level correction check box is cleared, terrestrial observations are applied along the ground.

The ellipsoid level correction formula is:

Where:

	is the earth radius
See the reduction diagram. The diagram clarifies the values used in the above formula.

NOTE: The ellipsoid level correction is not applied in a scale factor-only job. When you import a scale factor-only file, the ellipsoid level correction in Trimble Geomatics Office is turned off automatically unless you selected the Use ground coordinates check box in the Local Site Settings dialog.


Earth Radius

In Trimble Geomatics Office, the earth radius is calculated using the project latitude and the project ellipsoid. If a project latitude is not defined for your project, a default project latitude of 30 degrees is used. For example, on the WGS-84 ellipsoid, with a project latitude of 30 degrees, the value for the earth radius is 6383 480.917.

NOTE: Define the project latitude before importing terrestrial observations. If you define the project latitude after the import of terrestrial data, the ellipsoidal correction and curvature, and refraction correction, are not reapplied using the newly calculated earth radius.

To define the project latitude:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Coordinate System tab.

3.	In the Local site settings group, click Change.

4.	In the Project location group, enter the project latitude.


Conventional Observations - Overview
Conventional Observations − Overview

Trimble Geomatics Office supports points observed using conventional surveying instruments. These points are called conventional observations.

In Trimble Geomatics Office you can:

  import conventional observations

  import laser rangefinder observation

  import digital level files


Reduction of Conventional Observations

The recompute operation of Trimble Geomatics Office uses the distance measurements and observed angles to compute coordinates for conventionally observed points.

Import

During file import, the following corrections are applied:

  Pressure and temperature correction, applied to the slope distance.

  Curvature and refraction, applied to the vertical angle.

  Horizontal angle, reduces horizontal observations to horizontal angles from the backsight point. Face two readings are stored as face one readings.

  Corrections for Electronic Distance Measurement equipment (EDM) Mounting Eccentricity.

  Horizontal Collimation

  Vertical Collimation

Recomputation

During a recomputation, the following corrections are applied:

  Ellipsoid correction

  Horizontal Orientation

  Prism Constant


Reduction Diagram

In these corrections, the following diagram clarifies the values used in the formulae:

Where:

	is the vertical angle (zenith)
	is the slope distance (after observational corrections)
	is the elevation of source point above ellipsoid
	is the difference in height between source and target points
	is the horizontal distance at elevation of source point
	is the sea level (or ellipsoid level) chord
	is the sea level (ellipsoid) distance


Conventional Observations - Two Face Observations
Conventional Observations − Two Face Observations

Face 2 observations are converted and stored in the database as Face 1 observations. To select an observation, use the Properties window. The Face (1 or 2) is shown.

If there are Face 1 and Face 2 observations from and to the same points, then the Face 1 and Face 2 observations are meaned and imported as one observation. The observation type is shown as meaned.


Conventional Observations - Traverse
Conventional Observations − Traverse

Using Trimble Survey Controller, TDS Survey Pro, or 3600/5600 Elta software, you can calculate a traverse misclosure for your conventional observations and adjust the traverse.

If you have adjusted a traverse and want to change the adjusted values then, follow these steps:

1.	Select the point you want to change the coordinates for.

2.	Open the Properties window and expand the point using the tree structure

3.	Check if there is already a grid/local coordinate for the point. If there is not, add a coordinate using the Add Coordinate tool

4.	Click in the coordinate fields and enter in the known coordinate values.

5.	In the Quality Selector Controls beside the coordinate fields, select the Quality option from the drop-down list. The quality must be survey or higher to be used in preference to the observation.

6.	Click OK.

7.	Press F4 to perform a recomputation of the survey data.

A recomputation determines any misclosures between the known coordinates and the observed coordinates.

The misclosures are shown in the Recompute report. If you do not want to see these misclosures, then disable the observation.

To view the misclosures, do one of the following:

  Select Reports / Recompute Report.

  Click the Warning page button [image] in the Properties window and select the Point Derivation tool [image].

  Click the Summary page button [image] in the Properties window and select the Point Derivation tool [image].


Laser Rangefinder Observations - Overview
Laser Rangefinder Observations − Overview

Trimble Geomatics Office supports points observed using laser rangefinders with Trimble Survey Controller 7.00 or later. For information about which laser rangefinders Trimble Survey Controller supports, see the Trimble Survey Controller Reference Manual.

How laser rangefinder observations are displayed depends on the appearance setting in the Properties window.

In Trimble Geomatics Office you can:

  Import Survey Controller (*.dc) files containing laser rangefinder observations. (Observed laser rangefinder points are imported into Trimble Geomatics Office just the same as conventional points.)

  View laser rangefinder observations in the Properties window.

  Select and report laser rangefinder observations.


Laser Rangefinder Observations - Viewing
    Laser Rangefinder Observations − Viewing

Laser rangefinder observations are displayed in the Survey view. The color in which they display depends on the background set in the View / Options / Survey Legend tab.

TIP: Choose Select / By Query and use the Laser rangefinder points option to select all laser rangefinder points in the database. Laser rangefinder points have a laser rangefinder observation.

To view a point observed using a laser rangefinder:

1.	In the Survey view, open the Properties window.

2.	Select a laser rangefinder observationIDH_Properties_window_-_Survey_tab_-_Laser_Rangefinder_Observations>Main.

Use the menu buttons to view the following laser rangefinder observation details:


Calibration and Adjustment Transformation Parameters

 How to ...

When a GPS site calibration is performed, calibration parameters are computed that establish the relationship between WGS-84 points (GPS points) and local grid positions in the database.

When a constrained network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed) is performed, transformation parameters are computed. These parameters establish the relationship between observations and fixed control.

Trimble Geomatics Office will only allow either horizontal and vertical adjustment parameters derived from a GPS site calibration or adjustment transformation parameters derived from an adjustment. If you have performed an adjustment and computed adjustment transformation parameters, and then try to carry out a GPS site calibration, you will be warned that the parameters will be removed if you continue with the calibration.

NOTE: You cannot transfer adjustment transformation parameters derived from an adjustment to Trimble Survey Controller. To do this, you need to carry out a GPS site calibration using saved calibration coordinates (as WGS-84 points) derived from an adjustment on the WGS datum and adjusted coordinates (as grid points) derived from a constrained Network Adjustment on the local datum.


References

Books

Barry, B. Austin. 1991. Errors in Practical Measurement in Surveying, Engineering, and Technology. Edited by M. D. Morris. ISBN 0-910845-47-6. Rancho Cordova: Landmark Enterprises.

Hofmann-Wellenhof, B., Herbert Lichtenegger, and James Collins. 1993. Global Positioning System Theory and Practice. Second Edition. ISBN: 3-211-82477-4 and ISBN 0-387-82477-4. New York: Springer-Verlag Wien.

Leick, Alfred. 1995. GPS Satellite Surveying. Second Edition. ISBN: 0-471-30626-6. New York: John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Pope, Allen J. 1976. The Statistics of Residuals and the Detection of Outliers. NOAA Technical Report NOS65 NGS1, Rockville, MD.

Seeber, Günter. 1993. Satellite Geodesy, Foundations, Methods, and Applications. ISBN: 3-11-012753-9. Berlin and New York: Walter deGruyter.

U.S. National Geodetic Survey (NGS). 1986. Geodetic Glossary. Silver Spring, MD: NGS Publications Information Center.

Van Sickle, Jan. 1996. GPS for Land Surveyors. ISBN 1-575-04041-7. Ann Arbor: Ann Arbor Press, Inc.

Wolf, Paul R. and Charles D. Ghilani. 1997. Adjustment Computations: Statistics and Least Squares in Surveying and GIS. ISBN: 0471-16833-5. New York: John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Other Resources − Publications / Periodicals in the USA

The following publications are a useful source of information about civil engineering and other aspects of surveying:

ACSM Bulletin. ISSN: 0747-9417. Published bimonthly by the American Congress on Surveying and Mapping, 5410 Grosvenor Land, Suite 100, Bethesda, MD 20814-2144 USA.

GPS World: News and Applications of the Global Positioning System. ISSN: 1048-5104.Published monthly by Advanstar Communications Inc. Subscription offices: P.O. Box 6148, Duluth, MN 55806-6148 USA.

P.O.B. − Point of Beginning. ISSN: 0739-3865. Published monthly by Business News Publishing Company, 755 W. Big Beaver Road, Ste. 1000, Troy, MI 48084 USA.

Professional Surveyor. ISSN: 0278-1425. Published ten times a year by Professional Surveyors Publishing Copany, Inc., 1713-J Rosemont Avenue, Frederick, MD 21702-4170 USA.


The Zoom Navigator

The Zoom Navigator appears as a small window at the bottom of the Project bar. It reflects the data displayed in the main Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window. If you use any of the zoom tools in the main window, the box in the Zoom Navigator changes to reflect this. It always displays the extents of your project.

Hiding (or showing) the Zoom Navigator

To hide (or show) the Zoom Navigator within the Trimble Geomatics Office bar:

1.	In the Project bar, right-click to access the shortcut menu.

2.	Select Zoom Navigator.

Using the Zoom Navigator

To use the Zoom Navigator:

  Click on an area of the project in the Zoom Navigator.

NOTE: This area becomes the center of the main graphics window.

To use the Zoom Navigator to zoom:

1.	In the Zoom Navigator, drag a box around the area of interest.

The main graphics window displays the same data.

2.	When you point to the middle of the box in the Zoom Navigator, the pointer becomes a [image]. This means that you can drag the box over the project area without changing the zoom. The view of the project in the main graphics window reflects these movements.

  To zoom to the extents of the project, double-click in the Zoom Navigator.

NOTE: If you have a mouse with a wheel, you can use the wheel to change the size of the Zoom Navigator box.


Project bar - Overview
Project bar − Overview

The Project bar consists of named groups that list shortcuts to commonly-used tasks in Trimble Geomatics Office. Each shortcut is available in a menu.

To quickly access a task:

1.	Click a shortcut on the Project bar.

2.	Click a group to move to a different set of shortcuts.

To change the size of the shortcut icons:

1.	Right-click in the Project bar area.

A shortcut menu appears.

2.	Select the Large Icons or Small Icons option.

To hide (or show) the Project bar, do one of the following:

  Right-click in the Project bar area.

A shortcut menu appears. Select Hide.

  Select View / Project bar

In the toolbar, click the Project bar icon

When there is no project open, the Projects and Utilities groups are available. When a project is open, the full list of groups (apart from the Utilities group) becomes available:

  Trimble Survey group

  Projects group

  Import group

  Process group (if you have the Trimble WAVE Baseline Processing module installed)

  Adjustment group (if you have the Trimble Network Adjustment module installed)

  Export group

  CAD group

  Utilities group


Project bar - Trimble Survey group
Project bar − Trimble Survey group

The Trimble Survey group contains shortcuts that provide quick access to commonly-used tasks in the Survey View. The shortcuts are listed in the order they are generally used.


Project bar - Projects group
Project bar − Projects group

The Projects group contains shortcuts that provide quick access to project commands.


Project bar - Import group
Project bar − Import group

The Import group contains shortcuts that provide quick access for importing from commonly-used survey data sources.


Project bar - Process group
Project bar − Process group

The Process group contains shortcuts that provide quick access to commonly-used baseline processing tasks.

NOTE: The Baseline Processing module must be installed.


Project bar - Adjustment group
Project bar − Adjustment group

The Adjustment group contains shortcuts that provide quick access to commonly-used adjustment tasks.

NOTE: The Network Adjustment module must be installed.


Project bar - Export group
Project bar − Export group

The Export group contains shortcuts that provide quick access for exporting data in your project to commonly-used data formats.


Project bar - CAD group
Project bar − CAD group

The CAD group contains shortcuts that provide quick access to commonly-used tasks in the Plan View.


Project bar - Utilities group
Project bar − Utilities group

The Utilities group contains shortcuts that provide quick access to commonly used utilities included with the Trimble Geomatics Office system.


Attributes - Overview
Attributes − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

An attribute is a piece of descriptive information about a feature code. For example, with the feature code ‘tree’ you can have the attributes of species, height, girth, and condition. Each ‘tree’ feature code that you collect in the field will have its own values for these attributes.

Trimble Geomatics Office supports the management of attribute information with points. With Trimble Geomatics Office you can:

  use Trimble’s Feature and Attribute Editor utility to create feature and attribute libraries containing attribute definitions

  import Survey Controller (*.dc) files containing attributes

  view and edit the attribute information

  add attributes

  export the data to a Geographic Information System (GIS) format

  produce a report of attributes

Use the Feature and Attribute Editor utility to define a set of attributes for a feature code. For each attribute, you must define an attribute name and type. The attribute type determines the format of the attribute information. For example, if the attribute for ‘tree’ is height, the type of the attribute is ‘numeric’.

You can also use Data Dictionary (*.ddf) files to collect attribute information. To create .ddf files, use Trimble’s Data Dictionary Editor utility. This is part of the GPS Pathfinder® Office software.

Workflow

The workflow for managing attribute information with Trimble Geomatics Office is:

1.	Create a Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file in the Feature and Attribute Editor.

2.	In Trimble Geomatics Office, set the project up for attributes by selecting the .fcl or .ddf file.

3.	Transfer the .fcl or .ddf to Trimble Survey Controller (version 7.00 or later).

4.	Collect the data in the field.

5.	Transfer the field data to Trimble Geomatics Office.

6.	Export the data in a GIS or a custom ascii format.


Feature and Attribute Library - Overview
Feature and Attribute Library − Overview

More Information

 How to ...

Overview

A Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file is a text file containing the definitions of feature codes, attributes, CAD styles, and control codes. To edit feature and attribute libraries, use Trimble's Feature and Attribute Editor utility.

Feature and attribute libraries are a set of instructions that describe operations to be carried out when feature codes are processed. For example:

  assigning a specific point style to a point

  creating lines between points

  defining attributes to be collected in the field

  annotating points and lines

For more information about creating feature and attribute libraries, refer to the Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor online Help.

Use a Feature and Attribute Library file (*.fcl) to:

  process feature codes

  define attributes for the collection of data in the field

Feature Code Processing

For information about using a feature and attribute library to process feature codes, see the topic Feature Codes − Overview.

Attributes

To set up a project for attributes, use the Project Properties dialog. You can select a Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file or a Data Dictionary (*ddf) file.


Setting up a Project for Attributes

 Overview and More Information

To use attributes in Trimble Geomatics Office, you must set up the project for attributes. To do this, select the Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) or Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file that you want to use.

TIP: For more information on how to select an .fcl or .ddf file, see the topic To set up a project for attributes.

Trimble Geomatics Office creates a table for each feature code with attributes. The library file is not stored in the project. This means that the project is not updated if any changes are made to the library.

Changing the feature and attribute library for the project

To change the Feature and Attribute Library for the project, select it as described above. However, Trimble Geomatics Office does not let you do this after:

  importing a Survey Controller (*.dc) file containing attributes

  adding an attribute record in Trimble Geomatics Office

This is because the existing feature tables are deleted, and new tables are created using the selected library.

If you really need to change the feature and attribute library for a project you can delete all points with attributes, reopen the project, and then select a new feature and attribute library.

Trimble Survey Controller

Make sure that the feature and attribute library (or data dictionary file) used in Trimble Geomatics Office is the same as the one used in the field with Trimble Survey Controller. If you use different libraries, some attribute data may not be imported.

For information about importing data with attributes when the libraries are different, see Importing Attributes with Different Definitions.


Data Dictionary Files - Overview
Data Dictionary Files − Overview

More Information

 See also

Overview

A Data Dictionary file is a file that defines features and associated attributes for features.

It can be used as an alternative to a Feature and Attribute Library file.

If you have the Data Dictionary Editor utility (which is part of GPS Pathfinder Office), you can use it to create Data Dictionary (*.ddf) files. A .ddf file contains feature and attribute definitions.

Using a .ddf file to set up a project for attributes

You can use a .ddf file to set up a Trimble Geomatics Office project for attributes. If you do this, any line or area features in the .ddf file are treated as point features. This is because Trimble Geomatics Office and Trimble Survey Controller (version 7.00 or later) only support point features.

Using a .ddf file in the Feature and Attribute Editor

NOTE: The feature and attribute library used for setting up a project for attributes does not have to be the same as the feature and attribute library used for feature code processing. However if you collect attribute data in the field using a Feature and Attribute Library file, use the same one to process the feature codes.

You can import .ddf files into Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) files using the Feature and Attribute Editor utility. You can also export an .fcl file as a .ddf file. These tasks are useful if you want to use .ddf files with the Data Dictionary Editor utility.

Using a .ddf file in Trimble Survey Controller

You can use a .ddf file in the field as the library defining attributes. To do this, transfer a .ddf file to Trimble Survey Controller.


Importing Attributes with Different Definitions

 Overview and More Information

When you import a Survey Controller (*.dc) file containing attributes, the attribute definitions in the .dc file are compared with the attributes definitions in the project. If they are different in any way, a dialog appears. It asks you if you want to:

  import attribute information common to both feature and attribute libraries or data dictionary files.

If you select this option and you changed any attribute definitions in the Feature and Attribute Library file for the project after transferring the file to Trimble Survey Controller, you will lose the attribute information for that feature code. If you only added new feature codes, no data is lost.

  insert points with feature codes but without attribute information

  cancel the import

To prevent this message from appearing, make sure that the file used to set up a project for attributes is the same as the one used in Trimble Survey Controller.


Viewing/Editing Attributes in Trimble Geomatics Office

 Overview and More Information

To view and edit attributes for a point in Trimble Geomatics Office, use the Properties window. If you have set up a project for attributes in the Project Properties dialog, the Attribute tab appears in the Properties window. If there are more than one features with attributes for the selected point, use the drop-down list to select the feature you want to view the attributes for. To edit an attribute value, click the appropriate field in the Value column.

For menu attributes:

  Select a value from the list of available attribute values.

For all other attribute types:

  Enter the new value for the attribute using the keyboard. You cannot use field fill-in for attributes.

NOTE: When you edit attribute information, Trimble Geomatics Office checks the feature and attribute library definition to make sure the new value is valid.


Copying/Cutting/Pasting Points with Attributes Between Projects

 See also

To copy, or cut and paste points with attributes, the feature and attribute libraries used to set up the two projects should be the same.

If the feature and attribute libraries are different, but have common attribute definitions, you are warned and given the option to cancel the paste, paste points only (without attributes), or paste points with attributes common to the two libraries. Trimble Geomatics Office records the attributes that were not pasted in the Import.rpt report.

You cannot select a different library to set up a project for attributes if the project already contains points with attributes. This is because the attribute definitions have already been set. However, you can create a new project, define the new attribute definitions in the Feature and Attribute Library (or Data Dictionary file), then copy points with attributes from the existing project to the new project.

NOTE: Copying or cutting and pasting only works if one of the following is true:

  All points being copied or cut have elevations.

  The project has a default elevation specified. This default is used for any points with null elevations.

This is because the coordinates for the points being copied/cut are reduced to the WGS-84 ellipsoid. The coordinate system in the project you are pasting into is applied to the pasted points. If the project to which you are pasting contains a different coordinate system, the correct coordinates will be shown.


Differences Between .fcl and .ddf Files

You can use a Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file or Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file in your Trimble Geomatics Office project. To select a file for the current project, select File / Project Properties /Features tab. The differences between the two files are described below.

.fcl Files

An .fcl file can contain CAD settings (for example point styles, line styles, annotation styles, and control codes) for feature coding as well as for attribute definitions. When you select an .fcl file to set up a project for attributes, Trimble Geomatics Office uses the attribute definitions to create the required tables.

The same process occurs if you choose to export an .fcl file with attributes to Trimble Survey Controller (version 7.00 or later).

If you want to use feature codes and collect attributes, use the .fcl files. If you have a .ddf file already but want to feature code, you can import the .ddf file into an .fcl file in the Feature and Attribute Editor utility and then use the .fcl file.

For more information, refer to the Feature and Attribute Editor Help.

.ddf Files

A .ddf file cannot contain CAD settings for feature coding. It only contains feature and attribute definitions. If you process feature codes from a .ddf file, no point, line, or annotation style will be assigned.

You can create a .ddf file from the Data Dictionary Editor utility (if you have GPS Pathfinder Office) or from the Feature and Attribute Editor in Trimble Geomatics Office. (Select File / Export in the Feature and Attribute Editor to export a .ddf file.)


Data Transfer - Overview
Data Transfer − Overview

Trimble’s Data Transfer utility is the software that is used to transfer data between Trimble Geomatics Office and a device. A device is a survey controller, Trimble GPS receiver, a conventional total station, SDR format data collector, digital level, control unit or PC Card. Before you can transfer data using the Data Transfer utility, you need to set up the required device.

If you have a device set up, to access the Data Transfer utility from within Trimble Geomatics Office, do the following:

1.	Select File / Import or File / Export—depending on what you want to do. The appropriate dialog appears.

2.	Select the required option.

To open the Data Transfer utility, select an option that requires a connection to a device.

The Save As or Open dialog appears, depending on what you have chosen.

3.	Select the required device to transfer data to or from.

Accessing the Data Transfer utility from outside a project

If you do not have a project open, you can transfer files between your computer and a device.

To do this:

  From Trimble Geomatics Office, select Utilities / Data Transfer.

Accessing the Data Transfer utility from outside Trimble Geomatics Office

You can transfer files from your computer to a device from outside Trimble Geomatics Office.

To do this:

  Select Start / Programs / Data Transfer.


Devices -Overview
Devices − Overview

To transfer data between a Trimble Geomatics Office project and a device; you need to correctly set up the device.

When you set up a device, it will always be available during import or export. For more information, refer to the Data Transfer Help.


DAT Checkin dialog

Use this dialog to check and correct the values in the GPS file(s) before importing the GPS observations into a Trimble Geomatics Office project.

NOTE: Any changes you make in the dialog only affect the data that is imported. The changes do not affect the GPS data (*.dat) file.

The dialog appears when you import:

  GPS data files (*.dat)

  RINEX files (*.XXo, *.XXn, *.obs, *.nav)

  DC files with associated .dat files

Use

Clear this check box if you do not want the data transferred to the project.

Name

Displays the name of the point where the data has been observed. If there is no name assigned to the point in the file, the station ID is used. Use the keyboard to enter a name to change this field.

Filename

Displays the file source of the data.

Start Time

Displays the start time and date of the occupation.

Stop Time

Displays the stop time and date of the occupation.

Receiver Type

Lists the type of GPS receiver used to collect the data.

Receiver S/N

Displays the serial number of the receiver. You can edit this number.

Antenna Height

Displays the antenna height entered for the occupation. If the height has been incorrectly entered during the occupation, use the keyboard to enter a value to change this field.

Antenna Type

Displays the type of antenna connected to the receiver. If the antenna has been incorrectly entered during the occupation, select an antenna type from the list to change this field.

Measured To

Displays where the antenna height was measured to. If the method has been incorrectly entered during the occupation, select an option from the list to change this field.

Feature Code

Displays the feature code value assigned to the point. Use the keyboard to enter a new value to change this field.

Reset

Click Reset to restore the original settings.

TIP: To apply the same changes to more than one point, hold down Ctrl and select the required fields under the column that you want changed. Press Shift if you want to select sequential rows. Enter or select a value in a selected field that you want applied to all the fields in the selection.


Digital Level Import dialog

 See Also

Use the Digital Level Import dialog to:

  Display the data from a Digital Level file

  Determine which points you want delta elevations computed between

  Validate the elevation of the starting point

  Determine misclosures on known points

  Validate point names

The Digital Level Import dialog appears when you import Digital Level Files (*.dat, *.raw). To do this:

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select Digital Level Files (*.dat, *.raw). The Open dialog appears.

3.	Select the Digital Level file.

4.	The Digital Level Import dialog appears.

Any changes you make in the dialog only affect the data that is imported. The changes do not affect the Digital Level (*.dat, *.raw) file.

NOTE: When you import digital level data, you can specify how duplicate points are dealt with. By default, Trimble Geomatics Office merges points with the same name on import, so duplicate points are not created. In the Duplicate Point Options dialog, you can use the Merge duplicate points within tolerance option to specify the vertical tolerance with which to merge duplicate points. The horizontal tolerance is not used when you import digital level data.

NOTE: You can directly import data from a DiNi Digital level device. When you do this the Digital Level Import dialog will appear.

TIP: When you collect digital level import data, store points that you want to import into Trimble Geomatics Office with a unique prefix or suffix. For example, store all of the points that you want to use as station points with the prefix, STN. This lets you easily select points using the Select by Filter button in the Digital Level Import dialog or points that you do not want imported.

In the Elevation group, you can view the following fields:

Starting Point

The name of the starting point. The starting point in a level run is indicated with the starting point icon.

Elevation

The elevation of the starting point. You can edit the elevation of a starting point when the point is selected in the table. Selecting another level loop in the table shows the starting point for that loop in the elevation group. The end of a level loop and the start of another loop is shown by a thick, horizontal black line in the table.

Elevation Quality

The quality of the elevation field. To change the elevation quality, click the Quality button.

The data in the Digital Level table is shown in the order that observations were made. You can view the following columns:

Column	What it shows
Station Points	The point name and whether the point has been selected as a station point for import into Trimble Geomatics Office. When you import a file, all observations are selected by default. The station point name is editable.
BS	The level observation to the backsight.
IS	The level observation to an intermediate sight. You cannot select the intermediate sight until the corresponding backsight is selected.
FS	The level observation to the foresight.
Elevation	The elevation of the point. An icon is used to indicate which point was used as the starting point for the calculation of the elevation. This corresponds to the starting point that is shown in the Elevation group.  The elevation of the starting point in each loop can be edited from the Elevation group. If a point does not have an elevation, then a starting point is not selected to compute the elevation of the point.
Distance	The distance to the backsight, foresight or intermediate sight.
Description	The description of the point being leveled.
Staked Deltas	The difference in elevation between a point that was staked out and the design height for the point location.

To select points in the table, do one of the following:

  Select the check box in the Station Point column

  Click the Station Point column heading. You can select all the points in the table by clicking the top of the column and then selecting the first point in the column.

  Click Select by Filter.

Once you specify a selection, the following rules apply:

  You cannot select an intermediate sight until the preceding backsight is selected.

  If there is more than one sight with the same name, it will select all other observations (except for intermediate sights) with the same name.

When you click Select by Filter, the Define Level Stations dialog appears.

NOTE: The following Digital Level and Storage Formats are supported:

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office does not support Leica measurement records that are recorded outside the level run; that is, 330 records.


Define Level Stations dialog

More Information

 See Also

The Define Level Stations dialog appears when you click Select by Filter in the Digital Level Import dialog. Use this filter option to select or unselect station points. By default, all station points are selected in the Digital Level Import dialog.

TIP: When you collect digital level import data, store points that you want to import into Trimble Geomatics Office with a unique prefix or suffix. For example, store all of the points that you want to use as station points with the prefix, STN. This lets you easily select points using the Select by Filter button in the Digital Level Import dialog.

The options are:

Select Points with

Use this option to select station points in the Station Points column of the Digital Level Import dialog. For example, you can select station points with a particular prefix or suffix.

NOTE:  Any points that do not have the particular prefix or suffix are cleared.

Unselect Points with

Use this option to clear, for particular points, the check box in the Stations Points column in the Digital Level Import dialog.

NOTE:  Any points that do not have the particular prefix or suffix are checked.

Name

Use this field to select points by name. You can select point names using the ?, * or # wildcards.

Description

Use this field to select points by their description. Again, you can select the description using wildcards.

Example:

If you do not want points with the prefix "IS" to be selected in the Station Point column of the of the Digital Level Import dialog:

1.	In the Define Level Stations dialog, select the Unselect points with option.

2.	Select the Name option and enter IS*.


Using Level Observations in a Network Adjustment

If you want to perform a network adjustment using level data, you must have level observation standard errors defined. The software calculates standard errors for the following situations:

  If you import digital level data, the standard error (delta elevation) is calculated using the number of turns.

  Using the Trimble Data Exchange Format, the standard error is calculated if you include the number of turns in the import format. Alternatively, the standard error (delta elevation) can be used directly from the file.

If a standard error is not defined, the level observations are not marked for adjustment.

NOTE: You can input the standard error or number of turns for each delta elevation in the Properties window.


GIS Export Failure dialog

This dialog appears if the GIS export has failed.

Some possible reasons are shown in the following table:


Select Geoid Model dialog - Troubleshooting
Select Geoid Model dialog − Troubleshooting

During the import of a device file, if the geoid model name referenced in the file does not match any of the geoid model names in the coordinate system database (Current.csd), this dialog appears. Choose the geoid model that you want to use.

This dialog has appeared because of one of the following reasons:


Missing Printer

To print or plot from Trimble Geomatics Office, you need to have a printer installed on your computer.

To install a printer:

1.	Click Start.

2.	Select Settings / Printers. The Printers window appears.

3.	Double-click Add Printer.

Follow the installation instructions to add your printer to your Microsoft Windows settings.

After installing a printer, you can use it to print from Trimble Geomatics Office.


Select Datum Grid Model dialog

If the Combined Datum Grid file name referenced in the imported file does not match up with any Datum Grid files in the coordinate system database, this dialog appears.

Use this dialog to choose the most appropriate combined datum grid file for use within the system.

This dialog has appeared because of one of the following reasons:


Messages and Dialogs on import of a Survey Controller (*.dc) file

When you import a Survey Controller (*.dc) file to Trimble Geomatics Office, the software performs a number of checks on the file and warns you if the .dc file and the project coordinate system are not the same.

The following lists the possible messages and dialogs that appear when a .dc file is imported:

  One or more errors were generated importing the file

  The Feature and Attribute file defined for this project is different

  A Feature and Attribute file has not been defined for this project

  Unable to import file

  Default projection definition dialog

  Duplicate Points dialog

  Project Coordinate System dialog

  Select Datum Grid dialog

  Select Geoid Model dialog


Message - One or more errors were generated importing the file
Message − One or more errors were generated importing the file

During the import of the file, the software found one or more errors.

Do one of the following:

  To dismiss the message and ignore the error messages, click No.

  To view the errors, click Yes.

An import report appears in the default HTML viewer.

Click the Error Messages link or scroll down to the Errors section of the import report to examine the errors.

If necessary, fix the errors and re-import the file.


Message - The Feature and Attribute file defined for this project is different
Message − The Feature and Attribute file defined for this project is different

During the import of a Survey Controller (*.dc) file, the Feature and Attribute library or Data Dictionary file used to set up the project for attributes was found to be different from the one referenced in the .dc file.

Do one of the following:

  Click Yes to import the attributes common to the .dc file and the project.

  Click No to only import points from the .dc file.

To prevent this message appearing again, make sure that the library you use is the same as the library you use to collect attribute information in the field.


Message - Feature and Attribute file has not been defined for this project
Message − Feature and Attribute file has not been defined for this project

During the import of a Survey Controller (*.dc) file containing attribute information, Trimble Geomatics Office could not find a Feature and Attribute library or Data Dictionary file defined for the project.

Do one of the following:

  Click OK to import only the survey data and ignore attribute information from the .dc file.

  Click Cancel to set up the project for attributes in the Project Properties dialog / Features tab with the same library referenced by the .dc file, then re-import the .dc file.


Unable to import file

During the import of a file, an error was encountered resulting in the file not being imported. The following message appears:

The file <filename> could not be imported.

Check to see if the file is open in another application (for example, a Survey Controller (*.dc) file opened in the DC File Editor utility). Otherwise the file may be corrupt.


Feature Codes - Overview
    Feature Codes − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

Feature codes are a way of recording points that need to be grouped together for some form of processing. For example, you can code each point collected along a fence line as "FENCE" so that, back in the office, all points with a feature code of FENCE can be joined together by a particular line style.

To work with feature codes, you need to:

  create a Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file

  transfer the library to Trimble Survey Controller

  transfer the library to TDS Survey Pro

  collect data using feature codes in the library

  transfer a Survey Controller (*.dc) file to Trimble Geomatics Office

  process feature codes

A feature and attribute library is a set of instructions.

To create new libraries, use the Feature and Attribute Editor utility. You can create as many libraries as you need. When feature codes are processed, the instructions in the library tell Trimble Geomatics Office what to do to with the data in the selection. When the value in a feature code field matches a condition specified in the feature and attribute library, the associated actions are performed.

For more information about feature and attribute libraries, see the Feature and Attribute Editor Help.


Feature Codes - Order of Processing
    Feature Codes − Order of Processing

 Overview and More Information

All feature codes in a current selection are processed, but the selection method that you use dictates the order of processing.

Selection sets

When a Survey Controller (*.dc) file is imported, a selection set is created. It has the same name as the .dc file, and records the order in which points were collected in the field. If you use this selection set, feature codes are processed in the order in which they were collected.

Other selection methods

You can also do one of the following:

  Choose a command from the Select menu.

  Click a point.

With these methods, processing might not occur in the order in which data was collected.


Feature Codes - Common Errors
    Feature Codes − Common Errors

 Overview and More Information

The following typical errors can occur when you are using feature codes.

Incorrect joining due to the use of a wrong selection set

Incorrect joining can occur when you use a graphical selection (or the Select / All command) to select points for feature coding rather than using a selection set created by the system during data import.

NOTE: All the entities imported from a file are saved in a selection set. In the case of Survey Controller (*.dc) files the selection set is named according to the internal job name in the file. That is, the selection set created retains the order of the imported points. In the case of .dc files this means that the selection set retains the order in which the survey work was carried out. This is generally required for feature code processing.

Putting the control codes beside the wrong point code

For example: CURB1 LP ST

Here the point is an observation of a lamp post that is on the curb line. The curb observation is the start of a new curb line. The lamp post is a point to be plotted with the appropriate symbol. The ST (Start) command is applied to the point code that it follows (that is, the lamp post). This means that the line from the last point labeled CURB1 is drawn to the current point, which is not the intention of the coding.

The coding should be: CURB1 ST LP or LP CURB1 ST

Failing to use the ST (Start) command

This results in continuous lines between points with the same code drawn where they were not supposed to be.


Field Codes - Overview
Field Codes − Overview

More Information

 How to ...

Overview

Field codes are special instructions that tell Trimble Geomatics Office to insert information into fields. Field codes are also used to handle the transfer of database data in ASCII import/export or custom report operations. Field codes are grouped under several headings. For a list of each heading and links to details of each field code, see Field code Details.

Trimble Geomatics Office uses field codes extensively. For example, field codes are used in:

  the project name and date in the project headings when creating a new project

  annotations

  labels

  custom point labeling

  ASCII import/export

  report definitions

Field codes are always contained between pairs of square brackets. Any characters inside pairs of ‘[]’s are treated as a possible field code expression, and replaced by the corresponding field code value, if there is one.

For example, you can instruct Trimble Geomatics Office to custom label every point in the database with its name by using the field code ‘[Name]’. You can extend these labels to include elevation by adding the field code ‘[Elevation]’.

For example, with the appropriate settings [$Coordinate System.Zone] could display "California Zone 3 0403" and [Feature Code] could display "TREE". Other information such as the current computer system date and time can be output using [Date] and [Time] field codes.

As a further example, the field code Name=[Name] Elv=[Elevation] could generate the following type of report:

Name=3397 Elv=18.762

Name=3396 Elv=18.702

Name=3432 Elv=?

Name=3436 Elv=16.372

To access field codes, right-click in the field to which you want to add the field code. If field codes are available, the Fields option appears in the shortcut menu.

Syntax

The syntax of a field code comprises three elements:

[context.name:options]

Use the context component to eliminate any ambiguity among field code names. For example, the field code [Name] always shows the point name for the current point from the database. If you want to show the project name using a field code this must include the context $Project (that is, [$Project.Name] is required). Otherwise, the current point name is returned.

The context component is optional. If it is omitted, Trimble Geomatics Office assumes the most logical context.

The options that can be included with a field code are usually modifiers for the field code. This component is also optional.


Field Code Details

 Overview and More Information

Field codes are grouped into several headings:


Database Field Codes

 Overview and More Information

Database field codes provide direct output of both stored and calculated values from the database. You can optionally prefix a database field code with the name of the table the data is to come from.

For example, [Point.easting] extracts the Easting value from the point table. Simply specifying [Easting] also extracts the Easting value from the point table as long as this table is the only table with an Easting field. If there is any chance of any ambiguity the table name should be specified.

Available field codes are context-sensitive. Valid names depend on the context but, in general, the field codes associated with the database tables are:

Database Field Codes

A database field’s value is taken directly from the database (for example, Easting).

Calculated Field Codes

The following table shows the calculated field codes that are valid:

$Center{<separator>} (alternatively, $Centre{<separator>})

For an arc, there is a special $Center (alternatively, $Centre) field code that displays either the center point name (if a database point was used) or the center point coordinates.

You can specify a separator character for display between coordinate values. If the separator character is omitted, the ‘list separator’ character from the Microsoft Windows Control Panel / Regional Settings is used.

First Ordinate

The value of the First Ordinate (Easting or Northing) depending on the output order.

Second Ordinate

The value of the Second Ordinate (Northing or Easting) depending on the output order.

First Ordinate Name

The name of the First Ordinate (Easting or Northing) depending on the output order.

Second Ordinate Name

The name of the Second Ordinate (Easting or Northing) depending on the output order.


System Field Codes

 Overview and More Information

System field codes provide access to a number of system-wide details, and provide a number of special functions. Use system field codes to add extra information to reports.

NOTE: Each of these system field codes can be prefixed with $System. For example, [$System.time] displays the current computer’s time at the time the field code is used.

While these field codes do not need to be prefixed by $System, use this prefix to avoid any ambiguity. For example, [Time] displays the same value as [$System.Time].

Time

Displays the current time for the computer at the time the field code is used.

Date

Displays the current system date for the computer at the time the field code is used.

Summary

Displays the ‘current entity’s’ summary.

NOTE: The summary field code used for a point is defined in the Options.ini file associated with the project. Usually, it uses the name and feature code field codes in the form [Name] : [Feature Code]

Space:<count>

Displays one or more spaces.

For example, the field code [$System.space:3] provides three spaces.

Repeat<string>:<count>

Displays a repeated piece of text. The text you want to have repeated must be enclosed in angle brackets (< >).

For example, the field code [$System.Repeat<->:80] displays eighty minus characters. For more information, see Parameter Entry Screen.

Column:<number>

Displays spaces from the current position on a line up to the specified column.

For example, the field code [$System.Column:40] inserts spaces until the fortieth column in the current line is reached.

Replace<find><replace>

Replaces all occurrences of the specified ‘find’ text with the ‘replace’ text. The Replace<find><replace> field code must follow the fields the find and replace is to action. If the Replace field code appears before the field you want to find and replace, the field will not be changed.

It is optional whether you specify the replace text. If it is not specified, the ‘find’ text will be removed from the line.

For example, the field code [$System.Replace<°><degrees>] finds all occurrences of a degree symbol in the current line and replace them with the word ‘degrees’.

Character:code

Inserts a character by specifying its character code.

NOTE: The character output varies according to the font being used.

For example, the field code [$System.Character:169] gives © for most fonts.

User name

Displays the users network log-in name.

Computer name

Displays the network identification. You can change this identification in your system from the Microsoft Windows Control Panel / Network.

About

Displays the product name and version number.

For example, Trimble Geomatics Office, Version 1.00.

Directory name

There are a number of different field codes that you can use to provide specific system-related folder names.

Available directory names are:

ASCII Export

Two field codes that are valid for ASCII Export only are:

Counter	Displays the number of field codes used. It can be used to individually identify each value exported.
Line	Displays the line number in an export file. It is provided to allow for ASCII definitions that have a line count for every line in the file.


Parameter Entry dialog

WARNING: Trimble Navigation Limited supports use or modification of this database only by the use of Trimble’s proprietary Trimble Geomatics Office software. Trimble does not support or authorize use or modification, or warrant the performance, of this database by means of other software applications. Trimble may at any time modify the format of this database making it incompatible with other software applications.

This dialog appears if you are required to enter a value(s) to complete a selection query or field code. Select queries and field codes that require parameters have an ellipsis (…). The dialog appears in a number of places in Trimble Geomatics Office.

Name

Shows the parameter(s) to be defined.

Value

Enter the value(s) you require.

A Parameter Entry dialog appears when carrying out a database report that has been based on the results of a database query.


Project Field Codes

 Overview and More Information

Project field codes provide access to specific project information. Use these field codes to add extra information to reports.

NOTE: Each of these project field codes can be prefixed with $Project. For example, [$Project.projection] displays the name of the type of coordinate system projection used for the project.

While these field codes do not need to be prefixed by $Project, use this prefix to avoid any ambiguity. For example, [Name] displays the same value as [$Project.Name].

Name

Displays the project name that you have used for the project.

Path

Displays the name of the folder that projects are stored under.

NOTE: This field code provides the same output as $System.Projects directory

Projection

Displays the name of the type of the coordinate system projection used for the project. For example, Transverse Mercator.

Auto name

Displays the name of the current auto point name.

For example, AUTO 0009 is returned if the previous allocated auto point name was AUTO 0008

CAD Layer

Displays the current CAD layer name.

Units:type

Displays the appropriate unit name. You must always provide a type.

NOTE: Distance, elevation, coordinate and angle are available.

For example, the field code [$Project.Units:Distance] displays the distance unit as set for the system. You can include the name ‘:verbose’ to get a full field code value. For example, to get ‘Meters’ rather than ‘m’ use [$Project.Units:Distance:verbose].

Type:distance

Displays the display type for distance. You can set this in File / Project Properties / Units and Format.

Type:LLH

Displays the display type for latitude, longitude, and height (local or WGS-84).


Headings Field Codes

 Overview and More Information

The headings field codes provide access to the data recorded in the project headings fields in the Project Details tab of the Project Properties dialog. Use these field codes to add extra information to reports.

NOTE: Each of these headings field codes can be prefixed with $Headings. For example, [$Headings.Title] displays the title for the current project.

If any of the headings are changed, the available headings field codes change to reflect this.

While these field codes do not need to be prefixed by $Headings, use this prefix to avoid any ambiguity.

The standard headings field codes are:

Title

Displays the title for the current project.

Description

Displays a description of the project.

Reference

Displays a project reference number so that you can link the project to the office costing process.

Field Surveyor

This field code output could be useful for later reference.

Computer Operator

This field code output could be useful for later reference.

Date

Displays the creation date of the project. This is carried out automatically using the date field code in the template project.

Vertical Datum

Displays the vertical datum for the project.

Equipment

Displays the serial number(s) of your equipment.


Coordinate System Field Codes

 Overview and More Information

Coordinate system field codes provide access to specific details of the coordinate system for the project. Use these field codes to add extra information to reports.

NOTE: Each of these coordinate system field codes can be prefixed with $Coordinate system. For example, [$Coordinate system.System] displays the name of the coordinate system used for the project.

While these field codes do not need to be prefixed by $Coordinate system, use this prefix to avoid any ambiguity.

NOTE: The $Coordinate system field codes return ‘Not selected’ when there is no setting available.

System

Displays the name of the coordinate system that is used for the project (for example, United States State Plane 1983).

Zone

Displays the name of the coordinate system zone that is used by the project (for example, California Zone 3 0403).

Datum

Displays the name of the datum that the coordinate system projection is based upon (for example, North American 1983 (Conus)).

Geoid

Displays the name of the geoid model that is used by the project (for example, GEOID96 (Continental US)).

Site

Displays the name of any site definition for the project.


Projection Field Codes

 Overview and More Information

Projection field codes provide access to specific details of the projection used within the coordinate system for the project. Use these field codes to add extra information to reports.

NOTE: Each of these projection field codes can be prefixed with $Projection. For example, [$Projection.Name] displays the name of the coordinate system projection used for the project.

While these field codes do not need to be prefixed by $Projection, use this prefix to avoid any ambiguity.

Name

Displays the name of the projection type (for example, Transverse Mercator).

The remaining projection field codes return actual parameter values for the projection used by the project.

NOTE: Not all field codes are valid for all projection types. That is, not all field codes are valid in every case. The following list of field codes gives the complete list of all the projection parameters that can be returned. Depending on which projection is in use by the project, only appropriate field codes will return values. Any field codes that are not valid for the projection return ‘N/A’ (which means Not Applicable).

Each of the following field codes displays the value that is detailed:

False northing

The false northing value for the projection.

False easting

The false easting value for the projection.

False elevation

The ellipsoid height value at the origin of a plane projection.

Origin height

The elevation value at the origin of a plane projection.

Origin latitude

The origin latitude for the projection.

Origin longitude

The origin longitude for the projection.

Scale factor

The central scale factor for the projection (unity based).

Azimuth

The skew azimuth value for Oblique Mercator and R.S.O. projections with a skew azimuth definition.

Convergence

The skew angle value for Oblique Mercator and R.S.O. projection with a skew by origin convergence definition.

Parallel 1

The north parallel used in the definition of Lambert 2 Parallel and Albers Equal Area Conic projection.

Parallel 2

The south parallel used in the definition of Lambert 2 Parallel and Albers Equal Area Conic projection.

Point 1 latitude, Point 1 longitude, Point 2 latitude, Point 2 longitude

These four field codes are used by the Oblique Mercator and R.S.O. projections defined by two points, with these fields being the definition point positions.


Datum Field Codes

 Overview and More Information

The datum field codes provide access to specific details of the datum used within the coordinate system for the project. Use these field codes to add extra information to reports.

NOTE: Each of these datum field codes can be prefixed with $Datum. For example, [$Datum.Method] displays the name of the datum method used for the project.

While these field codes do not need to be prefixed by $Datum, use this prefix to avoid any ambiguity.

NOTE: Not all field codes are valid for all datum types. That is, not all field codes are valid in every case. The following list of field codes gives the complete list of all the datum parameters that can be returned. Depending on which datum is in use by the project, only appropriate field codes will return values. Any field codes that are not valid for the datum return ‘N/A’ (which means Not Available).

Each of the following field codes displays the value detailed:

Method

The name of the datum transformation method used (for example, three-parameter).

Translation X

The X translation value (available for three- and seven-parameter datum transformations).

Translation Y

The Y translation value (available for three- and seven-parameter datum transformations).

Translation Z

The Z translation value (available for three- and seven-parameter datum transformations).

Rotation X

The X rotation value (available only for seven-parameter datum transformations).

Rotation Y

The Y rotation value (available only for seven-parameter datum transformations).

Rotation Z

The Z rotation value (available only for seven-parameter datum transformations).

Scale factor

The seven-parameter datum transformation scale factor value expressed in parts per million (ppm).

Ellipsoid name

The name of the ellipsoid used in the project.

Flattening of ellipsoid

The ellipsoid flattening.

Semi major axis

The semi-major axis of the ellipsoid.


Calibration Field Codes

 Overview and More Information

The calibration field codes provide access to specific details of the GPS site calibration used in the coordinate system for the project. Use these field codes to add extra information to reports.

NOTE: Each of these calibration field codes can be prefixed with $Calibration. For example, [$Calibration.Rotation] displays the rotation value for the plane transformation in the GPS site calibration.

While these field codes do not need to be prefixed by $Calibration, use this prefix to avoid any ambiguity.

NOTE: The calibration field codes are separated into two groups relating to the horizontal and vertical components of a GPS site calibration. All the field codes in either group are valid if that component has been computed. That is, the vertical calibration components are all valid if the vertical calibration is available in the coordinate system. The following list of field codes gives the complete list of all of the calibration parameters that can be returned. Any field codes that are not valid for the calibration return ‘N/A’ (which means Not Available).

Each of the following field codes displays the value detailed:

Vert origin north

The vertical transformation origin point Northing value.

Vert origin east

The vertical transformation origin point Easting value.

Vert const correction

The vertical shift that is applied at the transformation origin point.

Vert correction north

The vertical correction per unit north that is applied in the transformation.

Vert correction east

The vertical correction per unit east that is applied in the transformation.

Horz origin north

The horizontal transformation origin point Northing value.

Horz origin east

The horizontal transformation origin point Easting value.

Horz translation north

The horizontal translation value applied in the north direction.

Horz translation east

The horizontal translation value applied in the east direction.

Scale factor

The scale factor (unity based) applied in the horizontal transformation.

Rotation

The rotation applied in the horizontal transformation.


Special Field Codes

 Overview and More Information

These special field codes provide access to a number of computer-wide details, and provide a number of special functions. Use these field codes to add extra information to reports.

$File.filename

This field code displays the contents of the specified file.

NOTE: Because of a conflict with the colon character used in some of the field code definitions, you cannot use the colon (:) character to define a computer letter drive. If you need to specify a drive, use <drive> instead of ‘drive:’. For example, <C> specifies the C: drive.

Trimble Geomatics Office uses some special field codes for returning standard directories.

$Home (where the TGOffice.exe is located)

$System (the system subdirectory under $home where the TGOffice.exe is located)

$Project (the current project's directory)

For example [$FILE.<c>\temp\data.txt] or [$file.$system\myfile.txt]

NOTE: You can also use ‘:expand’ here.

$Env.variable

Displays the named environment variable.

$Key.key

Displays the string with the given key, taken from an .ini file (or the Registry).

The format of the field code ‘name’ is key{,section}{;path}

If the Section is omitted, ‘Field code’ is used, and if the path is omitted, $System is assumed.

As with $File, the path can start with any of the following:

  $Home

  $System

  $Project

NOTE: If the path is only $Project then the project’s *.ini file is used. (Options.ini is examined first, then tgo_v100.ini — these are .ini files associated with each project.) If the path is only $System then Trimble Geomatics Office’s area in the registry is used.

$Text.text

Displays the text you have entered. This is useful for reports.

For example [$Text.Feature code:20] displays the label ‘Feature code’ placed 20 spaces from the point.


Plan Form Field Codes

 Overview and More Information

In the definition of plan forms there are several special field codes provided. Use these within a plan form definition to let you display details specific to the plot.

NOTE: Each of these plan form field codes can be prefixed with $Plot. For example, [$Plot.Scale] displays the plot scale for the plot.

While these field codes do not need to be prefixed by $Plot, use this prefix to avoid any ambiguity.

Scale

Displays the plot scale for the plot.

First Origin Ordinate Name

Displays the first origin ordinate name. For example, with the File / Project Properties / Units and Format / Coordinate Order option set to North first, [$Plot.First Origin Ordinate Name] displays ‘Northing’.

Second Origin Ordinate Name

Displays the second origin ordinate name. For example, with the File / Project Properties / Units and Format / Coordinate Order option set to North first, [$Plot.Second Origin Ordinate Name] displays ‘Easting’.

First Origin Ordinate

Displays the first origin ordinate value. For example, with the File / Project Properties / Units and Format / Coordinate Order option set to North first, [$Plot.First Origin Ordinate Name] displays the plot origin Northing value.

Second Origin Ordinate

Displays the second origin ordinate value. For example, with the File / Project Properties / Units and Format / Coordinate Order option set to North first, [$Plot.Second Origin Ordinate Name] displays the plot origin Easting value.

Origin N

Displays the plot origin Northing value.

Origin E

Displays the plot origin Easting value.

Rotation

Displays the rotation values specified for the plot.

Plan form

Displays the name of the plan form as specified in the plan form definition.


Modifiers

 Overview and More Information

Field code modifiers are special commands that you can use to modify the output of a field code.

Use modifiers to:

  get the specific output you require from the field code

  provide additional formatting information or extra parameters when outputting data

A number of modifiers can be used to modify a single field code. When a number of modifiers are used, they are usually specified as follows:

	[Field code{:FormatItem}{:FormatItem}{:FormatItem}{:FormatItem}]
where FormatItem is either a modifier name or a format layout. The braces indicate these are optional items.

When specifying a modifier, the system accepts either upper or lower case or a mixed case.

Possible modifiers are as follows:

Width Value (Numeric)

Specifies the width of the output from a field code. If the width value is negative, the output is left-justified, otherwise it is right-justified.

For example, if Feature code = "sample code", then [Feature code:15] displays "    sample code" (that is, padded out to 15 characters wide by adding four leading spaces).

Width.decimals Values (Numeric)

Specifies both the width and number of decimal places for the output from a field code. The modifier has the form W.D where W is the width and D is the number of decimal places.

If the width value is negative, the field is left-justified, otherwise it is right-justified.

If the width value starts with a zero, but is not just zero (for example, 08.3), then padding is done with a zero rather than a space.

For example,	if Elevation = 10.3258

Then	[Elevation:0.3] displays 10.326

And	[Elevation:07.2] displays 0010.33

Units

Suffixes values with their units. For example, m for meters, ift for International feet, and sft for US survey feet. You can use this modifier to make sure units are shown even when the Display Units option in File / Project Properties / Units and Formats tab is set to No.

No units

Ensures that values are not suffixed with their units. You can use this modifier to make sure that no units are displayed even when the Display Units option in File / Project Properties / Units and Formats tab is set to Yes.

Uppercase

Converts any alpha characters that are returned from a field code to uppercase.

Lowercase

Converts any alpha characters that are returned from a field code to lowercase.

Right

Right-justifies the output from a field code within the specified field width. If no field width is specified, no justification is carried out.

Left

Left-justifies the output from a field code within the specified field width. If no field width is specified, no justification is carried out.

Center (alternatively, centre)

Justifies the output from a field code within the specified field width. If no field width is specified, no justification is carried out.

For example, if Feature code = "example"

Then [Feature code:11:Center] displays "  example  ".

That is, it is returned with two leading and two trailing spaces in this case.

Trim

Trims the output to the given width (leading/trailing if the width is positive or negative).

For example, if Feature code = Example

Then [Featurecode:4:Trim] displays ‘Exam’

And [Featurecode:−4:Trim] displays ‘mple’

Expand

Expands any field codes that are found in the text returned by the field code to which ‘expand’ applies.

For example, the field code [$File.$System\text.txt:expand], when used in the importing of a file, expands any valid field codes found in the Text.txt file before displaying it.

Standard

Converts output to standard numeric punctuation (dot for decimal symbol and no digit grouping symbol; that is, no thousand separator).

NOTE: This modifier only applies to report definitions. The import routines can receive numeric data in the standardized form (no digit grouping symbol and dot for the decimal point) or values using the digit grouping symbol and decimal symbol set in the Microsoft Windows system. The export routines convert numeric output to the standardized form.

Reverse

Reverses the sense of appropriate field codes. For example, [Azimuth:Reverse] reverses the azimuth that would normally be returned for a given line.

Quadrant

Shows an azimuth as a quadrant bearing. For example, an azimuth of 228°37'25" appears as N81°22'35"W.

Whole circle

Shows an azimuth as a whole circle bearing. For example, if your azimuth format is set to quadrant bearing north 81 degrees 22 minutes and 35 seconds west, it appears as 228°37'25".

Verbose

Uses the full wording where appropriate. For example, if units are abbreviated to ‘m’, use the verbose modifier to display the word ‘meters’.

Split

Splits the string at the decimal point.

For example, the modifier [Elevation:split] gives the elevation without the decimal point.

NOTE: This modifier is useful for the On point annotation position when you design annotation templates.

This modifier replaces the ‘.’ with a single space but you can increase this by using :split<3>, for example.

IntPart

Strips off the fractional part of the value (up to ‘.’).

FracPart

Strips off the integral part of the value (from ‘.’).

Implied

Handles the import and export of ASCII files where the decimal point is not present in numeric values but its position is implied. The modifier is used in conjunction with standard width and decimal modifiers.

For example, [Northing:10.3:Implied] would output the Northing value of 4853297.692 as 4853297692. The same field code definition allows the correct interpretation of values with implied decimal points on import.


Format Layouts

 Overview and More Information

Format layouts let you build field codes.

For example, you can build a field code for a date using format layout components:

[Date:<{DDDD}, {MMM} {D}-{YYYY}!>]

This gives Sunday, Oct 17 1999!

NOTE: You can include any text in the field code. In the example above, an exclamation mark was included.

Format layouts are always enclosed between angle brackets (< >) (for complete format layouts) or braces ({ }) (for components of a format layout).

Format layouts only apply to certain data types. These are:

  Date Format Layouts

  Time Format Layouts

  Angles/bearings Format Layouts

Dates and times provide components of a format layout while the angles/bearings provide complete format layouts.


Date Format Layouts

 Overview and More Information

The date format layouts provide control over the display of the date component for a field code. For example, the date field code that includes the component dd shows the date with a leading zero.

NOTE: Sample date format layouts using representative values are available under the shortcut Fields / Advanced / More / Format layouts option. These sample date layouts are automatically converted to use the detailed field codes listed here.

The full list of the available types of date format layout is as follows:


Time Format Layouts

 Overview and More Information

The time format layouts provide control over the display of the time component for a field code. For example, the time field code can include the component hh to display the hour with a leading zero (12 hour clock).

NOTE: Sample time format layouts using representative values are available under shortcut menu Fields / Advanced / More / Format layouts option. These sample time layouts are automatically converted to use the detailed field codes listed here.

The full list of the available types of time format layout is:

NOTE: The time-of-day components of the format layout must be ordered, with hours before minutes before seconds and milliseconds and t or tt last. You can omit any of these formatting items.

Both date and time components can be used for the date and time field codes; the data passed in has all the information. The case of the components is important for distinguishing between minutes (m) and months (M).

Examples:

<DDDD, MMM D, YYYY!> gives ‘Thursday, Oct 14 1999!’ −  which is the current date.

<hh mm sstt!> gives ‘01 02 07pm!’ −  which is the current time.


Angles / Bearings Format Layouts

 Overview and More Information

The angles/bearings format layouts provide control over the display of the angle/bearing component for a field code. For example, the azimuth field code can include the component <dm.mm> to display the azimuth in degrees and decimal minutes.

NOTE: The angles/bearings format layouts are available from the shortcut menu in Fields / Advanced / More / Format layouts option.

The available types of angles/bearings format layout are:

Decimal seconds

Shows angles/bearings using degrees, minutes, and decimal seconds (when the angle units are set to degrees). This format layout inserts the layout characters <dms.ss>. For example, [Azimuth:0.3:<dms.ss>] displays an azimuth value to three decimal places of a second.

Decimal minutes

Shows angles/bearings using degrees and decimal minutes (when the angle units are set to degrees). This format layout inserts the layout characters <dm.mm>. For example, [Azimuth:0.4:<dm.mm>] displays an azimuth value to four decimal places of a minute.

Decimal degrees

Shows angles/bearings using decimal degrees (when the angle units are set to degrees). This format layout inserts the layout characters <d.dd>. For example, [Azimuth:0.6:<d.dd>] displays an azimuth value to six decimal places of a degree.

Signed decimal degrees

Shows angles/bearings using decimal degrees (when the angle units are set to degrees) and includes a leading sign character for the value. This format layout inserts the layout characters <+d.dd>. For example, [Latitude<+d.dd>:0.8] displays a latitude value to eight decimal places of a degree including the leading sign character (+ or −) for the value.


Field Code Substitution

 Overview and More Information

Field code substitution recognizes some special non-field code character sequences. These are set out as follows:

Examples:

To create a tab delimited ASCII output format, use the following field codes:

[Name]\t[Easting]\t[Northing]\t[Elevation]\t[Feature Code]

To annotate a line with azimuth and distance on two lines, use the following field codes:

[Azimuth]|[Distance]


Field Codes and ASCII Import

 Overview and More Information

The field codes allowed in an import format are:

  Only fields in the point table.

  No subrecords and no system field codes.

(An exception is [$System.Repeat<find><replace>] which is allowed.)

Some calculated fields are allowed (for example, Latitude/Longitude).

$Skip

There is a special scope ($Skip) to help with interpreting ASCII input:

Space

This field code skips the number of spaces given by the width or, if no width is given, skips to a non-blank. You need to make sure you place a space before the Skip so that Trimble Geomatics Office knows where the previous field finishes. For example:

[Name] [$Skip.Space][Northing] [$Skip.Space][Easting] [$Skip.Space]

Number

This field code skips over a number (characters ‘+’, ‘−’, ’.’ & ‘0’...’9’). If there is a width, it skips that number of suitable characters; otherwise. it skips to the first non-number character.

NOTE: This does not work with nulls or exponentials.

Line

This field code skips the number of lines given in the width, or one line.

Text

This field code skips the given number of characters or up to a non-printing character (for example, ‘\n’).

Column

This field code skips to the given column number.

To:string

This field code skips to the first character after the given string (for example, [$Skip.To:ENTITIES]).

NOTE: The string cannot include new lines.

There are some special ‘format functions’:

Standard

This format function converts the input from standard punctuation: ‘.’ is changed to the decimal point character.

Skip

This format function reads the field as normal but does not store it (for example [Point.Horz Prec:10.3:skip]).

= (Equals sign)

This format function assigns the field’s value using the rest of the format string. It does not look at the file (for example, [Feature code:=imported]). Such fields must come first in the definition field code string (otherwise the parsing gets confused). For example ‘[Elevation:=0.0][Name],[Northing],[Easting]’

NOTE: When defining an ASCII import format it is important that you either specify the width in a field code (for example, [WGS Latitude:11]) or specify the separating character between field codes (for example, [WGS Latitude],[WGS Longitude],[WGS Height] where the commas indicate the end of the ‘fields’). This is because when the importing routines are attempting to interpret values from an ASCII file they use the format definition in order to work out the portion of each file line which is to be read into a given database field. The width or separating characters allow the appropriate portions of the file lines be located.

NOTE: To display event times to the nearest millisecond, add the following time format layout to the field code, <H:mm:ss.nnn>, where nnn is the number of decimal seconds. For example, [Point Obs.Time:<H:mm:ss.nnn>]. To increase the time precision, increase the number of decimal seconds. For example, nnnn outputs the first 4 decimal seconds.


Field Code Parameters dialog

Use this dialog to complete the field code. The title of the dialog indicates the context.

Name

This column shows the parameter(s) to be defined.

Value

Enter the value(s) you require.


Transferring Files to Trimble Survey Controller - Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog
Overview

You can transfer files that you require in the field to Trimble Survey Controller. To do this, you require a Survey Controller device setup in the Data Transfer utility.

You can transfer the following file types:

  Antenna files

  Datum Grid files (*.cdg)

  Data Collector files (*.dc)

  Data Dictionary files (*.ddf)

  DTM points

  Feature and attribute libraries (*.fcl)

  Geoid Grid files (*.ggf)

  UK National Grid files (*.pgf)

  CSV files

  Background Map files


Antenna Details to Survey Controller option

If you have edited antenna information in an antenna file, use this option to transfer this information to Trimble Survey Controller.

  For Trimble Survey Controller 6.00 or later, the antenna details are stored in the Antenna.ini file.

  For Trimble Survey Controller 5.03 or earlier, the antenna details are stored in the Antenna.dat file.

NOTE: To export antenna details, the appropriate antenna file must be located in the Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\Config folder.


Survey Controller Files (*.dc) option

Survey Controller (*.dc) files provide the link between Trimble Geomatics Office and Trimble Survey Controller. These files are created when you import a job from the Trimble Survey Controller job or when you export a Trimble Geomatics Office project to this file format.

Using Trimble Geomatics Office, you can:

  Import a Survey Controller file (*.dc)

  Export a Trimble Geomatics Office project to a Survey Controller file (*.dc) to be later transferred to Trimble Survey Controller

To import a Survey Controller file (*.dc):

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Survey Controller files (*.dc) option. The Open dialog appears.

4.	Select the file from a folder that you want to import and click Open.

To export the current Trimble Geomatics Office project to a Survey Controller file (*.dc):

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Survey Controller files (*.dc) option.

4.	Click Options to open the Data Collector Options dialog and specify the internal name of the file and the Survey Controller file version.

5.	Click OK to accept the settings and return to the Export dialog.

6.	Click OK. The Save As dialog appears.

7.	Select the folder where you want the file saved to.

8.	By default, the file name uses the project name. Enter a name in the File name field to change it and click Save.


Survey Controller option

Using Trimble Geomatics Office you can transfer data directly between a Trimble Geomatics Office project and Trimble Survey Controller. When a job is imported from Trimble Survey Controller it is converted into a Survey Controller file (*.dc) format which is used by Trimble Geomatics Office.

Use Trimble Geomatics Office to:

  import a job from Trimble Survey Controller

  export a Trimble Geomatics Office project to Trimble Survey Controller

To access the option, do one of the following:

  To import a Survey Controller job to a Trimble Geomatics Office project:

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Survey Device option and click OK. The Data Transfer Open dialog appears.

To export a Trimble Geomatics Office project to the Survey Controller:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Survey Device option.

4.	Click Options to open the Data Collector Options dialog to specify the internal name of the file and the Survey Controller file version.

5.	Click OK to accept the settings and return to the Export dialog.

6.	Click OK. The Save As dialog appears.

7. 	Select a survey controller device.

8.	Click Open. The computer connects to Trimble Survey Controller.

9.	Select the Main Memory or Survey Data Card option (if available).

10.	Click Open. The software reads the folder that you selected, and displays all of the Trimble Survey Controller jobs in the folder.

11.	In the File name field, enter a name for the new .dc file.

12.	Click Save to create the .dc file and transfer it to Trimble Survey Controller.

NOTE: If you are transferring data to or from Trimble Survey Controller 7.6, use the version 7.50 .dc file format.


Data Collector Options dialog

Use this dialog to specify the type of device to which you are exporting data.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select one of the following options:

  DTM Points to file

  DTM Points to Survey Controller

  Feature and Attribute Library to Survey Controller

  SDR files

  Survey Controller

  Survey Controller files

4.	Click Options.

NOTE: The fields that are available depend on the option you select.

Version

Select the version related to the data format.

Job / File name

Displays the name for the job or file type to be exported. When exporting a job, the Trimble Geomatics Office project name is entered by default. Use the keyboard to enter a new name for the file.

Output features and attributes

Select this check box to transfer the feature and attribute library used for the project and any feature and attribute information assigned to the points in the project that you are exporting. This option is only available for Trimble Survey Controller 7.00 or later.

Export lines and arcs

Select this check box to export lines and arcs used in the project to Trimble Survey Controller. This option is only available if you have lines and arcs included in the selection set, and is only available for Trimble Survey Controller 10.00 or later.

Output as

Select the points output to the device file.

The output can be as WGS-84 or grid positions. Depending on the data format and version you select, and the database coordinate system definition, both options are not always available. For example, Trimble Survey Controller before version 4.00 only accepts WGS-84 positions; Sokkia SDR20 versions only accept grid positions.

The project’s coordinate system can influence the data output to the Trimble Survey Controller files. The Datum Grid (for example, NAD83 HPGN, and NADCON) and Multiple Regression datum transformation methods are not supported by Trimble Survey Controller 6.50 or earlier. Trimble Survey Controller 7.00 does support datum grids.

If data is exported to Trimble Survey Controller that does not support the datum transformation method specified in the project, the Datum record in the created .dc file has the datum method set to None. The incorrect grid positions cannot be displayed in Trimble Survey Controller. For more information, see the topic Datum Transformation Methods and Trimble Survey Controller.

Similarly, Trimble Survey Controller 4.00 cannot work with Geoid models. If a project uses a Geoid model, the datum method is also set to None. This ensures that Trimble Survey Controller 4.00 cannot display incorrect data.

To use transferred grid coordinate data in the field you must carry out an in-field calibration to relate the grid data to the observed GPS data. For more information, see the topic Geoid models and Survey Controllers.

File details

Select the Append file check box to include data from an existing .dc file in the export. The Browse button becomes available. Click Browse to locate the .dc file you want included in the new file. The data from the current project is then appended to the new file.

This option is useful if you have a .dc file containing control points that you want added to the data to be exported. This preserves the existing .dc file in its original state.


Data Collector Units

When a Trimble Survey Controller file (.dc) or an SDR format file is imported, the units definition in the file header is used for unit conversion purposes. Trimble Geomatics Office always operates with internal SI (metric) data so the data imported from a device file is converted appropriately.

To select how the values are to be displayed on the screen:

1.	Select File / Project Properties.

The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Units and Format tab.

Use this tab to select the display units.

NOTE: SDR files only have feet and meters distance units settings. For SDR files, feet values are interpreted as US survey feet values if the Coordinate units are set to US survey feet.


DC File Attribute Notes (Survey Controller V4) option

Attribute note files are simple, comma-delimited files. They include point attributes collected as attribute notes in a device running Trimble Survey Controller (version 3.00 or 4.00). This option does not export attributes collected using a feature and attribute library (available with Trimble Survey Controller 7.00 or later).

Use this option to export only attributes collected using notes records.

The process is:

1.	Import a Trimble Survey Controller 3.00 or 4.00 file containing attribute notes into the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

A selection set is created by Trimble Geomatics Office. This selection set is given the same name as the file's internal job name.

2.	Select the created selection set. The selection set is used for reading points from the project for the attribute file.

3.	Export the .dc file with attribute notes.

An example of the type of file that is produced is:

1000,5315.362,1056.274,82.361,TREE,TYPE,PINE,HEIGHT,25,GIRTH,0.5

1001,5382.728,1132.692,75.472,TREE,TYPE,BIRCH,HEIGHT,20,GIRTH,0.4

1002,5298.048,1162.472,55.927,PP,VOLTAGE,110KV,CABLES,3

1003,5308.682,1192.329,62.854,PP,VOLTAGE,110KV,CABLES,3


DTM Points to Survey Controller option

Use this option to export DTM points to a device running Trimble Survey Controller.

To do this:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the DTM points to Survey Controller option.

4.	Click Options to specify the name of the file and the Trimble Survey Controller version you are exporting to.

5.	Click OK to accept the settings and return to the Export dialog.

6.	Click OK. The Data Transfer Save As dialog.

The points selected for export must be regularly gridded points. That is, they must form a grid of points oriented North-South and East-West with equal spacing between the points in either direction. Typically, the gridded points are imported into the system from an ASCII file of coordinates. You must make sure that only the regularly gridded points are selected for export, and that no extra ‘off-grid’ points have been included in the current selection.

Once the export option has been selected, the Trimble Geomatics Office system sorts the selected gridded points into the appropriate order and creates a specially formatted file that is required by Trimble Survey Controller.


DTM Points to File (*.dtx) option

Use this option to export DTM points to a Digital Terrain Model file (*.dtx).

To do this:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the DTM points to file (*.dtx) option.

4.	Click Options to specify the name of the file and the Trimble Survey Controller version you are exporting to.

5.	Click OK to accept the settings and return to the Export dialog.

6.	Click OK. The Save As dialog appears.

7.	Enter the name for the file and select the folder in which you want it saved.

8.	Click OK.

The points selected for export must be regularly gridded points. That is, they must form a grid of points oriented North-South and East-West with equal spacing. Typically, the gridded points are imported into the system from an ASCII file of coordinates. You must make sure that only the regularly gridded points are selected for export, and that no extra ‘off-grid’ points have been included in the current selection.

Once the export option has been selected, the Trimble Geomatics Office system sorts the selected gridded points into the appropriate order and creates the file in the Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) format.


Datum Grid to Survey Controller (*.cdg) option

See also

Use this option to create Combined Datum Grid files to transfer to Trimble Survey Controller.

To do this:

1.	 Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Datum grid to Survey Controller (*.cdg) option.

The Export a Datum Grid dialog appears.

Datum Grid files store datum grid transformations for the defined area. Using the Coordinate System Manager utility, you can define a coordinate system that uses a Datum Grid file as the system’s datum transformation (for example, NADCON). You can then select a coordinate system that uses a datum grid for your Trimble Geomatics Office project. To use the Datum Grid file in the field, you need to transfer the Datum Grid file as a Combined Datum Grid file to Trimble Survey Controller 7.00 or later. For information about what datum transformation methods are available for different Trimble Survey Controller versions, see the topic Datum Transformations and Survey Controllers.

A longitude grid file and latitude grid file exist in the Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\Geodata folder for the datum grid you have selected. These files must be combined before exporting to Trimble Survey Controller. When you choose the Create a Combined Datum Grid file for export to the Trimble Survey Controller software option, the software combines the files associated with the datum grid specified in the coordinate system of the project .

When you create a Combined Datum Grid file, and use it with Trimble Survey Controller the name of the original datum grid is stored in the .dc file, for example NADCON (HPGN).

If you import the .dc file to Trimble Geomatics Office, it uses this name to determine if the coordinate system used in the field matches the coordinate system defined for the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

NOTE: You can only create a Combined Datum Grid file from the Datum Grid file currently used, but you can export any combined datum grid.

You can:

  transfer an existing Combined Datum Grid (.cdg) file

  create a new Combined Datum Grid (.cdg) file to export to Trimble Survey Controller.

NOTE: You can also use the Grid Factory utility to combine Datum Grid files. To install the Grid Factory utility, use the Trimble Geomatics Office custom install option.


Datum Transformations and Trimble Survey Controllers

Trimble Geomatics Office supports the use of Datum Grids and Multiple Regression definitions for datum transformations.

A number of coordinate system definitions using these datum transformation methods are provided in the coordinate system database supplied with the software.

Versions of Trimble Survey Controller earlier than version 7.00 do not support either of these datum transformation types. Trimble Survey Controller 7.00 does support datum grids.

Trimble Geomatics Office cannot create:

  a Trimble Survey Controller 6.50 or earlier .dc file that references either of these datum transformation methods

  a Trimble Survey Controller 7.00.dc file that references a multiple regression datum transformation.

When points from a project that uses an unsupported method are exported to a Trimble Survey Controller .dc file, Trimble Geomatics Office outputs the datum record with the method set to None.

This means that in Trimble Survey Controller it is not possible to switch the point view between WGS-84 and grid positions. It also means that in fieldwork it is necessary to carry out a calibration if you have transferred grid positions before any further fieldwork can be carried out using these points.

If the grid positions have been transferred for calibration purposes, then this is not an issue. If WGS-84 positions are transferred you can start setting-out immediately. However, it is not possible to view grid coordinates unless an in-field calibration is carried out.


Export a Datum Grid dialog

Use this option to export a Datum Grid (*.cdg) file.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Datum grid to Survey Controller (*.cdg) option.

4.	Click OK.

When you select the Datum grid to Survey Controller (*.cdg) option, the Export a Datum Grid dialog appears.

Export existing Combined Datum Grid file to the Survey Controller

Select this option to export a Combined Datum Grid file to Trimble Survey Controller 7.00 or later. You can choose to export any of the Combined Datum Grid files that exist in the GeoData folder. If you select this option, the Select dialog appears.

Create a Combined Datum Grid for export to the Survey Controller

Select this option to create a new Combined Datum Grid file using the Datum Grid file used by the current project coordinate system. The Create a Combined Datum Grid file dialog appears.


Save As dialog (Datum Grid / Geoid Grid export)

Use this dialog to enter a name for the Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file or Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file.

Click OK to open the Data Transfer Save As dialog.


Create a Combined Datum Grid File dialog

Use this dialog to define the area for which you want a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file created. You can then send the Combined Datum Grid file to Trimble Survey Controller for use in the field.

To create a .cdg file, the coordinate system for the project must use a datum grid for its coordinate system. For information on using Datum Grid files, see the Coordinate System Manager Help.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Datum Grid to Survey Controller option.

4.	Click OK. The Export a Datum Grid dialog appears.

5.	Select the Create a Combined Datum Grid for export to the Survey Controller option.

6.	Click OK.

The yellow box on the globe defines the area covered by the latitude and longitude Datum Grid files.

Use the tools to drag a box over an area of the globe within the datum grid that you want the combined datum grid to cover

File Properties

The File Properties group shows the files being used to create the .cdg file.

Datum Grid

Displays the Datum Grid file being used to create the .cdg file.

Latitude Grid file

Displays the latitude grid file being used to create the .cdg file.

Longitude Grid file

Displays the longitude grid file being used to create the .cdg file.

Grid Properties

The Grid Properties group shows the properties of the grid that you are defining.

Latitude Limits

Displays the latitude limits of the current box.

Longitude Limits

Displays the longitude limits of the current box.

File Size

Displays the size of the .cdg file created. The File Size value changes as you change the shape of the box on the globe.

Survey Controller Name

Displays the internal name of the .cdg file that will be used in Trimble Survey Controller. The Survey Controller Name field defaults to the name of the original datum grid. If the .cdg file is used in a Trimble Survey Controller job, the internal name is referenced. During import of the Data Collector (*.dc) file, Trimble Geomatics Office uses the internal name to determine if the combined datum grid used in the .dc file matches the datum grid for the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

NOTE: If you edit this field, make sure that you only add a suffix or prefix to the name. This will ensure the name is unique and still allow the original datum grid to be recognized on import. You cannot continue until the Survey Controller Name field contains the name of the datum grid.

Globe Properties

The Globe Properties group shows the cursor position and provides options to configure the appearance of the globe.

Cursor Position

Displays the current latitude and longitude position of the mouse pointer within the globe.

Display state borders

Select this check box to display state borders in the globe.

Display national borders

Select this check box to display national borders in the globe

Display rivers

Select this check box to display rivers in the globe.


Geoid file to Survey Controller (*.ggf) option

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files store the separation between the WGS-84 ellipsoid and the geoid for the defined area. For information about geoid models, see the topic Geoid Models − Overview.

If a .ggf file is used as part of the coordinate system for a Trimble Geomatics Office project, approximate elevations for GPS points are calculated. To use a .ggf file in the field, use Trimble Geomatics Office to transfer the .ggf file to Trimble Survey Controller 6.00 or later.

To do this:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Geoid files to Survey Controller option.

The Export a Geoid Model dialog appears.

With this option, you can select to:

  Transfer any .ggf file in the Program files\Common files\Trimble\GeoData folder.

  Subgrid the .ggf file used in the current Trimble Geomatics Office project to extract a smaller Geoid Grid file. This process reduces the size of the .ggf file that you send to the TSC1 device running Trimble Survey Controller 6.00 or later.

For information about geoid model support for different Trimble Survey Controller versions, see the topic Geoid Models and Survey Controllers.

When you create a new .ggf file by subgridding, the name of the original geoid model is stored (for example, GEOID96 Conus). This internal name is also included in .dc files that use the subgridded .ggf file. During the import of a .dc file, Trimble Geomatics Office uses this name to determine if the geoid model used in the field matches the geoid model defined for the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

NOTE: You can also use the Grid Factory utility to sub-grid geoid model files. The Grid Factory utility is part of the Custom option at installation of Trimble Geomatics Office.


Geoid file to TDS Survey Pro CE (*.ggf) option

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files store the separation between the WGS-84 ellipsoid and the geoid for the defined area. For information about geoid models, see the topic Geoid Models − Overview.

If a .ggf file is used as part of the coordinate system for a Trimble Geomatics Office project, approximate elevations for GPS points are calculated. To use a .ggf file in the field, use Trimble Geomatics Office to transfer the .ggf file to TDS Survey Pro CE (v3.5 or later.)

To do this:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Geoid files to TDS Survey Pro CE option.

The Export a Geoid Model dialog appears.

With this option, you can select to:

  Transfer any .ggf file in the Program files\Common files\Trimble\GeoData folder.

  Subgrid the .ggf file used in the current Trimble Geomatics Office project to extract a smaller Geoid Grid file. This process reduces the size of the .ggf file that you send to the TSCE device running TDS Survey Pro CE (v3.5 or later).

NOTE: You can also use the Grid Factory utility to sub-grid geoid model files. The Grid Factory utility is part of the Custom option at installation of Trimble Geomatics Office.


Geoid Models and Trimble Survey Controller

Geoid models can be transferred to Trimble Survey Controller 6.00 or later. Trimble Survey Controller uses these Geoid models when switching the display of points between WGS-84 positions and grid (NEE) positions.

Generally, Geoid models are very large files. It is usually not possible to upload a complete Geoid model to Trimble Survey Controller 6.00 or later.

Use the File / Export / Geoid files to Survey Controller option to create a smaller Geoid model for your area. You can then transfer this smaller file to Trimble Survey Controller.

Earlier Trimble Survey Controller versions

The following points relate to earlier versions of Trimble Survey Controller.

Version 5.00

This is a Military version and is not available for general release.

Version 4.00

This version cannot work with Geoid models. If Trimble Geomatics Office was to write a full coordinate system definition followed by the point positions as either Grid or WGS-84 positions to a Trimble Survey Controller 4.00 .dc file, incorrect heights/elevations could be viewed in Trimble Survey Controller.

This would occur within Trimble Survey Controller when the data view was swapped, with incorrect WGS-84 heights being shown when grid positions have been transferred, and incorrect grid point elevations shown when WGS-84 positions have been transferred.

To avoid this happening, Trimble Geomatics Office outputs the datum record from the project definition, then warns you that it is not possible to convert between NEE and WGS-84 values due to a Geoid model, and alerts you that a blank transformation has been added. This is followed by another datum record with the method set to None. A later datum record always overrides any earlier datum record. This means that in Trimble Survey Controller 4.00 it is not possible to switch between the point view between WGS-84 and grid positions. This avoids the display of any erroneous values.

For fieldwork, this means if you upload grid positions, you must carry out a calibration. You must do this before undertaking any new fieldwork using these points. (If the grid positions have been transferred for calibration purposes this is not an issue.)

NOTE: If WGS-84 positions are transferred you can do setting-out immediately. However, it is not possible to view grid coordinates unless an in-field calibration is carried out.

Versions before version 4.00

Earlier Trimble Survey Controller versions can only handle the uploading of WGS-84 positions and because of this are not affected by the use of a Geoid model in a project.


Export a Geoid Model dialog

When you select the Geoid files to Survey Controller (*.ggf) option, or the Geoid files to TDS Survey Pro CE (*.ggf) option, the Export a Geoid Model dialog appears.

Export existing Geoid model to the Survey Controller

Select this option to export a Geoid Grid file to Trimble Survey Controller (version 6.00 or later), or to the TDS Survey Pro CE version 3.5 or later). You can export any of the Geoid Grid files that exist in the GeoData folder. If you select this option, the Select dialog appears.

Create a subgrid of a Geoid model for export to the Survey Controller

Select this option to subgrid the Geoid Grid file used in the current project coordinate system. The Create Geoid Grid File dialog appears.


Create Geoid Grid File dialog

Use this dialog to define the area for which you want to create a new Geoid Grid file that is based on the Geoid Grid file used in the project coordinate system.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Geoid files to Survey Controller (*.ggf) option, or the Geoid files to TDS Survey Pro CE (*.ggf) option.

4.	Click OK. The Export a Geoid Model dialog appears.

5.	Select the Create a subgrid of a Geoid model for export option.

6.	Click OK.

The yellow box on the globe defines the area covered by the geoid model.

Use the tools to drag a box over an area of the globe within the geoid model that you want the geoid grid to cover. The file size of the current box is shown.

File Properties

The File Properties group shows the properties of the Geoid Grid file that is used to create the .ggf file.

Geoid

Displays the geoid model that is used in the project coordinate system.

Geoid Grid file

Displays the Geoid Grid file name that is used in the geoid model.

Grid Properties

The Grid Properties group shows the properties of the grid that you are defining.

Latitude Limits

Displays the latitude limits of the current box.

Longitude Limits

Displays the longitude limits of the current box.

File Size

Displays the size of the Geoid Grid file that will be created. The File Size value changes as you change the shape of the box on the globe.

Name

Displays the internal name of the sub-grid file that will be used in Trimble Survey Controller or TDS Survey Pro CE software. The Survey Controller Name field defaults to the name of the original geoid model. If the .ggf file is used in a Trimble Survey Controller job, the internal name is referenced. During import of the Data Collector (*.dc) file, Trimble Geomatics Office uses the internal name to determine if the geoid model used in the .dc file matches the geoid model defined for the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

NOTE: If you edit this field, make sure that you only add a suffix or prefix to the name. This will ensure the name is unique and still allow the original geoid model to be recognized on import. You cannot continue until the Survey Controller Name field contains the name of the geoid model.

Globe Properties

The Globe Properties group shows the cursor position and provides options to configure the appearance of the globe.

Cursor Position

Displays the current latitude and longitude position of the mouse pointer within the globe.

Display state borders

Select this check box to display state borders in the globe.

Display national borders

Select this check box to display national borders in the globe

Display rivers

Select this check box to display rivers in the globe.

NOTE: You can also use the Grid Factory utility to sub-grid geoid model files. The Grid Factory utility is part of the Custom option at installation of Trimble Geomatics Office.


Feature and Attribute Library to Survey Controller (*.fcl) option

 Overview and More Information

To export a feature and attribute library to Trimble Survey Controller:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Feature and Attribute Library to Survey Controller (*.fcl) option.

The Select Feature and Attribute Library dialog appears.

Use this option to export a feature and attribute library to Trimble Survey Controller so that you can collect feature codes in the field. You can also use the feature and attribute library to collect attributes for feature codes with attributes defined.


Select Feature and Attribute Library dialog

Use this dialog to select the feature and attribute library that you want to transfer to the Survey Device.

Browse

Click Browse to select a library.

File

The File field default is the name of the last exported file.

Export Attributes

You can only do this if you are exporting to Trimble Survey Controller version 7.00 or later. Select this check box to export attribute definitions contained in the feature and attribute library.

Use this option if you want to collect attribute information in the field. If you clear this checkbox, any attributes defined in the library file are not exported.

This field is not available if you are exporting to the TDS Survey Pro CE or Trimble 3600/5600 TDS software.

OK

Click OK once you have chosen the appropriate feature and attribute library.

The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

NOTE: Control codes are also exported to Trimble Survey Controller.


Feature and Attribute Library Options dialog

Use this dialog to configure the Trimble Survey Controller version to which you are exporting.

To access it:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Feature and Attribute Library to Survey Controller option.

4.	Click Options.

Version

If you select a version of Trimble Survey Controller earlier than version 7.00, the export attributes check box in the Select Feature and Attribute Library dialog is unavailable. This is because these versions do not support attributes.


Data Dictionary to Survey Controller (*.ddf) option

 Overview and More Information

Use this option to export a data dictionary file to Trimble Survey Controller 7.00 or later. In Trimble Survey Controller, use the data dictionary file to collect attributes.

To export a data dictionary file to Trimble Survey Controller:

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Data Dictionary File to Survey Controller (*.ddf) option.

4.	Click OK.

The Select dialog.


Select dialog (Export Data Dictionary files to Trimble Survey Controller)

Use this dialog to select the Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file that you want to transfer to Trimble Survey Controller.

When you click Open, the Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.


Transferring data from Trimble Survey Controller - Overview

 How to ...

Overview

You can connect to a device running Trimble Survey Controller and transfer jobs to Trimble Geomatics Office. During import, the jobs are converted to Data Collector (*.dc) files. To do this, you must have a survey controller device set up in the Data Transfer utility.

NOTE: If any jobs have Trimble GPS raw data (*.dat) files associated with them, the .dat files are imported with the jobs. If you import a .dat file more than once to the same project, existing occupations in the project are not selected by default in the DAT Checkin dialog.

During the import of a .dc file, Trimble Geomatics Office uses the class assigned to each point in Trimble Survey Controller and the method used to determine the point’s position to assign a point quality to the point. A Recomputation uses the quality to determine the calculated position for the point.

NOTE: If you are transferring data to or from Trimble Survey Controller 7.60, use the version 7.50 .dc file format.

NOTE: If you intend to perform a network adjustment using data downloaded from a Trimble Survey Controller, make sure that you enter a pressure, temperature and, curvature and refraction correction in the Survey Controller Survey Style when performing the survey.


Note Records - Overview
Note Records − Overview

Notes in the project are user-entered notes from Trimble Survey Controller. No survey information notes, such as ‘Initialization gained’ and ‘Initialization lost’, are put in the project.

Note records are used in older versions of Trimble Survey Controller for the following purposes:

If you are using older versions of Trimble Survey Controller and want to use note records, choose the Select / By Types dialog to select all note records in the project.


Sokkia Data Recorder files (*.sdr)

Trimble Geomatics Office supports data from a Sokkia Data Recorder file (*.sdr) format.

Using Trimble Geomatics Office, you can:

  import a Sokkia Data Recorder file (*.sdr) to a Trimble Geomatics Office project.

  export a Trimble Geomatics Office project to a Sokkia Data Recorder file (*.sdr).

To import a Sokkia Data Recorder file (*.sdr):

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the Sokkia Data Recorder files (*.sdr) option. The Open dialog appears.

4.	Select the file from a folder that you want to import and click Open.

To export the current Trimble Geomatics Office project to a Sokkia Data Recorder file (*.sdr):

1.	Select File / Export. The Export dialog appears.

2.	Select the Survey tab.

3.	Select the SDR files (*.sdr) option.

4.	Click Options to open the Data Collector Options dialog to specify the internal name of the file and the Sokkia Data Recorder file version.

5.	Click OK to accept the settings and return to the Export dialog.

6.	Click OK.  The Save As dialog!JumpID(`DataXfer.hlp',`IDH_RDM_send_Save_As_dialog') appears.

7.	Select the folder that you want to export the file to, enter a filename, and click Save.


Transferring UK National Grid Files to Trimble Survey Controller

 How to ...

Use the Data Transfer utility to transfer UK National Grid projection grid files (*.pgf) directly to Trimble Survey Controller 7.5 or later.

You can transfer any of the existing .pgf files located in the Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\Geodata folder.

NOTE: This export option is only available when running the Data Transfer utility in standalone mode. This option is not available from Trimble Geomatics Office Export dialog.


Field Fill-in - Overview
Field Fill-in − Overview

More Information

 How to ...

Overview

Use field fill-in to enter values into fields. For example, you can fill in a layer field by clicking a point that is in the layer you want.

In fields that support field fill-in, the pointer in the graphics window shows:

NOTE: If the entity you select in the graphics window cannot provide the value required by the highlighted field, the field in the dialog remains unaffected.

Some fields fill in as a group of values. A single click fills in all grouped fields. For example, Northing, Easting and Elevation fields usually form a group. To fill in one field only, select it and hold Alt then click.

The focus of Trimble Geomatics Office moves to the next empty field after field fill-in.

Special field fill-in uses

Field fill-in has the following special uses:

  To enter the opposing azimuth value when completing an azimuth field, hold Shift and click. You cannot use field fill-in for the azimuth field when adding points by azimuth and distance.

  Holding Ctrl while using field fill-in avoids snapping to entities—only coordinates are chosen. This lets you select coordinates close to an entity.

  Use the View menu commands (for example, Zoom and Pan) to locate entities with the values you require for field fill-in. Once located, you must return focus to the field before copying the value.


Entering Angles

Digits to the right of the decimal point are interpreted according to the angle, unit, and format settings.

To set the format, use the Units and Formats tab in the Project Properties dialog.

For example:

Entering the digits 10.1234


Unit Conversions

To set the display units for fields that have units (such as, onscreen display, importing, exporting, and reporting), use the Units and Format tab in the Project Properties dialog.

Any numerical values entered into a field are interpreted as units of the value set for the system. For example, with the settings for elevation set to meters, any numerical values entered into an elevation field are interpreted as meter values.

You can override this setting by typing in the numeric value followed by an alphabetical entry.

The system lets you enter other values by specifying a unit. For example, if you enter an elevation as ‘25 sft’, Trimble Geomatics Office recognizes the unit (as US Survey Feet) and interprets the value appropriately.

The following table outlines the values that apply to this feature:


Dragging Entities

To move or rotate a selected entity with the mouse, use the edit handles.

For example, you can change the position of an annotation to better present the information it contains and improve the layout of the main graphics window.

Text/Annotations

To drag text or annotation entities, select the text, annotations, or both, move the mouse pointer over the text frame and locate either of the two handles. The mouse pointer changes to an appropriate icon when you place the pointer on the handle. The drag pointer lets you move the entity. The rotate pointer lets you rotate the entity.

For example:

Select the edit handle you require, and drag. The position that you release the mouse button is maintained.

NOTE: Unless the anchor type is in a right-hand position, the rotation handle will be in the top right position. Similarly, when a right-hand anchor type is selected, the rotation handle will be in the top left position.

Edit handles can be located in the following positions:

NOTE: The baseline indicates the lowest position of letters that do not include descenders. (That is, the space from bottom to baseline is the area where lower case descenders are positioned.)

Curves

To change the entry tangent or the exit tangent of curves, select a curve (or curves), move the mouse pointer over it and locate the rotate handles. There are two handles for each curve (an entry tangent handle and an exit tangent handle).

The pointer changes to [image] when you place the pointer on the edit handle.

The rotate pointer lets you rotate the selected curve or curves.

NOTE: With two joining curves, you can rotate both curves using one edit handle. Trimble Geomatics Office sets and automatically maintains a common tangent between joining curves.

To snap to existing entities, hold down Ctrl. By default, snapping to existing entities is off.

Points

Moving a point (or points) constitutes a simple translation of database points. To move a point or points; make a selection, move the pointer over the it, and then locate the edit handle. The pointer changes to [image] when you place the pointer on the handle. When the point is at the desired location, release the button. The Move Points and Text dialog appears. Use this dialog to edit and confirm the values.

Dragging points causes all selected points and text to move.


Points with no Names

Within the project, each entity is recorded with a unique handle. The handle is a unique integer value that Trimble Geomatics Office uses to identify the point. This means that even when a point has no name assigned, Trimble Geomatics Office recognizes the point by its internal handle.

When a point with no name assigned to it requires a name (for example, when selected as an end point in the Add point dialog) the actual database handle for the point appears. An equals (=) character prefixes the name. This is the software’s method of identifying which point you have selected.


Status Bar

The status bar is located at the bottom of the graphics window. It displays information about the current status of the software, including coordinate information.

When you move the mouse over the Timeline viewing area, the status bar shows time information. It may show Windows local time or GPS week/seconds, depending on your time option settings.

When Trimble Geomatics Office is performing certain tasks, such as processing baselines, the status bar becomes a progress indicator.

For more information on the status bar indicators, see Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide.


Status Bar - Window corner
Status Bar − Window Corner

The window corner lets you resize the main graphics window.


Progress Indicator

The status bar display changes to a progress indicator when Trimble Geomatics Office is performing certain tasks.

A brief description of the task appears, followed by a bar graph that charts the percentage of the task that has been completed.

When a task can be interrupted, the progress indicator shows the message Press ESC to cancel. When this appears, press Esc to end the task. When a task cannot be interrupted, this message does not appear.


Restore command

Use this command to return the active window to its original size and position.

To access it:

1.	Do one of the following:

  Click the Trimble Geomatics Office button [image] on the title bar.

  Right-click on the title bar.

  Click the System button [image] on the menu bar.

The System menu opens.

2.	Select Restore from the System menu.


Move command

Use this command to display a four-headed arrow so you can move the active window or dialog box with the arrow keys.

To access it:

1.	Do one of the following:

  Click the Trimble Geomatics Office button [image] on the title bar.

  Right-click on the title bar.

  Click the System button [image] on the menu bar.

The System menu opens.

2.	Select Move from the System menu.

NOTE: This command becomes unavailable if you maximize the window.


Size command

Use this command to display a four-headed arrow so you can size the active window with the arrow keys.

To access it:

1.	Do one of the following:

  On the title bar, click the Trimble Geomatics Office button [image].

  Right-click on the title bar.

  On the menu bar, click the System button [image].

The System menu opens.

2.	Select Size from the System menu.

After the pointer changes to the four-headed arrow:

1.	Press one of the direction keys (left, right, up, or down arrow key) to move the pointer to the border you want to move.

2.	Press a direction key to move the border.

3.	Press Enter when the window is the size you want.

NOTE: This command becomes unavailable if you maximize the window.


Minimize command

Use this command to reduce Trimble Geomatics Office frame window to an icon.

To access it:

1.	Do one of the following:

  On the title bar, click the Trimble Geomatics Office button [image].

  Right-click the title bar.

  On the menu bar, click the System button [image].

The System menu opens.

2.	Select Minimize from the System menu.


Maximize command

Use this command to enlarge the active window to fill the available space.

To access it:

1.	Do one of the following:

  On the title bar, click the Trimble Geomatics Office button [image].

  Right-click the title bar.

  On the title bar, click the System button [image].

The System menu opens.

2.	Select Maximize from the System menu.


Close command

Use this command to close the active window or dialog box.

To access it:

1.	Do one of the following:

  On the title bar, click the Trimble Geomatics Office button [image].

  Right-click the title bar.

  On the menu bar, click the System button [image].

The System menu opens.

2.	Select Close from the System menu.


Next command

Use this command to switch to the next open graphics window according to the order in which you opened them.

To access it:

1.	Do one of the following:

  On the title bar, click the Trimble Geomatics Office button [image].

  Right-click the title bar.

  On the menu bar, click the System button [image].

The System menu opens.

2.	Select Next from the System menu.


Previous command

Use this command to switch to the previous open frame window according to the order in which you opened them.

To access it:

1.	Do one of the following:

  On the title bar, click the Trimble Geomatics Office button [image].

  Right-click the title bar.

  On the menu bar, click the System button [image].

The System menu opens.

2.	Select Previous from the System menu.


Switch to command

Use this command to display a list of all open applications.

Use the Task List option to switch to or close an application on the list.

Dialog options

When you select the Switch to command, you open a dialog with the following options:

Option	Description
Task List	Selects the application you want to switch on or close.
Switch To	Makes the selected application active.
End Task	Closes the selected application.
Cancel	Closes the Task List option.
Cascade	Arranges open applications so that they overlap and you can see each title bar. This option does not affect applications that have been reduced to icons.
Tile	Arranges open applications into windows that do not overlap. This option does not affect applications that have been reduced to icons.
Arrange icons	Arranges the icons of all minimized applications across the bottom of the screen.


Dragging and Dropping Files to Trimble Geomatics Office

Overview and More Information	How to ...

Use the Windows Explorer and Microsoft Windows ‘drag and drop’ functionality to import data files from a folder on your computer to a Trimble Geomatics Office project.

You can import any file type that is available in the tabs of the Import dialog.

NOTE: You cannot drag and drop .job or .raw files from a PC-card to a Trimble Geomatics Office project. To transfer these files to a Trimble Geomatics Office project, use Trimble Geomatics Office to transfer these files. This software converts the files to the correct format.

Single formats

You can use either mouse button to drag and drop files.

It is always safer to use the right mouse button because when you release:

  the right mouse button after dragging, a list of available import formats appears. You can select the correct format from the list.

  the left mouse button after dragging, Trimble Geomatics Office uses the extension of the file and determines the file format you are importing. There is no guarantee that the correct file format will be selected by the software.

Multiple formats

You can use either mouse button to drag and drop multiple files.

  With the right mouse button, you can drag and drop multiple files of the same type. A list of available formats appears where you can select the correct format to import. If you drag and drop a selection of different file types (for example a .dc file and a .dat file), the individual import options do not appear in the list. Select Default from the list to use the import options for each file type. Trimble Geomatics Office uses the extension of the files and determines the file formats you are importing. However, there is no guarantee that the correct file format will be selected by the software.

  With the left mouse button, you can drag and drop multiple files of different types. Trimble Geomatics Office uses the extension of the files and determines the file formats you are importing. However, there is no guarantee that the correct file format will be selected by the software.

NOTE: If Trimble Geomatics Office does not recognize any of the formats imported by drag-and-drop, a shortcut menu appears giving the option to import the file as a Third party data recorder files or an NMEA file. If you choose the Default option, Trimble Geomatics Office will attempt to import it as an NMEA file.

Custom formats

Any custom import formats you create appear in the shortcut menu when you use the right mouse button to drag and drop a file to a Trimble Geomatics Office project.

TIP: If you do not have a project open, you can drag the Options.ini file of a project onto Trimble Geomatics Office to open the project.


Shortcut Menus

Shortcut menus are context-sensitive menus with commands that vary depending on where you position the pointer.

You can use shortcut menus for common tasks such as:

  accessing commonly used menu commands and dialogs

  toggling display settings

  inserting field codes

To access a shortcut menu:

1.	Place the pointer over the appropriate area.

2.	Click the right mouse button.


Hot Keys

Hot keys provide a quick way of using the keyboard to select an option from a menu or dialog. They appear as underlined letters in the option description.

Press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the underlined letter in the option that you want to select.


Coordinate Systems - Overview
Coordinate Systems − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Dialog	See also
Overview

Trimble Geomatics Office uses a coordinate system to transform measurements on a curved surface (the earth) to a flat surface (a map or plan). For example, a coordinate system is used to calculate grid coordinates for a point measured using GPS (GPS measurements are made on the WGS-84 ellipsoid).

A coordinate system can consist of the following elements:

  a datum transformation (between the WGS-84 ellipsoid and the local ellipsoid)

  a projection

  a geoid model

  a GPS site calibration (consisting of an horizontal adjustment and a vertical adjustment)

You must select a coordinate system for every project. Alternatively, if you do not have a system (or know which system to select) use the default projection.

NOTE: Make sure that the points in a project are within a reasonable distance from the projection origin according to the properties of the projection used.

Coordinate system database

The coordinate system database is stored as a file called Current.csd. It contains all of the coordinate system information. Trimble supplies an extensive set of published coordinate systems from around the world. To define or edit coordinate systems, zones, sites, datum transformations, ellipsoids, and geoid models, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.

Selecting a coordinate system

To select the coordinate system for a project, use one of the following:

  a coordinate system and zone from the coordinate system database

  a site from the coordinate system database

  an undefined default projection

  a defined default projection

  the coordinate system specified in a Survey Controller (*.dc) file during import

When you select a coordinate system in the Trimble Geomatics Office software, parameters are obtained from the coordinate system database.

Changing the coordinate system for a project

To change the coordinate system for a project, do one of the following:

  Specify a new coordinate system using the Project Properties dialog.

  Import into a Trimble Geomatics Office project a Survey Controller (*.dc) file with a different coordinate system. That is, if the project has a coordinate system and the .dc file has a different coordinate system, then during import the software detects the difference and asks you to select which one it is to use. This is a method of changing the coordinate system for a project if you choose to use the .dc file’s system.

When you change the coordinate system for a project, Trimble Geomatics Office computes the coordinates of all points. The coordinates are transformed from the old coordinate system to the new coordinate system. The general process for this is as follows:

1.	All coordinates are reduced to the ellipsoid. (The ellipsoid is usually the WGS-84 ellipsoid but when only the projection has changed, it is the local ellipsoid.)

2.	New coordinates are calculated using the new parameters.

These steps are illustrated in the following figure:

If a geoid model or vertical adjustment is part of the old coordinate system, it is used to calculate the WGS-84 heights for all points that are not derived from field observations. Similarly, if a geoid model or vertical adjustment is applied in the new coordinate system, it is used to calculate the new elevation of the grid coordinates from the WGS-84 heights.

How changing the coordinate system affects the RoadLink and DTMLink software

When you export points from the project to Trimble’s RoadLink or DTMLink utilities, the points that you export are not updated by subsequent changes to the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

Trimble recommends that you do not export points until you are confident that all changes to the Trimble Geomatics Office project are complete.

If you have already exported points from the Trimble Geomatics Office project into Roadlink or DTMLink, and you change the coordinate system or calibrate your data in the Trimble Geomatics Office project, the following warning appears:

Coordinates for points in DTMLink and RoadLink will not be updated when you change the coordinate system.

Do one of the following:

  Click OK to acknowledge that the coordinates of the point will not change in RoadLink or DTMLink.

  Click Cancel to cancel the change.

To ensure that the latest coordinates are used in the RoadLink and DTMLink utilities:

1.	Delete the unwanted points in RoadLink and/or DTMLink.

2.	Export the points again from the Trimble Geomatics Office project.


Ground Coordinate Systems

If you require coordinates to be at ground level instead of projection level, use a ground coordinate system. When you select a ground coordinate system, grid distances equal ground distances.

To use your ground coordinates in the Trimble Geomatics Office software, you need to:

1.	Define a coordinate system for the project.

2.	Enter coordinates for the project location. The project location is saved as local latitude and longitude.

3.	Enter the ground scale factor, or compute it using the coordinates for the project location.

Defining a coordinate system for the project

For information about how to select and change a coordinate system in a Trimble Geomatics Office project, see the Coordinate System - Overview topic.

Entering coordinates for the project location

To do this:

1.	Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2.	Select the Coordinate System tab.

3.	In the Local site settings group, click Change. The Local site setting dialog appears.

4.	In the Project location group, enter the appropriate coordinates. If the coordinate system is undefined, you will be asked to update the coordinate system.

The latitude and longitude need to be approximate, and the elevation needs to be a reasonable estimate of the elevation, so enter a mean elevation for the project.

Ground Scale Factor

To do this:

1.	In the Local site setting dialog, select the Use ground coordinates check box and do one of the following:

  Enter the Ground scale factor.

  Select the Compute scale factor from project location check box. The software computes the ground scale factor from the values in the Project location group.

  Determine how the ground coordinates are displayed. You can specify a northing and/or easting offset, or four- or five-digit coordinates. Use this option to easily differentiate between coordinates.

NOTE: The ground coordinate system assumes that you are working close to the project location and that there are no large variations in the project height.

The ground scale factor is calculated by:

1.	Determining the reference elevation (h)

2.	Calculating the elevation factor

Where:

R is the ellipsoidal radius

h is the reference elevation

a is the semimajor axis

e2 is the eccentricity squared

φ is the origin latitude of the projection

3. 	Computing the Ground Scale Factor at the centroid at the project location.

Where:

s is the grid scale factor at the project location.

In Trimble Survey Controller version 10, Ground Coordinate Systems are fully supported. The following notes deal with Ground Coordinate Systems in Trimble Survey Controller version 7.7 and earlier.

NOTES:

Importing projects with ground coordinates from Trimble Survey Controller versions 7.5 – 7.7

If you import a Trimble Survey Controller (version 7.5 or 7.7) job with a Transverse Mercator projection in which a ground scale factor has been defined (for example, a no projection/no datum job with a calibration) leave the Use ground coordinates check box in the Local site settings dialog clear. Otherwise the ground scale factor will be applied twice.

When you import a Trimble Survey Controller job with a ground scale factor defined into a Trimble Geomatics Office project that does not have a ground coordinate system defined, then a warning message tells you that the coordinate systems in the job and the project are different. Use the coordinate system that is in the Trimble Geomatics Office project and then select the Use ground coordinates check box in the Local site setting dialog.

Exporting projects with ground coordinates to Trimble Survey Controller versions 7.5 – 7.7

If you export a Trimble Geomatics Office project with a ground coordinate system defined to Trimble Survey Controller(version 7.70 or earlier), the coordinate system will be different when you reimport it into the Trimble Geomatics Office software. Make sure that you accept the Trimble Geomatics Office coordinate system.

Trimble Survey Controller (version 7.7 or earlier) does not support ground coordinates with the Lambert Conformal Conic 2 Parallel projection. The coordinate system is exported from Trimble Geomatics Office to Trimble Survey Controller with a Lambert Conformal Conic One Parallel projection.

Trimble Survey Controller (version 7.7 or earlier) does not support ground coordinates with the Albers Equal Area Conic projection. If you want to export a project with an Albers Equal Area Conic projection defined to the Trimble Survey Controller software, remove the ground coordinates or change projections.


Datum Transformations - Overview
Datum Transformations − Overview

More Information

 See also

Overview

A datum transformation is a set of parameters used to convert coordinates from one ellipsoid (for example, the WGS-84 ellipsoid) to coordinates on the local ellipsoid. (The local ellipsoid is the ellipsoid used by the projection.) A datum transformation is part of a coordinate system definition.

The following datum transformation methods are available:

  Molodensky (three-parameter)

  seven-parameter

  datum grid

  multiple regression

All methods are stored in the coordinate system database.

To define new datum transformations, edit the coordinate system database using the Coordinate System Manager utility.


Datum Transformation - Molodensky (Three-parameter)
Datum Transformation − Molodensky (Three-parameter)

 Overview and More Information

The Molodensky datum transformation defines a translation in the X, Y, and Z directions between the origin of the WGS-84 ellipsoid and the origin of the local ellipsoid (or vice versa).

The Molodensky datum transformation is sometimes called a three-parameter datum transformation.

Viewing details

If you have a Molodensky datum transformation defined as part of your project’s coordinate system, you can view the datum transformation values.

To do this, use the Coordinate System Details dialog.

These fields define a three-dimensional Cartesian (X, Y, Z) transformation from the origin of the WGS-84 ellipsoid to the origin of the local ellipsoid.

Datum transformations are stored in the coordinate system database (Current.csd). To edit them, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.


Datum Transformation - Seven-parameter
Datum Transformation − Seven-parameter

 Overview and More Information

The seven-parameter datum transformation defines a transformation from the WGS-84 ellipsoid to a local ellipsoid, or from a local ellipsoid to the WGS-84 ellipsoid.

Translation

These fields define a three-dimensional Cartesian (X, Y, Z) transformation from the origin of the WGS-84 ellipsoid to the origin of the local ellipsoid.

Rotation

The rotation X values define the angles of rotation about the X, Y, and Z axes respectively. These are the angles through which the Cartesian axes of the WGS-84 ellipsoid must be rotated to align them to the axes of the local ellipsoid.

The angle of rotation is positive for a counter-clockwise rotation about each axis, viewed from the positive end of the axis.

Scale Factor

All coordinates are multiplied by this value. It is defined in parts per million. If the scale factor is 6.02, all coordinates are multiplied by 1.00000602.

Viewing details

If you have a seven-parameter datum transformation defined as part of your project’s coordinate system, you can view the datum transformation values.

To do this, use the Coordinate System Details dialog − Datum Transformation tab.

Datum transformations are stored in the coordinate system database (Current.csd). To edit them, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.


Datum Transformation - Datum Grid
Datum Transformation − Datum Grid

 Overview and More Information

A Datum Grid datum transformation is a published file containing values for the datum transformation parameters for the area. The file is used to interpolate the datum transformation values at your location.

To use a datum grid as part of the project coordinate system definition, you must select a datum transformation that is defined by a latitude and longitude datum grid (*.dgf) file.

To view or create a datum transformation using Datum Grid files, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.

To use the datum grid file in the field, you need to transfer the datum grid file as a combined datum grid file to Trimble Survey Controller(version 7.00 or later).


Datum Transformation - Multiple Regression
Datum Transformation − Multiple Regression

 Overview and More Information

A Multiple Regression datum transformation defines a transformation between the WGS-84 ellipsoid and a local ellipsoid by fitting a polynomial equation to the predicted shifts in the local area. To add a Multiple Regression datum transformation, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.

Viewing details

If you have a Multiple Regression datum transformation defined as part of your project’s coordinate system, you can view the datum transformation values.

To do this, use the Coordinate System Details dialog − Datum Transformation tab.

Datum transformations are stored in the coordinate system database (Current.csd). To edit them, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.


Projections - Overview
Projections − Overview

More Information

 See also

Overview

A projection is a mathematical expression for the curved surface of an ellipsoid on a rectangular coordinate grid.

Use a projection to transform local geodetic coordinates into local grid coordinates.

Grid coordinates are plotted to create maps that represent the surface of the earth or parts of that surface.

Different countries and regions use different projections to achieve minimum distortion in the resultant grid coordinates. The Coordinate System Manager utility contains a large number of projections (for example, Transverse Mercator and Lambert One Parallel). For more information about specific projections, see the Coordinate System Manager Help.

NOTE: Make sure that the points in a project are within a reasonable distance from the projection origin according to the properties of the projection used.

To define projection parameters as part of a coordinate system definition, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.


Geoid Models - Overview
Geoid Models − Overview

More Information

 See also

Overview

A geoid is a surface of constant gravitational potential that approximates sea level.

Points observed with GPS have heights based on the WGS-84 ellipsoid. These heights are known as ellipsoid heights.

A geoid model lets us estimate elevations based on ellipsoid heights.

Geoid models are stored as Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files. A .ggf file contains geoidal separations for a number of positions on a grid. Using interpolation, these geoidal separations can be calculated for any point that falls within the grid.

When a geoid model is selected for each point observed using GPS, Trimble Geomatics Office uses the .ggf file to interpolate the geoidal separation (N) at that location. It then subtracts or adds the value from the observed ellipsoid height (h). This gives an approximate elevation above sea level (e) for the GPS point. The relationship between the geoid and local ellipsoid is shown in the following figure:

To define a new geoid model using an existing geoid grid file, use the Coordinate System Manager utility. All geoid models in the coordinate system database are available when you select a coordinate system for a project.

You can use Trimble Geomatics Office to export geoid grid files to Trimble Survey Controller or the TDS Survey Pro CE software (version 3.5 or later), and create subgrids of existing geoid grid files.

NOTE: If you do not use a geoid model or perform a GPS site calibration, the elevation of a point will be the same as the ellipsoid height and will not be a true elevation. If a geoid model is used in the project coordinate system, then it is used to convert between local ellipsoid heights and elevations for all point types, not just GPS.


Change Coordinate System - Select Coordinate System dialog
Change Coordinate System − Select Coordinate System dialog

Use this dialog to select an existing coordinate system, site, or to define a default projection for the project.

This dialog is the first step of a wizard that guides you through the selection settings.

Click Next to go forward and Back to go back through the selection dialogs.

Trimble Geomatics Office uses coordinate systems in the coordinate system database file (Current.csd). You can edit the parameters of a coordinate system using the Coordinate System Manager utility.

New System

To select a new coordinate system and zone, a local calibrated site that has been saved to the coordinate system database, or a default projection:

1.	Select New System.

2.	Click Next to go to the Select Coordinate System Type dialog.

3.	Use the wizard to select a coordinate system for the project.

Recently Used System

To select a coordinate system from a list of the ten most recently-selected coordinate systems:

1.	Click Recently Used System.

2.	Click the arrow buttons to scroll through the summaries of your systems.

3.	Select the coordinate system that you want to use for your project.

4.	Click Finish.

NOTE: If it is the first time you have used the coordinate system database, the Select Coordinate System Type dialog appears (and not the Change Coordinate System − Select Coordinate System dialog). This is because there are no recently used systems to select.

NOTE: Trimble Geomatics Office does not support all of the coordinate systems available in the Coordinate System Manager utility. If you select a coordinate system that is not supported, the following message appears:

Unknown Coordinate System Type


Select Coordinate System Type dialog

Use this dialog to select the type of coordinate system that you want to use.

Coordinate System and Zone

Select this option to choose a coordinate system from your coordinate system database.

Calibrated Site

Select this option to choose a calibrated site you have previously saved to the coordinate system database. Sites are stored coordinate system details for local sites that may include GPS calibration parameters.

Default Projection (Transverse Mercator)

Select this option to define a default projection.

Back

Click Back to return to the Select Coordinate System dialog.

NOTE: If this is the first time that you have used the coordinate system database, Back is not available because there are no recently used systems to select.

Next

Click Next. Depending on the option you selected, one of the following dialogs appears:

  Select Coordinate System Zone dialog.

  Select Calibrated Site dialog.

  Default Projection (Transverse Mercator) dialog.


Select Coordinate System Zone dialog

Use this dialog to select the coordinate system for the project from the list of available coordinate systems in the coordinate system database.

To view the properties of a coordinate system group or zone:

1.	Highlight the coordinate system group or zone.

2.	Right-click to access the shortcut menu and select Properties.

Coordinate System Group

This list contains the coordinate systems in the coordinate system database. A system contains one or more zones that have been defined for different areas.

Zone

This list contains the zones available for the selected coordinate system. A zone contains a datum transformation (including an ellipsoid and a set of transformation parameters to transform data from the WGS-84 ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid), geoid model, and projection parameters.

Back

Click Back to return to the Select Coordinate System Type dialog.

Next

Click Next. The Select Geoid Model dialog appears.


Select Calibrated Site dialog

Use this dialog to select a calibrated site from the list of available calibrated sites in the coordinate system database. Sites are stored in the coordinate system database. You create sites in the Coordinate System Manager utility, or in Trimble Geomatics Office(in the File / Project Properties / Coordinate System tab or Survey / GPS Site Calibration.)

To view the properties of a site:

1.	Highlight the site name.

2.	Right-click to access the shortcut menu and select Properties.

Site Details

This group shows the datum transformation and geoid model for the highlighted site.

Back

Click Back to return to the Select Coordinate System Type dialog.

Finish

Click Finish to complete the coordinate system definition and return to the Project Properties dialog. The site definition you selected is the coordinate system for the project.

NOTE: You cannot change the geoid model for a site in the Trimble Geomatics Office software. The geoid model specified for the site is used. To change the geoid model for a site, use the Coordinate System Manager utility. The utility lets you edit the site.


Default Projection (Transverse Mercator) dialog

Use this dialog to specify the default projection parameters. Trimble Geomatics Office can calculate the values or you can key them in.

Automatically calculate projection parameters

Select this check box to configure Trimble Geomatics Office to automatically use the first WGS-84 position entered in the project as the origin, and the first grid coordinate (northing and easting) to calculate the false northing and false easting.

NOTE: You must also specify the south azimuth system (if required) and positive coordinate direction. Trimble Geomatics Office does not automatically update these fields.

Clear this check box to enter projection parameters. The following fields in the dialog become available. Enter the values in these fields.

Central Latitude

Enter the latitude of the origin of the projection.

Central Longitude

Enter the longitude of the origin of the projection.

False Northing and False Easting

Enter the false easting and false northing for the default projection. The false easting and false northing are the grid coordinates of the origin of the default projection.

Scale factor

Enter the scale factor for the origin. It should be based on a known scale factor for the projection. This represents the ratio of distance on the projection to distance on the surface of the earth. All ground coordinates are scaled by this value to give grid distances.

South azimuth system

Select this field to specify a south azimuth system. A south azimuth system uses south as zero degrees azimuth. It is used in Hawaii and South Africa (other systems use north as zero degrees azimuth).

Positive Coordinate Direction

Select the options to specify the direction in which you want coordinate values to increase.

Back

Click Back to go back to the Select Coordinate System Type dialog.

Next

When you have finished, click Next. The Select Geoid Model dialog appears.


Select Geoid Model dialog

Use this dialog to select a geoid model for the project. If a geoid model is defined for the coordinate system in the coordinate system database, the geoid model is selected automatically.

A geoid model is a mathematical surface made up of geoid/ellipsoid separations. It is an estimation of the separation between the WGS-84 ellipsoid and mean sea level. A geoid model is used to derive approximate orthometric heights for GPS points.

No Geoid Model

Select this option to specify no geoid model for the coordinate system. If you do not specify a geoid model the elevation of a point is the height above the local ellipsoid.

If you select this option, Trimble recommends that you perform a GPS site calibration to achieve more accurate elevations for your GPS observations.

Predefined Geoid Model

To specify a geoid model for the project, select one from the list. The list of geoid models is from the coordinate system database (Current.csd).

Depending on the accuracy of the geoid model, the elevation derived from the WGS-84 height and geoid separation is given a quality. To specify the quality of the geoid model, use the Geoid model quality field in the Project Properties dialog / Recompute tab. The quality is used to determine the quality of the elevation field for points.

Back

Click Back to return to the Select Coordinate System Zone dialog or the Default Projection (Transverse Mercator) dialog.

Finish

Click Finish to complete the coordinate system definition and return to the Project Properties dialog.


Sites - Overview
Sites − Overview

A site is commonly used to store local GPS site calibration details based on an existing coordinate system and zone.

When you have performed a GPS site calibration you can save it and the coordinate system to the coordinate system database as a site so that you can easily use it again.

To save a site, do one of the following:

  Select Survey / GPS Site Calibration.

  Select File / Project Properties / Coordinate System tab.

Alternatively, you can create a new site using the Coordinate System Manager utility. When you use this utility, the saved sites appear in the Sites tab.

For more information, see the Coordinate System Manager Help.

NOTE: You cannot save adjustment transformation parameters as a site.


Using an Undefined Default Projection - Overview / Default Projection Definition dialog
Using an Undefined Default Projection − Overview / Default Projection Definition dialog

Overview

An undefined default projection is a default projection with no origin latitude and origin longitude values. When you first enter survey data to a project using an undefined default projection, the Default Projection Definition dialog appears. The Default Projection Definition dialog suggests using projection parameters suitable for the data that you are entering. Different fields in the dialog are available depending on the type of data being added to the project. The following scenarios are possible:

  Adding GPS Points to a Project (Undefined Default Projection) Containing Grid Points

  A File with a Defined Projection to a Project with an Undefined Default Projection

  Adding a WGS-84 Point to a Project (Undefined Default Projection)

  Using Scale Factor-only File (Undefined Default Projection)

  Adding Grid points to an empty project

To use an undefined default projection, use a project template that does not have a coordinate system defined (for example, the Trimble Metric and US Feet templates).


Adding Grid Points (Undefined Default Projection)

 Overview and More Information

The Default Projection Definition dialog appears when the first position added to the Trimble Geomatics Office project that has an undefined default projection (no coordinate system) is a grid position.

The Default Projection Definition dialog contains the following fields:

False Northing

The northing at the origin of the projection. The northing value is derived from the first point in the file. You can change this value.

False Easting

The easting at the origin of the projection. The easting value is derived from the first point in the file. You can change this value.

OK

Click OK to accept the default projection parameters. These values are used to define the coordinate system for the project. To view these parameters, select File / Project Properties / Coordinate System tab and click Details.

NOTE: Because your default projection is still not fully defined (the origin latitude and origin longitude are undefined), you can update the default projection by importing a file that contains one or more GPS points.


Adding GPS Points to a Project (Undefined Default Projection) Containing Grid Points

 Overview and More Information

The Default Projection Definition dialog appears when the Trimble Geomatics Office project has an undefined default projection (no origin latitude and origin longitude), contains one or more grid positions, and:

  a file containing at least one GPS point is imported;

or

  a WGS-84 point is keyed-in.

The Default Projection Definition dialog contains the following fields:

Northing

This field is null. Enter the best known northing coordinate for the GPS point being used to define the default projection.

Easting

This field is null. Enter the best known easting coordinate for the GPS point being used to define the default projection.

Latitude

The WGS-84 latitude of the first GPS point in the file is shown here. This field is unavailable.

Longitude

The WGS-84 longitude of the first GPS point in the file is shown here. This field is unavailable.

OK

Click OK to accept the grid coordinates for the GPS point. The WGS-84 latitude and WGS-84 longitude values for the origin are determined based on the false coordinates for the origin (already defined), and the values for the GPS point specified in the dialog. To view all the parameters, select File / Project Properties / Coordinate System tab and click Details.

NOTE: Once a GPS point has been added to the database, the default projection is fully defined, from now on when you import a file, or add a point to the Trimble Geomatics Office project, the default projection parameters will not be updated. However, you can update the projection origin by performing a GPS calibration (select Survey / GPS Site Calibration).


Adding a WGS-84 Point to a Project (Undefined Default Projection)

The Default Projection Definition dialog appears when the Trimble Geomatics Office project has an undefined default projection (no origin latitude and origin longitude) and

  a WGS-84 point is keyed in

  a WGS-84 point is imported.

The Default Projection Definition dialog contains the following fields:

Northing

This field defaults to 0. Enter the best known northing coordinate for the point being used to define the default projection. This value is used as the false northing for the projection.

Easting

This field defaults to 0. Enter the best known easting coordinate for the point being used to define the default projection. This value is used as the false easting for the projection.

Origin latitude

The WGS-84 latitude of the point is shown here. This field is the origin latitude for the projection. The field is unavailable.

Origin longitude

The WGS-84 longitude of the point is shown here. This field is the origin longitude for the projection. The field is unavailable.

OK

Click OK to accept the default projection parameters. These values are used to define the coordinate system for the project. To view these parameters select the Project Properties / Coordinate System tab and click Details.

NOTE: Once the default projection is fully defined, from now on when you import a .dc file, or add a point to the Trimble Geomatics Office project, the default projection parameters will not be updated. However, you can update the projection origin by performing a GPS calibration (select Survey / GPS Site Calibration).


Importing a File (with a Defined Projection) to a Project with an Undefined Default Projection

 Overview and More Information

The project coordinate system is automatically changed to the coordinate system specified in the file.

A message is written to the import report. It reads:

The imported and project coordinate systems were different. The imported definition has been used in preference to the undefined default (Transverse Mercator) projection.


Using the Coordinate System from a File

 Overview and More Information

When a file is imported with a defined coordinate system, the coordinate system definition recorded in the file is compared with the coordinate system definition for the project. If they are different, the Project Coordinate System dialog appears.

To use the coordinate system specified in the file, select the Convert to data collector definition option in the Project Coordinate System dialog.

If the coordinate system in the file is anything other than a Scale factor-only coordinate system, the project coordinate system definition is changed to the one specified in the file.

If the coordinate system in the file is Scale factor only, then what happens depends on the coordinate system defined for the project.

NOTE: If the project coordinate system is an undefined default projection and has no points, the coordinate system in the file is automatically used and the project coordinate system changed to the coordinate system in the file.


Total Station Files (Scale Factor-Only) with No Defined Coordinate System - Overview

Overview

A scale factor-only coordinate system can be used for surveys where all observations have been made with a conventional instrument (that is, no GPS observations).

The way that files containing only terrestrial observations are handled in Trimble Geomatics Office depends on the coordinate system defined in the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

Undefined default projection

If the Trimble Geomatics Office project has an undefined default projection (no origin latitude or origin longitude), the Default Projection dialog  appears. You can enter the false northing, easting, and scale values.

WARNING: If a point already exists in the database, the scale in the file is not used to update the default projection. Make sure that the scale in the imported file is the same as the scale in the project’s default projection.

Defined coordinate system

If the Trimble Geomatics Office project has a defined coordinate system (including the default projection where the origin latitude and longitude values have been defined), the project coordinate system is used, and the scale in the file is assumed to be the same as the scale in the project coordinate system.


Using Scale Factor Only Files (Undefined Default Projection)
Using Scale Factor-Only Files (Undefined Default Projection)

 Overview and More Information

The Default Projection Definition dialog appears when:

  the file you are importing contains a Scale factor-only projection

  the Trimble Geomatics Office project has an undefined default projection (that is, the origin latitude and origin longitude are undefined)

  there are no points in the database

The dialog contains the following fields:

False Northing

The northing value is derived from the first point in the file. You can change the values for the false origin.

False Easting

The easting value is derived from the first point in the file. You can change the values for the false origin.

Scale factor

The scale factor is derived from the last scale record in the file. You can change the values for the scale factor.

NOTE: When searching for the first point in the file, deleted points are not considered.

OK

Click OK to accept the default projection parameters. These values are used to define the coordinate system of the project. To view these parameters, select the File / Project Properties / Coordinate system tab and click Details.

NOTE: Because your default projection is still not fully defined (that is, the origin latitude and origin longitude are still undefined), the Default projection will be updated when a file that contains one or more GPS positions is imported.

The sea-level correction is turned off unless you have the Use ground coordinates check box selected in the Local site setting dialog.


Using Terrestrial Files with Project Coordinate System Defined

If a coordinate system is defined for the Trimble Geomatics Office project, and you import a file, a message appears stating that the existing coordinate system of the project is to be used. The points in the file are then imported.

Trimble Geomatics Office assumes that the project scale in the existing coordinate system, and the ground scale factor, is equivalent to the scale in the file.

If the Use ground coordinates option is not selected in the Local Site Settings dialog, you should make sure that the scales are identical before importing, and the scale factor in the file is equivalent to the combined scale factor.

If the Use ground coordinates check box is selected in the Local site settings dialog, make sure that the project elevation in Trimble Geomatics Office is correct for the data being imported.


Project Coordinate System dialog

This dialog appears when file is imported, and the coordinate system definition recorded in the file is different from the coordinate system definition for the project, and the project coordinate system is defined (that is, the project coordinate system is not an undefined default projection).

Coordinate System

To use the coordinate system in the file, select the Convert to data collector definition. Any existing data in the database is updated using the new coordinate system definition.

To retain the project coordinate system definition select the Keep the existing project definition option. The data in the data collector file is interpreted using the project coordinate system definition.

To view the details of either coordinate system, click the appropriate Details button.

Summary

Click Summary to view a comparison report of the two coordinate systems. Use the report to inspect the full parameters of the coordinate systems and find the differences between them.


Using the Project Coordinate System Dialog During File Import

When a file is imported, the coordinate system definition recorded in the file is compared with the coordinate system definition for the project. To use the coordinate system specified in the project, select the Keep the existing project definition option in the Project Coordinate System dialog.

Undefined Default projection

If the project coordinate system is an undefined Default projection, the Update default projection appears. The first point in the file is used to update the Default projection.

Other coordinate systems

The file is imported using the project coordinate system.

NOTE: If the coordinate system in the file is Scale factor-only then what happens depends on the coordinate system defined for the project.


Using a Plane Projection from Trimble Survey Office or Survey Controller

Trimble Geomatics Office will not update an undefined Plane projection.

If you do one of the following:

  export a Trimble Graphics File (*.tgf) from Trimble Survey Office where the Trimble Survey Office project has a Plane projection

  export a .dc from a Trimble Survey Office project with a Plane projection

and then you import the file to Trimble Geomatics Office, the Plane projection can still be used for the Trimble Geomatics Office project. (You must select the Use the .dc file coordinate system option when the Project Coordinate System dialog appears.)

The Plane Projection becomes the coordinate system selected for the project. Use the Project Properties dialog / Coordinate System tab to view the coordinate system details.


Performing a Network Adjustment with Data from a Scale Factor-Only File (Undefined Default Projection)

A terrestrial data-file (that is, one without GPS observations) may have a coordinate system that has no parameters defined other than a scale; that is, it does not have a datum transformation, horizontal adjustment, or vertical adjustment. Scale factor-only coordinate systems are created in Trimble Survey Controller (version 7.00 or later).

You need to define a coordinate system before you can perform a network adjustment. Therefore, if you have imported a Scale factor-only job from Trimble Survey Controller into an undefined default project coordinate system in Trimble Geomatics Office, the software asks you to update the undefined default projection.

In the dialog that appears, you will need to enter a latitude and longitude for the projection origin, and false northing and false easting coordinates.


Earth Rotation Parameters

If you process baselines that are longer than 100 km, the baseline processor uses earth rotation parameters to model pole tides.

These earth rotation parameters, in particular the pole coordinates, are available each week as (.erp files) from organizations such as the International GPS Service (IGS). If an .erp file for the time of the baseline is not available, predicted pole coordinates are used.

Use Windows Explorer to copy all of the relevant .erp files into the folder Data Files\Precise Ephemeris under the project folder. The baseline processor automatically looks there for these files when they are required. If it does not find them, it uses the predicted values.

NOTE: If you use an .erp file in more than one project, you must copy that file into each of the projects.


High Precision Geodetic Network

The HPGN (High Precision Geodetic Network) Datum Grid files for the US State Plane systems are provided as part of the Trimble Geomatics Office system installation. The Datum Grid files are stored in the GeoData folder under the Trimble Common Files folder (usually Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData). HPGN Datum Grid files are not available for all US states.

The grid file naming convention for the files is:

  The two character state identifier + hpgn + la (latitude) or lo (longitude), with the file extension .dgf. For example, the California HPGN grid files are Cahpgnla.dgf and Cahpgnlo.dgf.

As the coordinate system management for Trimble Geomatics Office is based on the WGS-84 ellipsoid, the HPGN datum grids (designed for bi-directional conversion between NAD83 (1986) and NAD83 (HPGN)) do not fit cleanly into this coordinate system model. For this reason, and to avoid confusion, the software does not provide predefined coordinate system definitions to reference these datum grids.

You can set up your own datum and coordinate system definitions using the appropriate HPGN Datum Grid files in the Coordinate System Manager utility.

To do this:

1.	Create a new datum definition referencing the appropriate HPGN Datum Grid files for the state.

2.	Create a new coordinate system definition using the appropriate State Plane projection parameters and referencing the newly created datum definition.

Use the new coordinate system definition in a Trimble Geomatics Office project to obtain NAD-83 (1986) latitude and longitude values from known HPGN projection coordinates; or latitude, longitude, and height values.

Do the following:

1.	Enter the HPGN values as grid coordinates; or local latitude, longitude, and height values as appropriate.

2.	Read the equivalent NAD-83 (1986) latitude and longitude values from the displayed WGS-84 fields.

Obtain HPGN values from known NAD-83 (1986) latitude, longitude, and height values as follows:

1.	Enter the known NAD-83 (1986) latitude, longitude, and height values as WGS-84 values.

2.	Read the equivalent HPGN grid coordinates; or latitude, longitude, and height values from the grid or local fields respectively.


New Brunswick (Canada) Coordinate System

The coordinate system database now has the Stereographic Double projection and the Average Terrestrial System 1977 (ATS77) ellipsoid. You must purchase the datum grid and geoid model from the Geodetic Survey of Canada before setting up the New Brunswick coordinate system.

The New Brunswick (Canada) coordinate system uses:

  Ellipsoid: ATS77

  Datum: NTv2 Datum Grid

  Geoid: HT101

  Projection: Stereographic Double:

– Central Latitude: 46° 30' 00" N

– Central Longitude: 66° 30' 00" W

– False Northing: 800 000 m

– False Easting: 300 000 m

– Scale Factor: 0.999912

To create the New Brunswick (Canada) coordinate system:

1.	Use the Grid Factory utility to create Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files from the HT101 geoid model purchased from Geodetic Survey of Canada.

2.	Use the Grid Factory utility to create Datum Grid (*lat.dgf, *lon.dgf) files from the NTv2 datum grid purchased from Geodetic Survey of Canada. For more information, refer to the Grid Factory utility Help.

3.	Use the Coordinate System Manager utility to add a new coordinate system. For more information, refer to the Add Coordinate System Command topic in the Coordinate System Manager utility Help.


Glossary

This glossary defines the terms specific to GPS and the Trimble Geomatics Office software. It does not cover Microsoft Windows or general computer terms.

Symbols

1-sigma

A

a posteriori errors

a priori errors

AASHTO

accuracy

adjusted values

adjustment

adjustment convergence

adjustment datum

adjustment styles

algebraic sign

algorithm

almanac

ambiguity

annotation

antenna height

antenna phase correction

Anti-Spoofing (AS)

APC

autonomous positioning

azimuth

B

base station

baseline

baseline processor

baud

bivariate

C

CAD styles

calibrated site

calibration coordinates

Cartesian coordinates

chi-square test

clock offset

closure

CMR

Coarse Acquisition (C/A) code

code

component

constellation

constrained

constraint

control point

conventional observation

coordinate system

correlated

covariance

covariance matrix

covariant values

current view

cycle slip

D

data logging

data message

datum

datum defect

datum transformation

de-correlate

deflection of the vertical

degrees of freedom

delta elevation

delta height

delta N, delta E, delta U

delta X, delta Y, delta Z

differential positioning

DOP

Doppler shift

double differencing

DTM

dual-frequency

E

Earth-Centered-Earth-Fixed (ECEF)

easting

elevation

elevation mask

ellipsoid

ellipsoid distance

ellipsoid height

entities

ephemeris

epoch

epoch interval

error

error ellipse

events

F

FastStatic

feature and attribute library (*.fcl) file

feature codes

field codes

final solution

fixed

fixed coordinates

fixed solution

flattening

flattening inverse

float solution

free adjustment

frequency distribution

fully constrained

G

GDOP

geodetic azimuth

geodetic datum

geographic coordinates

geoid

geoid model

geoid observation

geoid separation

geomatics

GPS

GPS baseline

GPS observations

GPS raw data

GPS time

grid

grid conversion

grid distance

ground distance

H

HDOP

height measurement rod

HI

histogram

horizontal control point

horizontal distance

horizontal position

I

independent

inner constraints

integer ambiguity

integer search

iono free

ionosphere

ionospheric modeling

iteration

J

K

kinematic surveying

known point initialization

L

L1

L2

label

layers

least squares

level of confidence

level of significance

local ellipsoid

local geodetic coordinates

local geodetic horizon

loop closure

M

major axis

mapping angle

mapping projection

mean sea level

minimally constrained

minor axis

modeling

multipath

N

narrow-lane

NAVDATA

network

network adjustment

network status

NMEA

normal

normal distribution curve

normal section azimuth

northing

O

observation residual

observations

occupation time

origin

orthometric height

OTF search method

outlier

over-determined

P

P-code

parameter

parity

PDOP

PDOP cutoff

PDOP mask

phase center

phase center models

plumbing

point positions

postprocess

PPM

precise ephemeris

precision

PRN

probability

probable value

project

project datum

projection

propagated error

Q

QC records

Quality Acceptance test

R

ratio

RDOP

Real-Time kinematic

rectangular coordinates

reduced column profile

redundancy

redundancy number

redundant baselines

redundant observation

reference factor

reference frame

reference station

reference variance

relative errors

residual

RINEX

RMS

rotated meridian

rotation

rover

RTCM

RTK

S

satellite geometry

scalar

scalar weighting

scale

SDMS

Selective Availability (S/A)

semimajor axis

semiminor axis

session

set-up error

side-shot

sigma

single-frequency

site calibration

skyplot

slope distance

SNR

solution types

standard error

standard error of unit weight

State Plane Coordinates

static (surveying)

static network

status

stochastic model

subnetwork

Super-trak

surveying observations

SV

symbols and line types

systematic errors

T

tau (value)

tau criterion

TDOP

terrestrial observation

TOW

tracking

transformation

transformation group

transformation parameters

tribrach

tropo correction

tropo model

tribrach centering errors

U

univariate

unknowns

URA

US National

US Survey Foot

UTC

V

variance

variance component estimation

variance group

variance-covariance matrix

VDOP

vector

vertical

vertical adjustment

vertical control point

W

wave

weight

weighting strategy

weights

WGS-84

wide-lane

X

X, Y, and Z

Y

Y-code

Z

zenith delay


1-sigma

One standard error from the mean.


a posteriori errors

The a priori errors multiplied by the standard error of unit weight (reference factor) resulting from a network adjustment.


a priori error

Errors estimated for observations prior to a network adjustment.


AASHTO

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials


accuracy

The closeness of a measurement to the actual (true) value of the quantity being measured.


adjusted values

A value derived from observed data (measurement) by applying a process of eliminating errors in that data in a network adjustment.


adjustment

The process of determining and applying corrections to observations for the purpose of reducing errors in a network adjustment.


adjustment convergence

When the network adjustment has met the defined residual tolerance or last ditch residual tolerance within a defined number of iterations.


adjustment datum

The datum used in the current network adjustment iteration. The Trimble Geomatics Office software lets you select either the project datum or WGS-84.


adjustment styles

Trimble default and user-defined settings for a network adjustment.


algebraic sign

The sign (+ or −) associated with a value which designates it as a positive or negative number.


algorithm

A set of rules for solving a problem in a finite number of steps.


almanac

Data, transmitted by a GPS satellite, that includes orbit information on all the satellites, clock correction, and atmospheric delay parameters.

The almanac facilitates rapid SV acquisition. The orbit information is a subset of the ephemeris data with reduced precision.


ambiguity

The unknown integer number of cycles of the reconstructed carrier phase contained in an unbroken set of measurements. The receiver counts the radio waves (from the satellite as they pass the antenna) to a high degree of accuracy. However, it has no information on the number of waves to the satellite at the time it started counting. This unknown number of wavelengths between the satellite and the antenna, then, is the ambiguity. Also known as integer ambiguity or integer bias.


annotation

A piece of text that describes another database record. To select and edit annotations, use the Properties window.

An annotation is live—fields are updated whenever the parent entity changes.


antenna height

The height of a GPS antenna phase center above the point being observed.

The uncorrected antenna height is measured from the observed point to a designated point on the antenna, then corrected to the true vertical manually or automatically in the software.


antenna phase correction

The phase center for a GPS antenna is neither a physical nor a stable point. The phase center for a GPS antenna changes with respect to the changing direction of the signal from a satellite. Most of the phase center variation depends on satellite elevation. Modeling this variation in antenna phase center location allows a variety of antenna types to be used in a single survey. Antenna phase center corrections are not as critical when two of the same antenna are used since common errors cancel out.


Anti-Spoofing (AS)

A feature that allows the U.S. Department of Defense to transmit an encrypted Y-code in place of P-code. Y-code is intended to be useful only to authorized (primarily military) users.


APC

Antenna Phase Center

The electronic center of the antenna. It often does not correspond to the physical center of the antenna. The radio signal is measured at the APC.

In the Properties window the height of a point may be the elevation of the APC. If the height is specified as APC, it is the height of the APC—not the ground height.


autonomous positioning

A mode of operation in which a GPS receiver computes position fixes in real time from satellite data alone, without reference to data supplied by a base station. Autonomous positioning is the least precise positioning procedure a GPS receiver can perform, yielding position fixes that are precise to ±100 meters horizontal RMS when Selective Availability is in effect, and to ±10--20 meters when it is not. Also known as absolute positioning and point positioning.


azimuth

A surveying observation used to measure the angle formed by a horizontal baseline and geodetic north. When applied to GPS observations, it refers to a normal section azimuth.


base station

An antenna and receiver set up on a known location. It is used for real-time kinematic (RTK) or differential surveys. Data can be recorded at the base station for later postprocessing. A Trimble reference station, such as the Trimble Reference Station (TRS) software, or the Trimble Universal Reference Station software (URS) and a receiver in base station mode are examples of base stations.

In GPS surveying practice, you observe and compute baselines (that is, the position of one receiver relative to another). The base station acts as the position from which all other unknown positions are derived.


baseline

The position of a point relative to another point. In GPS surveying, this is the position of one receiver relative to another. When the data from these two receivers is combined, the result is a baseline comprising a three dimensional vector between the two stations.


baseline processor

A computer program that computes baseline solutions from satellite measurements. It may run as postprocessor on a personal computer, or as a real-time processor in a receiver. WAVE (Weighted Ambiguity Vector Estimator) is Trimble’s baseline processor.


baud

A unit of data transfer speed (from one binary digital device to another) used when describing serial communications.


bivariate

Mathematical function describing the behavior of two-dimensional random errors in error ellipses for:

  northing/easting

  latitude/longitude

  X/Y


CAD styles

CAD styles define the appearance of points, lines, arcs, curves, text, and annotations in a project. A style, for example, can be made up of a symbol, line type, color, or font. Style definitions are stored in a project.

To have styles available for a number of projects, define the styles in a template project.


calibrated site

A site definition uses an existing coordinate system definition plus correction transformation. This makes the best fit for GPS data in a specific area (or site).

The extra correction transformations are required because a coordinate system is designed to apply over a very large area. It does not allow for variations in the local coordinates.

It is necessary to have new work fit with the existing control, so the extra correction transformations will correct for these local variations. These extra corrections are only valid over a limited area. This explains the ‘site’ terminology.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software can compute the extra transformations required to fit to local control and save these definitions in the coordinate system database.


calibration coordinates

WGS-84 coordinates (latitude/longitude/ellipsoid height) generated from a minimally constrained network adjustment of your GPS observation, then saved for later use in a GPS site calibration.

The calibration coordinates are used as the GPS observed coordinates that are associated with the grid coordinates of a particular point when performing a calibration.


Cartesian coordinates

See Earth-Centered-Earth-Fixed Cartesian coordinates.


chi-square test

An overall statistical test of the network adjustment. It is a test of the sum of the weight squares of the residuals, the number of degrees of freedom and a critical probability of 95 percent or greater.

The purpose of this test is to reject or to accept the hypothesis that the predicted errors have been accurately estimated.


clock offset

The constant difference in the time reading between two clocks. In GPS, usually refers to offset between SV clocks and the clock in the user’s receiver.


closure

Agreement between measured and known parts of a network.


CMR

Compact Measurement Record

A satellite measurement message that is broadcast by the base receiver and used by real-time kinematic (RTK) surveys to calculate an accurate baseline vector from the base to the rover.


Coarse Acquisition (C/A) code

A pseudorandom noise (PRN) code modulated onto an L1 signal. This code helps the receiver compute the distance from the satellite.


code

The GPS code is a pseudorandom noise (PRN) code that is modulated onto the GPS carrier signals.

The C/A code is unclassified and is available for use by civilian applications.

The P code also is known and unclassified, but may be encrypted for national defense purposes.

Code measurements are the basis of GPS navigation and positioning. Code also is used in conjunction with carrier phase measurements to obtain more accurate survey quality baseline solutions.


component

One of the three surveying observations used to define a three-dimensional baseline between two control points. The same baseline can be defined by azimuth, delta height, and distance (in ellipsoid coordinates); by delta X, delta Y, and delta Z in (Earth Centered Cartesian coordinates); and by delta north, delta east, and delta up (in local plane coordinates).


constellation

A specific set of satellites used in calculating positions: three satellites for 2D fixes, four satellites for 3D fixes.

All satellites visible to a GPS receiver at one time. The optimum constellation is the constellation with the lowest PDOP. See also PDOP.


constrained

To hold (fix) a quantity (observation and coordinate) as true in a network adjustment.


constraint

External limitations imposed upon the adjustable quantities (observations and coordinates) in a network adjustment.


control point

A monumented point to which coordinates have been, or are in the process of being, assigned by the use of surveying observations.


conventional observation

An observation in the field obtained using a total station or theodolite.


coordinate system

A set of transformations that allow GPS positions (in the WGS-84 ellipsoid) to be transformed to projection coordinates with elevations above the Geoid.

It consists of a datum transformation, a geoid model allocation, and a coordinate projection definition.

The datum transformation is defined in the coordinate system database. It includes the definition of the datum on which the coordinate projection is based.

An existing geoid model can be assigned to the coordinate system, but it is also possible to specify a constant geoidal separation rather than using a geoid model. Use the Trimble Coordinate System Manager™ utility to define geoid models in the coordinate system database.

You can allocate some coordinate projection types to a coordinate system (for example, Transverse Mercator or Lambert One Parallel). Different countries and regions use different projection types to achieve optimum results (that is, minimum distortion) in the projection coordinates. The coordinate projection methods project latitude and longitude values on the appropriate datum to Cartesian coordinate values. The elevations for the projection coordinates are achieved using the geoid model assigned to the coordinate system.

The Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility lets you view, edit, and add to the coordinate system definitions supplied with the Trimble Geomatics Office software.


correlated

Said of two or more observations (or derived quantities) which have at least one common source of error.


covariance

A measure of the correlation of errors between two observations or derived quantities. Also refers to an off-diagonal term (that is, not a variance) in a variance-covariance matrix.


covariance matrix

A matrix that defines the variance and covariance of an observation. The elements of the diagonal are the variance and all elements on either side of the diagonal are the covariance.


covariant values

As used by the Trimble Geomatics Office software, this is the publication of the propagated (computed) a posteriori errors in azimuth, distance, and height between pairs of control points resulting from a network adjustment. The term covariant indicates that this computation involves the use of covariant terms in the variance-covariance matrix of adjusted control points.


current view

You can open more than one view onto the database using the Window / New Window command. Each of these views can have different view settings. The current view is the view that has focus and this is identified by the use of the active title bar.


cycle slip

An interruption in a receiver’s lock-on to a satellite’s radio signals. A cycle slip requires the re-estimation of integer ambiguity terms during baseline processing.


data logging

The process of recording satellite data in a file stored in the receiver, a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software, or on a PC card.


data message

A message, included in the GPS signal, that reports on the location and health of the satellites as well as any clock correction. It includes information about the health of other satellites as well as their approximate position.


datum

A mathematical model of the earth designed to fit part or all of the geoid. It is defined by the relationship between an ellipsoid and a point on the topographic surface established as the origin of the datum. It is usually referred to as a geodetic datum.

The size and shape of an ellipsoid, and the location of the center of the ellipsoid with respect to the center of the earth, usually define world geodetic datums.


datum defect

Unknown discrepancies between two sets of coordinates which can only be rectified by the use of a datum transformation as part of a network adjustment.


datum transformation

Defines the transformation that is used to transform the coordinates of a point defined in one datum to coordinates in a different datum.

There are a number of different datum transformation methods supported by the Trimble Geomatics Office software:

  Seven-Parameter

  Three-Parameter (also referred to as Molodensky)

  Datum Grid

  Multiple Regression

Datum transformations usually convert data collected in the WGS-84 datum, by GPS methods, onto datum’s used for surveying and mapping purposes in individual regions and countries.


de-correlate

To remove the covariance’s between observations. This may be done through elaborate orthogonal transformations, or by computing separate horizontal and vertical adjustments.


deflection of the vertical

The angular difference, between the upward direction of the plumb line (vertical) and the perpendicular (normal) to the ellipsoid.


degrees of freedom

A measure of the redundancy in a network.


delta elevation

The difference in elevation between two points.


delta height

The vertical component in the Trimble Geomatics Office software’s expression of GPS baselines. It is the difference in height or change of height.


delta N, delta E, delta U

Coordinate differences expressed in a Local Geodetic Horizon coordinate system.


delta X, delta Y, delta Z

Coordinate differences expressed in a Cartesian coordinate system.


differential positioning

The precise measurement of the relative position of two receivers that are tracking the same satellites simultaneously.


DOP

Dilution of Precision

An indicator of the quality of a GPS position. It takes account of each satellite’s location relative to the other satellites in the constellation, and their geometry in relation to the GPS receiver. A low DOP value indicates a higher probability of accuracy. Standard DOPs for GPS applications are:

  PDOP Position (three coordinates)

  HDOP Horizontal (two horizontal coordinates)

  RDOP

  VDOP Vertical (height only)

  TDOP Time (clock offset only)


Doppler shift

The apparent change in frequency of a signal caused by the relative motion of satellites and the receiver.


double differencing

An arithmetic method of differencing carrier phases simultaneously measured by two receivers tracking the same satellites. This method removes the satellite and receiver clock errors.


DTM

Digital Terrain Model

An electronic representation of terrain in three-dimensions.


dual-frequency

A type of receiver that uses both L1 and L2 signals from GPS satellites. A dual-frequency receiver can compute more precise position fixes over longer distances and under more adverse conditions because it compensates for ionospheric delays.


Earth-Centered-Earth-Fixed (ECEF)

A Cartesian coordinate system used by the WGS-84 reference frame. In this coordinate system, the center of the system is at the earth’s center of mass. The z axis is coincident with the mean rotational axis of the earth and the x axis passes through 0° N and 0° E. The y axis is perpendicular to the plane of the x and z axes.


easting

Eastward reading of grid values. Left to right on a grid (X-axis).


elevation

The height above mean sea level or the vertical distance above the geoid. Elevation is sometimes referred to as the orthometric height.


elevation mask

An angle which is normally set to 13 degrees. If you track satellites from above this angle, you avoid interference caused by buildings, trees, and multipath errors.

Trimble recommends that you do not track satellites from below 13 degrees.


ellipsoid

A mathematical model of the earth formed by rotating an ellipse around its minor axis. For ellipsoids that model the earth, the minor axis is the polar axis and the major axis is the equatorial axis.

You define an ellipsoid by specifying the lengths of both axes, or by specifying the length of the major axis and the flattening.

Two quantities define an ellipsoid; these are usually given as

the length of the semimajor axis, a, and

the flattening, [image], where b is the length of the semi-minor axis.


ellipsoid distance

As used in the Trimble Geomatics Office software, it is the length of the normal section between two points.

CAUTION: Ellipsoid distance is not the same as the geodesic distance.


ellipsoid height

The distance, measured along the normal, from the surface of the ellipsoid to a point.


entities

Primary graphical elements that you can view and select from the graphics window.

Entities available in the Trimble Geomatics Office software are points, lines, arcs, curves, text, and annotations.


ephemeris

A set of data that describes the position of a celestial object as a function of time. Each GPS satellite periodically transmits a broadcast ephemeris describing its predicted positions through the near future, uploaded by the Control Segment. Postprocessing programs can also use a precise ephemeris that describes the exact positions of a satellite in the past.


epoch

The measurement interval of a GPS receiver. The epoch varies according to the survey type:

  for real-time surveys it is set at one second

  for postprocessed surveys it can be set to a rate of between one second and one minute


epoch interval

The measurement interval used by a GPS receiver; also called a cycle.


error

The difference between the measured value of a quantity and its true value. Surveying errors are generally divided into three categories: blunders, systematic errors, and random errors. Least squares analysis is used to detect and eliminate blunders and systematic errors, and least squares adjustment is used to measure and properly distribute random error.


error ellipse

A coordinate error ellipse is a graphical representation of the magnitude and direction of the error of network adjusted points.


events

A record of the occurrence of an event, such as the closing of a photogrammetric camera's shutter. A GPS receiver can log an event mark containing the time of the event and an alphanumeric comment entered through the keypad to describe the event. An event can be triggered through the keypad or by an electrical signal input on one of the receiver's ports.


FastStatic

A method of GPS surveying using occupations of up to 20 minutes to collect GPS raw data, then postprocessing to achieve sub-centimeter precisions. Typically the occupation times vary based on the number of satellites (SVs) in view:

  4 SVs take 20 minutes*

  5 SVs take 15 minutes*

  6 or more SVs take 8 minutes*

(*collected at a 15 second epoch rate)


Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file

A text file that contains the definitions of feature codes, attributes, CAD styles, and control codes.


feature codes

Descriptive words or abbreviations that describe the features you see.


field codes

Special instructions that tell the Trimble Geomatics Office software to insert information into reports, files, and annotations.

Field codes are used to handle the transfer of database data in ASCII import/export/report operations.


final solution

When post-processing is used to generate GPS vectors, particularly for static solutions, the baseline processor steps through different solutions using a variety of processing techniques and combinations of GPS measurements. In general each subsequent solution is better than the previous one. The final solution provides the best estimate of the GPS vector between two points.


fixed

See constrained.


fixed coordinates

Point coordinates that do not move when performing a network adjustment.


fixed solution

A solution obtained when the baseline processor is able to resolve the integer ambiguity search with enough confidence to select one set of integers over another. It is called a fixed solution because the ambiguities are all fixed from their estimated float values to their proper integer values.


flattening

A mathematical expression of the relative lengths of the major and minor axes of an ellipsoid.


flattening inverse

An expression of the flattening that is easier to read and edit.


float solution

A solution obtained when the baseline processor is unable to resolve the integer ambiguity search with enough confidence to select one set of integers over another. It is called a float solution because the ambiguity includes a fractional part and is non-integer.


free adjustment

Performing a network adjustment in which no point (coordinate) is constrained. The network adjustment uses inner constraints.


frequency distribution

The size and spread of residuals in a data set. Graphically shown in histograms.


fully constrained

A network adjustment in which all points in the network which are part of a larger control network are held fixed to their published coordinate values. Used to merge smaller with larger control networks and old networks to new networks.


GDOP

Geometric Dilution of Precision

The relationship between errors in user position and time, and errors in satellite range. See also DOP.


geodetic azimuth

The angle between the geodetic meridian and the tangent to the geodesic line of the observer, measured in the plane perpendicular to the ellipsoid normal of the observer. Clockwise from north.


geodetic datum

An ellipsoid that best approximates the geoid.

The size and shape of an ellipsoid and the location of the center of the ellipsoid with respect to the center of the earth define geodetic datums.

Various datums have been established to suit particular regions. For example, European maps are often based upon the European datum of 1950 (ED-50). Maps of the United States are often based upon the North American Datum of 1927 or 1983 (NAD-27, NAD-83). All GPS coordinates are based upon the WGS-84 datum surface.


geographic (geodetic) coordinates

Latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height.


geoid

The surface of gravitational equipotential that closely approximates mean sea level. It is not a uniform mathematical shape, but is an irregular figure with an overall shape similar to an ellipsoid.

Generally, the elevations of points are measured with reference to the geoid. However, points fixed by GPS methods have heights established in the WGS-84 datum (a mathematical figure).

The relationship between the WGS-84 datum and the geoid must be determined by observation, as there is no single mathematical definition that can describe the relationship. You must use conventional survey methods to observe the elevation above the geoid, then compare the results with the height above the WGS-84 ellipsoid at the same point.

By gathering a large number of observations of the separation between the geoid and the WGS-84 datum (geoidal separation), grid files of the separation values can be established. This allows the interpolation of the geoidal separation at intermediate positions. Files containing these grids of geoidal separations are referred to as geoid models. Given a WGS-84 position that falls within the extents of a geoid model, the model can return the interpolated geoidal separation at this position.


geoid model

A mathematical representation of the geoid for a specific area, or for the whole earth. The software uses the geoid model to generate geoid separations for your points in the network.


geoid observation

A geoid separation, with its associated error, extracted from a geoid model. The Trimble Geomatics Office software network adjustment treats them as in the same way as any observation with an associated error. As the adjustment progresses the observations will become adjusted geoid observations.


geoid separation

The distance between the ellipsoid and geoid at a given point.


geomatics

The design, collection, storage, analysis, display, and retrieval of spatial information. The collection of spatial information can be from a variety of sources, including GPS and terrestrial methods. Geomatics integrates traditional surveying with new technology-driven approaches, making geomatics useful for a vast number of applications.


GPS

Global Positioning System

GPS is based on a constellation of twenty-four (24) satellites orbiting the earth at a very high altitude.


GPS baseline

A three-dimensional measurement between a pair of stations for which simultaneous GPS data has been collected and processed with differencing techniques.

Represented as delta X, delta Y, and delta Z; or azimuth, distance, and delta height.


GPS observations

A GPS baseline with it’s associated errors. As the adjustment progresses the observations become adjusted GPS observations.


GPS raw data

The data collected by a GPS receiver for the purpose of processing at a later time. It can be in the form of a .dat file (Trimble raw data file format) or a RINEX file.


GPS time

A measure of time used by the NAVSTAR GPS system. GPS time is based on Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) but does not add periodic ‘leap seconds’ to correct for changes in the earth’s period of rotation.


grid

A two-dimensional horizontal rectangular coordinate system, such as a map projection.


grid conversion

The conversion between geographic and map projection coordinates.


grid distance

The distance between two points that is expressed in mapping projection coordinates.


ground distance

The distance (horizontal distance with curvature applied) between two ground points.


HDOP

Horizontal Dilution of Precision


height measurement rod

A measuring tool supplied with an external GPS antenna and used for measuring the height of the antenna above a point.


HI

Height of instrument.

Synonymous with antenna heights for GPS.


histogram

A graphical display of the size and distribution of residuals in a network adjustment.


horizontal control point

A point with horizontal coordinate accuracy only. The elevation or ellipsoid height is of a lower order of accuracy or is unknown.


horizontal distance

The distance between two points, computed horizontally from the elevation of either point.


horizontal position

A point with horizontal coordinates only.


independent

Subnetworks, observations, and control points not connected by geometry or errors. This term is the opposite of correlated.


inner constraint

A network adjustment computed without fixing any point coordinates. The Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the centroid of the network as an inner constraint.


integer ambiguity

The whole number of cycles in a carrier phase pseudorange between the GPS satellite and the GPS receiver.


integer search

GPS baseline processing, whether real-time or post-processed, requires fixed integer solutions for the best possible results. The software which processes the GPS measurements used to derive a baseline does an integer search to obtain a fixed integer solution. The search involves trying various combinations of integer values and selecting the best results.


iono free

ionospheric free solution (IonoFree)

A solution that uses a combination of GPS measurements to model and remove the effects of the ionosphere on the GPS signals. This solution is often used for high-order control surveying, particularly when observing long baselines.


ionosphere

The band of charged particles 80 to 120 miles above the earth’s surface. It affects the accuracy of GPS measurements if you measure long baselines using single-frequency receivers.


ionospheric modeling

The time delay caused by the ionosphere varies with respect to the frequency of the GPS signals and affects both the L1 and L2 signals differently. When dual frequency receivers are used the carrier phase observations for both frequencies can be used to model and eliminate most of the ionospheric effects. When dual frequency measurements are not available an ionospheric model broadcast by the GPS satellites can be used to reduce ionospheric affects. The use of the broadcast model, however, is not as effective as the use of dual frequency measurements.


iteration

A complete set of adjustment computations that includes the formation of the observation equations, normal equations, coordinate adjustments, and computation of residuals.


kinematic surveying

A method of GPS surveying using short Stop and Go occupations, while maintaining lock on at least 4 satellites. Can be done in real-time or postprocessed to centimeter precisions.


known point initialization

Known point is used in conjunction with kinematic initialization. If two known points are available the baseline processor can calculate an inverse between the two points and derive an initialization vector. This initialization vector, with known baseline components, is used to help solve for the integer ambiguity. If the processor is able to successfully resolve this ambiguity a fixed integer solution is possible, yielding the best solutions for kinematic surveys.


L1

The primary L-band carrier used by GPS satellites to transmit satellite data. Its frequency is 1575.42 MHz. It is modulated by C/A code, P code, and a Navigation Message.


L2

The secondary L-band carrier used by GPS satellites to transmit satellite data. Its frequency is 1227.6 MHz. It is modulated by P code and a Navigation Message.


label

Information that you can assign to points in the project. They appear beside points helping you locate them easily. Labels are visible in Survey view and Plan view.

You can use the Trimble Geomatics Office software’s predefined label definition to label points (for example, with their names, feature codes, and elevations).

Labels use the same font and size as the ToolTips in your Microsoft Windows Appearance settings.

To assign labels to points in the database, use View / Point Labels.


layers

A place to store data that has been grouped together.

Organizing data into layers in this way makes it easier to manage. You can have any number of layers in a project. To assign or reassign an entity to a layer, use the Properties window. A layer name can have up to 100 alphanumeric characters.


least squares

A mathematical method for the adjustment of observations, based on the theory of probability. In this adjustment method, the sum of the squares of all the weighted residuals is minimized.


level of confidence

A measure of the confidence in our results, expressed in a percentage or sigma.


level of significance

An expression of probability. A one-sigma (standard) error is said to have a level of significance of 68 percent. For one-dimensional errors, a 95 percent level of significance is expressed by 1.96 sigma, and a 99 percent level of significance is expressed by 2.576 sigma.


local ellipsoid

The ellipsoid specified by a coordinate system. The WGS-84 coordinates are first transformed onto this ellipsoid, then converted to grid coordinates.


local geodetic coordinates

The latitude, longitude, and height of a point. The coordinates are expressed in terms of the local ellipsoid.


local geodetic horizon

At any point, a plane at the ellipsoid height of a given point which is parallel to the tangent plane to the ellipsoid at that point. Coordinate values for the local geodetic horizon are expressed as North, East, and Up. The LGH is used for rotating the differences in Earth-Centred Cartesian Coordinates, before modeling a baseline on the ellipsoid. Azimuth values computed from LGH components must be corrected for skew normals as part of modeling on the ellipsoid.


loop closure

Loop closures provide an indication as to the amount of error in a set of observations within a network.

A loop closure is calculated by selecting a point from which one or more observations were taken, adding one of those observations to the point’s coordinates, and calculating coordinates of the second point based on that observation. This process is repeated one or more times around a loop, finally ending at the original starting point. If there were no error in the observations the final calculated coordinate would be exactly the same as the original starting coordinate. By subtracting the calculated coordinate from the original coordinate a misclosure is determined. Dividing this error by the length of the line allows the error to be expressed in parts per million.

This technique also can be used between two different points when both points are known with a high degree of accuracy. This is also known as a traverse closure.


major axis

See ellipsoid.


mapping angle

The angle between grid north on a mapping projection and the meridian of longitude at a given point. Also know as convergence.


mapping projection

A rigorous mathematical expression of the curved surface of the ellipsoid on a rectangular coordinate grid.


mean sea level

The mean height of the surface of the ocean for all stages of the tide. Used as a reference for elevations.


minimally constrained

A network adjustment in which only enough constraints to define the coordinate system are employed. Used to measure internal consistency in observations.


minor axis

See ellipsoid.


modeling

Expressing an observation and its related errors mathematically and geometrically on some defined coordinate system, such as an ellipsoid.


multipath

Interference (similar to ‘ghosts’ on a television screen) that occurs when GPS signals arrive at an antenna after traveling different paths. The signal traveling the longer path yields a larger pseudo-range estimate and increases the error. Multiple paths may arise from reflections from structures near the antenna.


narrow-lane

A linear combination of L1 and L2 carrier phase observations (L1 + L2) that is useful for canceling out ionospheric effects in collected baseline data. The effective wavelength of the narrow-lane is 10.7 centimeter.


NAVDATA

NAVDATA is the 1500-bit navigation message broadcast by each satellite. This message contains system time, clock correction parameters, ionospheric delay model parameters, and details of the satellite’s ephemeris and health. The information is used to process GPS signals to obtain user position and velocity.


network

A set of baselines. See also subnetwork.


network adjustment

Solution of simultaneous equations designed to achieve closure in a survey network by minimizing the sum of the weighted squares of the residuals of the observations.

The adjustment technique employed by the Trimble Geomatics Office software is sometimes called variation of coordinates, and sometimes the method of indirect observations.


network status

An indication that a particular observation will be included in the adjustment.

 Network means that it is included in the adjustment

 Non-network means that it is excluded from the adjustment


NMEA

National Marine Electronics Association

The NMEA 0183 Standard defines the interface for marine electronic navigational devices. This standard defines a number of ‘strings’ referred to as NMEA strings that contain navigational details such as positions.

Most Trimble GPS receivers can output positions as NMEA strings.


normal

In geodesy, the straight line perpendicular to the surface of the ellipsoid.


normal distribution curve

A graphical illustration of the theoretical distribution of random variables around an expected value according to probability theory. Used with histograms.


normal section azimuth

Angle measured from the geodetic meridian of the observer to the observed point on the ellipsoid.


northing

Northward reading of a grid value.


observation residual

The correction applied to an observation, as determined by the adjustment.


observations

See surveying observations.


occupation time

The amount of time required on a station, or point, to achieve successful process a GPS baseline. The amount of time will vary depending on the surveying technique, the type of GPS receiver used, and the precision required for the final results. Occupation times can vary from a couple of seconds (kinematic surveys) to several hours (control or deformation surveys that require the highest levels of precision and repeatability).


origin

The intersection of axes in a coordinate system. The point of beginning.


orthometric height

The distance between a point and the surface of the geoid. It is usually called the elevation.


OTF search method

GPS baseline processing, whether real-time or post-processed, requires fixed integer solutions for the best possible results. (See integer search.)

Historically, this search was done using measurements collected while two or more receivers were stationary on their respective points. Modern receivers and software can use the measurements collected while the roving receiver is moving. Because the receiver is moving, the data is described as collected ‘On-the fly’ (OTF) and the integer search using this data is an ‘OTF search’.


outlier

An observation which is identified by statistical analysis as having a residual too large for its estimated error. The term derives from the graphical position of an observation in a histogram.


over-determined

A network for which more measurements have been made than are necessary to compute the coordinates of the network. Related to redundancy.


P-code

The ‘precise’ code transmitted by the GPS satellites. Each satellite has a unique code that is modulated onto both the L1 and L2 carrier waves. The P-code is replaced by an Y-code when Anti-Spoofing is active.


parameter

An independent variable in terms of which the coordinates of points on a line or surface are given. See unknowns.


parity

A form of error-checking used in binary digital data storage and transfer. Options for parity-checking include Even, Odd, or None.


PDOP

Position Dilution of Precision

A unitless figure of merit expressing the relationship between the error in user position, and the error in satellite position. Geometrically, PDOP is proportional to 1 divided by the volume of the pyramid formed by lines running from the receiver to four satellites that are observed. Values considered ‘good’ for positioning are small, for example 3. Values greater than 7 are considered poor. Thus, small PDOP is associated with widely separated satellites.

PDOP is related to horizontal and vertical DOP by:


PDOP cutoff

A receiver parameter specifying a maximum PDOP value for positioning. When the geometric orientation of the satellites yields a PDOP greater than the mask value, the receiver stops computing position fixes.


PDOP mask

The highest PDOP value at which a receiver will compute positions.


phase center

See antenna phase correction.


phase center models

A model used to apply a correction to a GPS signal based on a specific antenna type. The correction is based on the elevation of the satellite above the horizon and models electrical variations in the antenna phase center location. These models are useful in eliminating errors introduced when identical antennas are not used at both the base and rover points. See also antenna phase correction.


plumbing

The act of aligning the antenna or instrument along a vertical line (plumb line) perpendicular to the equipotential surface of earth’s gravity field.


point positions

See autonomous positioning.


postprocess

To process satellite data on a computer after it has been collected.


PPM

Parts per million

A standardized representation of a scale error in distance measurements. A 1 PPM error would result in 1 millimeter of measurement error for every 1000 meters of distance traveled.


precise ephemeris

See ephemeris.


precision

A measure of how closely random variables tend to cluster around a computed value. High precision implies small residuals. Usually expressed as one part in, or alternatively, as parts per million.


PRN

Pseudorandom noise

A sequence of digital 1’s and 0’s that appear to be randomly distributed like noise, but that can be exactly reproduced. PRN codes have a low autocorrelation value for all delays or lags except when they are exactly coincident.

Each NAVSTAR satellite can be identified by its unique C/A and P pseudorandom noise codes, so the term ‘PRN’ is sometimes used as another name for GPS satellite or SV.


probability

A statistical percentage expressing what portion of a hypothetical number of observations will fall within the defined limits. Sometimes called level of significance.


probable value

The adjusted value for observations and other quantities, assuming that the adjustment has been done correctly. The closest approximation to true value that is possible.


project

The Trimble Geomatics Office software operates on data in projects. You can consider a project to be the workspace you are working in. New projects are always created from existing templates and inherit all the elements of the template. From this point on, all new work is saved only in the new project.

A project contains all of the raw observations, computed points, coordinate system definition, line work, text, and CAD styles.


project datum

The datum associated with a project in the Trimble Geomatics Office software. All local coordinates are displayed using the project datum.


projection

Used to create flat maps that represent the surface of the earth or parts of that surface.


propagated error

Computed errors derived from estimated observational errors and expressed in terms of coordinate positions. Propagated coordinate errors may, in turn, be propagated into relative errors in azimuth, distance, and delta height between points.


Quality Acceptance test

One or more software evaluation tests performed on raw GPS measurement data to determine if the data passes or fails a set of tolerance values that you define. These tests either remove data from further processing or mark data requiring quality improvements.


QC records

Quality Control records

QC records contain information about the quality of the measured GPS position. They are stored with the point record.


ratio

During initialization, the receiver determines the integer number of wavelengths for each satellite. For a particular set of integers, it works out the probability that it is the correct set.

Ratio is the ratio of the probability of correctness of the currently best set of integers to the probability of correctness of the next-best set. Thus, a high ratio indicates that the best set of integers is much better than any other set. This gives us confidence that it is correct. The ratio must be above 5 for new point and OTF initializations.


RDOP

Relative Dilution of Precision


Real-Time Kinematic

A method of GPS surveying in real-time using short (stop-and-go) occupation, while maintaining lock on at least 4 satellites. This method requires a wireless data link between the base and rover receivers.


rectangular coordinates

Coordinates in any system in which the axes of reference intersect at right angles.


reduced column profile

An abbreviated version of the normal equations in which the equations are reordered to minimize the computer memory required to store all nonzero elements.


redundancy

The amount by which a control network is over-determined, or has more observations than are needed to strictly compute its parts.


redundancy number

A measure of the degrees of freedom in a portion, rather than the entirety, of a control network.


redundant baselines

A baseline observed to a point that has already been connected to the network by other observations. A redundant baseline can be either an independent reobservation of a previous measurement, or an observation to a point from another base. It is redundant because it provides more information than is necessary to uniquely determine a point. Redundant observations are very useful, however, in that they provide a check on the quality of previous measurements.


redundant observation

A repeated observation, or an observation which contributes to over-determining a network.


reference factor

See standard error of unit weight.


reference frame

The coordinate system of a datum.


reference station

This is a base station.


reference variance

The square of the reference factor.


relative errors

Errors and precisions expressed for and between pairs of network adjusted control points.


residual

The correction, or adjustment, of an observation to achieve overall closure in a control network. Also, any difference between an observed quantity and a computed value for that quantity.


RINEX

Receiver INdependent EXchange format

A standard GPS raw data file format used to exchange files from multiple receiver manufacturers.


RMS

Root Mean Square

RMS expresses the accuracy of point measurement. It is the radius of the error circle within which approximately 70% of position fixes are found. It can be expressed in distance units or in wavelength cycles.


rotated meridian

A zone constant for the oblique Mercator mapping projection.


rotation

In transformations, an angle through which a coordinate axis is moved around the coordinate system origin.


rover

Any mobile GPS receiver and field computer that is collecting data in the field. The position of a roving receiver can be differentially-corrected relative to a stationary base GPS receiver.


RTCM

Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services

A Commission established to define a differential data link for the real-time differential correction of roving GPS receivers. There are two types of RTCM differential correction messages, but all Trimble GPS receivers use the newer Type 2 RTCM protocol.


RTK

Real-time kinematic

A type of GPS survey.


satellite geometry

Position and movement of GPS satellites during a GPS survey.


scalar

In least squares, a value applied to the variances (errors) based on the required level of confidence.


scalar weighting

A process of applying a scalar to the estimated errors to achieve proper weighting of the observation. The three types of scalars available in a network adjustment in the Trimble Geomatics Office software are:

 Default means that scalar is set to 1.00, initial estimated error remains the same

 Alternative means that scalar is set to the Reference Factor of the previous adjustment

 User-defined means that you can enter a value for the scalar

 The Alternative scalar weighting scheme is iterated until the Chi-square test passes.

The scalar is applied to the observation errors using one of the following methods:

 All Observations

 Each Observation

 Variance Component Groups


scale

A multiplier used on coordinate and other linear variables, such as for map projections and transformations.


SDMS

Survey Data Management System

A set of format definitions for the storage of survey data. AASHTO maintains this system.


Selective Availability (S/A)

Artificial degradation of the GPS satellite signal by the U.S. Department of Defense. Since the 1st May 2000, Selective Availability has been turned off.


semimajor axis

One-half of the major axis.


semiminor axis

One-half of the minor axis.


session

A period during which one or more GPS receivers log satellite measure data.


set-up error

Errors in tribrach centering or height of instrument at a control point.


sideshot

An observed baseline with no redundancy.


sigma

A mathematical symbol or term for standard error.


single-frequency

A type of receiver that only uses the L1 GPS signal. There is no compensation for ionospheric effects.


site calibration

A process of computing parameters which establishing the relationship between WGS-84 positions (latitude, longitude and ellipsoid height) determined by GPS observations and local known coordinates defined by a map projection and elevations above mean sea level. The parameters are used to generate local grid coordinates from WGS-84 (and vice-versa) real-time in the field when using RTK surveying methods.


skyplot

A polar plot that shows the paths of visible satellites for the time interval selected for the graph. The elevation of the satellite is represented in the radial dimension and the azimuth is shown in the angular dimension. The result depicts the satellite’s path as it appears to an observer looking down from a place directly above the survey point.


solution types

A description of both the data and techniques used to obtain baseline solutions from GPS measurements. Typical solution types include descriptions such as code, float, and fixed. These describe techniques used by the baseline processor to obtain a baseline solution. Solution types also may include descriptions such as L1, L2, wide-lane, narrow-lane, or ionospheric free. These describe the way the GPS measurements are combined to achieve particular results. For more information, see the references on GPS processing for a more in depth discussion of these terms and techniques.


slope distance

The distance in the plane parallel to the vertical difference (slope) between the points.


SNR

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

A measure of the strength of a satellite signal. SNR ranges from 0 (no signal) to around 35.


standard error

A statistical estimate of error, according to which 68 percent of an infinite number of observations will theoretically have absolute errors less than or equal to this value.


standard error of unit weight

A measure of the magnitude of observational residuals in an adjusted network as compared to estimated preadjustment observational errors.


State Plane Coordinates

Special definitions of Transverse Mercator and Lambert conformal mapping projections adopted by statute in the USA. There is one set of such zones for NAD-27, and another for NAD-83.


static (surveying)

A method of GPS surveying using long occupations (hours in some cases) to collect GPS raw data, then postprocessing to achieve sub-centimeter precisions.


static network

The static network describes the geometry and order in which GPS baselines collected using static and fast static techniques are organized and processed. The baseline processor first examines the project for points with the highest quality coordinates, and then builds the processing network from those points. The result is a set of static baselines that are derived using accurate initial coordinates.


status

Every observation and set of keyed-in coordinates for a point has a status field (available in the Summary page of the Properties window).

The status can be Enabled, Enabled as check, or Disabled:

  Enabled observations and coordinates are always used by a recomputation in determining the calculated position for the point

  Enabled as check observations and coordinates are only used if there are no Enabled ones

  Disabled observations and coordinates are never used


stochastic model

A general reference to the techniques used to estimate errors in a network adjustment.


subnetwork

A set of baselines connected together by common control points, and independent of (separate from) any other baselines. As used by the Trimble Geomatics Office software, a network may consist of one or more subnetworks, and any one subnetwork may consist of as few as one baseline and two control points.


Super-trak

A Trimble proprietary method of processing the L2 signal when the P-code is encrypted.


surveying observations

Measurements made at or between control points using surveying equipment, including GPS receivers and conventional equipment.


SV

Satellite Vehicle (or Space Vehicle)


symbols and line types

Symbols and line types are maintained using the Trimble Symbol and Line Type Editor utilities. Use these editors to create new symbols and line types as well as to edit existing ones. Symbols are stored in symbol libraries and line types are stored in line type libraries.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the current system symbol and line type libraries. When saving an edited library you can make this the system library (if it is not already the current system library).


systematic errors

An error that occurs with the same sign, and often the same magnitude, in a number of related observations.


tau (value)

A value computed from an internal frequency distribution based upon the number of observations, degrees of freedom, and a given probability percentage (95%). This value is used to determine if an observation is not fitting with the others in the adjustment. If an observations residual exceeds the tau, it is flagged as an outlier. Known as tau lines in the histogram of standardized residuals, vertical lines left and right of the center vertical line.


tau criterion

Allen Pope's statistical technique for detecting observation outliers. For more information, see Pope (1976).


TDOP

Time Dilution of Precision


terrestrial observation

A terrestrial observation is an observation in the field using a laser rangefinder, a level or a conventional instrument.


TOW

Time of Week

TOW in seconds, from midnight Saturday night/Sunday morning GPS time.


tracking

The process of receiving and recognizing signals from a satellite.


transformation

The rotation, shift, and scaling of a network to move it from one coordinate system to another.


transformation group

A selected group of observations used to compute transformation parameters unique to that group of observations. Typically, the observations within the group are the same type with similar errors and measured using a common method.


transformation parameters

A set of parameters derived for a network adjustment or user-defined, that transform one datum to another. Typically with GPS the parameters are generated to transform WGS-84 to the local datum.


tribrach

Centering device used for mounting GPS antennas and other survey instruments on survey tripods.


tribrach centering errors

The errors associated with centering (plumbing) the tribrach over the observed point. These errors are estimated. The estimate is based on surveying the quality of surveying methods and should be conservative.


tropo correction

tropospheric correction

The correction applied to a satellite measurement to correct for tropospheric delay.


tropo model

tropospheric model

GPS signals are delayed by the troposphere. The amount of the delay will vary with the temperature, humidity, pressure, height of the station above sea level, and the elevation of the GPS satellites above the horizon. Corrections to the code and phase measurements can be made using a tropo model to account for these delays.


univariate

A mathematical function describing the behavior of one-dimensional random errors, in:

  angle

  distance

  difference in height

  elevation

  ellipsoid height


URA

User Range Accuracy

A measure of the errors that may be introduced by satellite problems and Selective Availability (S/A) if a particular satellite vehicle (SV) is used. A URA of 32 meters indicates that S/A is enabled. The URA value is set by the Control Segment and is broadcast by the satellites.


unknowns

The computed adjustments to coordinates and transformation parameters. Also used to compute observation residuals.


US National Geodetic Survey (NGS)

United States government agency that maintains the national geodetic datum and all geodetic survey control networks within the US and its territories.


US Survey Foot

1200/3937 meter. The official unit of linear measure for NAD-27.


UTC

Universal Time Coordinated

A time standard based on local solar mean time at the Greenwich meridian. See also GPS time.


variance

The square of the standard error.


variance component estimation

A least-squares technique for estimating the relative error of different portions of a network.


variance group

One of the groups of observations for which variance component estimation is being used in a network adjustment.


variance-covariance matrix

The set of numbers expressing the variances and covariances in a group of observations.


VDOP

Vertical Dilution of Precision


vector

A three-dimensional line between two points.


vertical

Similar to the normal, except that it is computed from the tangent plane to the geoid instead of the ellipsoid.


vertical adjustment

A network adjustment of vertical observations and coordinates only.


vertical control point

A point with vertical coordinate accuracy only. The horizontal position is of a lower order of accuracy or is unknown.


WAVE

Weighted Ambiguity Vector Estimator

WAVE is the Trimble baseline processor. It computes GPS vectors from field observations made using static, FastStatic, or kinematic data collection procedures.


weight

The inverse of the variance of an observation.


weighting strategy

The collection of values used to augment variance-covariance matrices in Trimble Geomatics Office software.


weights

The set of weights, or the inverse of the variance-covariance matrix of correlated observations.


WGS-84

World Geodetic System (1984)

The mathematical ellipsoid used by GPS since January 1987.


wide-lane

A linear combination of L1 and L2 carrier phase observations (L1 − L2). This is useful for its low effective wavelength (86.2 cm) and for finding integer ambiguities on long baselines.


X, Y and Z

In the Earth Centered Cartesian system, X refers to the direction of the coordinate axis running from the system origin to the Greenwich Meridian; Y to the axis running from the origin through the 90° east longitude meridian, and Z to the polar ice cap. In rectangular coordinate systems, X refers to the east-west axis, Y to the north-south axis, and Z to the height axis.


Y-code

Y-code is an encrypted form of the information contained in the P-code. Satellites transmit Y-code in place of P-code when Anti-Spoofing is in effect.


zenith delay

The delay, caused by the troposphere, of a GPS signal observed from a satellite directly overhead. As a satellite approaches the horizon, the signal path through the troposphere becomes longer and the delay increases.


GPS Precise Ephemeris Files

A precise ephemeris file contains accurate positional data and clock corrections for each satellite for some specified period of time, typically one day. This information is used by the baseline processor to improve baseline accuracy by reducing the effects of broadcast ephemeris errors. Using a precise ephemeris also helps the baseline processor to achieve fixed solutions on long baselines.

Trimble Geomatics Office supports the use of Precise Ephemeris in two file formats:

  .sp3 − An ASCII format defined by the U.S. National Geodetic Survey. It is the most widely available format.

  .ef18 − A binary file with information similar to that contained in the .sp3 files. The .ef18 files require less disk space and can be used more efficiently by the baseline processor.

The use of precise ephemeris is controlled by the Ephemeris option in the Active GPS Baseline Processing Style dialog. Precise ephemeris files must be imported into each project in which they are to be used. Use File / Import to load one or more precise ephemeris files into a project.

Originally, precise ephemeris files provided satellite positions and clock offsets for a week. Current files, however, provide this information only for a single day. This means the files can be made available in a shorter period of time.

The baseline processor requires that the time span of the precise ephemeris must exceed the time span of the GPS measurements being processed by a minimum of eight SV epochs, both before and after the start of the data. This additional precise ephemeris information is required to ensure proper interpolation at both the start and end of the survey.

The precise ephemeris import utility does the following:

  Examines the format of the file. If the file is in .sp3 format it is converted to .ef18 format automatically during the import. If the file is .ef18 format, it is used directly.

  Determines if there are existing precise ephemeris files already loaded into the project. If so, it examines the coverage of those files to determine if the new file spans the same time frame as existing coverage. If so, the new file overwrites the old and a warning message is provided in the Import report to indicate that this occurred.

  Copies the file into the project’s Precise Ephemeris folder.

Precise ephemeris files are available from a variety of sources, including:

  U.S. National Geodetic Survey

  Center for Orbit Determination in Europe (CODE)

  European Space Agency

  Scripps Orbit and Permanent Array Center (SOPAC)

  Canadian Department of Energy, Mines and Resources (EMR)

  NASA Jet Propulsion Laboratory (JPL)


To import a precise ephemeris file on your computer (.sp3, .e18)

1.	Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2.	In the Survey tab, select the Precise ephemeris files (*.sp3, *.e18) option.

3.	Click OK. The Open dialog appears.

4.	Locate the .sp3 or .e18 files that you want to import.

5.	Click Open.

The files are loaded into the project’s Precise Ephemeris folder.

NOTE: If the precise ephemeris files being imported cover the same time span as the precise ephemeris files already in the project, a message appears. This message shows that one or more messages were generated during the import. To see the details of these files, click Yes on this message

NOTE: The use of precise ephemeris is controlled by the Ephemeris option in the Active GPS Baseline Processing Styles.


Registration Overview

If you register your Trimble Geomatics Office software and supply your contact details, Trimble can send you any new information about the software as soon as it becomes available—this includes information about any new developments in the product. Your registration helps Trimble to continually improve its product support and development.

You can register your Trimble Geomatics Office software when prompted at the end of the installation process, or at any time from within Trimble Geomatics Office.

To do this:

1.	In Trimble Geomatics Office, select Help / Registration.

2.	Select a method of registration. You can do one of the following:

  Complete and submit the registration form supplied on the Internet.

  Print out the supplied text registration form, complete it, and then fax or mail.

The questions on the Internet and fax/mail registration forms are the same.

The information that you supply is neither used nor distributed outside of Trimble. The registration forms also include questions about how and why you use Trimble Geomatics Office. These questions are not compulsory, but your answers will again help Trimble to improve its product support and development.


Registration - Via Internet command
Registration − Via Internet command

 Overview and More Information

To register your Trimble Geomatics Office Software via the Internet:

1.	Select Help / Registration / Via Internet. The online Registration page appears in your Web Browser.

2.	Complete the form and be sure to provide details for all of the fields marked *.

3.	Click Send Registration Now.


Registration - Via Fax or Mail
Registration − Via Fax or Mail

 Overview and More Information

To register your Trimble Geomatics Office Software via fax or mail:

1.	Select Help / Registration / Via Fax or Mail. The Trimble Geomatics Office Registration form appears in your default text editor.

2.	Complete the form and be sure to provide details for all of the fields marked *.

3.	Save the form.

4.	Send the form to:

Land Survey Marketing

Trimble Navigation

7403 Church Ranch Boulevard, Suite 100

Westminster, CO 80021

USA

Attention: Technical Publications Group

Fax: +1 720 887-6101


GPS Loop Closures Report - Overview
    GPS Loop Closures Report − Overview

More Information

How to ...	Report	See also
Overview

The GPS Loop Closure report can be used to help judge the quality of a set of GPS observations within a network. You can use it to check for errors in your baseline processing results (if you have the Baseline Processing module installed). To generate loop closures, however, you must have designed your network to have closed geometric figures. If this is the case, Trimble Geomatics Office will automatically generate all the possible loops and produce a GPS Loop Closure report.

The Loop Closure Settings dialog is used to control how loops are built and analyzed. It also is used to control the amount of information in the GPS Loop Closures report. The loop closure settings are accessed from Reports / Setup / GPS Loop Closures Report.

The default GPS Loop Closures report includes the following sections:

  Header

  Summary

  Failed Loops

  Observations in Failed Loops

  Occupations in Failed Loops

These additional report sections can be included in the report by selecting them in the Loop Closure Settings dialog:

  Failed Loop Details

  Passed Loops

  Passed Loop Details

Consider these guidelines:

  Small misclosures are desired. A large misclosure indicates that there is a problem with one or more observations in the loop.

  High misclosures are often due to blunders made in the field, such as entering wrong antenna information or not setting a station up properly. Check your field notes to verify the information associated with observations that have been flagged as being members of multiple failed loops.

  When designing your network to consist of closed geometric figures, make sure that the network is observed in such a way as to include baselines from different sessions in every figure. If a loop is generated using baselines that were all observed in the same session, common station setup errors cannot be detected.

NOTE: From the Loop Closures report, you can link to GPS loops in the Survey view.


GPS Loop Closures Report - Header
    GPS Loop Closures Report − Header

More Information

How to ...	Report	See also
The report header is included in every report. It includes general project information extracted and a Contents section. The Contents section has hyperlinks that can be used to jump to the various report sections.

It shows the following fields, most of which contain the information that you specified in the project properties:

Project

This field shows the project name.

User Name

This field shows the name.

Date and Time

This field shows the date and time when the report was generated.

Coordinate System

This field shows the coordinate system.

Zone

This field shows the coordinate system zone. If a GPS calibration site is selected, the site name is displayed in the Zone field.

All published coordinate systems have a zone. The only exception is the default projection which displays ‘default’ in the Zone field. The default is used when you are assuming coordinates of a site, such as N = 10000, E = 10000, and elev = 100.

Project Datum

This field shows the project datum. It does not represent the datum selected for the adjustment.

Vertical Datum

You can add this field to the Network Adjustment report header information. To do this, add the necessary details to the Vertical Datum field in the Project Properties dialog - Project Details tab.

Geoid Model

This field shows the geoid model if a model was assigned in the project properties. When no geoid model is assigned to the project, ‘Not selected’ appears in this field.

Coordinate Units

This field shows the units of the coordinate system.

Distance Units

This field shows the distance units.

Height Units

This field shows the height units.

Contents

The contents of the GPS Loop Closures report are controlled by the settings in the Loop Closure Settings dialog. The default GPS Loop Closures report includes the following sections:

  Header

  Summary

  Failed Loops

  Observations in Failed Loops

  Occupations in Failed Loops

These additional report sections can be included in the report by selecting them in the Loop Closure Settings dialog:

  Failed Loop Details

  Passed Loops

  Passed Loop Details


GPS Loop Closure Report - Summary
    GPS Loop Closure Report − Summary

More Information

How to ...	Report	See also
The summary section provides a quick overview of the results of the loop closure analysis. It is included in the default report and includes the following information:

Legs in Loop

This field shows the number of observations used to form the sides of the loop. The default is 3. If more than 3 legs are specified, all loops having that number or legs, or less, are generated. If 5 is specified, for example, all loops having either 5, 4 or 3 sides are considered in the report.

Number of Loops

This field shows the total number of loops generated.

Number Passed

This field shows the number of loops passing the acceptance criteria.

Number Failed

This field shows the number of loops failing the acceptance criteria.

Pass / Fail Criteria

These fields show the absolute horizontal and vertical tolerance values.

Best

These fields show the results for the best loop generated.

Worst

These fields show the results for the worse loop generated.

Average Loop

These fields show the results for the average of all the loops generated for this report.

Standard Deviation

These fields show the standard deviation of all the loops generated for this report.


GPS Loop Closures Report - Failed Loops
    GPS Loop Closures Report − Failed Loops

More Information

How to ...	Report	See also
The failed loops section provides information about each loop that fails the misclosure tolerance test. A loop fails when the misclosures are greater than the tolerances specified in the GPS Loop Closure Settings dialog. This section is included in the default report.

A sample report section showing one failed loop is shown below:

GPS Loop 1:
MOON 2:WAVE:N 245:MOON 2

Observations:

		From	To	Solution Type	Start Time
B3	S1	MOON 2	WAVE	L1 fixed	13:45:03 24 Feb 1999
B47	S5	MOON 2	WAVE	L1 fixed	13:11:03 24 Feb 1999
B2	S8	WAVE	N 245	L1 fixed	13:45:03 24 Feb 1999
B46	S4	MOON 2	N 245	L1 fixed	13:43:48 24 Feb 1999
B49	S7	MOON 2	N 245	L1 fixed	12:28:33 24 Feb 1999

Failed combinations for loop 1:

	Length	dHoriz	dVert	Ppm
S5 − S8 − S7	3295.499m	0.026m	0.034m	12.915

Observations Table

The first two columns in the table represent the Baseline and Solution IDs, respectively, of the GPS observation used in the loop. The Baseline ID represents the combination of two overlapping sets of GPS data that can be processed to form a baseline. The Solution ID represents an actual solving of the baseline by the baseline processor. There can be multiple Solution IDs for a single Baseline ID. This occurs when the Overwrite Duplicate Baseline Solutions check box is clear when Saving GPS Processing Results.

The remaining columns are as follows:

From

This field shows the start point of the observation.

To

This field shows the end point of the observation.

Solution Type

This field shows the solution type for the observation.

Start Time

This field shows the start time of the observation.

Failed Combinations for Loop # Table

The Failed Combinations for Loop table identifies the combination of GPS observations that generated a misclosure greater than the acceptance criteria. The example above shows a single combination. Multiple combinations are listed in the table if several failures occur. The first table column shows the baseline solutions in the failed combination.

TIP: If you click on the failed combination, the observations are highlighted in the Survey view.

The remaining columns are as follows:

Length

This field shows the total distance traversed around the loop.

dHoriz

This field shows the horizontal misclosure generated by this loop.

dVert

This field shows the vertical misclosure generated by this loop.

Ppm

This field shows the total horizontal and vertical misclosure expressed in parts per million.


GPS Loop Closures Report - Observations in Failed Loops
    GPS Loop Closures Report − Observations in Failed Loops

More Information

How to ...	Report	See also
This section helps to identify GPS baselines that do not fit into the network. It does this by examining all failed loops and reporting the baselines that are found in multiple failed loops. The list is sorted so that the baselines occurring in the most failed loops are listed at the top. It also includes baseline summary statistics that might help to identify poor solutions.

This section is included in the default report.

 A sample report sections is shown below:

		From	To	Solution Type	Ratio	Ref var	RMS	# of Occurrences
B2	S8	WAVE	N 245	L1 fixed	21.8	2.489	0.006	3
B47	S5	MOON 2	WAVE	L1 fixed	2.9	1.693	0.005	2
B5	S19	COWBOY	KTOM	L1 fixed	8.5	1.117	0.009	1

Back to top

The first two columns in the table represent the Baseline and Solution IDs, respectively, of the GPS observation that are members of multiple failed loops. The Baseline ID represents the combination of two overlapping sets of GPS data that can be processed to form a baseline. The Solution ID represents an actual solving of the baseline by the baseline processor. There can be multiple Solution IDs for a single Baseline ID. This occurs when the Overwrite Duplicate Baseline Solutions check box is clear when saving GPS processing results.

The remaining columns are as follows:

From

This field shows the start point of the observation.

To

This field shows the end point of the observation.

Start Time

This field shows the time and date of the GPS observation.

Ratio

This field shows the ratio of the GPS observation as determined by the baseline processor.

Ref var

This field shows the reference variance of the GPS observation as determined by the baseline processor.

RMS

This field shows the RMS of the GPS observation as determined by the baseline processor.

# of Occurrences

This field shows the number of failed loops of which the GPS observation was a member. Observations with a higher number of occurrences should be reviewed with respect to how well they fit into your network.


GPS Loop Closures Report - Occupations in Failed Loops
    GPS Loop Closures Report − Occupations in Failed Loops

More Information

How to ...	Report	See also
This section helps to identify GPS station occupations for the baselines that do not fit into the network. These station occupations may have station setup errors. It does this by examining all failed loops, determining the baselines found in multiple failed loops, and then reporting the occupations that are common to these baselines. The list is sorted so that the occupations occurring in the most failed loops are listed at the top.

This section is included in the default report.

A sample report section is shown below:

Occupations in Failed Loops

Point	Start Time	# of Occurrences
KTOM	10:46:18 24 Feb 1999	6
WAVE	13:11:03 24 Feb 1999	5
MOON2	12:04:48 24 Feb 1999	4
COWBOY	14:05:03 24 Feb 1999	3
N 245	12:28:33 24 Feb 1999	2
COWBOY	12:45:48 24 Feb 1999	1
Back to top

The columns are as follows:

Point

This field shows the name of the point at which the occupation occurred.

Start Time

This field shows the time of the occupation. Use the time to verify your field notes against the information contained in the project.

# of Occurrences

This field shows the number of time this occupation was used for an observation that was a member of a failed loop. Occupations with a higher number of occurrences should be examined for station setup errors.


GPS Loop Closures Report - Failed Loop Details
    GPS Loop Closures Report − Failed Loop Details

More Information

How to ...	Report	See also
This section provides more detailed information about each loop that fails the misclosure tolerance test. This section is not included in the default report. You can enable this section from the Loop Closure Settings dialog.

A sample report section is shown below:

Failed Loop Details

Loop S1 - S86 - S3:

From:	MOON 2
To:	WAVE		L1 fixed	13:45:02 24 Feb 1999
		Slope:	962.407m	606819.055m
		Total:	962.407m	1828548.125m
				29.499m
To:	N 245		L1 float	13:45:02 24 Feb 1999
		Slope:	852.542m	606662.061m
		Total:	1814.949m	1829386.030m
				33.251m
To:	MOON 2		L1 fixed	13:43:47 24 Feb 1999
		Slope:	1480.504m	605983.905m
		Total:	3295.453m	1828070.086m
				26.770m
Precision:		32.407ppm
Errors	Horiz:	0.096m	Vert:	−0.046m

At the top of the table is a list of the baseline solutions that are members of the loop. This is followed by the From station, which is the point from which the loop originates.

This initial information is followed by three or more subsections, each four rows long. These subsections contain station information, and they are provided in the order in which the program traverses around the loop. The first row in each subsection starts with a To: identifier. The following information is provided in these station subsections:

Row 1

The To: identifier is the first row in a four row subsection. The row itself provides information about the GPS observation. The To: identifier is followed by the name of the point, listed in the order in which the loop is traversed. This is followed by the type of GPS observation and the date the GPS measurements were collected.

The information provided in this row corresponds to one of the solution IDs provided at the top of the table. More detailed information about a specific baseline solution can be obtained by examining its statistics using the Properties window in the Survey view, or by generating a GPS Baseline Processing report for that baseline.

Row 2

The Slope identifier denotes the second row of a four row subsection. The identifier is followed by the slope distance of the GPS observation. This is followed by the northing component of the current To point’s coordinates.

Row 3

The Total identifier denotes the third row of a four row subsection. The identifier is followed by the total distance traversed so far in building the loop. This is followed by the easting component of the current To point’s coordinates.

Row 4

The last row in the subsection does not have an identifier. It contains the height of the current To point’s coordinates.

NOTE: The northing, easting and height coordinates reported here will not be the same coordinates as found in the project. The values displayed here are derived by adding the GPS observations to the initial From station coordinates and continuing this vector addition around the loop. At the end of the loop, the coordinates derived in this manner are subtracted from the initial coordinates of the From point to generate the misclosure.

The last station subsection in this table is for the From station, indicating that the loop has been closed. The last two rows of the table provide information about the loop misclosure.

Precision

This field shows the total horizontal and vertical misclosure, expressed in parts per million.

Errors

This field shows the horizontal and vertical misclosures generated by this loop.


GPS Loop Closures Report - Passed Loops
    GPS Loop Closures Report − Passed Loops

More Information

How to ...	Report	See also
This section provides information about each loop that passes the tolerance test. A loop passes when the loop misclosures are less than or equal to the specified tolerances. This section is not included in the default report. You can enable this section from the Loop Closure Settings dialog.

A sample report section is shown below:

Passed Loops

GPS Loop 1:
MOON 2: WAVE: COWBOY: MOON 2

Observations:

Baseline ID	Solution ID	From	To	Solution Type	Start Time
B3	S1	MOON 2	WAVE	L1 fixed	13:45:02 24 Feb 1999
B47	S4	MOON 2	WAVE	L1 fixed	13:11:02 24 Feb 1999
B1	S9	WAVE	COWBOY	L1 fixed	14:05:02 24 Feb 1999
B45	S2	MOON 2	COWBOY	L1 fixed	14:05:02 24 Feb 1999
B48	S5	MOON 2	COWBOY	L1 fixed	12:45:47 24 Feb 1999
Passed combinations for Loop 1:

	Length	dHoriz	dVert	Ppm
S1 - S9 - S2	3795.569m	0.001m	-0.002m	0.508
S1 - S9 - S5	3795.577m	0.009m	0.001m	2.296
S4 - S9 - S2	3795.568m	0.018m	-0.012m	5.683
S4 - S9 - S5	3795.577m	0.020m	-0.009m	5.872

Observations Table

The first two columns in the table represent the Baseline and Solution IDs, respectively, of the GPS observation used in the loop. The Baseline ID represents the combination of two overlapping sets of GPS data that can be processed to form a baseline. The Solution ID represents an actual solving of the baseline by the baseline processor. There can be multiple Solution IDs for a single Baseline ID. This occurs when the Overwrite Duplicate Baseline Solutions check box is clear when Saving GPS processing results.

The remaining columns are as follows:

From

This field shows the start point of the observation.

To

This field shows the end point of the observation.

Solution Type

This field shows the solution type for the observation.

Start Time

This field shows the start time of the observation.

Passed Combinations for Loop # Table

The Passed Combinations for Loop # table identifies the combination of GPS observations that generated a misclosure less than or equal to the acceptance criteria. The first column shows the baseline solutions in the combination that passed.

TIP: If you click on the passed combination, the observations are highlighted in the Survey view.

The second set of columns are as follows:

Length

This field shows the total distance traversed around the loop.

dHoriz

This field shows the horizontal misclosure generated by this loop.

dVert

This field shows the vertical misclosure generated by this loop.

Ppm

This field shows the total horizontal and vertical misclosure expressed in parts per million.


GPS Loop Closures Report - Passed Loop Details
    GPS Loop Closures Report − Passed Loop Details

More Information

How to ...	Report	See also
This section provides more detailed information about each loop that passes the misclosure tolerance test. This is not included in the default report. You can enable this section using the GPS Loop Closure Settings dialog.

A sample report section is shown below:

Passed Loop Details

Loop S1 - S9 - S2:

From:	MOON 2
To:	WAVE		L1 fixed	13:45:02 24 Feb 1999
		Slope:	962.407m	606819.055m
		Total:	962.407m	1828548.125m
				29.499m
To:	COWBOY		L1 fixed	14:05:02 24 Feb 1999
		Slope:	1076.569m	607738.388m
		Total:	2038.976m	1827988.084m
				22.331m
To:	MOON 2		L1 fixed	14:05:02 24 Feb 1999
		Slope:	1756.593m	605983.815m
		Total:	3795.569m	1828070.120m
				26.815m
Precision:	0.50858508651573ppm
Errors	Horiz:	0.001m	Vert:	−0.002m

At the top of the table is a list of the baseline solutions that are members of the loop. This is followed by the From station, which is the point from which the loop originates.

This initial information is followed by three or more subsections, each four rows long. These subsections contain station information, and they are provided in the order in which the program traverses around the loop. The first row in each subsection starts with a To: identifier. The following information is provided in these station subsections:

Row 1

The To: identifier is the first row in a four row subsection. The row itself provides information about the GPS observation. The To: identifier is followed by the name of the point, listed in the order in which the loop is traversed. This is followed by the type of GPS observation and the date the GPS measurements were collected.

The information provided in this row corresponds to one of the solution IDs provided at the top of the table. More detailed information about a specific baseline solution can be obtained by examining its statistics using the Properties window in Survey view, or by generating a GPS Processing report for that baseline.

Row 2

The Slope identifier denotes the second row of a four row subsection. The identifier is followed by the slope distance of the GPS observation. This is followed by the northing component of the current To point’s coordinates.

Row 3

The Total identifier denotes the third row of a four row subsection. The identifier is followed by the total distance traversed so far in building the loop. This is followed by the easting component of the current To point’s coordinates.

Row 4

The last row in the subsection does not have an identifier. It contains the height of the current To point’s coordinates.

NOTE: The northing, easting and height coordinates reported here will not be the same coordinates as found in the project. The values displayed here are derived by adding the GPS observations to the initial From station coordinates and continuing this vector addition around the loop. At the end of the loop, the coordinates derived in this manner are subtracted from the initial coordinates of the From point to generate the misclosure.

The last station subsection in this table is for the From station, indicating that the loop has been closed. The last two rows of the table provide information about the loop misclosure.

Precision

This field shows the total horizontal and vertical misclosure expressed in parts per million.

Errors

This field shows the horizontal and vertical misclosures generated by this loop.


    GPS Loop Closure Settings dialog

More Information

 How to ...

Use this dialog to configure Loop Closure options and to select the sections included in the GPS Loop Closures report.

To view the Loop Closure Settings dialog, do one of the following:

  Select Reports / Setup / GPS Loop Closures Report.

  Press Alt+RSL.

The Loop Closure Settings dialog appears.

These controls or groups are included:

Legs in Loop

Edit this field to specify the number of observations used to form the sides of the loop. The default is 3. If more than 3 legs are specified, all loops having that number of legs, or fewer, are generated. If 5 is specified, for example, all loops having either 5, 4, or 3 sides are considered in the report.

Tolerance

Edit these fields to define the maximum acceptable misclosure that meets the accuracy requirements required for your project. Misclosures that exceed these tolerances will be reported as failed loops in the GPS Loop Closure report. The tolerance can be based either on absolute distance or as a ratio expressed in parts per million.

When Absolute is selected the Horizontal and Vertical fields become available. Enter horizontal and vertical distance tolerances in these fields to specify the maximum allowable misclosure.

When Ratio is selected the Ppm field becomes available. Enter the maximum allowable misclosure in ppm. When Ratio is selected the horizontal and vertical misclosures are combined before performing the misclosure tolerance test.

Report Sections

Use the check boxes in this group to select the sections appearing in the GPS Loop Closures report. The following sections may be included:

  Overall Summary

  Failed Loops

  Failed Loop Details

  Observations in Failed Loops

  Occupations in Failed Loops

  Passed Loops

  Passed Loop Details

By default, the following sections are included:

  Overall Summary

  Failed Loops

  Observations in Failed Loops

  Occupations in Failed Loops

Any section can be removed from the report by clearing its check box. Other sections may be included in the report by selecting their check boxes.

Only use active solutions

Select this check box if you only want to include active solutions in the Loop Closures report.


    GPS Loop Closures Report command

How to ...	Report
Use this command to perform loop closure analysis and view the results in report format.

To view the GPS Loop Closures report:

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete and loads the GPS Loop Closures report.


    Setup GPS Loop Closures Report

More Information

How to ...	Dialog

Select this command to choose the sections included in the GPS Loop Closures report.

To view the GPS Loop Closures Report Setup dialog, do one of the following:

  Select Report / Setup / GPS Loop Closures Report.

  Press Alt+RSL.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts and the GPS Loop Closures Report Setup dialog appears.

NOTE: Several sections appear by default and additional sections can be added. You can disable or enable any combination of check boxes to customize the contents of the report.


Loop Closure Report dialog

Use this dialog to select whether to report on the whole database or on selected loops.

To view the GPS Loop Closures report

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete and loads the GPS Loop Closures report.


To check for Loop Closure

After baseline processing, a red warning flag may appear in the Survey view window to mark each baseline that did not pass the quality acceptance criteria. Baselines with warning flags may also cause large misclosures when performing loop closure analysis.

Possible causes of error contributing to poor misclosures include:

  Setting up over the wrong survey point.

  Entering incorrect antenna information.

  Poor processing results.

To check for a loop closure:

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete, and the report appears with the Header at the top of the report.

3.	Click Summary.

The Summary section of the Loop Closure report appears.


To set up the GPS Loop Closures report

 Overview and More Information

GPS Loop Closure report sections can be enabled or disabled to control the contents of the report. By default, these report sections are enabled:

  Summary

  Failed Loops

  Observations in Failed Loops

  Occupations in Failed Loops

If enabled, these report sections are also available:

  Failed Loop Details

  Passed Loops

  Passed Loop Details

To enable or disable report sections:

1.	To view the GPS Loop Closures report, do one of the following:

  Select Report / Setup / GPS Loops Closures Report.

  Press Alt+RSL.

The Loop Closure Settings dialog appears.

2.	Select or clear the applicable check boxes in the Report Sections group


To view the GPS Loop Closures Report Summary

 Overview and More Information

To view the report summary:

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete, and the report appears with the Header at the top of the report.

3.	Click Summary.

The Summary section appears.


To view the GPS Loop Closures Report

Overview and More Information
To view the report:

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete, and the report appears.

3.	Use the Contents hyperlinks to jump to report sections and examine data.


To view the GPS Loop Closure Report Header

Overview and More Information
To view the report header:

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete, and the report appears with the Header at the top of the report.

3.	Use the scrollbars to examine the data.


To view the GPS Loop Closure Passed Loop Statistics

Overview and More Information
The Passed Loops section identifies which loops passed the misclosure tolerance test. This report section does not appear in the default report. You can include this section in the report by selecting it in the Loop Closure Settings dialog.

To view the passed loop statistics:

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete, and the report appears with the Header at the top of the report.

3.	Click Passed Loops.

The Passed Loops section appears.


To view the GPS Loop Closure Passed Loop Details

Overview and More Information
The Passed Loop Details section provides more detailed information about the loops that passed the misclosure tolerance test. This report section does not appear in the default report. You can include this section in the report by selecting it in the Loop Closure Settings dialog.

To view the passed loop statistics:

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete, and the report appears with the Header at the top of the report.

3.	Click Passed Loop Details.

The Passed Loop Details section appears.


To view the GPS Loop Closure Failed Loop Details

Overview and More Information
The Failed Loop Details section provides more detailed information about the loops that did not pass the misclosure tolerance test. This report section does not appear in the default report. You can include this section in the report by selecting it in the Loop Closure Settings dialog.

To view the failed loop details:

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

3.	Click Failed Loop Details.

The Failed Loop Details section appears.


To view the Observations in Failed Loops Statistics

Overview and More Information
The Observations in Failed Loops section helps to identify GPS baselines that do not fit into the network. It does this by examining all failed loops and reporting the baselines that are found in multiple failed loops. The list is sorted so that the baselines occurring in the most failed loops are listed at the top. It also includes baseline summary statistics that might help to identify poor solutions.

To view the observations in failed loops:

1.	To view the GPS Loop Closures report, do one of the following:

  Select Report / Loop Closures Report.

  Press Alt+RL.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete, and the report appears with the Header at the top of the report.

2.	Click Observations in Failed Loops.

The Observations in Failed Loops section appears.


To view the Occupations in Failed Loops Statistics

Overview and More Information
The Occupations in Failed Loops section helps to identify GPS station occupations for the baselines that do not fit into the network. These station occupations may have station setup errors. It does this by examining all failed loops, determining the baselines found in multiple failed loops, and then reporting the occupations that are common to these baselines. The list is sorted so that the occupations occurring in the most failed loops are listed at the top.

To view the occupations in failed loops:

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete, and the report appears with the Header at the top of the report.

3.	Click Occupation in Failed Loops.

The Occupation in Failed Loops section appears.


To view the Failed Loops Statistics

 Overview and More Information

The Failed Loop statistics identify why the legs in a baseline loop failed to close.

To view the failed loop statistics:

1.	Select Report / GPS Loop Closures Report. If you have selected observations in the graphics window, the Loop Closures Report dialog appears.

2.	Select one of the following options:

  Selection − Performs a loop closure on the selected baselines.

  Whole Database − Performs a loop closure on the whole database.

The default HTML viewer for your computer starts after loop closure analysis is complete, and the report appears with the Header at the top of the report.

3.	Click Failed Loops.

The Failed Loops section appears.


To view the Baseline Warning Flag Properties

Overview and More Information
After baseline processing, a red warning flag appears in the Graphics window to mark each baseline that did not pass the quality acceptance criteria.

To view the warning flag details:

1.	Select a baseline.

2.	Open the Properties window (Right-click to access the shortcut menu and select Properties).

The Properties window appears.

3.	Click the plus (+) icon next to the baseline in the Properties window selection list.

The Selection list tree expands and displays the ‘from’ and ‘to’ points for the baseline. A red flag indicates a baseline processing problem.

4.	Select any point with a flag.

5.	Do one of the following:

  Click the Warning Flags button.

  From the Detailed Page menu, select Warnings.

A message displays why the baseline is flagged. Use this information to resolve the problem that prevents the baseline from passing the acceptance criteria. For more information, see GPS Processing Data Analysis.


Recomputation - Overview
Recomputation − Overview

Recomputation is the process of establishing the calculated position of a point.

Trimble Geomatics Office performs a recomputation on all data, that is, all GPS, conventional, and laser rangefinder observations, and keyed-in or imported coordinates for a point. It uses these observations and keyed-in coordinates to determine the highest possible quality position for a point.

Recomputation:

  calculates the position for the points measured in the field

  gives a point an appropriate quality

  detects and reports misclosures in data

  creates a Recompute report

If a point has redundant survey data, the Point Derivation report shows which observation(s) or keyed-in coordinates were used to establish the calculated position. The Recompute report shows any redundant observations that are out of tolerance. Tolerances are defined in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog.

A recomputation is required whenever data is added to the project, or if existing data is edited, for example if you change an antenna height for a GPS observation.

However, Trimble Geomatics Office does not perform a recomputation automatically. When a recomputation is required, the Recompute icon [image] appears in the status bar of Trimble Geomatics Office.

To recompute, do one of the following:

  Select Survey / Recompute.

  Press F4.

  In the status bar, double-click the Recompute icon (if available).

  Right-click to access the shortcut menu and select Recompute.

NOTE: You can perform a recomputation at any time, however, if the Recompute icon is not first displayed in the status bar, nothing changes.

Recomputation:

  does not distribute errors

  will use adjusted, control or survey quality keyed-in coordinates in preference to observations.

NOTE: The term keyed-in coordinates refers to coordinates for a point that are either keyed in using Trimble Geomatics Office, or imported from a data file to the Trimble Geomatics Office project.


Recomputation - How the Calculated Position for Observed Points is Determined
Recomputation − How the Calculated Position for Observed Points is Determined

 Overview and More Information

The flow chart shows how a recomputation finds the calculated position for points observed in the field.

NOTE: When determining the calculated position for an observed point, a recomputation does not use disabled observations or disabled keyed-in coordinates. It only uses observations or keyed-in coordinates that are enabled as a check if the positions of points in the project cannot be determined by any other observations or coordinates. To enable and disable observations, use the Properties window.

These topics describe the boxes in the flow chart:

  How a Recomputation Determines Potential Starting Points

  How a Recomputation Determines the Position for all Potential Starting Points

  Recomputation − How the Component Qualities Determine the Current Starting Point

  Recomputation − How Observations are Applied From the Current Starting Point

  Recomputation − How the Quality of Observed Points is Determined


Recomputation - How Potential Starting Points are Determined
Recomputation − How Potential Starting Points are Determined

 Overview and More Information

A recomputation can start with any point that has the following characteristics:

  Keyed-in coordinates, and

  One or more observations from the point

For example, the following figure shows a Real Time Kinematic (RTK) base. This is a potential starting point.


Recomputation - How the Position for all Potential Starting Points is Determined
Recomputation − How the Position for all Potential Starting Points is Determined

 Overview and More Information

The position of the starting point is determined from the keyed-in coordinate. A potential starting point usually has only one set of keyed-in coordinates. The quality of each position component (NE,e,h) is inherited from the quality of the keyed-in coordinate. If the elevation or height component is not keyed in, then the geoid model is used to derive the missing component.

A point may have more than one set of keyed-in coordinates if you:

  key in coordinates for a point and perform an adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed) without holding the point fixed (this creates an adjusted set of coordinates for the point)

  import WGS-84 coordinates and grid control coordinates for a point

  import a WGS-84 coordinate and an elevation. An elevation is stored as part of a grid coordinate.

In this case, a recomputation uses certain criteria to determine which of the coordinates to use as the calculated position. If it cannot find a single set of coordinates using the first criterion, it applies the next. The criteria, in order, are as follows:

1.	The status (enable/disabled) of the coordinates

2.	The highest quality component.

3.	WGS-84 coordinates are used in preference to grid coordinates.


Recomputation - How the Position for all Potential Starting Points is Determined : (1) The status of the coordinates
Recomputation − How the Position for all Potential Starting Points is Determined : (1) The status of the coordinates

 See also

The status (enabled/disabled) of the coordinates

Only enabled coordinates are considered when determining the position of starting points. Check coordinates are only used to determine the position of starting points if observations are not used to coordinate the point.

NOTE: Check coordinates are rarely used to coordinate starting points.

Disabled coordinates are never considered. To enable and disable coordinates, use the Properties window or the Multiple Edit dialog.

The highest quality component

If there is more than one enabled set of coordinates, a recomputation takes the highest quality components from all of the available keyed-in coordinates for the point. The three components are:

  horizontal

  elevation

  height

NOTE: These components do not have to come from the same coordinate group.

The following table shows the qualities of the three components and ranks them from highest to lowest. The order of the qualities is referred to as the ‘quality hierarchy.’

In the Properties window, the symbol for the quality appears next to each component.

Coordinate Type

If the two coordinates have the same quality, a recomputation chooses from the type of the coordinate. WGS-84 coordinates are used in preference to Grid/Local coordinates.


Recomputation - How the Component Qualities Determine the Current Starting Point
Recomputation − How the Component Qualities Determine the Current Starting Point

 Overview and More Information

If there is more than one potential starting point, a recomputation chooses the highest quality point as the current starting point. It uses the following hierarchy:

1.	Control

2.	Adjusted

3.	Survey

4.	Mapping

5.	Unknown

Each component quality is considered. If the quality for the point position is different for each component, the horizontal quality is considered first, then the height, and then the elevation.

The following table shows part of the quality hierarchy that determines which of the potential starting points becomes the current starting point (the quality hierarchy extends beyond what is shown in the table). The shaded cells indicate the qualities that a recomputation prefers:

For example, a point can have the following component qualities:

  Horizontal quality − control

  Height quality − unknown

  Elevation quality − unknown

It is then used as a starting point before a point with the following component qualities:

  Horizontal quality − survey

  Height quality − survey

  Elevation quality − mapping

Make sure that the point that you want to use as a starting point or seeding coordinate has control quality components.

NOTE: If there is more than one potential stating point with the same qualities for all components, a recomputation uses the first point in the project.


Recomputation - How Observations are Applied From the Current Starting Point
Recomputation − How Observations are Applied From the Current Starting Point

 Overview and More Information

A recomputation applies an observation from a starting point in different ways according to the observation type. It applies:

  GPS observations on the WGS-84 ellipsoid.

  Conventional and laser rangefinder observations on the local ellipsoid—unless the Reduce terrestrial observations to ellipsoid (Sea Level correction) option is not selected.

This option is located in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog. In this case, a recomputation applies terrestrial observations at ground level. For more information, see the topic Ellipsoid Level Correction. If an adjustment is performed, all distances will be reduced to the ellipsoid.

  Delta elevations − are applied to existing elevations in an initial recomputation.


Recomputation - How GPS Observations are Applied
Recomputation − How GPS Observations are Applied

 Overview and More Information

GPS observations are stored in the Trimble Geomatics Office project as ground-to-ground vectors. However, GPS vectors are observed from antenna phase center to antenna phase center (APC-APC) in the field.

During import, Trimble Geomatics Office converts the GPS vectors to ground-to-ground vectors using the antenna heights of the GPS antennas at each end of the baseline. If antenna heights are edited, the ground-to-ground vector is automatically updated.

NOTE: The baseline processor generates ground-to-ground vectors.

A recomputation performs the following actions to determine the position for points observed using GPS:

1.	Converts current starting point coordinates to WGS-84 latitude, longitude, and height (LLh).

2.	Converts these coordinates to WGS-84 Cartesian coordinates (X, Y, Z).

3.	Applies the ground-to-ground GPS vector (delta X, delta Y, and delta Z) to the WGS-84 Cartesian coordinates of the starting point. This provides a Cartesian WGS-84 position for the observed point.

NOTE: The GPS vector applied is an adjusted vector if network adjusted parameters are used in the project, even if the baseline was not used in the network adjustment.

4.	Converts the observed point to a WGS-84 latitude, longitude, height.

5.	Uses the coordinate system selected for the project to derive the projection coordinates for each point from its WGS-84 position. It also uses any GPS Site Calibration applied to the project.

6.	The resultant coordinate becomes the current position of the point.


Recomputation - Direction of GPS Baselines
Recomputation − Direction of GPS Baselines

 Overview and More Information

By default, a recomputation applies all Real Time Kinematic (RTK) GPS observations in the direction that the vector was observed (base to rover).

The direction of static and faststatic postprocessed baselines are determined by observation seeding during baseline processing. The direction is stored in the project and an arrow is shown on the baseline in the graphics window. The seeding algorithm ensures that vectors are processed from the point with the highest quality position to the point with the lowest quality position. A recomputation applies the vector in the direction that is stored in the project.

You can change the direction of a GPS vector so that a recomputation applies the vector in the opposite direction.

To do this, select the observation and select Edit / Reverse Observation Flowout. In this case, make sure that the point you want the vector to flow out from has a known position, for example, keyed-in WGS-84 latitude, longitude and height coordinates. If the point does not have a known position, the observation is not applied.


Recomputation - How Conventional and Laser Rangefinder Observations are Applied
Recomputation − How Conventional and Laser Rangefinder Observations are Applied

 Overview and More Information

When conventional observations are imported:

  vertical angles are corrected for curvature and refraction

  slope distances are corrected for atmospheric errors (ppm correction)

  horizontal observations are converted to horizontal angles from the backsight

A recomputation performs the following actions to determine the position for points observed conventionally or with a laser rangefinder:

1.	It does one of the following:

  If the observation is a laser rangefinder observation, a recomputation applies magnetic declination to the observed azimuth.

  If the observation is a conventional observation, a recomputation applies the prism constant to the slope distance.

2.	It reduces observed slope distances to horizontal ground distances.

3.	If the Reduce terrestrial observations to ellipsoid (Sea Level correction) option is selected in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog, it reduces ground distances to ellipsoid distances.

4.	It adds the instrument height to the local height.

5.	It uses the coordinate system defined for the project to convert the current starting point to local latitude, longitude, and height (the observation is applied along the ellipsoid).

6.	It uses the following rules to determine the backsight azimuth (for conventional observations only):

  If only the position of the instrument point and the backsight points are known, (that is, there is no keyed-in azimuth) the recomputation uses the backsight azimuth determined from the inverse between the two points.

  If only a keyed-in azimuth is available and the "to" point does not have a coordinate, the recomputation uses this as the backsight azimuth.

  If both positions of the instrument point and the backsight point are known, and a keyed-in azimuth is available, the recomputation determines the quality of each azimuth and uses the hierarchy in the table below to determine which azimuth to use as the backsight azimuth.

For example, if a survey-quality instrument and backsight point pair exist, along with a control quality keyed-in azimuth, the keyed in azimuth would be used for the backsight azimuth.

NOTE: To compute the quality of the backsight azimuth, the horizontal quality for the instrument point and the backsight point are examined and the lowest quality is taken. For example, if the instrument point has a control quality and the backsight point has a mapping quality, the backsight azimuth will have a mapping quality.

Type	Quality
Derived from coordinates	Control
Keyed-in Azimuth	Control
Derived from coordinates	Survey
Keyed-in Azimuth	Survey
Derived from coordinates	Mapping
Keyed-in Azimuth	Mapping
NOTE: If you want a recomputation to use the keyed-in azimuth in preference to the azimuth determined between the instrument and the backsight point, increase the quality of the keyed-in azimuth position so that it is higher in the hierarchy than the azimuth determined between the instrument and the backsight point.

TIP: The quality of a keyed-in azimuth can be edited.

7.	It applies the horizontal angle to the backsight azimuth to determine the grid azimuth (for conventional observations only).

8.	It applies the magnetic declination to the magnetic azimuth to determine the grid azimuth (for laser only).

9.	It applies the observation along the ellipsoid to determine a local latitude and longitude for the observed point.

10.	To determine the elevation for the observed point, it subtracts the target height from the instrument height to find the delta height. It then adds this to the elevation of the instrument setup point.

It uses the coordinate system selected for the project to convert the coordinates to local grid coordinates.


Recomputation - How Delta Elevations are Applied
Recomputation − How Delta Elevations are Applied

Delta elevations are applied during recomputation. A recomputation performs the following actions to flow out delta elevations:

  The elevation of the starting point is determined.

  The delta elevation is applied to the starting point to determine the elevation of the new point.

In a recomputation the starting point must have a keyed-in elevation for delta elevations to flow out from it.

You must enter an elevation at the start of the level run to ensure that delta elevations can be flowed out from the start of the level run.

For example, in the diagram below, Point A must have a keyed-in elevation for the elevations of points B, C, and D to be determined using the delta elevation observations. If an observation to A had sufficient information to compute an elevation at A, delta elevations would still not be computed (unless it had a keyed-in elevation).


Recomputation - Example
Recomputation − Example

 Overview and More Information

The following figure is an example of how a recomputation coordinates points. Points A and I are both Control quality points, the remaining points are Survey quality.

A recomputation establishes points A and I as potential starting points as both these points have keyed-in coordinates and observations flowing from them. Points A and I are of the same quality (control L,L,h), so a recomputation chooses point A as the current starting point because it was entered in the project first.

A recomputation uses all of the observations from the starting point to coordinate the observed points until it can go no further. Therefore, the following points are coordinated from point A: B, C, D, E, F, G and H.

There are no further observations from the current starting point (point A), so a recomputation chooses point I as the new current starting point. A recomputation coordinates points J, K, and L from point I.

There are observations from point I to points D and H. A recomputation has already coordinated these points so a closure is shown for these points. If the closure error is larger than the tolerance settings in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog, a warning flag appears on the observed point in the graphics window. The closure is reported in the Recompute report.

WARNING: Point D can be derived from observations from B and I. The observation from B is used regardless of the quality of these observations. This is because D is coordinated from B first. If you want to make sure that the observation from I is used, change the status of the observation from B to D to "enabled as check".


Recomputation - Multiple Observations and Coordinates for a Point
Recomputation − Multiple Observations and Coordinates for a Point

 Overview and More Information

A point can have multiple observations to it and keyed-in coordinates. If the Use best observation option in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog is selected, only one observation or coordinate can be used to derive a position component (NE,e,h) for the point. For example, a point may have two observations to it and one keyed-in coordinate. The keyed-in coordinate is used to coordinate the point, in preference to the observation. The other observations or keyed-in coordinates that a recomputation does not use are reported in the Recompute report.

NOTE: If the Calculate mean from the same type of observation option (in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog) is selected, all observations can contribute to the calculation of the coordinate components of the sideshot point. Only sideshot points are meaned.

Multiple Observations to a Point

To determine the calculated coordinates for a point with multiple observations (when the Use best observation option is selected), a recomputation uses the following observation hierarchy:

1.	Observation status (enabled, enabled as check, disabled)

2.	Observation quality

3.	Observation type (GPS, conventional, laser, reduced)

4.	Precision

5.	First observation in the project


Recomputation - Multiple Observations to Sideshot Points
Recomputation − Multiple Observations to Sideshot Points

 Overview and More Information

When observations (GPS or conventional) are transferred to Trimble Geomatics Office, the software determines if each observation is a sideshot. A sideshot is an observation to a point that:

  does not have an observation from it

  does not have a static or FastStatic observation to it

  is not a control point

The following figure shows how sideshot points can occur in two different situations.

The setting in the Multiple Sideshot Observations group (in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog) determines which observations are used to calculate the position of the sideshot point.

NOTE: A recomputation does not mean elevations from multiple sideshots.


Recomputation - Multiple Observations and Meaning Coordinates
Recomputation − Multiple Observations and Meaning Coordinates

 Overview and More Information

By default, the Calculate mean from the same type of observations option in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog is not selected. As a result, multiple observations are not meaned.

If you do select this option, Trimble Geomatics Office means the coordinates calculated from each observation to a sideshot point.

NOTE: If the point is a traverse point, a recomputation only uses one observation or coordinate to determine the position of the point.

The rules for meaning the position for sideshot points are:

  A recomputation only means the same type of observation. For example, a GPS observation cannot be meaned with a conventional observation. In this case, a recomputation uses the GPS observation in preference to the conventional observation.

  A recomputation only means the coordinates derived from observations. For example, if a point has two observations and keyed-in coordinates, a recomputation means the observations, and determines the coordinates and qualities. It then compares the keyed-in coordinates and the meaned coordinates, and uses the highest quality coordinate as the position for the point.

NOTE: If there are one or more observations enabled, a recomputation does not use observations enabled as a check to determine a mean position.

To determine the calculated position for the point, a recomputation calculates positions from each observation to the point. Each observation is weighted according to its precision value. The better the precision, the more influence the observation has on the mean coordinate values.

For GPS observations, a recomputation uses the Precision field. To view this field:

1.	Select a GPS observation.

2.	Open the Properties window.

3.	Click the Observation Statistics menu button [image].

For conventional observations, an equal weighting is used.

A recomputation uses the mean position as the center of a circle with a radius defined by the tolerance distance. This distance is specified in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog. If the coordinate component is horizontal (Northing, Easting), a recomputation uses the Horizontal tolerance. If the coordinate component is vertical (Elevation, or Height), it uses the Vertical tolerance.

If any positions are outside the circle defined by the tolerance, the position furthest from the mean position is rejected and the process is repeated. In the following figure, a sideshot point has three conventional observations to it.

Observation 3 is outside the tolerance circle, so is omitted for the next iteration.

The process is repeated with the remaining observations until all of the calculated positions are within the tolerance circle. The following figure shows how the computed mean grid coordinates become the final calculated coordinates for the point.

All observations used to determine the mean coordinates are now within the tolerance specified, so a recomputation uses these meaned coordinates for the calculated position for the point.

NOTE: If you clear the Use tolerance checking check box in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog, all observations of the same type are meaned without tolerance checking. As a result, outliers will not be detected.


Recomputation - Multiple Observations to Traverse Points
Recomputation − Multiple Observations to Traverse Points

 Overview and More Information

In a survey traverse, a traverse point may have more than one observation to it. This is known as a multiple observation.

Multiple observations to traverse points are not meaned. This is shown in the following figure. Point 1 has two observations to it, and one observation from it. The observation used to derive the position of Point 1 is the first one to position the point.


Recomputation - Points with Keyed-in Coordinates and Observations
Recomputation − Points with Keyed-in Coordinates and Observations

 Overview and More Information

The displayed position for a point can be derived from:

  observation(s)

  keyed-in coordinate(s), for example, imported grid coordinates

If a point has keyed-in coordinates and observations to it, a recomputation uses the quality of the keyed-in coordinate(s) and observation(s) to determine the position for the point. If the qualities are the same, it uses the keyed-in coordinates in preference to the coordinates from the observation(s). Therefore, if you want to use observations for the position of a point, make sure you select higher qualities for the observation than any keyed-in coordinates to the point.

A recomputation considers the horizontal component quality and vertical component quality separately. For example, imported grid coordinates for a point may have a Survey quality horizontal component (Northing, Easting), and a Mapping quality elevation component. There is also an observation to the point. The horizontal and vertical coordinates derived from the observation are Survey quality.

This is summarized in the following table.

The shaded cells show how the position for the point is determined. The horizontal component qualities are the same, so a recomputation uses the coordinates in preference to the observation. The imported coordinate vertical component is lower than the observation, so a recomputation derives the elevation from the observation.

The best elevation or height for points is derived using any available keyed-in coordinates and observations to the point. If a recomputation uses an observation to calculate an elevation or height for the point, then it calculates the remaining vertical components from one of the following:

  The geoid model and/or vertical adjustment

  Keyed-in coordinates

If a geoid model is used for the project, the geoid model quality in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog is used to determine the quality of the elevation or height derived from the geoid model. This quality is compared to any keyed-in coordinates, and the best quality elevation or height component is used.

NOTE: If a vertical adjustment from a calibration exists in the project coordinate system definition, then the quality of the derived elevation or height will be Survey.


Recomputation - How the Quality of Observed Points is Determined
Recomputation − How the Quality of Observed Points is Determined

 Overview and More Information

A recomputation determines the quality of an observed point from the quality of the point that it was observed from, and the quality of the observation used to derive the position of the point. It considers the horizontal and vertical components separately.

The quality hierarchy is:

1.	Control

2.	Survey

3.	Mapping

4.	Unknown

The following table shows how observation qualities are determined from the solution type or measurement type.

Observation type	Quality assigned to the observation
GPS Fixed	Survey
GPS Float	Mapping
GPS Autonomous	Unknown
Conventional	Survey
Laser rangefinder	Mapping
Delta elevation	Survey
The quality assigned to a point for each component (horizontal, elevation, and height) is the lower of:

  the quality for the point from which the observation was observed

  the quality of the observation


Autonomous Base Position for Real Time Kinematic Surveys

 Overview and More Information

If you use the [image] key in Trimble Survey Controller to start a Real Time Kinematic (RTK) base and transfer the Survey Controller (.dc) file to Trimble Geomatics Office, the base position (and therefore all rover points from the base) are of unknown quality (for all components: horizontal, height, and elevation).

If you use Trimble Geomatics Office to perform a GPS site calibration, the qualities of the horizontal and height components are not changed.

If you are confident that the GPS site calibration has improved the quality of the points, use the Properties window to change the quality of the base point. Increasing the quality of the base will improve the quality of the rover points.

NOTE: The quality of the elevation component will be survey if a vertical adjustment exists in the project coordinate system definition.


Recomputation - Points that have been Moved or Adjusted Using Trimble Geomatics Office

 Overview and More Information

A recomputation does not move points that have been shifted by:

  moving a coordinate

  a coordinate transformation

  an elevation adjustment

  a network adjustment

When one of these operations is applied to a point, the positions derived from the observations to the point are not used.


Recomputation - Project Height
Recomputation − Project Height

 Overview and More Information

The project height is a project-wide setting that is used as an approximate height for any calculations for points with no height. Any points that do not have heights do not get updated with the project height value. It is only used to convert coordinates when:

  the project’s coordinate system is changed and there are null heights

  sea level corrections are applied because there are no heights for points

The Project height field is in the Coordinate System tab of the Project Properties dialog.


Recomputation - Check Observations
Recomputation − Check Observations

 Overview and More Information

Trimble Survey Controller lets you store check observations to points. The following describes how these points are handled when a .dc file is imported to Trimble Geomatics Office.

Check points to points other than keyed-in control points

When the .dc file is imported, the calculated position for the point added is derived using the enabled observation(s) to the point. The check observation is imported, but is not used to determine the calculated position for the point unless there are no observations to the point with a status of Enabled (a recomputation always uses Enabled observations before Enabled as check observations). The observation is given a status of Enabled as check, and displays as a dotted line in the graphics window. To view and edit the status of an observation, use the Summary page of the Properties window. A misclosure is calculated between the calculated position for the point and the coordinates determined by the check observation. This is reported in the Recompute report that is generated during import, and placed in the Recompute folder inside the project’s Reports folder.

NOTE: If you store a check observation to a stored point, then delete the previously collected point, the check observation is imported, and a new point added. The Status of the observation remains as Enabled as check, and the calculated position for the point is derived from the observation.


Trimble 3600/5600 GDM - Overview
Trimble 3600/5600 GDM − Overview

You can transfer data between Trimble Geomatics Office and a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit on a Trimble 3600/5600 instrument. Trimble recommends that the instrument have firmware 632.11.00 or later.

You can import data from 3600/5600 GDM Job (*.job) files and Area (*.are) files, and export data from your current Trimble Geomatics Office project to an Area (*.are) file. Alternatively, import or export data directly using the Survey Devices import option.

The following table shows the file types that you can transfer between Trimble Geomatics Office and a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit:

Import	Export
.job − collected data from the Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit	None
.are − coordinate file	.are
None	.pco − to the Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit
None	.uds − a user-defined sequence
To ensure that Trimble Geomatics Office can correctly interpret imported 3600/5600 GDM files, do the following:

  	Make sure the Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit has the program number turned on.

  	Configure Program 32 to store the slope distance rather than a horizontal and vertical distance. For more information, refer to the Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit documentation.

  	To display Program 23 and 24 observations in Trimble Geomatics Office, the Trimble 3600/5600 GDM program user tables must include horizontal angle, vertical angle, and slope distance records after the standard records. For information on how to modify user tables, refer to the Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit documentation.


User-Defined Sequences (UDS) - Overview
User-Defined Sequences (UDS) − Overview

A user-defined sequence determines how you collect and store survey data in the field using a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit on a Trimble 3600/5600 instrument. Each sequence is stored in a User-Defined Sequence (*.uds) file.

UDS files should comprise the following records:

2	Instrument station
3	Instrument height	(Optional)
62	Backsight point
21	Backsight azimuth
5	Point name
6	Target Height	(Optional)
4	Code	(Optional)
7	Horizontal Angle
8	Vertical Angle
9	Slope Distance

To use a user-defined sequence in the field, transfer a UDS file to the Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit using the standalone Data Transfer utility. (You cannot use the Trimble Geomatics Office Export dialog.) For more information, refer to the Data Transfer Help.

Once you have collected and stored your survey data, transfer it to Trimble Geomatics Office.

NOTE: Predefined UDS files are available on the Trimble Geomatics Office CD.

See Also


Pcode (*.pco) Files

Pcode files contain numeric codes and alphanumeric descriptions that define features and attributes. They are used in a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit on a Trimble 3600/5600 instrument. You can enter the codes while collecting data in the field to quickly define observed points. For example, if a Pcode file contains a code of "201" and a description of "Tree", in the field you can enter "201", and "Tree" will be displayed on the control unit.

A Pcode file exported to a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM control unit must have the following:

  Numeric codes with a number lower than 256

  Descriptions that together total fewer than 800 characters

To use a Pcode file, create one from a feature and attribute library in Trimble's Feature and Attribute Editor utility and then transfer it to the control unit.

See Also


Area (*.are) Files

Trimble Geomatics Office supports Area data from a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM Control Unit (*.are files).

For more information, see:

  Importing Trimble 3600/5600 GDM CU files, how to

  Exporting to a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM CU format, how to


Job (*.job) Files

Trimble Geomatics Office supports Job data from a Trimble 3600/5600 GDM Control Unit (*.job files).

For more information, see Importing Trimble 3600/5600 GDM CU files, how to